Fuji Frontier 390 Service Manual

Distributed by www.minilablaser.
com
SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER 390
SCANNER/IMAGE PROCESSOR
SP2500
LASER PRINTER/PAPER PROCESSOR
LP2500P
System Disk Ver.4.0 Second Edition

PP3-C900E2
Distributed by www.minilablaser.com
INTRODUCTION
This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the Fujifilm Digital Minilab
FRONTIER 390 SP2500 and LP2500P.
This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SP2500 and
LP2500P. When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel.
Precautions Generally Applying to All Servicing Operations
! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the power switch and the main power supply on the power distribution
board are both set to the OFF position.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power switch and power supply section, and this can cause
electric shocks and/or short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the
machine and/or bodily injury.
! CAUTION
The light source section and dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing
with servicing procedures.
• Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints.
• When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.
• Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are
connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.
• The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).
Service Manual Appropriations
1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.
K Manual copying in whole or in part.

K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
1. SAFETY 1
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION 2
3. MENU TABLE 3
4. OUTLINE 4
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES 5
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS 6
7. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS 7
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 8
9. MAINTENANCE MENU 9
10. I/O PARTS DIAGRAM 10
11. OPERATION SECTION 11
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION 12
13. SCANNER SECTION 13
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION 14
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION 15
16. EXPOSURE SECTION 16
17. POST-EXPOSURE FEED SECTION/PRINTER FRONT DOOR SECTION 17
18. PRINTER ELECTRICAL SECTION 18
19. PROCESSOR 19
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM 20
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM 21
22. DRYER SECTION 22
23. CUTTER AND SORTER 23
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 24
25. AUTOMATIC NEGATIVE LOADING SYSTEM NF2500AG (135ANL) 25
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Safety Indications ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor .................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ......................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer .......................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions ................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels .......................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor ................... 1-9
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ...................... 1-10
1.5 Circuit Board Fuse/CP List ........................................................................................................... 1-11
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION ...................................................... 2-1
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP2500) .................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP2500P) ............................................................... 2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Handling Precautions ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ......................................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When Replacing Solutions ............................................... 2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2500P .................................................... 2-5
2.4 Adjustment Jigs ............................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement .......................................................................... 2-12
2.5.1 Operation Section ............................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.2 Light Source Section ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.3 Scanner Section ................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section .................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.5 Paper Feed Unit ................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.5.6 Unit 1 .................................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.5.7 Exposure Section ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.8 Unit 2 .................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.5.9 Unit 3/Reservoir Section .................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.10 Unit 4 .................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.5.11 Unit 5 .................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.5.12 Printer Control Section ....................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.13 Processor ........................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.14 Cutter/Sorter ....................................................................................................................... 2-16
3. MENU TABLE ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Menu Table .................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table .......................................................................... 3-6
3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item .................................................................................................................... 3-7
2
CONTENTS
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item ........................................................................................................... 3-8

3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item .................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item ....................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item ................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item .................................................................................................... 3-19
4. OUTLINE .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Scanner (SP2500) ........................................................................................................................ 4-3

4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations .................................................................... 4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations ........................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG Configuration ......................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240AG Configuration ......................................................................... 4-7
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions ............................................................. 4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations .................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions ...................................................................... 4-11
4.1.8 Electrical Equipment Block Diagram .................................................................................. 4-12
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer ........................................................................................................... 4-13
4.1.10 CTB21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.11 CCD21 Circuit Board (CCD Unit) ....................................................................................... 4-16
4.1.12 CDS21 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.13 GMC20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-18
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135AG) ....................................................................................... 4-23
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240AG) ...................................................................................... 4-24
4.2 Printer Section (LP2500P) ........................................................................................................... 4-25
4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration .................................................................................. 4-25
4.3 Exposure Section (LP2500P) ....................................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration .................................................................................................... 4-27
4.4 Post-exposure Feed Section (LP2500P) ...................................................................................... 4-28
4.4.1 Post-exposure Feed Section .............................................................................................. 4-28
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP2500P) .......................................................................... 4-29
4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations ...................................................................... 4-29
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................................. 4-29
4.5.3 Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ...................................................................... 4-30
4.5.4 Printer Processor Power ON Operation ............................................................................. 4-31
4.5.5 Printer Interlock System .................................................................................................... 4-32
4.5.6 DC Power Supply Section Block Diagram .......................................................................... 4-33
4.5.7 CTL21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-34
4.5.8 PDC21 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.5.9 JNA21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-40
3
CONTENTS
4.5.10 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board) ............................................... 4-42
4.5.11 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board) .................................................................... 4-43
4.5.12 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board) ...................................................... 4-44
4.5.13 LDD20 Circuit board ........................................................................................................... 4-45
4.6 Processor Section (LP2500P) ...................................................................................................... 4-48
4.6.1 Processor Section Drive System ........................................................................................ 4-48
4.6.2 Variable Paper Width Guide Drive System ......................................................................... 4-49
4.7 Processing Solution Circulation and Replenishment System ...................................................... 4-50
4.7.1 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System ................................................................. 4-50
4.7.2 Piping Diagram for Replenishment and Cartridge Auto-washing System .......................... 4-51
4.7.3 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism ...................................................................... 4-53
4.8 Dryer Section ............................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.8.1 Dryer Section Configuration ............................................................................................... 4-54
4.9 Cutter and Sorter ......................................................................................................................... 4-55
4.9.1 Cutter and Sorter Configuration .......................................................................................... 4-55
4.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Section ...................................................................................... 4-56
4.10.1 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration ...................................................... 4-56
4.10.2 Processor Control Section Configuration ........................................................................... 4-57
4.10.3 Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions ............................................................ 4-58
4.10.4 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................................. 4-58
4.10.5 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ................................................................. 4-59
4.10.6 Relay, SSR and Circuit Protector Map ............................................................................... 4-60
4.10.7 Processor Interlock System ................................................................................................ 4-61
4.10.8 Replenisher Tank Section Interlock System ...................................................................... 4-61
4.10.9 CTP21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-62
4.10.10 PAC21 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-65
4.10.11 PAD21 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-68
4.10.12 PWC01Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-70
4.11 135ANL (Optional) ....................................................................................................................... 4-71
4.11.1 135ANL Configuration ........................................................................................................ 4-71
4.11.2 CTF21 Circuit Board (135ANL Control Circuit Board) ........................................................ 4-72
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Scanner ....................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.1 Basic Operation Flow ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Auto Film Carrier ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 NC240AG Initialization ....................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 NC240AG Cartridge Processing ......................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 NC240AG Strip Film Processing ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.2.4 NC135AG Initialization ....................................................................................................... 5-21
5.2.5 NC135AG Scanning Operation .......................................................................................... 5-23
5.2.6 Monitoring Start Timing ...................................................................................................... 5-29
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG) .................................................................................................................. 5-30
5.3.1 Normal processing .............................................................................................................. 5-30
5.3.2 Interrupt processing ........................................................................................................... 5-35
5.4 Paper Feed .................................................................................................................................. 5-36
4
CONTENTS
5.4.1 Paper Leading End Feed .................................................................................................... 5-36

5.4.2 Paper Feed ......................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.4.3 Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 5-49
5.4.4 Shut-down Process ........................................................................................................... 5-51
5.4.5 Paper End/Splice ................................................................................................................ 5-52
5.4.6 All Process ......................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.4.7 Rewind process .................................................................................................................. 5-56
5.4.8 Cutter Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-65
5.4.9 Single Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-68
5.5 Exposure Section ......................................................................................................................... 5-86
5.5.1 Start-up Initialization ........................................................................................................... 5-86
5.5.2 End Process ....................................................................................................................... 5-87
5.5.3 Feed Start ........................................................................................................................... 5-88
5.5.4 Feed Completion ................................................................................................................ 5-89
5.5.5 Exposure Start .................................................................................................................... 5-89
5.5.6 Exposure Completion ......................................................................................................... 5-89
5.6 Processor ..................................................................................................................................... 5-90
5.6.1 Processing Tank Section Temperature Control .................................................................. 5-90
5.6.2 Heat-up Operation .............................................................................................................. 5-91
5.6.3 Normal Temperature Control .............................................................................................. 5-92
5.6.4 Pre-heat Operation ............................................................................................................. 5-92
5.6.5 Cool-down Operation ......................................................................................................... 5-93
5.6.6 Heater Cooling Fan ........................................................................................................... 5-93
5.6.7 Monitoring Processing Solution Level ................................................................................ 5-94
5.6.8 Normal Operation Drive Control ......................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.9 Processing Rack/Dryer Rack Paper Width Guide Control .................................................. 5-95
5.6.10 Replenishment Start-up Processing .................................................................................. 5-96
5.6.11 Replenisher End Processing .............................................................................................. 5-97
5.6.12 Replenisher Level Adjustment ........................................................................................... 5-97
5.6.13 Replenisher Amount Calculation ........................................................................................ 5-98
5.6.14 Replenishment Pump Control ............................................................................................. 5-98
5.6.15 P1-R Replenishment Control .............................................................................................. 5-99
5.6.16 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control ................................................................................ 5-100
5.6.17 Evaporation Replenishment Control .................................................................................. 5-101
5.6.18 Auto Opening Control ......................................................................................................... 5-106
5.6.19 Cleaning/Dilution ................................................................................................................ 5-107
5.6.20 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control .................................................................... 5-108
5.6.21 Power Supply Restoration .................................................................................................. 5-110
5.6.22 Error Recovery Control ....................................................................................................... 5-111
5.6.23 Pump Output Measurement ............................................................................................... 5-112
5.6.24 Waste Solution Process .................................................................................................... 5-112
5.6.25 Dryer Section Temperature Control .................................................................................... 5-113
5.6.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control ........................................................................................... 5-114
5.6.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment ............................................................................. 5-114
5.6.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control .......................................................................................... 5-115
5.6.29 Dryer Section Cool-down Control ....................................................................................... 5-115
5.6.30 Cutter Operation Sequence Outline .................................................................................. 5-116
5
CONTENTS
5.6.31 Paper Leading End Insertion .............................................................................................. 5-117

5.6.32 Paper Cutting ...................................................................................................................... 5-119
5.6.33 Paper Trailing End Output .................................................................................................. 5-120
5.6.34 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Operation .................................................................... 5-122
5.6.35 Cutter Section Loop Guide Operation ................................................................................ 5-122
5.6.36 Cutter Section Exit Guide Operation .................................................................................. 5-123
5.6.37 Sorter Operation Sequence ................................................................................................ 5-124
5.6.38 Sorter Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-124
5.7 Densitometer ................................................................................................................................ 5-125
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................................................ 6-4
6.3.1 Paper Feed Roller Cleaning ............................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ............................................................. 6-4
6.3.3 Scanner ND Filter Inspection .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.4 Paper Reservoir Cleaning .................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor Cleaning ................................................................................ 6-5
6.3.6 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor Cleaning ................................................................................ 6-5
6.3.7 Rack Feed Roller Inspection .............................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.8 Rack Drive Helical Gear Lubrication .................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.9 Processor Lubrication ......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.10 Dryer Rack Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.11 Dryer Rack Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.12 Heater Cooling Fan (F720 to F727) Cleaning .................................................................... 6-8
6.3.13 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement .................................................................................. 6-8
7. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ......................................................................................................... 7-1
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Simple Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Update ......................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Reinstallation ................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.4 New Installation ............................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.5 Reversion ..................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit ................................................... 8-15
9. MAINTENANCE MENU .................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Operational Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-4

9.1.1 User Identification ............................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41) .................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Production Information 1 (411) ........................................................................................... 9-5
6
CONTENTS
9.2.2 Production Information 2 (412) ........................................................................................... 9-5

9.2.3 Timer Setup (414) ............................................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.4 Error Information Check (415) ........................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.5 Installation Information Confirmation (416) ......................................................................... 9-8
9.2.6 Data Backup (417) .............................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.7 Clear Error Log (41E) ......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.8 Installation Information Setup (41F) .................................................................................. 9-9
9.2.9 Shipping Information Reference (41G) ............................................................................... 9-10
9.2.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) ............................................................................. 9-10
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) .......................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (421) .............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.2 Processor Temperature Check (422) ................................................................................. 9-12
9.3.3 Control Strip Processing (423) ........................................................................................... 9-13
9.3.4 Print Size Setup (424) ........................................................................................................ 9-15
9.3.5 Monitor Adjustment (426) .................................................................................................. 9-16
9.3.6 Image Correction Setup (42C) ........................................................................................... 9-16
9.3.7 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) ................................................................. 9-17
9.3.8 Special Film CH Setting (42E) ........................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.9 Film Type Setting (42F) ...................................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.10 Monotone Correction Setting (42G) .................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.11 Paper Condition Setup (42J) .............................................................................................. 9-19
9.3.12 Shop Logo Regist/ Delete (42K) ......................................................................................... 9-19
9.3.13 Template Regist/Delete (42L) ............................................................................................. 9-20
9.3.14 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) .................................................................................. 9-20
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ........................................................................................ 9-22
9.4.1 Lamp/Reflector Replacement (431) .................................................................................... 9-22
9.4.2 Lamp Position Adjustment (432) ........................................................................................ 9-25
9.4.3 135 Light Source Aperture Table (433) ............................................................................. 9-25
9.4.4 120 Light Source Aperture Table (434) ............................................................................. 9-26
9.4.5 Input Check (435) ............................................................................................................... 9-26
9.4.6 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area (436) ............................................................................. 9-26
9.4.7 I/O Check (43A) .................................................................................................................. 9-27
9.4.8 ND Dust Check (43B) ......................................................................................................... 9-27
9.4.9 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) ........................................................................... 9-28
9.4.10 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) ......................................................................................... 9-29
9.4.11 CCD Data Display (43E) .................................................................................................... 9-30
9.4.12 Working Information (43F) .................................................................................................. 9-32
9.4.13 Lens Registration (43G) .................................................................................................... 9-32
9.4.14 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) ........................................................................................... 9-33
9.4.15 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) ............................................................................... 9-34
9.4.16 Focus Calibration (43K) ...................................................................................................... 9-34
9.4.17 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) ............................................................................... 9-35
9.4.18 Spectral Calibration (43P) .................................................................................................. 9-35
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) .......................................................................................... 9-37
9.5.1 NC135AG Input Check (441) .............................................................................................. 9-37
9.5.2 NC240AG Input Check (442) .............................................................................................. 9-37
9.5.3 MFC10Y Input Check (443) ................................................................................................ 9-37
7
CONTENTS
9.5.4 135ANL Input Check (444) ................................................................................................. 9-37

9.5.5 135ANL Function Setup (445) ........................................................................................... 9-38
9.5.6 135ANL Negative Catcher Section Cleaning (446) ............................................................ 9-38
9.5.7 NC135AG Sensor Calibration (44A) .................................................................................. 9-39
9.5.8 NC240AG Sensor Calibration (44B) .................................................................................. 9-39
9.5.9 Installation Information Display (44C) ................................................................................. 9-40
9.5.10 Installation Information Setup (44D) .................................................................................. 9-40
9.5.11 NC135AG I/O Check (44E) ................................................................................................ 9-40
9.5.12 NC240AG I/O Check (44F) ................................................................................................. 9-41
9.5.13 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) .................................................................................................. 9-42
9.5.14 MFC10Y Monitor Image Position Adjustment (44H) ........................................................... 9-42
9.5.15 NC135AG Working Information (44J) ................................................................................. 9-44
9.5.16 NC240AG Working Information (44K) ................................................................................ 9-45
9.5.17 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) .................................................................................. 9-46
9.5.18 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) .................................................................................... 9-47
9.5.19 NC135AG Machine Data Setup (44Q) ............................................................................... 9-48
9.5.20 NC240AG Machine Data Setup (44R) ................................................................................ 9-48
9.5.21 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) .................................................................................. 9-49
9.5.22 135ANL Sensor Calibration (44T) ...................................................................................... 9-49
9.5.23 135ANL I/O Check (44U) .................................................................................................... 9-50
9.5.24 135ANL Information Setup (44W) ...................................................................................... 9-50
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) ........................................................................................... 9-51
9.6.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451) .................................................................................... 9-51
9.6.2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) ................................................................................ 9-51
9.6.3 Test Pattern Printing (453) ................................................................................................. 9-52
9.6.4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) ........................................................ 9-53
9.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (456) .................................................................................... 9-54
9.6.6 Printer Input Check (457) .................................................................................................. 9-54
9.6.7 Image Position Fine Adjustment (458) ............................................................................... 9-55
9.6.8 Printer I/O Check (45A) ...................................................................................................... 9-55
9.6.9 Laser Exposure Check (45C) ............................................................................................. 9-56
9.6.10 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D) .................................................................................................. 9-56
9.6.11 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E) .............................................................................................. 9-56
9.6.12 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) ............................................................................................... 9-57
9.6.13 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) ............................... 9-57
9.6.14 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ............ 9-57
9.6.15 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) .................................................................. 9-58
9.6.16 Laser History Display (45K) ................................................................................................ 9-59
9.6.17 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L) ................................................................ 9-60
9.6.18 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) ........................................................................ 9-60
9.6.19 Back Printer Test (45N) ...................................................................................................... 9-62
9.6.20 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ................................................................................. 9-62
9.6.21 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) ................................................................ 9-62
9.6.22 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) ...................................................................................... 9-63
9.6.23 Data Saving (45T) .............................................................................................................. 9-63
9.6.24 Data Download (45U) ......................................................................................................... 9-64
9.6.25 PSD Sensor Information (45V) ........................................................................................... 9-64
8
CONTENTS
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46) .................................................................................... 9-65

9.7.1 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461) ...................................................... 9-65
9.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (462) ............................................................................... 9-66
9.7.3 Processor Temperature Calibration (463) .......................................................................... 9-66
9.7.4 Replenisher Rate Setting (464) .......................................................................................... 9-67
9.7.5 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465) ......................................................................... 9-68
9.7.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup (466) ...................................................................... 9-68
9.7.7 Processor Input Check (468) .............................................................................................. 9-68
9.7.8 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Fine Adjustment Value Setting (469) ........................... 9-69
9.7.9 Processor Mechanical Fine Adjustment (46A) ................................................................... 9-69
9.7.10 Processor I/O Check (46B) ................................................................................................. 9-70
9.7.11 RC50D Measurement/Installation (46C) ............................................................................. 9-71
9.7.12 Processor Operation Data Display (46D) ........................................................................... 9-71
9.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) ........................................................................ 9-71
9.7.14 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46F) ........................................................................... 9-72
9.8 Option Adjustment/Maintenance (47) ........................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A) ...................................................................................................... 9-73
9.9 Special Operations (49) ............................................................................................................... 9-74
9.9.1 Paint (49A) ......................................................................................................................... 9-74
9.9.2 Explorer (49B) .................................................................................................................... 9-74
9.9.3 Command (49C) ................................................................................................................ 9-74
10. I/O PARTS DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Scanner (SP2500) ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.2 Film Carrier NC135AG ................................................................................................................ 10-4
10.3 Film Carrier NC240AG ................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.4 Printer Section .............................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.5 Processor Section ........................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.6 Automatic Negative Loading System NF2500AG (Optional) ...................................................... 10-14
11. OPERATION SECTION .................................................................................................................. 11-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.1 Monitor and Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.1 Monitor Replacement ......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.2 Table Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/KYA20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................... 11-4
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.5 Mouse Replacement ........................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier Replacement ................................................................ 11-5
11.1.7 Monitor Color Adjustment .................................................................................................. 11-6
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG ......................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.2 Film Leading End Sensor LED (D400) Replacement ......................................................... 11-7
11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Sensor LED (D402/D410) Replacement ................................... 11-7
11.2.4 Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409) Replacement .................................................... 11-7
9
CONTENTS
11.2.5 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection ................................................................................ 11-7

11.2.6 Variable Film Mask Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 11-7
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) Replacement .................................................................... 11-8
11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) Replacement ................................................................... 11-8
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-8
11.2.10 Film Retainer Replacement ................................................................................................ 11-8
11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 11-9
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 11-9
11.2.14 Pressure Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................................. 11-9
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ............................................................................. 11-10
11.2.16 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................ 11-10
11.2.17 Nip Home Position Sensor (D407) Replacement ............................................................... 11-10
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor (D405) Replacement ........................................................................... 11-10
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 11-11
11.2.20 Film Leading End Sensor (D401) Replacement ................................................................. 11-11
11.2.21 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 11-11
11.2.22 Check Tape Sensor (D411) Replacement .......................................................................... 11-11
11.2.23 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) Replacement ......................................................................... 11-12
11.2.24 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................................................ 11-12
11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ......................................................................... 11-12
11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Section Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 11-12
11.2.27 Soft Nip Cam Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................................... 11-13
11.2.28 Film Feed Roller/Drive Belt Replacement .......................................................................... 11-13
11.2.29 Pressure Cover Hook Replacement .................................................................................. 11-14
11.2.30 Display LED (L400) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-14
11.2.31 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................... 11-14
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor (M400) Replacement ............................................................................... 11-15
11.2.33 Reduction Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ............................................................................. 11-15
11.2.36 Reduction Belt Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-18
11.2.37 Plug-in Connector Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-18
11.2.38 Loop Sensor (D406) Replacement .................................................................................... 11-18
11.3 Auto Film Carrier NC240AG ......................................................................................................... 11-19
11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................. 11-19
11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) Replacement .................................. 11-19
11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 11-19
11.3.4 Film Retainer Replacement ................................................................................................ 11-19
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................. 11-20
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90) Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................. 11-20
11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) Replacement .......................................................................... 11-20
11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 11-20
11.3.9 Dummy Head Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-21
11.3.10 Magnetic Head Replacement ............................................................................................. 11-21
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 11-22
11.3.12 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................ 11-22
10
CONTENTS
11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) Replacement .................................................. 11-22

11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445) Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-22
11.3.15 Display LED (L440) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-22
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 11-23
11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D406) Replacement ............................................... 11-23
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt Replacement .................................................................................... 11-23
11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal Roller/Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ........................ 11-24
11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................... 11-24
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ............................................................................. 11-25
11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor (D444) Replacement ........................................................................... 11-25
11.3.23 Film Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................................... 11-25
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Disassembly/Reassembly .................................................................... 11-26
11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Replacement .................................................................................. 11-26
11.3.26 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 11-26
11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor (D456) Replacement ............................................................................. 11-26
11.3.28 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement ................................................................. 11-27
11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Replacement ............................................................. 11-27
11.3.30 Nest Section Unit Replacement .......................................................................................... 11-27
11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444) Replacement ................................................................................ 11-27
11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-27
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-28
11.3.34 Cartridge Holder Locking Release Method ......................................................................... 11-28
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 11-28
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) Replacement ............................................................................... 11-29
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-29
11.3.40 Reduction Belt Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-31
11.3.41 Plug-in Connector Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-32
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION ........................................................................................................... 12-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 12-2

12.1 Scanning Lamp Section ............................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 12-3
12.1.2 Lamp Socket Replacement ................................................................................................ 12-3
12.1.3 First IR Filter Replacement ................................................................................................. 12-4
12.1.4 Safety Thermostat (ST201) Replacement .......................................................................... 12-4
12.1.5 Light Source Section Detecting Interlock Switch (D301) Replacement .............................. 12-4
12.1.6 Light Source Section Suction Fan (F302) Replacement .................................................... 12-5
12.1.7 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan (F303) Replacement ................................................... 12-5
12.1.8 Light Source Cooling Fan (F308) Replacement ................................................................. 12-6
12.2 Light Source Filter Section ........................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor (D202) Replacement ............................................... 12-7
12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ............................................................... 12-7
11
CONTENTS
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................. 12-7

12.2.6 Filter Replacement ............................................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.7 Light Source Aperture Home Position/Standby Sensor (D201/D203) Replacement .......... 12-8
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture Motor (M201) Replacement ............................................................ 12-9
12.2.9 Light Source Aperture Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 12-9
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box Sensor (D204/D205) Replacement .................................................... 12-10
13. SCANNER SECTION ....................................................................................................................... 13-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 13-2

13.1 Scanner Section ........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Scanner Section Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................... 13-3
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 13-3
13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................. 13-3
13.1.4 Conjugate Length Variable Belt Replacement .................................................................... 13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) Replacement .................................................... 13-4
13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.7 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107) Replacement ......................................................... 13-5
13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement ............................................................................. 13-6
13.1.10Table Right Cover (Scanner Section Rear Cover) Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 13-6
13.1.11Conjugate Length Variable Home Position (D102)/Upper Position (D103)/Lower Position
(D104) Sensor Replacement ....................................................................................... 13-6
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow Sensor (D351) Replacement ................................................................... 13-7
13.2 Lens Section ................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) Replacement ................................................................ 13-8
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 13-8
13.2.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) Replacement ............................................................. 13-8
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Replacement ............................................................................. 13-9
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement ...................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle Replacement ................................................................................ 13-10
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION ........................................................................................... 14-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 14-2

14.1 Power Supply Section .................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.1.1 Main Control Unit Section Cover and Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......... 14-3
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement ......................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 Transformer Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP16) Replacement ................................................................. 14-5
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................. 14-5
14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1 Replacement .................................................................................... 14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply Replacement .................................................................................. 14-6
14.1.10 DC24V Voltage Adjustment ................................................................................................ 14-6
14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply Replacement .................................................................................... 14-6
12
CONTENTS
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment .................................................................................................. 14-7

14.1.13 DC Power Supply Replacement ......................................................................................... 14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ........................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.1 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (F306/F307) Replacement .............................. 14-8
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 14-8
14.2.3 CTB21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.4 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan (F304/F305) Replacement ................. 14-8
14.2.5 Image Processing Circuit Board (CDS21/GFM20/GIP20/GLO20/GIS20/GMC20)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.6 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 14-9
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air Compressor Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank Replacement .................................................................................. 14-11
14.2.9 Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351) /Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement .............. 14-11
14.2.10 Main Control Unit Replacement .......................................................................................... 14-12
14.2.11 Noise Filter Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-12
14.2.12 Start Switch Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-12
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ........................................................................................................... 15-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 15-3

15.1 Magazine Rewind Unit ................................................................................................................ 15-4
15.1.1 Magazine Rewind Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 15-4
15.1.2 Paper Magazine Rewind Motor (M500) Replacement ........................................................ 15-4
15.1.3 Gear/One-way Clutch Shaft Replacement ......................................................................... 15-5
15.2 Magazine Interface Unit ............................................................................................................... 15-6
15.2.1 Magazine Interface Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 15-6
15.2.2 Magazine Interface Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 15-6
15.2.3 Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................. 15-6
15.2.4 Magazine ID Sensor (D500 to D504) Replacement ........................................................... 15-7
15.2.5 Magazine Nip Sensor (D505) Replacement ...................................................................... 15-7
15.2.6 Feed Section Press Roller Release Shaft Replacement .................................................... 15-7
15.2.7 Magazine Lock Release Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly .................................................. 15-8
15.2.8 Paper Magazine Setting Sensor (D590) Replacement ...................................................... 15-8
15.2.9 Magazine Locking Mechanism Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................. 15-9
15.3 Paper Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.1 Paper Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................... 15-10
15.3.2 Paper End Sensor (D510P) Replacement .......................................................................... 15-10
15.3.3 Paper End Sensor LED (D510L) Replacement .................................................................. 15-10
15.3.4 Paper Feed Motor (M510) Replacement ........................................................................... 15-11
15.3.5 Press Roller Replacement .................................................................................................. 15-11
15.3.6 Paper Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 15-11
15.3.7 Paper Feed Idler Gear Replacement .................................................................................. 15-12
15.3.8 Nip or Nip Release Sensor (D523 or D524) Replacement ................................................. 15-13
15.3.9 Nip Release Motor (M516) Replacement ........................................................................... 15-13
15.3.10 Nip Release Gear Replacement ......................................................................................... 15-13
15.3.11 Nip Release Motor Driver (PDM21) Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 15-14
15.3.12 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D522) Replacement ........... 15-14
13
CONTENTS
15.3.13 Paper Width Guide Replacement ....................................................................................... 15-14

15.3.14 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor (M515) Replacement ..................................... 15-15
15.3.15 Paper Width Guide Belt/Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................. 15-15
15.3.16 Paper Width Guide Shaft Replacement ............................................................................. 15-16
15.3.17 Paper Width Guide Centering ............................................................................................. 15-16
15.3.18 Paper Width Guide Adjustment .......................................................................................... 15-17
15.3.19 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................. 15-18
15.3.20 Loop 1 Sensor (D512) Replacement .................................................................................. 15-18
15.4 Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 15-19
15.4.1 Unit 1 Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................................... 15-19
15.4.2 Loop 1 Sensor LED (D512L) Replacement ........................................................................ 15-19
15.4.3 Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor (D511) Replacement ...................................... 15-19
15.4.4 Loop 1 Guide Plate Motor (M511) Replacement ................................................................ 15-20
15.4.5 Loop 1 Guide Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 15-20
15.4.6 Loop 1 Support Roller Replacement .................................................................................. 15-20
15.4.7 Loop 1 Guide Plate Height Adjustment ............................................................................. 15-21
15.4.8 Rewind Paper Sensor (D513P) Replacement .................................................................... 15-21
15.4.9 Rewind Paper Sensor LED (D513L) Replacement ............................................................ 15-21
15.4.10 Splice Sensor (D515P) Replacement ................................................................................. 15-22
15.4.11 Splice Sensor LED (D515L) Replacement ......................................................................... 15-22
15.4.12 Cutting/Sorting Hole Punch Unit Replacement ................................................................... 15-22
15.4.13 Unit 1 Paper Sensor (D517P) Replacement ...................................................................... 15-22
15.4.14 Unit 1 Paper Sensor LED (D517L) Replacement ............................................................... 15-23
15.4.15 Unit 1 Feed Belt Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-23
15.4.16 Unit 1 Feed Motor (M513) Replacement ........................................................................... 15-23
15.4.17 Inlet Left Guide Plate/Roller Replacement ......................................................................... 15-23
15.4.18 Unit 1 Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 15-24
15.4.19 Feed Roller Section Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 15-25
15.4.20 Unit 1 Feed Roller Belt/Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 15-25
15.4.21 Paper Width Guide 1 Home Position Sensor (D514) Replacement ................................... 15-26
15.4.22 Paper Width Guide 1 Motor (M512) Replacement ............................................................. 15-26
15.4.29 Loop 2 Guide Plate Motor (M514)/Gear Replacement ...................................................... 15-29
15.4.30 Loop 2 Sensor (D518P) Replacement ................................................................................ 15-30
16. EXPOSURE SECTION ..................................................................................................................... 16-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 16-2

16.1 Laser Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.1 Printer Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 16-3
14
CONTENTS
16.1.2 Air Duct Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................................... 16-3

16.1.3 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 and 3 (F620, F621 and F622)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.4 Air Filter Replacement ........................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.5 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................... 16-4
16.2 Light-shield Shutter Unit ............................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.1 Light-shield Shutter Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 16-6
16.2.2 Laser Unit Shutter Open Sensor (D534) Replacement ...................................................... 16-6
16.2.3 Shutter Opening/Closing Belt Replacement ...................................................................... 16-6
16.2.4 Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor (M533) Replacement ............................................. 16-6
16.2.5 Light-shield Shutter Replacement ...................................................................................... 16-7
16.2.6 Exposure Point Cooling Fan (F574) Replacement ............................................................. 16-7
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit ........................................................................................................ 16-8
16.3.1 Exposure Section Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 16-8
16.3.2 Upper Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 16-8
16.3.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor (D531P) Replacement ................................... 16-8
16.3.4 Upper Stainless Guide Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 16-9
16.3.5 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor LED (D531L) Replacement ............................ 16-9
16.3.6 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor (D533P) Replacement ........................................................ 16-9
16.3.7 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor LED (D533L) Replacement ............................................... 16-9
16.3.8 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 16-10
16.3.9 Pre-exposure Feed Motor (M531) Replacement ................................................................ 16-10
16.3.10 Pre-exposure Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement .......................................................... 16-10
16.3.11 Reverse Clutch (S530)/One-way Gear Replacement ......................................................... 16-10
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide 2 Replacement .................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.19 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement ............................................................................... 16-14
16.3.20 Sub-scanning Rubber Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 16-15
16.3.21 Sub-scanning Motor (M532) Replacement ......................................................................... 16-15
16.3.22 Sub-scanning Pulley Replacement .................................................................................... 16-16
16.3.23 Sub-scanning Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 16-16
16.3.24 Exposure Section Feed Roller Nip Sensor (D535) Replacement ...................................... 16-16
16.3.25 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (TS580) Replacement ............................................. 16-16
16.3.26 Roller Nip Release Motor (M534) Replacement ................................................................. 16-17
16.3.27 Nip Releasing Mechanism Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................................ 16-17
16.3.28 Outlet-side Roller Replacement .......................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.29 Outlet-side Upper Guide Roller Replacement .................................................................... 16-18
16.3.30 Lower Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 16-19
16.3.31 Exposure Section Feed Sub Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ............................................. 16-19
15
CONTENTS
17. POST-EXPOSURE FEED SECTION/PRINTER FRONT DOOR SECTION .................... 17-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 17-4

17.1 Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 17-5
17.1.1 Printer-side Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 17-5
17.1.7 Loop 3 Drive Gear Replacement ........................................................................................ 17-6
17.1.10 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 (D543P) Replacement .................................................................... 17-7
17.1.11 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 LED (D543L) Replacement ............................................................ 17-8
17.1.12 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 (D548P) Replacement .................................................................... 17-8
17.1.13 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 LED (D548L) Replacement ............................................................ 17-8
17.1.16 Unit 2 Inlet-side Feed Roller Replacement ......................................................................... 17-9
17.1.17 Inlet-side Press Roller/Guide Roller/Guide Plate Replacement ........................................ 17-10
17.1.18 Unit 2 Outlet-side Feed Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 17-11
17.1.19 Outlet-side Press Roller Replacement ............................................................................... 17-11
17.1.20 Outlet-side Guide Plate Replacement ................................................................................ 17-11
17.1.21 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1 (D542) Replacement ............................... 17-12
17.1.24 Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1, 2 and 3 (M541, M543 and M544) Replacement ............... 17-13
17.1.25 Inlet-side Paper Width Guide Belt/Drive Gear/Guide Shaft Replacement .......................... 17-13
17.1.26 Inlet-side Paper Width Guide Replacement ...................................................................... 17-14
17.1.27 Middle Paper Width Guide Replacement ........................................................................... 17-14
17.1.28 Middle Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement .................................................................... 17-14
17.1.29 Middle Paper Width Guide/Slider/Shaft Replacement ........................................................ 17-15
17.1.30 Outlet-side Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement ............................................................. 17-15
17.1.31 Outlet-side Paper Width Guide Shaft Replacement ........................................................... 17-16
17.1.34 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor (D544P) Replacement ...................................................... 17-19
17.1.35 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor LED (D544L) Replacement ............................................... 17-19
17.1.36 Back Printer Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 17-19
17.1.37 Back Printer Head Setting Sensor (D545) Replacement .................................................... 17-20
17.1.38 Back Printer Head (JNE20) Circuit Board Replacement .................................................... 17-20
17.1.39 Back Printer Head Replacement ........................................................................................ 17-20
17.1.40 Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................... 17-21
17.1.41 Back Printer Drive Gear (Unit Side) Replacement ............................................................. 17-22
17.1.42 Back Printing Section Guide Plate Replacement ............................................................... 17-22
17.1.43 Back Printer Head Platen Replacement ............................................................................. 17-22
16
CONTENTS
17.1.44 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor (D550P) Replacement .......................................................... 17-23

17.1.45 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D550L) Replacement ................................................... 17-23
17.1.46 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment .......................................................................... 17-23
17.2 Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 17-25
17.2.2 Cutter 1 Home Position Sensor (D552) Replacement ........................................................ 17-25
17.2.3 Cutter 1 Unit Replacement ................................................................................................. 17-25
17.3 Reservoir Section ......................................................................................................................... 17-28
17.3.3 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 17-28
17.3.4 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 17-28
17.3.5 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D555) Replacement ...................... 17-29
17.3.6 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Motor (M552) Replacement ............................................... 17-29
17.4 Unit 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 17-32
17.4.2 Unit 4 Paper Sensor LED (D561L) Replacement ............................................................... 17-32
17.4.3 Unit 4 Paper Sensor (D561P) Replacement ...................................................................... 17-32
17.4.4 Paper Sensor Section Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 17-32
17.4.5 Belt Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................... 17-33
17.4.8 Outlet-side Guide Plate/Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 17-33
17.4.10 Unit 4 Press Roller/Inlet Roller/Inlet-side Guide Replacement ........................................... 17-34
17.4.18 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D562L) Replacement ................................................... 17-38
17.4.19 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor (D562P) Replacement .......................................................... 17-38
17.4.20 Cutter 2 Home Position Sensor (D563) Replacement ........................................................ 17-39
17.4.21 Cutter 2 Unit Replacement ................................................................................................. 17-39
17.5 Unit 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 17-41
17
CONTENTS

17.5.9 Unit 5 Inlet Guide Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................................... 17-44
17.5.14 Loop 5 Guide Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................. 17-45
17.5.17 Unit 5 Press Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 17-46
17.5.19 Feed Drive Gear Replacement ........................................................................................... 17-48
17.5.20 Printer Exit Paper Sensor (D568) Replacement ................................................................. 17-48
17.6 Printer Door/Front Cover Section ................................................................................................. 17-49
17.6.1 Printer Front Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 17-49
17.6.2 Printer Front Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 17-49
17.6.3 Printer Door Interlock Switch 1 (D591) Replacement ......................................................... 17-49
17.6.4 Printer Door Interlock Switch 2 (D592) Replacement ......................................................... 17-49
18. PRINTER ELECTRICAL SECTION .............................................................................................. 18-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 18-2

18.1 Printer Power Supply Section ...................................................................................................... 18-3
18.1.1 Printer-side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 18-3
18.1.2 Power Switch (D594) Replacement .................................................................................... 18-3
18.1.3 JNA21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-3
18.1.4 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement .................................................................................. 18-3
18.2 Printer Control Section ................................................................................................................ 18-5
18.2.1 Printer Control Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 18-5
18.2.2 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan (F584 and F585) Replacement ................................. 18-5
18.2.3 PDC21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-5
18.2.4 CTL21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-5
18.3 Image Processing Section ........................................................................................................... 18-6
18.3.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................ 18-6
18.3.2 Louver Replacement ......................................................................................................... 18-6
18.3.3 Sub-scanning Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement .................................................... 18-6
18.3.4 Printer Air Intake Fan (F587 and F588) Replacement ........................................................ 18-6
18.3.5 Air Intake Fan (F572 and F573) Replacement ................................................................... 18-7
18.3.6 Laser Unit Light Source Section Cooling Fan (F570 and F571) Replacement ................... 18-8
18.3.7 AOM Exhaust Fan (F580, F581 and F582) Replacement .................................................. 18-8
18.3.8 LDD20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-8
18.3.9 AOM Driver (AOM-R, AOM-G and AOM-B) Replacement ................................................. 18-9
18
CONTENTS
18.3.10 AOM Driver Cooling Fan (F577, F578 and F579) Replacement ........................................ 18-9
18.3.11 FMB20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-9
18.3.12 FMA20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-10
18.3.13 FMC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-10
18.4 Operation Panel ........................................................................................................................... 18-11
18.4.1 KEY21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-11
19. PROCESSOR ..................................................................................................................................... 19-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 19-3

19.1 Processor Body ............................................................................................................................ 19-6
19.1.1 Processor Front Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 19-6
19.1.2 Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 19-6
19.1.3 Processor Cover Sensor (D700) Replacement .................................................................. 19-6
19.1.4 Squeegee Rack Cover Sensor (D701) Replacement ......................................................... 19-6
19.1.5 Processor Exhaust Fan (F790) Replacement .................................................................... 19-7
19.1.6 Ambient Temperature Sensor (HS790) Replacement ........................................................ 19-7
19.2 Crossover Rack ............................................................................................................................ 19-8
19.2.1 No.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ............................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 No.3, No.5 to No.8 Crossover Racks Disassembly/Reassembly ...................................... 19-8
19.3 Processing Racks ............................................................................................................... 19-10
19.3.1 Lower Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 19-10
19.3.2 Upper Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 19-11
19.3.3 Middle Feed Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 19-12
19.3.4 Upper Guide Plate Replacement ........................................................................................ 19-12
19.3.5 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement .......................................................................................... 19-13
19.3.6 Rack Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement ........................................................................... 19-14
19.3.8 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Gear Replacement ........................................................... 19-16
19.3.9 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Replacement .................................................................... 19-16
19.3.10 Paper Width Guide Timing Adjustment ............................................................................. 19-17
19.4 Squeegee Rack ............................................................................................................................ 19-18
19.4.1 Guide Plate Replacement .................................................................................................. 19-18
19.4.2 Squeegee Roller/Gear Replacement .................................................................................. 19-18
19.5 Rack Drive System ....................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.5.1 Processor Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 19-20
19.5.2 Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ................................................. 19-20
19.5.3 Processor Drive Motor (M710) Replacement .................................................................... 19-20
19.5.4 Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................ 19-21
19.5.5 Processor Drive Shaft/Dryer Section Drive Shaft Replacement ........................................ 19-21
19.5.6 Processing Rack Drive Chain Tension Adjustment ............................................................ 19-22
19.5.7 Processing Rack Drive Chain Replacement ...................................................................... 19-22
19.5.8 Dryer Rack Drive Sprocket/Chain Guide Replacement ...................................................... 19-23
19.5.9 Squeegee Rack Drive Gear Replacement ......................................................................... 19-23
19.5.10 Dryer Section Drive Chain Replacement ........................................................................... 19-24
19.5.11 Processor Drive Chain Guide Replacement ...................................................................... 19-25
19.5.12 Unit 5 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement .......................................................................... 19-25
19
CONTENTS
19.6 Paper Width Guide ....................................................................................................................... 19-27

19.6.1 Processor Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D710) Replacement ..................... 19-27
19.6.2 Paper Width Guide Position Encoder Sensor (D711) Replacement .................................. 19-27
19.6.3 Paper Width Guide Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 19-27
19.6.4 Paper Width Guide Drive Unit Disassembly/Reassembly .................................................. 19-28
19.6.5 Processor Width Guide Motor (M711) Replacement .......................................................... 19-29
19.6.6 Processor Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement ................................................... 19-30
19.6.7 Dryer Rack Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement .................................................. 19-30
19.6.8 Rack Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement ........................................................... 19-31
19.6.9 Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shaft Replacement ........................................................... 19-31
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM ........................................................... 20-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 20-2

20.1 Sub-tanks ..................................................................................................................................... 20-3
20.1.1 Harness Protection Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 20-3
20.1.2 Processing Solution Level Sensor Replacement ............................................................... 20-3
20.1.3 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor Replacement .................................................... 20-3
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section ................................................................ 20-4
20.2.1 Processor Rear Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 20-4
20.2.2 Processor Rear Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 20-4
20.2.3 Heater Cooling Fan Replacement ...................................................................................... 20-4
20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 20-5
20.2.5 Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat Replacement ........................................... 20-5
20.2.6 Hose Connection ................................................................................................................ 20-5
20.2.7 Pump Section Brace Plate Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 20-6
20.2.8 P1-1 to PS2 Processing Solution Heater Replacement .................................................... 20-6
20.2.9 PS3 to PS4 Processing Solution Heater Replacement ...................................................... 20-6
20.2.10 Circulation Pump Replacement .......................................................................................... 20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System ................................................................................................................ 20-8
20.3.1 Waste Solution Level Sensor Replacement ...................................................................... 20-8
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM .................................................... 21-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 21-2

21.1 Replenisher Tank Section ........................................................................................................... 21-4
21.1.1 Replenisher Tank Section Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 21-4
21.1.2 Replenisher Tank Section Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 21-4
21.1.3 Replenisher Tank Section Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 21-4
21.1.4 Replenisher Tank Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 21-4
21.1.5 Replenisher Tank Section Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 21-5
21.1.6 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing .................................................................. 21-5
21.1.7 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D803) Replacement ................................... 21-5
21.1.8 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D801/D802) Replacement ........................................ 21-5
21.1.9 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D800) Replacement .................................................................. 21-6
21.1.10 Cartridge Opening Motor (M800) Replacement ................................................................. 21-6
20
CONTENTS
21.1.11 Replenisher Cartridge Section Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 21-6

21.1.12 Hose Connection ................................................................................................................ 21-7
21.1.13 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement ........................................................... 21-7
21.1.14 Auto Washing Solution Filter Replacement ........................................................................ 21-8
21.1.15 Auto Washing Pump (PU800) Replacement ...................................................................... 21-8
21.1.16 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Valve /P1-R Stirring Valve Replacement ........................ 21-8
21.1.17 P1-R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS800/FS804) Replacement ........................................ 21-9
21.1.18 P2-RA/P2-RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement .................................................... 21-9
21.1.19 PS-R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS803/FS807) Replacement ........................................ 21-10
21.1.20 P1-R Replenisher Tank Replacement ................................................................................ 21-10
21.1.21 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenisher Tank Replacement .................................................................. 21-11
21.1.22 PS-R Replenisher Tank Replacement ................................................................................ 21-11
21.1.23 PCW/P1W Air Bleeding ...................................................................................................... 21-12
21.1.24 Replenisher Preparation .................................................................................................... 21-13
21.2 Replenisher Pump Section ........................................................................................................... 21-14
21.2.1 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ............................................................................. 21-14
21.2.2 Replenisher Pump Replacement ........................................................................................ 21-14
21.2.3 Replenisher Filter Case Replacement ................................................................................ 21-14
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Air Bleeding .......................................................................................... 21-15
22. DRYER SECTION ............................................................................................................................. 22-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 22-2

22.1 Dryer Rack .................................................................................................................................. 22-3
22.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 22-3
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................... 22-3
22.1.3 Roller Drive Chain Replacement ........................................................................................ 22-3
22.1.4 Sprocket Replacement ....................................................................................................... 22-4
22.1.5 Roller Replacement ........................................................................................................... 22-5
22.1.6 Inlet Guide Replacement .................................................................................................... 22-6
22.1.7 Inlet Paper Width Guide Replacement ............................................................................... 22-6
22.1.8 Outlet Guide Replacement ................................................................................................. 22-6
22.1.9 Lower Turn Guide Replacement ......................................................................................... 22-7
22.1.10 Rack Upper Guide Replacement ........................................................................................ 22-7
22.1.11 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Bracket (Brace Plate) Removal/Reinstallation ................. 22-8
22.1.12 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................... 22-8
22.1.13 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 22-9
22.1.14 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................... 22-10
22.1.15 Paper Width Guide Threaded Shaft Replacement ............................................................. 22-10
22.1.16 Dryer Inlet Guide/Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 22-11
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan ................................................................................................................ 22-12
22.2.1 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement ............................................................. 22-12
22.2.2 Dryer Heater (H760)/Safety Thermostat (D760) Replacement .......................................... 22-12
22.2.3 Dryer Fan (F760)/Duct Replacement ................................................................................. 22-13
21
CONTENTS
23. CUTTER AND SORTER .................................................................................................................. 23-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 23-3

23.1 Cutter Section .............................................................................................................................. 23-4
23.1.1 Cutter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................. 23-4
23.1.2 Outlet Cover and Inside Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 23-4
23.1.3 Cutter Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................... 23-5
23.1.4 Cutter Entry Paper Sensor (D770) Replacement ............................................................... 23-5
23.1.5 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Open/Close Sensor (D771/D772) Replacement ........................ 23-5
23.1.6 Cutter Loop Sensor (D773P)/Sensor LED (D773L) Replacement ..................................... 23-6
23.1.7 Loop Guide Drive Belt Replacement .................................................................................. 23-6
23.1.8 Cutter Loop Guide Motor (M770) Replacement ................................................................. 23-7
23.1.9 Loop Guide Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 23-8
23.1.10 Loop Guide Plate Replacement .......................................................................................... 23-9
23.1.11 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Adjustment .................................................................................. 23-9
23.1.12 Cutter Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D774) Replacement ........................... 23-9
23.1.13 Paper Leading End Sensor (D775) Replacement ............................................................. 23-10
23.1.14 Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement ................................................................................ 23-10
23.1.15 Paper Width Guide Belt Tension Adjustment .................................................................... 23-10
23.1.16 Cutter Paper Width Guide Motor (M771) Replacement ...................................................... 23-11
23.1.18 Paper Width Guide Treaded Shaft Replacement ............................................................... 23-12
23.1.19 Cutter Home Position Sensor (D776) Replacement ........................................................... 23-13
23.1.20 Cutter Motor (M773) Replacement .................................................................................... 23-13
23.1.21 Cutter Replacement ........................................................................................................... 23-14
23.1.22 Punch Hole Sensor (D777P/D784P) Replacement ............................................................ 23-15
23.1.23 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D777L/D784L) Replacement .................................................... 23-15
23.1.24 Punch Hole Sensor (D777/D784) Gain Value Adjustment ................................................. 23-16
23.1.25 Feed Roller Drive Belt Replacement .................................................................................. 23-16
23.1.26 Feed Roller Drive Belt Tension Adjustment ........................................................................ 23-16
23.1.27 Cutter Feed Motor (M772) Replacement ........................................................................... 23-17
23.1.28 Feed Roller Replacement .................................................................................................. 23-17
23.1.29 Paper Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 23-18
23.1.30 Outlet Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................................... 23-18
23.1.31 Anti-static Brush Replacement ........................................................................................... 23-18
23.1.32 Cutter Motor Driver Replacement ....................................................................................... 23-19
23.1.33 Cutter Exit Guide Replacement .......................................................................................... 23-19
23.1.34 Cutter Exit Guide Home Position Sensor (D778) Replacement ........................................ 23-20
23.1.35 Cutter Exit Guide Motor (M774) Replacement ................................................................... 23-20
23.1.36 PWC01 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................. 23-21
23.2 Horizontal Sorter ......................................................................................................................... 23-22
23.2.1 Horizontal Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................... 23-22
23.2.2 Large-size Tray Transfer Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 23-22
23.2.3 Horizontal Sorter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 23-23
23.2.4 Horizontal Sorter Stop Position Sensor (D779) Replacement ............................................ 23-23
23.2.5 Horizontal Motor Drive Motor (M775) Replacement ........................................................... 23-23
23.2.6 Chain Replacement ........................................................................................................... 23-23
22
CONTENTS
23.2.7 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement .................................................................................... 23-24

23.2.8 Driven Sprocket Replacement ........................................................................................... 23-24
23.2.9 Chain Tension Adjustment ................................................................................................. 23-24
23.2.10 Large-size Tray Waiting Sensor (D783) Replacement ...................................................... 23-24
23.2.11 Large-size Tray Set Sensor (D785) Replacement ............................................................. 23-25
23.3 Slant Sorter .................................................................................................................................. 23-26
23.3.1 Slant Sorter Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................................. 23-26
23.3.2 Slant Sorter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................ 23-28
23.3.3 Slant Sorter Stop Position Sensor (D780) Replacement .................................................... 23-28
23.3.4 Slant Sorter Drive Motor (M776) Replacement .................................................................. 23-28
23.3.5 Sorter Drive Switch Replacement ....................................................................................... 23-29
23.3.6 Sorter Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................................... 23-29
23.3.7 Sorter Full Sensor (D781) Replacement ........................................................................... 23-29
23.3.8 Sorter Chain/Sprocket Replacement .................................................................................. 23-30
23.3.9 Sorter Chain Tension Adjustment ....................................................................................... 23-31
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION .................................................................................... 24-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 24-2

24.1 Power Supply Section .................................................................................................................. 24-4
24.1.1 Processor Power Supply Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................... 24-4
24.1.2 Circuit Breaker Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 24-4
24.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ................................................................................. 24-4
24.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2) Test ........................................................................................... 24-5
24.1.5 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ............................................................... 24-5
24.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP20) Replacement ................................................................... 24-5
24.1.7 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Replacement ............................................................................. 24-5
24.1.8 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement ........................................................................................... 24-6
24.1.9 Transformer Replacement .................................................................................................. 24-6
24.1.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 3/4 (F793/F794) Replacement ....... 24-6
24.1.11 PAD21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 24-7
24.2 Processor Control Section ........................................................................................................... 24-8
24.2.1 Processor Control Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 24-8
24.2.2 Processor Control Section Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................... 24-8
24.2.3 Processor Control Section Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 24-8
24.2.4 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 24-9
24.2.5 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F791/F792) Replacement ....... 24-9
24.2.6 CTP21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 24-9
24.2.7 PAC21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 24-9
25. AUTOMATIC NEGATIVE LOADING SYSTEM NF2500AG (135ANL) .............................. 25-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 25-3

25.1 Tray Section ................................................................................................................................ 25-4
25.1.1 Tray Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................................................... 25-4
25.1.2 Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 25-4
25.1.3 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 25-4
23
CONTENTS
25.1.4 Negative Holder Cover Sensor (D383) Replacement ......................................................... 25-4

25.1.5 Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch (D385) Replacement ........................................... 25-4
25.1.6 Indicator LED (L371) Replacement .................................................................................... 25-5
25.1.7 Negative Holder Cover Sensor (D383) Adjustment ............................................................ 25-5
25.1.8 Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch (D385) Adjustment ............................................. 25-5
25.2 Negative Holder Section .............................................................................................................. 25-6
25.2.1 Negative Holder Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 25-6
25.2.2 Negative Holder Open Sensor (D374) Replacement ......................................................... 25-6
25.2.3 Negative Holder Close Sensor (D375) Replacement ......................................................... 25-6
25.2.4 Negative Holder Motor (M372) Replacement .................................................................... 25-6
25.2.5 Negative Feed Motor (M371) Replacement ...................................................................... 25-7
25.2.6 Negative Holder Replacement ........................................................................................... 25-7
25.2.7 Negative Holder Reference Position Adjustment ............................................................... 25-8
25.3 Negative Holder Unit Feed Section .............................................................................................. 25-9
25.3.1 Negative Holder Section Inlet Upper Anti-static Brush Replacement ................................. 25-9
25.3.2 Negative Sensor (D376) Replacement ............................................................................... 25-9
25.3.3 Feed Belt Replacement ...................................................................................................... 25-9
25.3.4 Negative Holder Section Inlet Lower Anti-static Brush Replacement ................................. 25-9
25.3.5 Negative Holder Section Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................... 25-9
25.4 Upper Guide Section .................................................................................................................... 25-10
25.4.1 Negative Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 25-10
25.4.2 Negative Feed Section Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 25-10
25.4.3 Negative Feed Section Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 25-10
25.4.4 Negative Overlap Sensor (D382) Replacement ................................................................. 25-10
25.4.5 Negative Leading End Sensor LED (D388) Replacement .................................................. 25-10
25.4.6 Loop Sensor (D372) Replacement .................................................................................... 25-11
25.4.7 Negative Standby Sensor LED (D387) Replacement ......................................................... 25-11
25.4.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 25-11
25.4.9 Loop Section Anti-static Brush Replacement .................................................................... 25-11
25.4.10 Inlet Roller Replacement .................................................................................................... 25-12
25.4.11 Middle Roller Replacement ................................................................................................ 25-12
25.4.12 Loop Section Roller Replacement ...................................................................................... 25-12
25.4.13 Negative Overlap Sensor Adjustment ................................................................................ 25-13
25.5 Lower Guide Section .................................................................................................................... 25-14
25.5.1 Negative Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 25-14
25.5.2 Negative Leading End Sensor (D373) Replacement .......................................................... 25-14
25.5.3 Upper Guide Sensor (D381) Replacement ......................................................................... 25-14
25.5.4 Negative Standby Sensor (D371) Replacement ................................................................. 25-14
25.5.5 Lower Guide Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................................. 25-14
25.5.6 Anti-static Brush Replacement ........................................................................................... 25-15
25.5.7 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 25-15
25.5.8 Inlet (Drive) Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 25-15
25.5.9 Middle Roller Replacement ................................................................................................ 25-15
25.6 Switch Guide Section .................................................................................................................. 25-16
25.6.1 Switch Guide Unit Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................... 25-16
25.6.2 Upper Roller Replacement ................................................................................................. 25-16
25.6.3 Lower Roller Replacement ................................................................................................. 25-16
24
CONTENTS
25.6.4 Switch Guide Replacement ................................................................................................ 25-16

25.7 Negative Catcher Unit .................................................................................................................. 25-17
25.7.1 Negative Catcher Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 25-17
25.8 Negative Feed Section ................................................................................................................ 25-18
25.8.1 Outlet Anti-static Brush Replacement ................................................................................. 25-18
25.8.2 Negative Trailing End Sensor LED (D389) Replacement ................................................... 25-18
25.8.3 Negative Trailing End Sensor (D377) Replacement ........................................................... 25-18
25.8.4 Nip Release Home Position Sensor (D378) Replacement ................................................. 25-18
25.8.5 Negative Feed Belt Replacement ....................................................................................... 25-19
25.8.6 Catcher Negative Feed Motor (M373) Replacement .......................................................... 25-19
25.8.7 Nip Release Solenoid (S371) Replacement ...................................................................... 25-19
25.8.8 Nip Roller/Feed Roller Replacement .................................................................................. 25-20
25.8.9 Inlet Guide Replacement .................................................................................................... 25-20
25.9 Negative Press Section ................................................................................................................ 25-21
25.9.1 Negative Full Sensor (D384) Replacement ........................................................................ 25-21
25.9.2 Negative Press Home Position Sensor (D380) Replacement ............................................ 25-21
25.9.3 Negative Press Motor (M374) Replacement ...................................................................... 25-21
25.9.4 Lower Negative Guide Replacement .................................................................................. 25-22
25.9.5 Upper Negative Guide Replacement .................................................................................. 25-22
25.9.6 Negative Full Sensor Adjustment ....................................................................................... 25-23
25.10 ANL Sliding Device ...................................................................................................................... 25-24
25.10.1 Slide Lock Sensor (D391) Replacement ........................................................................... 25-24
25.10.2 ANL Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................................................... 25-24
25.10.3 ANL Operating Position Sensor (D379) Replacement ...................................................... 25-24
25.10.4 Slide Lock Replacement .................................................................................................... 25-25
25.11 Control Circuit Board Section ....................................................................................................... 25-26
25.11.1 CTF21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 25-26
25.12 Optional Air Compressor .............................................................................................................. 25-27
25.12.1 Optional Air Compressor Connection ................................................................................. 25-27
25
1. SAFETY
1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety .................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label ........................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Safety Indications ............................................................................................. 1-3

1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor ................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ...................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer ........................................................ 1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions ......................... 1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels ........................................................ 1-9

1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor 1-9
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ... 1-10
1.5 Circuit Board Fuse/CP List ............................................................................ 1-11
1-1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety
1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety

1
This product is a Class 1 laser device for which biological hazards have not been established.
1.1.1 Follow all warnings on the device label and in the Users Manual.
1.1.2
Laser Radiation Specification

R G B
Class IIIB
Laser Semi-conductor Solid-state Laser
Wavelength 685 nm 532 nm 473 nm
Output Max. 10mW 7mW 0.3mW
! WARNING • Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
• The exposure section front cover and upper side door of this device are provided with safety interlocks, which
work to stop laser radiation being emitted when the covers are opened. Do not press the safety interlocks when
they are opened. Otherwise, laser emissions may occur, resulting in serious hazards.
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label
The Protective Housing Label and its position required by the Section J of Chapter 1 of 21 CFR, issued by the U.S.FDA, are shown in
subsections 1.2.3 and 1.4.1.
REFERENCE:
The FDA (Food and Drug Administration) is the U.S. government agency which retains authority over major high-energy-radiating product
safety.
1-2
1.2 Safety Indications
On the machine, each location shown below is provided with a caution label concerning safety. In the case of operation or maintenance of
the machine, take good care when doing work so that burns or other personal injury may be avoided. 1
1.2.1
1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor
EZ1257
1-3
1
1.2.1
GD1550-1
1-4
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor

1
1.2.2
GD1559
1-5
1
1.2.2
GD1560
1-6
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer

1
1.2.3
CAUTION
Visible laser radiation when open
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CAUTION
Visible laser radiation when open
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
GD1618
1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions
Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of the
1 respective chemicals.
! CAUTION
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
● Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above
indications. This is recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater
protection, the use of a protective mask and apron is also recommended.
● Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.
● Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately.

● Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases.
● If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great
amount of water.
● If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show
the physician the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.
● In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and
key. You are responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling
of poisonous substances that apply in your country.
● Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children.
● Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of
industrial waste products in your locale. The P1-R chemical in the CP-48S replenisher cartridge and
the Component A of the P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you
have any questions concerning these chemicals, consult your service representative.
Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-48S chemicals.
! CAUTION ● The P1-R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical
These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if
improperly handled. They may be injurious to the health if swallowed.
● The P2-RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with
a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA).
● The P2-RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up
Chemical
These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach
(hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur trioxide gas
when mixed with an acid.
● FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed
with an acid. It could be injurious to the health if swallowed.
1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels
1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor

1
1.4.1
GD1550-2
1-9
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor

1
1.4.2
GD1436-1
ELECTRICAL RATING
200/210/220/230/240V~ 200/210/220/230/240V~ 200/210/220/230/240V~
32/ 32/ 28/ 29/ 30A 32/ 32/ 28/ 29/ 30A 32/ 32/ 28/ 29/ 30A
50/ 60Hz 346/365/380/400/415V3~N 200/210/220/230/240V3~
15/ 15/ 12/ 12/ 12A 23/ 24/ 20/ 21/ 21A
50/60Hz 346/365/380/400/415V3~N
15/ 15/ 12/ 12/ 12A
50/60Hz
US
FPO
1-10
1.5 Circuit Board Fuse/CP List
! CAUTION ● Always turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and main power supply before replacing a fuse.
● Never use a fuse with different rating from that specified. A wrong fuse could cause serious damage 1
to the electrical system or fire.
SCANNER/IMAGE PROCESSOR (SP2500)
CTB21 Circuit Board
Code Specified Parts Manufacturer Alternate Parts Manufacturer

Fuse Circuit Protector
Daito Communication
CP1 250Vac/63Vdc 4A 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL40 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
CP2 250Vac/63Vdc 3.15A 250Vac/32Vdc 1A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G1A
Daito Communication
CP3 250Vac/63Vdc 3.15A 250Vac/32Vdc 2A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G2A
CP4 - - - -
Daito Communication
CP5 250Vac/63Vdc 2A 250Vac/32Vdc 1A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G1A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL40 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL10 NRPS10-G1A
135ANL (NF2500AG)
CTF21 Circuit Board

Daito Communication
NFB1 250Vac/63Vdc 3.15A 250Vac/32Vdc 2A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
NFB2 250Vac/63Vdc 1A 250Vac/32Vdc 1A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL10 NRPS10-G1A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G1A
NFB4 - - - -
Daito Communication
NFB5 250Vac/63Vdc 3.15A 250Vac/32Vdc 2A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL40 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL40 NRPS10-G2A
1-11
PRINTER PROCESSOR (LP2500P)

1
Printer
JNA21 Circuit Board
Code Specified Parts Manufacturer Code Alternate Parts Manufacturer

Daito Communication
F1 48Vac/48Vdc 2A CP1 250Vac/32Vdc 2A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20* NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM50* NRPS10-G5A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM50* NRPS10-G5A
Circuit Protector Fuse
Daito Communication
CP4 250Vac/32Vdc 5A Idec Izumi Corporation F4 48Vac/48Vdc 5A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G5A LM50*
Daito Communication
F5 48Vac/48Vdc 3.2A CP5 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM50* NRPS10-G5A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20* NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
CP8 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation F8 48Vac/48Vdc 4A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G3.15A LM40*
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20* NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
F12 48Vac/48Vdc 4A CP12 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
F13 48Vac/48Vdc 4A CP13 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A LM40*
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20* NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A LM40*
Daito Communication
CP18 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation F18 48Vac/48Vdc 4A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G3.15A LM40*
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
1-12

1
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A LM40*
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM40* NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A LM40*
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A LM40*
Printer
PDC21 Circuit Board

Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM32* NRPS10-G3.15A
Printer
CTL21 Circuit Board

Fuse
Daito Communication
FUSE1 48Vac/48Vdc 2A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20*
Fuse
Daito Communication
FUSE2 48Vac/48Vdc 2A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
LM20*
1-13
Processor
1 CTP21 Circuit Board

Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
CP4 - - - -
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL40 NRPS10-G4A
Daito Communication
CP6 250Vac/63Vdc 3.15A 250Vac/32Vdc 3.15A Idec Izumi Corporation
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
Processor
PAC21 Circuit Board

Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL20 NRPS10-G2A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
CP5 250Vac/32Vdc 4A Idec Izumi Corporation 250Vac/63Vdc 4A
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL40
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL32 NRPS10-G3.15A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G5A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
BL50 NRPS10-G5A
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
1-14

1
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Processor
PAD21 Circuit Board

Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
Daito Communication
Apparatus Co.,Ltd.
NRPS10-G4A BL50
1-15
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP2500) ............................. 2-2 2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP2500P) ........................ 2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation ................................................................. 2-4

2.3.1 Handling Precautions ....................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ...................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When Replacing Solutions ............................. 2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2500P .................................. 2-5
2.4 Adjustment Jigs ................................................................................................ 2-7
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement ..................................... 2-12

2.5.1 Operation Section ............................................................................................ 2-12
2.5.2 Light Source Section ........................................................................................ 2-12
2.5.3 Scanner Section .............................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section ............................................................................... 2-13
2.5.5 Paper Feed Unit ............................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.6 Unit 1 ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.7 Exposure Section ............................................................................................. 2-14
2.5.8 Unit 2 ............................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.9 Unit 3/Reservoir Section .................................................................................. 2-15
2.5.10 Unit 4 ............................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.11 Unit 5 ............................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.12 Printer Control Section ..................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.13 Processor ......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.14 Cutter/Sorter .................................................................................................... 2-16
2-1
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP2500)
Item Specifications
Type Floor-type, normal-light operation (laser printer, processor, cutter, sorter in one unit).
2 Scanning section 3-line CCD (5000 pixel × 3 colors)
Lens system Auto variable aperture system lens; conjugate length variable system
Light source 400W halogen lamp with light amount adjustment system; line-type mirror box
1) 135 automatic negative carrier NC135AG (standard); 135F/P/Hv, 135H, strips/piece

2) Automatic negative carrier NC240AG for Advanced Photo System (IX240) film (standard); Advanced
Photo System (IX240) C/H/P color negative cartridge/piece
3) Multi-film carrier MFC10Y (Optional); IX240, 135F/P/Hv, 135H, 120, 220, 110, 126 (Reversal and
Film carrier
Negative)
4) Automatic 135 negative loading system NF2500AG (Optional)
• 135F/P/HV
• 20 color negative strips can be loaded.
Operation Operation keyboard, mouse, and full keyboard (standard)
Optimal color reproduction processing, hyper-tone processing, facial expression enhancement,

Image processing monotone finishing, RP-tone correction processing, and others.
Variety prints (optional): red-eye correction processing and mounted prints, soft focus.
15-inch CRT color display

Display
6-frame, 1-frame or 3-frame (high-speed) display
135 → 4R
2,300 prints/hr (Hi-speed mode with NF2500AG)
2,000 prints/hr (Hi-speed mode without NF2500AG)
Processing/transportation capacity
1,900 prints/hr (Semi-automatic mode without NF2500AG)
Advanced photo system (IX240) → 4 inch size
54 films/hr (Semi-automatic mode)
Power requirements AC200-240V (50/60Hz) 10A, 2.4KVA
Dimensions 936(W)mm × 815(D)mm × 1,238(H)mm/36.85(W)in × 32.09(D)in × 48.74(H)in.
Weight Approx. 146kg/322lbs
Installation space Approx. 0.76m2/0.91sq.yd.
2-2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP2500P)
Item Specifications
Type Floor-type, normal-light operation (laser printer, processor, cutter, sorter in one unit).
Exposure system Scanning exposure system using RGB lasers (solid-state G and B lasers). 2
Pixel density: 300dpi; sub-scanning luster density: 600dpi
Scanning speed Sub-scanning speed: 80mm/sec.
Paper transport system Roll paper transport system
Magazine Single paper magazine

Paper width: 8.9 to 15.2cm, length: 180m; Paper width: 16.5 to 21.0cm, length: 90m
Paper width 8.9, 10.2, 11.7, 12.0, 12.7, 13.0, 15.2, 16.5, 20.3, 21.0cm
Paper FUJICOLOR paper (silver-halide).
Print size 82.5 × 117mm to 203 × 305mm
Back printing Two 40-character lines in backside print of information
Front printing Time and date of photograph in black characters in lower-right corner on prints from Advanced Photo
System (IX240) cartridge film.
Index print Color index print and normal prints can be printed from Advanced Photo System (negative, positive,
black and white) /135 (negative, black and white) film in one pass.
Print condition setup Semi-automatic calibration by AD100 densitometer
Operation panel 16 × 2 lines, LCD display with 8 keys
Counter Software controlled counting system
Processing system Roll paper transport system
Processing speed 4500mm/min.
Processing time Dry to dry: 4 min.
Processor capacity 135: Approx. 2,440 prints/hr (4R: Using 152mm width paper)
Processing chemicals New chemical system CP-48S (NC replenisher system)
Waste solution tank 18 liters × 2
Sorter SU2500AG; sorting capacity: 25 orders
Power requirements AC200-240V (50/60Hz), single-phase 32A, three-phase three-wire and four-wire, 24A, approx.6KVA.
Dimensions 2,568(W)mm × 1,153(D)mm × 1,920(H)mm/101.10(W)in × 45.39(D)in × 75.59(H)in. (not including

replenisher and waste solution tanks)
Weight Approx. 800kg/1,764lbs (1,764kg/2,315lbs during actual operation)
Installation space Approx. 2.50m2/2.95sq.yd.
2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation
2.3.1 Handling Precautions • Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of

children.
* Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the • Waste solutions should be disposed of in
accordance with the ordinances governing the
2 precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of the respective
chemicals. handling of industrial waste products in your
locale. The P1-R chemical in the CP-48S
2.3.1 replenisher cartridge and the Component A of the
2.3.2
! CAUTION
P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of
2.3.3 industrial waste. Should you have any questions
concerning these chemicals, consult your service
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
representative.
• Always wear protective gloves and safety * Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of
goggles when handling chemicals with the above the CP-48S chemicals.
indications. This is recommended even for
chemicals without these indications. For greater ! CAUTION • The P1-R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge
protection, the use of a protective mask and PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up
apron is also recommended. Chemical
• Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing These components contain P-phenylenediamine
chemicals or solutions. and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if
improperly handled. They may be injurious to the
health if swallowed.
• The P2-RA Chemical of the Replenisher
Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-
up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals.
• Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed
immediately. with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an
• Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA).
mixtures may produce toxic gases. • The P2-RB Chemical of the Replenisher
• If you get any chemical on your skin or in your Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-
eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a up Chemical
great amount of water. These components may produce harmful
• If you swallow any chemical or get any in your ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based
eyes, seek medical attention immediately and bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-
show the physician the information printed on the RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur
box or label of the chemical(s) involved. trioxide gas if mixed with an acid.
• In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison • FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
label are required by law to be stored under lock This component contains dichloroisocyanurate
and key. You are responsible for ascertaining and and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if
complying with the regulations concerning the mixed with an acid. It could be injurious to the
handling of poisonous substances that apply in health if swallowed.
your country.
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure 2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When
Replacing Solutions
Tools Preparation Procedure
• Measuring Cup (5L) 1. Drain the processing tank (properly Name Code Packing Units Components Q’ty
dispose of the drained solution). Color
2. Remove the processing rack. Developer A×6
3. Clean the processing tank and rack with Startup P1 To make 10 L A+B B×6
running water (preferably warm water) Chemicals
and a sponge or soft cloth. Do not use
any abrasive material such as a scrub Bleach-fix
A×6
brush. Startup P2 To make 10 L A+B
B×6
4. Prepare the solution in accordance with Chemicals
EZ1129
“5.3 Preparing Processing Solutions Super Rinse
(CP-48S)”. Replenisher To make
• Stirring Rod FSC100 Tablets 1
5. Install the processing rack into the tank. (Fuji Super 5 L × 100
6. Thoroughly clean the solution Conditioner)
preparation tools with water. Ensure that Replenisher P1-R
they are free of processing solution Cartridge PC 2 Cartridge P2-RA 1
incrustations so as to avoid problems (PC × 2) P2-RB
with the ensuing solution preparation.
NOTE: Paper area processed by a replenisher cartridge :
IMPORTANT: 111 sq.m (Approximately 10,000 sheets of 3R-size)
Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1
GD1720 solution preparation. If the measuring cup
• Fuji Rinse Saving System has contained other solutions, thoroughly
clean it before P1 solution preparation.
FRSS10
2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2500P
* Prepare the processing solutions by doing the steps in the order shown. If these steps are not followed, abnormal solutions may result.
2
P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 55.5 liters) 2.3.4
q Water up to level line w 6 bottles of P1A r 6 bottles of P1B y Install P1-1 and i Water (4 liters) up to
(Approx. 38 liters) e Stir 20 times. t Stir 20 times. P1-2 racks. overflow hole
(15°C to 40°C) u Remove circulation filter.
u
38R e t
4R
i
q w P1-1 Rack y
r
P1-2 Rack
Overflow Hole
Line
GD1473-1
P2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 54.5 liters)

q Install contamination prevention e 6 bottles of P2A t 6 bottles of P2B u Install P2-1 and P2-2 racks.
cover. r Stir 20 times. y Stir 20 times. i Remove circulation filter and
w Water up to level line add water (4 liters) up to overflow
(Approx. 30 liters) hole.
(15°C to 40°C)
30R r y
4R
q w
e
t P2-1 Rack
u
P2-2 Rack
Line Overflow Hole

GD1473-2
2-5
2
2.3.4
PS4, PS3 or PS2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 26 liters)
q Water 20 liters w 5 tablets of FSC100 r Remove circulation filter and add
(15°C to 40°C) e Install processing rack. water (7 liters) up to overflow hole.
20R
w
q
7R
Processing Rack r
e
Overflow Hole
GD1473-3
PS1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 26 liters)

q Water 20 liters w 5 tablets of FSC100 r Remove circulation filter t Remove contamination y Install crossover
(15°C to 40°C) e Install PS1 rack. and add water (7 liters) prevention cover. racks.
up to overflow hole.
20R
t 7R
w
q r
y
Crossover
Racks
Overflow Hole PS1 Rack

e GD1473-4
2-6
2.4 Adjustment Jigs
See
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose
subsection
1 Carrier Extension Cable 111A8993590 Connect between the carrier and the
scanner to enable input, output and 2
operation checks to be carried out.
EZ1810
2 Focusing Chart Jig 96A21423A00 Optical axis adjustment (Menu 43H) 9.4.8
Optical magnification calibration 9.4.9

(Menu 43J)
Focus calibration (Menu 43K) 9.4.10
EZ1811
3 Reference Mirror Box 96A21424A00 Use to create reference data for dust 9.4.5
check on the “CCD Data Display (Menu
43E)” screen.
EZ1812
4 Printer Docking Jig 15B9956380 Use to check clearance between the

processor and the printer.
6mm
4mm
GD1487
5 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig 340A8894950 Back printer head clearance adjustment 15.4.1
EZ1814
2-7
2.4 Adjustment Jigs
See
subsection
6 Spectral Calibration Chart 610C895788 Spectral calibration (Menu 43P) 9.4.12
2
EZ1815
7 135ANL Guide Alignment Jig q 346D981724 Use to adjust alignment of the 135ANL Installation
w 346D974102B and the NC135AG. Manual
q w 3.4.5
GD195
8 Gear Locating Jig 356D984516 Use to position the Unit 5 drive gears 17.5.1
after installing Unit 5.
GD1484
9 Sorter Adjustment Tool 88B7851180 Use to adjust the slant sorter position 23.3.1
against the horizontal sorter.
GD1580
10 Feed Unit Extension Cable to enable input, output and 858C978077 Connect between the unit and the 15.3.18
operation checks. printer.
GD1580
2-8
2.4 Adjustment Jigs
See
subsection
11 Unit 1 Extension Cable 858C978078 Connect between the unit and the 15.4.27
printer. 2
12 Exposure Section Feed Unit Extension Cable 858C978079 16.3.18
13 Unit 2 Extension Cable 858C978080 17.1.33
17 Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Centering Jig 890C995622 For paper width guide centering. 15.3.17
GD1635
18 Unit 1 Paper Width Guide Centering Jig 890C998616 15.4.26
GD1646
19 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Centering 890C995562A 16.3.17
Jig
GD1654
20 Unit 2 Paper Width Guide 1 Centering Jig 890C995613 17.1.32
GD1661
2-9
2.4 Adjustment Jigs
See
subsection
21 Unit 2 Paper Width Guide 2 Centering Jig 890C995614 For paper width guide centering. 17.1.32
2
GD1662
22 Unit 2 Paper Width Guide 3 Centering Jig 890C995615 17.1.32
GD1663
23 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Centering Jig 890D995592 17.3.9
GD1676
GD1682
GD1689
2-10
2.4 Adjustment Jigs
See
subsection
26 Printer Paper Width Guide Gauge 890C995590 For paper width guide adjustment. 15.3.18
15.4.27 2
16.3.18
17.1.33
17.3.10
17.4.17
17.5.8
GD1694
27 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Gauge 890D995591A 17.3.10
GD1680
2-11
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement
2.5.1 Operation Section
Adjustment
No. Replacement Parts Ref.
2 Item Menu Ref.
1 Monitor 11.1.1 (1) Monitor Color Adjustment 11.1.7
2.5.1
(2) Monitor Adjustment 426 9.3.6
2.5.2
2 NC135AG Auto Film Carrier (1) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.9
(2) Carrier Inclination Display 43D 9.4.10
(3) Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete 44P 9.5.15
3 Film Leading End Sensor (D401)/LED (D400) 11.2.20/ NC135AG Sensor Calibration 44A 9.5.7
11.2.2
4 Scan Timing Sensor LED (D402)/Check Tape Sensor 11.2.3
LED (D410)
5 Scan Timing Sensor (D403)/Check Tape Sensor 11.2.22/
(D411) 11.2.23
6 Perforation Sensor (D405) 11.2.18
7 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) 11.2.8
8 CYB20 Circuit Board 11.2.19 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (Download) 44P 9.5.15
9 NC240AG Auto Film Carrier (1) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.9
(2) Carrier Inclination Display 43D 9.4.10
(3) Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete 44P 9.5.15
10 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) 11.3.13 NC240AG Sensor Calibration 44B 9.5.8
11 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) 11.3.2
12 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) 11.3.25
13 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) 11.3.7
14 CYC20 Circuit Board 11.3.16 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (Download) 44P 9.5.15
2.5.2 Light Source Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 135 Mirror Box (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 9.4.2
(2) 135 Light Source Aperture Table 433 9.4.3
2 120 Mirror Box (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 9.4.2
3 Scanner Lamp/Reflector 9.4.1 (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 9.4.2
(4) Scanner Correction/Print Condition 13/16 —
Upkeep
4 Lamp Socket 12.1.2
5 First IR Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 12.1.3 (1) 135 Light Source Aperture Table 433 9.4.3
(3) Scanner Correction/Print Condition 13/16 —
Upkeep
6 Balance Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 12.2.2/
12.2.5
7 Heat-absorbing Filter/Second IR Filter 12.2.6
(Replacement/Cleaning)
8 Light Source Aperture Home Position Sensor (D201)/ 12.2.7
Standby Sensor (D203)
9 Light Source Aperture Belt 12.2.9
2-12
2.5.3 Scanner Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref. 2
1 ND Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 6.3.3 (1) ND Filter Density Measurement 43N 9.4.17
2.5.3
(2) ND Filter Dust Check 43B 9.4.8
2.5.4
2 Conjugate Length Variable Belt 13.1.4 (1) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.15
2.5.5
(2) Focus Calibration 43K 9.4.16
(3) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.9
3 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) 13.1.5
4 Ball Screw 13.1.8
5 Conjugate Length Variable Upper Position (D103)/ 13.1.11
Home Position (D102)/Lower Position (D104)
Sensors
6 CCD Unit 13.1.6 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 43H 9.4.14
(2) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.15
(5) ND Filter Density Measurement 43N 9.4.17
(6) ND Filter Dust Check 43B 9.4.8
(7) CCD Data Display (Reference Data 43E 9.4.11
Creation)
(8) Spectral Calibration 43P 9.4.18
7 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) 13.2.1 (1) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.15
8 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) 13.2.3
9 Lens Motor (M102) 13.2.4
10 Lens Unit 13.2.5 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 43H 9.4.14
(2) Lens Registration 43G 9.4.13
(3) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.15
11 Film Cooling Air Nozzle 13.2.6 Nozzle Position Adjustment — 13.2.6
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 DC24V Power Supply 14.1.9 DC24V Voltage Adjustment (+24V±0.3V) — 14.1.10
2 Lamp Power Supply 14.1.11 Lamp Voltage Adjustment (+31V±0.3V) — 14.1.12
3 Main Control Unit 14.2.10 System Software Installation — 8.5
4 Film Cooling Air Compressor 14.2.9 Clearing Compressor Operation Data 43F 9.4.12
2.5.5 Paper Feed Unit
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position 15.3.12 Paper Width Guide Fine Adjustment 45M 15.3.18
Sensor (D522)
2 Paper Width Guide Belt 15.3.15 (1) Paper Width Guide Centering — 15.3.17
(2) Paper Width Guide Adjustment 45M 15.3.18
3 Paper Feed Unit 15.3.1 Loop 1 Guide Plate Height Adjustment 45M 15.4.7
2-13
2.5.6 Unit 1
Adjustment
2 Item Menu Ref.
1 Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor (D511) 15.4.3 Loop 1 Guide Plate Height Adjustment 45M 15.4.7
2.5.6
2 Loop 1 Guide Roller 15.4.5
2.5.7
3 Unit 1 15.4.1
4 Paper Width Guide 1 Home Position Sensor (D514) 15.4.21 Paper Width Guide Adjustment 45M 15.4.27
5 Paper Width Guide 1 Belt 15.4.24 (1) Paper Width Guide Centering — 15.4.26
7 Cut/Sort Punch Unit 15.4.12 (1) Clearing Cut Punch Operation Data 45Q 9.6.20
(2) Clearing Sort Punch Operation Data
2.5.7 Exposure Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Light-shield Shutter Unit 16.1.4 (1) LS Shutter Home Position 45M 9.6.16
(2) LS Shutter Opening Timing 45M 9.6.16
(3) LS Shutter Close Timing 45M 9.6.16
(4) Clearing Shutter Motor Operation 45Q 9.6.19
Data
2 Laser Unit 16.1.5 (1) Main Scanning Position Adjustment/ 45H 9.6.12
Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(2) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment 45J 9.6.13
Print
(3) G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal 454 9.6.4
Temperature Setup
(4) Print Condition Upkeep 16
3 Sub-scanning Belt 16.3.19 Belt Alignment Adjustment — 16.3.19
4 Sub-scanning Pulley 16.3.22
7 Nip Releasing Mechanism 16.3.27 (1) Bearing Clearance Adjustment — 16.3.27
(2) Guide Plate Adjustment — 16.3.27
(3) Clearing Exposure Feed Roller Nip 45Q 9.6.20
Operation Data
8 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor (D533P)/ LED (D533L) 16.3.6/7 PSD Sensor Information 45V 9.6.23
9 Sub-scanning Motor 16.3.21 Clearing Sub-scanning Motor Operation 45Q 9.6.20
Data
10 Reverse Clutch 16.3.11 Clearing Reverse Clutch Operation Data
2-14
2.5.8 Unit 2
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref. 2
1 Unit 2 17.1.2 Cutter 1 Position 45M 9.6.16
2.5.8
2.5.9
3 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1 (D542) 17.1.21 Paper Width Guide Adjustment 45M 17.1.33
2.5.10
4 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 2 (D546) 17.1.22
5 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 3 (D547) 17.1.23
6 Inlet Side Paper Width Guide 3 Belt 1 17.1.25 (1) Paper Width Guide Centering — 17.1.32
7 Middle Paper Width Guide 3 Belt 2 17.1.28 (2) Paper Width Guide Adjustment 45M 17.1.33
8 Outlet Side Paper Width Guide 3 Belt 3 17.1.30
9 Back Printer Head 17.1.39 (1) Back Printer Head Clearance — 17.1.46
Adjustment
(2) Back Printer Test 45N 9.6.17
(3) Clearing Back Printing Operation Data 45Q 9.6.20
10 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor (D544P)/LED (D544L) 17.1.34/ PSD Sensor Information 45V 9.6.23
35
11 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor (D550P)/LED (D550L) 17.1.44/ (1) PSD Sensor Information 45V 9.6.23
45 (2) Cutter 1 Position 45M 9.6.16
2.5.9 Unit 3/Reservoir Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
2 Cutter 1 Unit 17.2.3 (1) Cutter Angle Adjustment — 17.2.3
(2) Cutter 1 Position 45M 9.6.16
(3) Clearing Cutter 1 Operation Data 45Q 9.6.20
4 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Belt 17.3.7 (1) Paper Width Guide Centering — 17.3.9
5 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor 17.3.5 Paper Width Guide Adjustment 45M 17.3.10
(D555)
2.5.10 Unit 4
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
4 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor (D562P)/LED (D562L) 17.4.18/ Cutter 2 Position 45M 9.6.16
19
5 Cutter 2 Unit 17.4.21 (1) Cutter Angle Adjustment — 17.4.21
(2) Cutter 2 Position 45M 9.6.16
(3) Clearing Cutter 2 Operation Data 45Q 9.6.20
2-15
2.5.11 Unit 5
Adjustment
2 Item Menu Ref.
1 Unit 5 17.5.1 Drive Gear Alignment — 17.5.1
2.5.11
Loop 5 Guide Plate Height Adjustment 45M 17.5.16
2.5.12
2 Paper Width Guide 5 Home Position Sensor (D567) 17.5.2 Paper Width Guide Fine Adjustment 45M 17.5.8
2.5.13
3 Paper Width Guide 5 Belt 17.5.5 (1) Paper Width Guide Adjustment — 17.5.7
2.5.14
5 Loop 5 Guide Plate Motor (M563) 17.5.13 Clearing Loop 5 Guide Plate Operation 45Q 9.6.20
Data
2.5.12 Printer Control Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 CTL21 Circuit Board 18.2.4 (1) DIP Switch Setting Check — 4.5.7
(2) JP Plug Setting Check — 4.5.7
(3) System Software Update — 8.1
2 DC Power Supply 18.1.4 5V Adjustment — —
2.5.13 Processor
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Replenisher Filter 21.2.3 Pump Output Measurement/Setting 461 9.7.1
2 Replenisher Pump 21.2.2 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 461 9.7.1
3 Replenisher Pump Valve 21.2.1 (2) Clearing Replenisher Pump Operation 46F 9.7.13
Data
4 Processing Solution Heater 20.2.8/9 Clearing Heater Operation Data 46F 9.7.13
5 Dryer Heater 22.2.2 Clearing Dryer Heater Operation Data
6 Paper Width Guide System 19.6.4 Clearing Processor Paper Width Guide
Operation Data
2.5.14 Cutter/Sorter
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Cutter Loop Guide Roller 23.1.9 Loop Guide Plate Adjustment — 23.1.11
2 Loop Guide Plate 23.1.10
3 Cutter 23.1.21 (1) Cutting Position 46A 9.7.9
(2) Clearing Cutter Operation Data 46F 9.7.13
4 Punch Hole Sensor (D777/D784) 23.1.22/ Gain Value Adjustment — 23.1.24
23
5 Slant Sorter 23.3.1 Slant Sorter Position Adjustment — 23.3.1
6 Slant Sorter Stop Position Sensor (D780) 23.3.3 Stop Position Adjustment — 23.3.1
7 PWC01 Circuit Board 23.1.36 Punch Hole Gain Value Adjustment — 23.1.24
8 Cutter Loop Guide System — Clearing Loop Guide Operation Data 46F 9.7.13
9 Cutter Exit Guide 23.1.33 Clearing Exit Guide Operation Data
2-16
3. MENU TABLE
3.1 Menu Table ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table ...................................... 3-6 3
3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow ......................................................................... 3-7

3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item ................................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item ............................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item .................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item .................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item ................................................................................. 3-12
3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item ............................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item ................................................................................... 3-19
3-1
3.1 Menu Table
Classification User (Password)

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
No. Screen No. Display Menu No. Pull-down Menu Sub Menu Manager
– 0000 6666 7777
0 Main Menu
3 1 Pre-operational 12 Check Item Display
Check
18 135ANL Check Item
Display
13 Scanner Correction
14 Processor
Temperature Check
15 Control Strip
Processing
16 Print Condition
Upkeep
2 (1) Quit
(2) Printing (1) Index Print 135
IX240
(2) Back Print 135/120
IX240
Back Print of Custom
Setting (Display)
(3) Front Print
(4) P.SET Initial Setting
(5) Special Film CH Select
(6) Print Mode Selection
Normal Print
Mounted Print
Frame/Charact Print
Red-eye/Soft/Cross
Digital Image Import
(sRGB)
Digital Image Import
(No convert)
Digital Image Export
Digital Image Export
and Print
(7) Cropping Center Cropping
Free Cropping
(8) Preview
(9) Exposure Condition Retrieve
(3) Scanner Op. (1) Original Select
(2) →Re-order ⇔ →1st Print
(3) P.Size in Mixed Process
(4) Frame Display Switch 6 Frames
1 Frame
High Speed
(5) Sort Data Display/Setting
(6) Scanner Mode Set
(4) Image Correction (1) Tone Adjustment
(2) Sharpness
(3) Monotone Correction
(4) RP-tone Correction
(5) Auto Correction ON/OFF
*SE1: First step service engineer

*SE2: Second step service engineer
3-2
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
(6) Custom Setting Number

Selection 3
3 Post-operational (5) Printer Op (1) Processor Start
Check
(2) Paper Process (Alt + F1)
31 Check Item Display
411 Product Information 1
35 Next Timer ON Date/
Time Confirmation
4 Setup and 41 System Operation 411 Production Information 1
Maintenance Setup and Check
412 Production Information 2
414 Timer Setup
415 Error Information Check 415 Error log
information
41C Accumulated
error information
416 Installation Information Reference
417 Data Backup
41E Clear Error Log
41F Installation Information Setup
41G Shipping Information Reference
41I DI Manager Administrative Setting
42 Print Condition 421 Paper Condition Setup
Setup and Check
422 Processor Temperature Check
423 Control Strip Processing
424 Print Size Setup
426 Monitor Adjustment
42C Image Correction Setup
42D Fine Adjustment of the Print
Mag. Setting
42E Special Film Channel Setting
42F Film Type Setting
42G Monotone Correction Setting
42J Paper Condition Method Setup
42K Shop Logo Regist/Delete
42L Template Regist/Delete
42M Custom Setting Registration/
Delete
43 Scanner Adjustment/ 431 Lamp/Reflector Replacement
Maintenance
432 Lamp Position Adjustment
433 135 Light Source Aperture Table
434 120 Light Source Aperture Table
435 Input Check
436 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area
43A I/O Check
43B ND Filter Dust Check
43C Carrier Focus Position
Adjustment
43D Carrier Inclination Display
43E CCD Data Display
3-3
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
43F Working Information
3 43G Lens Registration
43H Optical Axis Adjustment
43J Optical Magnification Calibration
43K Focus Calibration
43N ND Filter Density Measurement
43P Spectral Calibration
44 Carrier Adjustment/ 441 NC135AG Input Check
Maintenance
442 NC240AG Input Check
443 MFC10Y Input Check
444 135ANL Input Check
445 135ANL Function Setup
446 135ANL Negative Catcher
Cleaning
44A NC135AG Sensor Calibration
44B NC240AG Sensor Calibration
44C Installation Information Display
44D Installation Information Setup
44E NC135AG I/O Check
44F NC240AG I/O Check
44G MFC10Y I/O Check
44H MFC10Y Monitor Image
Position Adjustment
44J NC135AG Working Information
44K NC240AG Working Information
44L MFC10Y Working Information
44P Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete
44Q NC135AG Machine Data Setup
44R NC240AG Machine Data Setup
44S MFC10Y Machine Data Setup
44T 135ANL Sensor Calibration
44U 135ANL I/O Check
44W 135ANL Information Setup
45 Carrier Adjustment/ 451 Paper Magazine Registration
Maintenance
452 Paper Feed Length Adjustment
453 Test Pattern Printing
454 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup
456 Printer Temperature Display
457 Printer Input Check
458 Image Position Fine
Adjustment
45A Printer I/O Check
45C Laser Exposure Check
45D R Laser (R-LD) Data
45E G Laser (G-SHG) Data
45F B Laser (B-SHG) Data
45G Scanning Position/Scanning
Home Position Parameter
Setup
3-4
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
45H Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. 3
Rough Adjustment
45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine
Adjustment Print
45K Laser History Display
45L Paper Condition Setup Table
(LUT) Copy
45M Printer Mechanism Fine
Adjustment
45N Back Printer Test
45P Printer Operation Data Display
45Q Clearing Selected Printer
Operation Data
45R Clearing All Operation Data
45T Data Saving
45U Data Download
45V PSD Sensor Information
46 Processor 461 Pump Output Measurement/
Adjustment/ Setting
Maintenance
462 Processing Temperature
Setting
463 Processor Temperature
Calibration
464 Replenisher Rate Setting
465 Evaporation Correction Rate
Setting
466 Processor Operating Condition
Setup
468 Processor Input Check
469 Cutter Section Paper Width
Guide Fine Adjustment Value
Setting
46A Processor Mechanical Fine
Adjustment
46B Processor I/O Check
46C RC50D Measurement/
Installation
46D Processor Operation Data
Display
46E Processor Operation Data
Display 2
46F Clearing Selected Processor
Operation Data
47 Option Adjustment/ 47A COM Port Setting
Maintenance
49 Special Operations 49A Paint
49B Explorer
49C Command
3-5
3.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table
Classification User
Laboratory
No. Main Menu No. Sub Menu Description SE
Manager
1 LANGUAGE 11 SET LANG. Language change
12 ORG. LANG NO. Required data version
3 13 ADD LANG NO. Loaded data version
2 CHECK 21 PROC TEMP Processor temperature indication
3 SELECT FUNC. 31 POWER OFF Power supply OFF
4 PRINT COND. 41 CALIBRATION Condition upkeep printing
42 MEASURE DENS Density measurement
43 CTRL STRIPS Control strip processing
44 CUT SELECT Cutter ON or OFF selection
5 SPEC. PRINT 51 BACK PRINT Back printing test
52 FEED PAPER Paper feeding
53 PAT. PRINT Pattern printing
54 ALL PROCESS All processing
6 SYSTEM 61 PROC. TYPE Processor type selection
62 PROC. METHOD Processing method selection
63 SORTER TYPE Sorter type selection
64 REPL. TANK Number of replenisher tanks selection
65 NIGHT ALARM Night alarm ON or OFF selection
7 INSTALLATION 71 FREQ. SETTING Frequency setting
72 PCW AIR EXTRA. Washing line air bleeding
73 MIX REPLENISH. Replenisher preparation
74 PUMP AIR EXTRA. Replenishment line air bleeding
75 P1W AIR EXTRA. P1W line air bleeding
76 P2W AIR EXTRA. P2W line air bleeding
Key Operation for Menu
User Key Operation

Laboratory Manager MENU MENU MENU and ENTER
, ,
SE MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU and ENTER
, , , ,
3-6
3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow
3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item
MENU MENU MENU
MENU
MENU
3
3.3.1
ENTER
STANDBY $✻ 0 [MENU] 1 [LANGUAGE]
1 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ?
(See subsection 3.3.2)
0 [MENU] 2 [CHECK]
2 CHECK 1 PROC. TEMP. ?
INITIALIZE $✻
0 [MENU] 3 [SELECT FUNC.]
3 SELECT FUNC. 1 PROC. DRIVE ?
0 [MENU] 4 [PRINT COND.]
4 PRINT COND. 1 CALIBRATION ?
MENU (See subsection 3.3.5)
0 [MENU] 5 [SPECIAL PRINT]
5 SPECIAL PRINT 1 BACK PRINT ?
0 [MENU] 6 [SYSTEM]
6 SYSTEM 1 PROC. TYPE ?
0 [MENU] 7 [INSTALLATION]
7 INSTALLATION 1 FREQ. SETTING ?
3-7
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item
ENTER
3
ENTER
0 [MENU] 1 [LANGUAGE] 11 <SET LANG.>
1 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ? [English] ?

3.3.2
ENTER
11 <SET LANG.>
[Japanese] ?
ENTER
1 [LANGUAGE] 12 <ORG. LANG No.>
2 ORG. LANG NO. ? 000001
ENTER
1 [LANGUAGE] 13 <ADD. LANG No.>
3 ADD. LANG NO. ? NO LANG LOADED
3-8
3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item
0 [MENU] 2 [CHECK]
ENTER
21 <PROC TEMP.> 3
2 CHECK 1 PROC TEMP. ? P1 38.5 $ 3.3.3
21 <PROC TEMP.>
P2 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS1 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS2 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS3 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS4 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
DRY 31.6 $
3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item
ENTER
0 [MENU] 3 [SELECT FUNC.] 31 <POWER OFF>
3 3 SELECT FUNC. 1 POWER OFF ? START ?
3.3.4
ENTER
#M0003
#POWER OFF [YES] ? ENTER
POWER OFF
ENTER
#M0003
#POWER OFF [NO] ?
3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item
0 [MENU]
4 PRINT COND.
3
3.3.5
ENTER ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 41 <CALIBRATION> 41 <CALIBRATION>
1 CALIBRATION ? START ? PRINTING ✻
ENTER
41 <CALIBRATION>
COMPLETED ?
ENTER ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 42 <MEASURE DENS> 42 <MEASURE DENS>
2 MEASURE DENS ? START ? MEASURING $
ENTER
42 <MEASURE DENS>
LUT UPDATE OK ?
ENTER
ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 43 <CTRL STRIPS> # Set Holder
3 CTRL STRIPS ? 152.0 START ? # DRIVE [YES] ?
ENTER
# Set Holder
ENTER
# Drive [NO] ?
43 <CTRL STRIPS>
PROCESSING ✻
ENTER ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 44 <CUT SELECT>
4 CUT SELECT ? YES ?
ENTER
44 <CUT SELECT>
NO ?
3-11
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item
3 0 [MENU] 5 [SPEC. PRINT]

(See 51 [BACK PRINT].)
5 SPEC. PRINT 1 BACK PRINT ?
3.3.6
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
(See 52 [FEED PAPER].)
2 FEED PAPER ?
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
(See 53 [PATTERN PRINT].)
3 PAT. PRINT ?
3-12
51 [BACK PRINT]
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
ENTER
51 <BACK PRINT> 3
1 BACK PRINT ? LENGTH [82.5] 3.3.6
51 <BACK PRINT>
START ?
51 <BACK PRINT>
ENTER
LENGTH [89.0]
51 <BACK PRINT>
PRINTING ✻
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [127.0]
ENTER
51 <BACK PRINT>
COMPLETED ?
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [254.0]
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [305.0]
3-13
52 [FEED PAPER]
3 5 [SPEC. PRINT]
ENTER
52 <FEED PAPER>
3.3.6 2 FEED PAPER ? LENGTH [82.5]
52 <FEED PAPER>
START ?
52 <FEED PAPER>
ENTER
LENGTH [89.0]
52 <FEED PAPER>
PRINTING ✻
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [127.0]
ENTER
52 <FEED PAPER>
COMPLETED ?
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [254.0]
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [305.0]
3-14
53 [PATTERN PRINT]
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
ENTER
3
3 PAT. PRINT ? 3.3.6
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [82.5]
53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [BL Plas]
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [89.0]
53 <PAT. PRINT> 53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [BD Plas] START ?
53 <PAT. PRINT>
ENTER
LENGTH [127.0]
53 <PAT. PRINT> 53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [GRID] PRINTING ✻
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [254.0] ENTER
53 <PAT. PRINT>
COMPLETED ?
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [305.0]
3-15
3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item
NOTE: Restart the system after changing a “SYSTEM” item.
3
0 [MENU] 6 [SYSTEM]
3.3.7
(See 61 [PROC.TYPE].)
6 SYSTEM 1 PROC. TYPE ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 62 [PROC. METHOD].)
2 PROC. METHOD ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 63 [SORTER TYPE].)
3 SORTER TYPE ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 64 [REPL. TANK].)
4 REPL. TANK ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 65 [NIGHT ALARM].)
5 NIGHT ALARM ?
61 [PROC. TYPE]
ENTER
61 <PROC. TYPE>
[NO PROC.] ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 61 <PROC. TYPE>
1 PROC. TYPE ? [LP2500P] ?
3-16
62 [PROC. METHOD]
62 <PROC.>
ENTER
3
[FACTORY TEST] ? 3.3.7
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 62 <PROC.>
2 PROC.METHOD ? [CP-48S/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-48S/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-47L/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-47L/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-43FA/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-43FA/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-40FA/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-40SP] ?
3-17
63 [SORTER TYPE]
3 63 <SORTER TYPE>
ENTER
3.3.7 [NONE] ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 63 <SORTER TYPE>
3 SORTER TYPE ? [SU2500AG] ?
64 [REPL. TANK] (Not used.)
ENTER
64 <REPL. TANK>
3 TANK ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 64 <REPL. TANK>
4 REPL. TANK ? 4 TANK ?
65 [NIGHT ALARM]
ENTER
65 <NIGHT ALARM>
[OFF] ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 65 <NIGHT ALARM>
5 NIGHT ALARM ? [ON] ?
3-18
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item
0 [MENU]
7 INSTALLATION
3
3.3.8
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 71 <FREQ. SETTING>
1 FREQ. SETTING ? [50Hz] ?
ENTER
71 <FREQ. SETTING>
[60Hz] ?
ENTER
ENTER ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.>
2 PCW AIR EXTRA. ? PSR 4L ADD ? START ?
ENTER ENTER
72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.>
START ? OPEN VALVE ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER ENTER
72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PCW AIR EXTRA.>
EXTRACTING AIR ✻ CLOSE VALVE ? PSR 12L ADD ?
ENTER
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 73 <MIX REPLENISH.> 73 <MIX REPLENISH.>
3 MIX REPLENISH. ? START ? PREPARING ✻
ENTER
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 74 <PUMP AIR EXTRA.> 74 <PUMP AIR EXTRA.>
4 PUMP AIR EXTRA. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 75 <P1W AIR EXTRA.> 75 <P1W AIR EXTRA.>
5 P1W AIR EXTRA. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 76 <P2W AIR EXTRA.> 76 <P2W AIR EXTRA.>
6 P2W AIR EXTRA. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
3-19
4. OUTLINE
4.1 Scanner (SP2500) ............................................................................................. 4-3

4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations ................................................. 4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations ..................................................................... 4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG Configuration ...................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240AG Configuration ...................................................... 4-7
4
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions .......................................... 4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations ................................................................ 4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions .................................................... 4-11
4.1.8 Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ................................................................ 4-12
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer ........................................................................................ 4-13
4.1.10 CTB21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-14
4.1.11 CCD21 Circuit Board (CCD Unit) ..................................................................... 4-16
4.1.12 CDS21 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.13 GMC20 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 4-18
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 4-19
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135AG) .................................................................... 4-23
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240AG) .................................................................... 4-24
4.2 Printer Section (LP2500P) ............................................................................... 4-25

4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration ................................................................ 4-25
4.3 Exposure Section (LP2500P) ......................................................................... 4-26

4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration ...................................................................... 4-26
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration .................................................................................. 4-27
4.4 Post-exposure Feed Section (LP2500P) .................................................... 4-28

4.4.1 Post-exposure Feed Section ........................................................................... 4-28
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP2500P) ...................................... 4-29

4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations ................................................... 4-29
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions ........................................................................... 4-29
4.5.3 Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram .................................................... 4-30
4.5.4 Printer Processor Power ON Operation ........................................................... 4-31
4.5.5 Printer Interlock System ................................................................................... 4-32
4.5.6 DC Power Supply Section Block Diagram ....................................................... 4-33
4.5.7 CTL21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-34
4.5.8 PDC21 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 4-37
4.5.9 JNA21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-40
4.5.10 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board) ............................ 4-42
4.5.11 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board) ................................................. 4-43
4.5.12 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board) .................................... 4-44
4.5.13 LDD20 Circuit board ........................................................................................ 4-45
4-1
4.6 Processor Section (LP2500P) ........................................................................ 4-48

4.6.1 Processor Section Drive System ..................................................................... 4-48
4.6.2 Variable Paper Width Guide Drive System ...................................................... 4-49
4 4.7 Processing Solution Circulation and Replenishment System ............... 4-50

4.7.1 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System .............................................. 4-50
4.7.2 Piping Diagram for Replenishment and Cartridge Auto-washing System ........ 4-51
4.7.3 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism .................................................... 4-53
4.8 Dryer Section ....................................................................................................... 4-54

4.8.1 Dryer Section Configuration ............................................................................. 4-54
4.9 Cutter and Sorter ................................................................................................ 4-55

4.9.1 Cutter and Sorter Configuration ....................................................................... 4-55
4.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Section ................................................... 4-56

4.10.1 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration ................................... 4-56
4.10.2 Processor Control Section Configuration ......................................................... 4-57
4.10.3 Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions ......................................... 4-58
4.10.4 Circuit Board Main Functions ........................................................................... 4-58
4.10.5 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram .............................................. 4-59
4.10.6 Relay, SSR and Circuit Protector Map ............................................................. 4-60
4.10.7 Processor Interlock System ............................................................................. 4-61
4.10.8 Replenisher Tank Section Interlock System .................................................... 4-61
4.10.9 CTP21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-62
4.10.10 PAC21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-65
4.10.11 PAD21 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-68
4.10.12 PWC01Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-70
4.11 135ANL (Optional) ........................................................................................... 4-71

4.11.1 135ANL Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-71
4.11.2 CTF21 Circuit Board (135ANL Control Circuit Board) ..................................... 4-72
4-2
4.1 Scanner (SP2500)
4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations
CCD Cooling Fan (F301)
ND Filter
CCD Unit (D101)
4
Shutter Motor (M103)
4.1.1
Lens Unit
Conjugate Length Variable Motor
(M101)
Lens Driving Motor (M102)
Auto Film Carrier

Film Cooling Nozzle
Mirror Box
Light Source Section
Suction Fan (F302)
Balance Filter
Motor (M202)
Air Filter
Light Source
Filter Unit
Light Source Aperture Motor

(M201)

Exhaust Fan (F303)
Light Source Cooling Fan (F308)
Scanning Lamp Unit
EZ1171
4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations
Lens Unit
4
4.1.2
Auto Film Carrier

(NC135AG/NC240AG)
Mirror Box
Balance Filter
(For Reversal)
(For Negative)
Light Source Aperture
Second IR Filter
Heat-absorbing Filter
First IR Filter
Reflector
Light Source Lamp
GD129
4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG Configuration
Top View
Reduction Clutch 3 (S402) Reduction Clutch 2 (S401)

Plug-in Connector
Film Feed Reduction Clutch 1 (S400) Pressure Cover 4
Motor (M400) 4.1.3
Check Tape
Sensor LED
(D410)
Winding
Section
Loop Sensor
(D406)
Film Leading
End Sensor
(D400)
Film Mask
Film Mask Home Position Scan Timing Sensor
Drive Motor (M403) Variable Film Mask
Sensor (D409) LED (D402)
Bottom View of Pressure Cover
Perforation Sensor
LED (D404) Film Nip Roller
Film Mask/Diffusion Plate
Dust Removal Roller
GD127
4-5
Bottom View
Check Tape Sensor (D411) Perforation Sensor (D405)
4
4.1.3
CYB20
Circuit Board
Indicator Lamp
(L400)
Nip Home Position Sensor

Scan Timing Sensor (D402) Film Feed Motor Driver
(D407)
Circuit Board
Soft Nip Drive Motor
(M401)
Film Leading End

Sensor (D401)
Lower Dust Removal Roller
GD128
4-6
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240AG Configuration
Top View
Reduction Clutch 2 (S441)
Reduction Clutch 1 (S440) Door Open/Close Sensor (D441)
Door Open/Close Motor (M441)
4
Reduction Clutch 3 (S442) Plug-in
Connector 4.1.4
Spool Motor (M442)
Film Feed Motor
(M440)
Chucking Sensor
(D443)/VEI Sensor
(D442)
MTP Sensor 1
LED (D447)
Write Head
(MWH01)
Circuit Board
Release Knob
C
Cartridge Sensor
C P (D456)
MTP Sensor 2 Cartridge Motor

LED (D457) (M444)
Read Head Circuit Board TAP Sensor LED (D448) Lower Dust
Removal Roller
Film Winding Unit
P-side Write Magnetic P-side Read Magnetic Head (D450)
Head (D452)
Upper Dust
Removal Roller
C-side Write Magnetic

Head (D451) C-side Read Magnetic Film Mask/
Head (D449) Diffusion Plate
Bottom View of Pressure Cover
EZ1027A
4-7
Bottom View
MTP Sensor 1 (D454)
4
4.1.4
Film Feed
Motor Driver
Circuit Board
TAP Sensor
(D455)
IPI Sensor (D445) Indicator Lamp

CYC20 Circuit Board
Feed Stop
Sensor (D444)
MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D446)
EZ1027B
4-8
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions
S402
4
S401
4.1.5
Pre-scanning and skipping
Fine-scanning
(Medium speed)
S400
Fine-scanning
(Low speed)
S401
S400
EZ1210
4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations
Monitor
DC24V Power Supply
Image Processing Circuit Transformer
PWR20 Circuit Board
4 Board Box
Noise Filter (NF1)
4.1.6 DC Power Supply Unit
Circui Breaker (NFB1)
Relays (K1, K2)
Electrical Equipment
Section Exhaust Fan
(F306/F307)
CTB21 Circuit Board
Lamp PowerSupply
Input Terminal Block
Circuit Protectors (CP11 ~ CP16)

Noise Filter
Terminal Block (J1)
START Switch
Main Control Unit Input Power Supply Unit Air Tank
Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351)

UPS (Uninterruptive Power Supply) Connector
GD1367
4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions
CCD21 Circuit Board

CTB21 Circuit Board
4
4.1.7
KYA20 Circuit Board
CDS21 Circuit Board
GFM20 Circuit Board
GIP20 Circuit Board
GLO20 Circuit Board
GIS20 Circuit Board
GMC20 Circuit Board
PWR20 Circuit Board
GD1583
Circuit Board Functions

CCD21 CCD board
CCD, timing plus generator for CCD, drive circuit of CCD and amplifier of CCD signal
CTB21 Mechanical control
Control of lamp section, lens section and others
CDS21 A/D converter board
A/D conversion of CCD signal
GMC20 CPU board for imaging process
GFM20 Input image data correction circuit
Changing of magnification electrically
Matrix calculation for color correction
GIP20 Main image processing
Hyper sharpness, hyper tone and face expression
GLO20 Interface circuit to LP2500P
GIS20 Interface circuit to main control unit (UWSCSI)
PWR20 Power supply system control circuit board
KYA20 Operation keyboard circuit board
4-11
4
4.1.8
4.1.8
4-12
CCD21 R/B/G Video
Circuit Board Image Processing Circuit Board Box

I/O
CDS21 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20 GIS20
Scanner I/O CTB21

Circuit Board
Film Carrier
Compressor
GIF20
RS422 Serial
Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
VDEN
Light Source I/O
EXTVD
Lamp
AC100V PWR DC. Lamp PWR

GMC20 SCSI
Cable
Lamp Power I/O
DC PWR
START Switch
AC200V PWR I/O
DC main Power Source Section Full Keyboard

DC PWR
SSR
Monitor
On Operation
K2 Control AC200V PWR Keyboard
On DC PWR
Transformer data
On
K1 Timer Card
AC200V PWR
AC200V input Main Control Unit START Switch
OR AC200V PWR
Power Control Section SCSI
UPS Inlet 100BaseTX
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer
Pre-scanning
FMB20 FMB20
CDS21 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20

4
Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial
Cable 1394 Cable Cable 4.1.9
CCD Unit
FMA20 FMC20 AOM Driver Laser Unit
SCSI
GMC20 GIS20 Main Control Unit
Fine-scanning
FMB20 FMB20

Cable 1394 Cable Cable
CCD Unit
SCSI
Index Printing
FMB20 FMB20

Cable 1394 Cable Cable
CCD Unit
SCSI
4-13
4.1.10 CTB21 Circuit Board
Power Supply and Check Points
Power Supply System Supply Connector Check Points Circuit Protector Protected Circuit
+5V: TP34
CN1 CP6 Whole digital circuits
DGND: TP21
4 +5V Digital circuit +5V: 2 pin
GND: 1 pin +5V2: TP23
CP7 (NOTE) Circuit board output, sensors, etc.
4.1.10 DGND: TP18
+5V Analog circuit +5VA: TP24

AGND: TP25
Power circuit CN16

+24V1: TP15
+24V1 (Without +24V: 5 pin CP5 Lens motor (M102)
PGND: TP13
interlock) GND: 2 pin
+24V2: TP14 Light source aperture motor (M201) and

CP1
Power circuit CN13 PGND: TP16 balance filter motor (M202)
+24V2 (Lamp interlock +24V: 3 and 4 pins
CN12
system) GND: 1 and 2 pins
+24V: 2 pin CP2 Fans, and etc.
GND: 1 pin
+24V3: TP11
CP3 Conjugate length variable motor (M101)
Power circuit CN16 PGND: TP10
+24V3 (Without +24V: 4 pin
CN17
interlock) GND: 1 pin Light source section cooling fans, and
+24V: 2 pin CP4
etc.
GND: 1 pin
NOTE: The CP7 is connected in series after the CP6. Therefore, the power supply to the CP7 is cut if the CP6 trips.
Indicator LED
Condition
LED System
During power On to downloading After completion of downloading
D1 Operation of U18X and SH2 Lights up (NOTE 1) Blinks (NOTE 2)
D2 Operation of U19 and H8 Lights up (NOTE 1) Blinks (NOTE 2)
NOTE 1: Indicates that the CPU has started up and is able to download. If the LED does not light up, there may be a problem in the power
supply, reset switch or CPU.
NOTE 2: Indicates that the CPU is operating. Blinking will stop when the motor is operating. If the LED stops blinking when the motor is not
operating, the CPU has stopped functioning.
4-14
4
4.1.10
GD1507
4-15
4.1.11 CCD21 Circuit Board (CCD Unit)
Power Supply Check Points
+5V TP12(+5V) to TP26(AGND)
–5V TP22(–5V) to TP26(AGND)

4 +5V TP24(D5V) to TP30(DGND)
4.1.11
EZ1716
4-16
4.1.12 CDS21 Circuit Board

4
+5V TP36(+D5V) to TP40(DGND) 4.1.12
1
EZ1717
4-17
4.1.13 GMC20 Circuit Board
DIP Switch Setting
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON

4
4.1.13
EZ1722
4-18
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.14
EZ1718
4-19
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.15
EZ1719
4-20
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.16
EZ1720
4-21
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.17
EZ1721
4-22
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135AG)
+5V TP1(+5V) to TP3(DGND)

4
4.1.18
EZ1724
4-23
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240AG)
+5V TP5(+5V) to TP2(DGND)

4 +24V TP8(+24V) to TP6(AGND)
4.1.19
EZ1725
4-24
4.2 Printer Section (LP2500P)
4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration
Nip Release Motor (M516)

Paper Feed Motor (M510)
Paper Feed Unit
Loop 1
Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor (M515)
4
4.2.1
Loop 1 Guide Plate
Motor (M511)
Paper Magazine
Unit 2
Paper Magazine
Rewind Motor (M500)
Unit 1 Feed Motor (M513)

Paper Width Guide 1 Motor (M512)
Loop 2
Loop 2 Guide Plate Motor (M514)
GD1236
4-25
4.3 Exposure Section (LP2500P)
4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration
Roller Nip Release Roller Unit Light-shield Pre-exposure

Paper Width Guide 2
Motor (M534) Shutter Motor (M533) Feed Motor (M531)
Laser Unit Motor (M530)
4
4.3.1
Sub-scanning Steel Belt Sub-scanning Reverse Clutch (S530)

Exposure Section
Motor (M532)
Feed Unit
GD1237
4-26
4.3 Exposure Section (LP2500P)
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration
Laser beams travel from the polygon scanner mirror via the lenses and mirrors to reach the paper. The polygonal scanner mirror rotates at a
constant speed, casting the reflected light in the main scanning direction. The sub-scanning motor (M532) feeds the paper at a speed of
80mm/s (equivalent to 600dpi).
Polygonal Scanner Mirror B-SHG G-SHG R Laser

4
AOM 4.3.2
Lenses
Paper Sheet
Mirrors
EZ1170
AOM Red Laser

R-LD
AOM SHG Infrared Laser
G-SHG
AOM SHG Infrared Laser
B-SHG
Output level changes in Green/blue lasers are

accordance with the digitized generated by the modulation
color level. of an infrared laser.
Red laser (Semiconductor laser): A laser diode is used as light source. Blue/green laser light is generated from an infrared laser.
SHG (Second Harmonic Generator): Blue/green laser light is generated from an infrared laser.
AOM (Acousto-Optic Modulator): Each laser has one AOM. The laser's output level changes in accordance with the digitalized color level
of the image.
4-27
4.4 Post-exposure Feed Section (LP2500P)
4.4.1 Post-exposure Feed Section
Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1 Loop 5 Guide Plate Motor

(M541) (M563)
Unit 2
Paper Width Guide 5
Motor (M564)
4
4.4.1
Loop 3 Guide
Plate Motor
(M540)
Unit 2 Feed Motor

(M542)
Paper Width Loop 3

Guide 3 Motor 2 Loop 4 Guide Plate
(M543) Motor (M551)
Back Printer
Loop 5
Paper Width
Guide 3 Motor 3
(M544)
Unit 5
Unit 4 Feed Motor

(M561) Cutter 2 Motor
(M562)
Paper Width Guide 4 Motor
Cutter 1 Motor (M560)
(M550) Cutter 1 Unit
Loop 4 Reservoir Paper Width Guide
Motor (M552)
Unit 3
GD1238
4-28
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP2500P)
4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations
LDD20 Circuit Board

Laser Unit Light Source Section Cooling Fans 1 and 2 (F570/F571)
4
4.5.1
4.5.2
AOM Drivers
(AOM20 Circuit
Boards)
(AOM-R, AOM-G
AOM Drive Exhaust and AOM-B)
Fans 1, 2 and 3
FMC20 Circuit Board (F580, F581 and F582) AOM Driver
Cooling Fans 1, 2
and 3 (F577, F578
and F579)
Printer Air Intake

Fans 1 and 2 Air Intake Fans 1
(F588 and F589) and 2 (F572 and
F573)
Power Supply Section

Exhaust Fans 1 and 2 FMB20 Circuit Boards FMA20 Circuit Board JNA21 Circuit
(F584 and F585) Board
DC Power Supply
Unit 1
DC Power Supply
Unit 2
PDC21 Circuit Board CTL21 Circuit Board

GD1239
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions

Circuit Board Functions Circuit Board Functions
CTL21 Printer main control circuit board THA20 Temperature sensor circuit board
FMA20 Circuit board for interfacing with the scanner JNE20 Back printer relay circuit board
(receives inputted image data) JMR20 Red LD control circuit board
FMB20 Frame memory circuit board JMG20 Green SGH control circuit board
(stores inputted image data)
JMB20 Blue SGH control circuit board
FMC20 Frame memory control circuit board (performs
tone-processing of inputted image data, and outputs DTA20 Exposure timing sensor circuit board
the data to the correct position) JND20 Exposure unit relay circuit board
PDC21 Printer load (motor, solenoid, fan) drive circuit board DTH21 Punch hole sensor circuit board
LDD20 Laser drive circuit board LEH21 Punch hole sensor LED circuit board
AOM20 AOM drive circuit board DTM00 Paper magazine ID sensor circuit board
JNA21 DC power supply distribution circuit board
4-29
4
4.5.3
4.5.3
A±12V
4-30
A24V
JMB20 SHG (B) AOM (B)
THA20 JMG20 SHG (G) AOM (G) Laser Unit
JMR20 LD (R) DTA20 AOM (R)

A6V
LDD20
A±12V
Polygon
Paper Feed Section P5V P24V
AOM20 (×3)
JND20 JND20 (AOM Drivers)
Motor/Fan/
Solenoid
PDC21 To Processor
(Load Driver)
CTL21
(Printer Control) CTP21 Circuit Board
RS422
Operator
Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
Panel
JNE20 JNE20 Densitometer Power

Switch From Processor
Back Printing DTM00 PAC21 Circuit Board
Magazine ID
A±12V
Scanner FMA20 D3.3V
(IEEE1394) D5V
FMC20
Image (Memory Controller/
LUT/DA) Power Supply Section A6V Analog System
Communication A±12V
Power Supply
FMB20 (DRAM) A24V
JNA21 Power System
P5V
A24V D9V D5V D–6V
P24V Supply
FMB20 (DRAM)
DTH21 (×4) D3.3V
Hole Sensors FMB20 (DRAM) D5V Digital system
GD1 GD2 D12V
Signal DC Power DC Supply
Interlock D9V
LEH21 (×4) Supply Supply
D–6V
Hole Sensor LEDs (Printer Doors/Paper Magazine)
AC200V
From Processor
PAC21 Circuit Board
AC200V
4.5.4
Power Switch
PAC21 Circuit Board

U2
AC100V Transformer AC200V
Backup (Ni-Cd) Q4
Battery
Timer
FMA20
Circuit Board
Timer Start-up
PC1
Q3
Scanner
Main CPU K1
(7709A)
Printer Processor Power ON Operation
Remote ON
CTL21 Circuit Board
K11
Printer JNA21 DC 5V AC200V
Circuit Board Power Supply
Processor
LP2500P
ON signal PC1 on FMA20 is

from scanner turned ON.
CTL21 timer ON Q4 on CTL21 U2 on PAC21 K1 on PAC21 K11 on PAC21

signal is turned ON. is turned ON. is turned ON. is turned ON.
Power switch is
turned ON.
Main CPU on 5V is 200V is supplied
Q3 on CTL21
CTL21 starts supplied from to 5V power
is turned ON.
up. JNA21. supply unit.
Printer Operation Processor Operation
Power ON trigger
4-31
4
4.5.4
4.5.5 Printer Interlock System
System Printer Left Door Printer Right Door Paper magazine
A OFF OFF ON
B OFF OFF OFF
4 Interlock System Loads

4.5.5
Interlock System Load Symbol
A Exposure section anti-dust pressure fan 1 (F620)

Exposure section anti-dust pressure fan 2 (F621)
Exposure section anti-dust pressure fan 3 (F622)
Loop 1 guide plate motor (M511)
Paper width guide 1 motor (M512)
Unit 1 feed motor (M513)
Paper feed unit paper width guide motor (M515)
Pre-exposure feed motor (M531)
Sub-scanning motor (M532)
Laser unit light-shield shutter motor (M533)
Roller nip release motor (M534)
Paper width guide 3 motor 1 (M541)
Reservoir paper width guide motor (M552)
Cutter 2 motor (M562)
Cut hole punch solenoid (S510)
Sort hole punch solenoid (S511)
Reverse clutch (S530)
Laser unit anti-dust shutter solenoid (S620)
B Paper magazine rewind motor (M500)

Paper feed motor (M510)
Paper magazine rewind clutch (S500)
NOTE: The cutter 1 motor (M550) is safely secured mechanically.
4-32
4.5.6 DC Power Supply Section Block Diagram
Printer Section DC Power Supply Section
AOM20 Circuit Board CTL21 Circuit Board

JNA21 Circuit Board 4
4.5.6
LDD20 Circuit Board FMC20 Circuit Board
PDC21 Circuit Board FMA20 Circuit Board
Interlock Switches
CTP21 Circuit Board
PAC21 Circuit Board
PWC01 Circuit Board
Processor Section
Signal System Power System
Power Supply Power Supply
Unit (GD1) Unit (GD2)
AC200V
AC200V
4-33
4.5.7 CTL21 Circuit Board
Test Pins
Test Pin Name System
TP1 D+5V Logic system +5V power supply
TP2 AP+24V 24V power supply for laser unit and CRBR
4
TP3 D+3.3V 3.3V power supply for SH7709A
4.5.7
TP4 D+1.8V 1.8V power supply for SH7709A
TP5 S+5V 5V power supply for backup
TP6 AP-GND AP+24V system GND
TP7 ~ 15 DGND Logic system common GND
LED Indicators
LED System
LED1 D+5V power supply
LED2 AS+5V
LED3 AS+5V-1
LED4 AS+5V-2
LED5 AP+24V
LED6 RESET
LED701 AS+9V
LED702 AS–5V
LED703 D533P
LED704 D-SA1P
LED705 D544P
LED706 D-550P
LED707 D562P
LED708 D-SB1P
DIP Switches
Condition
Switches Use
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
SW2 Software OFF OFF Not used OFF
SW3 Software OFF OFF OFF OFF
SW4 Software OFF OFF OFF Not used
4-34
Jumper Pins
Jumper Pin Use Condition
JP4 E10A switching Pins 1-2 shorted
JP5 GATE0 switching Pins 1-2 shorted
JP6 Buzzer switching Pins 1-2 shorted
JP7 Battery switching Pins 1-2 shorted 4

JP8 Mode switching Pins 1-2 shorted 4.5.7
JP9 Mode switching Pins 1-2 shorted
JP701 SH3 Pins 1-2 shorted
JP702 Circuit board control Pins 1-2 shorted, 3-4 shorted
JP703 Anti-chattering Pins 2-3 shorted

Circuit sampling
JP704 Pins 2-3 shorted
Frequency switching
JP705 Pins 1-2 shorted
Fuse Specifications
CAUTION: • Always turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and main power supply before replacing the fuse.
• Never use a fuse with a different rating from that specified. A wrong fuse could cause serious damage to the electrical system
or fire.
Fuse Manufacturer Type Rating Characteristic Power Supply LED
FUSE 1 Datio Communication LM20* 2.0A (DC48V) NON-DELAY AS+5V-1 LED3

Apparatus Co., Ltd.
FUSE 2 Datio Communication LM20* 2.0A (DC48V) NON-DELAY AS+5V-2 LED4

Apparatus Co., Ltd.
4-35
4
4.5.7
GD1554
4-36
4.5.8 PDC21 Circuit Board
Block Diagram
Loads
CTL21 Motor Driver Exposure Feed

Photo-coupler
I/F Motor Drive
PS9601L
Photo-coupler Driver
Paper Width Guide and Paper Feed 4
Motor Drive
PS2801-4 STK672 4.5.8
Hole Punch and Back Printer

Photo-coupler Protection Circuit Transistor
Solenoid Drive
PS2801-4 74_123 ON/OFF
Fan ON/OFF Drive

Photo-coupler Transistor
PS2801-4 ON/OFF
Back Printer Head Detection

Photo-coupler Buffer
PS2801-4 74_244
Fan Stop Detection

Photo-coupler Buffer
PS2801-4 74LS541
Interlock Detection
Photo-coupler
PS2801-4
Power Supply System Check Points Interlock System Circuit Protector
+5V Digital circuit D+5V: TP2, TP28

D-G: TP1, TP27
+5V Power circuit P+5V: TP4, TP13, TP16, TP17, TP24, TP25 CP1(3.15A)
P-G: TP3, TP6, TP8, TP10, TP12, TP14, TP15, TP18, TP19,
TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V0 Power circuit +24V0: TP20 CP2(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V1 Power circuit +24V1: TP22 A, B CP3(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V2a Power circuit +24V2-1: TP5 A CP4(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V2b Power circuit +24V2-2: TP7 A CP5(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V5a Power circuit +24V5-1: TP9 A CP6(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
+24V5b Power circuit +24V5-2: TP11 A CP7(3.15A)

TP21, TP23, TP26
4-37
Indication LED
Condition
LED System
Lighted Unlighted
D11 Power +5V ON OFF
D12 Power +24V (Without interlock) ON OFF

4 D13 Power +24V (A-interlock system) ON OFF
4.5.8 D14 Power +24V (B-interlock system) ON OFF
Jumper Pin
Jumper Pin System Condition
JP2 Power +5V and +24V Pins 1-2 shorted: LED “Light” setting
Circuit Protector
Circuit Protector Power Supply Protected Circuit
F1 +24V M551 and M561 motors
F2 +24V S620 of laser unit
F3 +24V M563, M565, M570 and M571 motors
F4 +24V S570 and S571 solenoid valves, M572 motor, F620 to F622 fans
F5 +24V F585 to F590 fans, and first line back printer head
F6 +24V M545, M550, and M560 motors
F7 +24V M540 to M542 motors
F9 +24V M501 and M521 motors
F10 +24V F591 to F593 fans, and second line back printer head
NOTE: If the circuit protector detects an excessive current level, it opens up and the white button pops out. Turn the power supply OFF,
determine and correct the problem, then push in the button to reset the circuit protector.
Posister
If the Posister detects excessive current in the M500 and M520 DC motor drivers, the internal resistance increases to cut the current flow.
When the current level returns to normal, the posister recovers automatically.
4-38
4
4.5.8
GD1506
4-39
4.5.9 JNA21 Circuit Board
Power Supply System Check Points Circuit Protector
+5V Digital circuit D+5V: TP11

5DG: TP12
4 +5Va Digital circuit D+5Va: TP2 CP3(5A)

5DG: TP12
4.5.9
+5Vb Digital circuit D+5Vb: TP3 CP4(5A)
5DG: TP12
+5Vc Digital circuit D+5Vc: TP5 CP5(3.15A)

5DG: TP12
+5V Digital circuit D+5Vd: TP1 CP12(5A)

5DG: TP12
–5V Digital circuit D–5V: TP8

5DG: TP12
+3.3V Digital circuit D+3.3V: TP4, TP14 CP6(5A)

3.3DG: TP13
+9V Digital circuit D+9V: TP10 CP1(2A)

9DG: TP9
+12V Digital circuit D+12V: TP18 CP7(2A)

12DG: TP60
+6V Analog circuit A+6V: TP22

6AG: TP16
+12V Analog circuit A+12V: TP17 CP10(4A)

12AG: TP21
+12Va Analog circuit A+12Va: TP15 CP11(2A)

12AG: TP21
–12V Analog circuit A–12V: TP20 CP9(3.15A)

12AG: TP21
+24V Analog circuit A+24V: TP19 CP8(3.15A)

24AG: TP7
+5V Power circuit P+5V: TP38 CP19(3.15A)

5PG: TP39
+24V0 Power circuit +24V0: TP36 CP17(4A)

24-0PG: TP37
+24V0-IL Power circuit ILSW: TP29 CP16(2A)

24-0PG: TP37
+24V1a Power circuit +24V1a: TP30 CP18(3.15A)

24-1PG: TP31
+24V2 Power circuit +24V2: TP34

24-2PG: TP35
+24V2a Power circuit +24V2a: TP28 CP15(4A)

24-2PG: TP25
+24V2b Power circuit +24V2b: TP27 CP14(4A)

24-2PG: TP25
4-40
+24V3 Power circuit +24V3: TP40 CP21(a:4A)

24-3PG: TP41 CP22(b:4A)
+24V3c Power circuit +24V3c: TP44 CP20(4A)

24-3PG: TP45
+24V4 Power circuit +24V4: TP42 CP23(a:4A)

24-4PG: TP43 CP24(b:4A)
4
CP25(c:4A) 4.5.9
+24V5 Power circuit +24V5: TP32

24-5PG: TP33
+24V5a Power circuit +24V5a: TP26 CP13(3.15A)

24-5PG: TP23
+24V5b Power circuit +24V5b: TP26 CP12(3.15A)

24-5PG: TP23
LED Indicator
Condition
LED System
Lighted Unlighted
LED1 Digital +5V ON OFF
GD1509
4-41
4.5.10 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board)
Power Supply System Check Points Circuit Protector Protected Circuit
D+5V: TP9
+5V Digital circuit DGND: TP11, TP12, -
TP17 or TP18
D3.3V: TP10
4 +3.3V Digital circuit DGND: TP11, TP12, -
4.5.10 TP17 or TP18
A3.3V: TP13
+3.3V Analog circuit -
AGND: TP14
A+12V: TP15
+12V Analog circuit CP1 1394PHY chip power supply
AGND: TP14
LED Indicators
LED System Condition
LED1 For asynchronous communication flag Lights during CPU communication.
LED2 For isochronous communication flag Lights during image transfer.
LED3 For 12V power supply flag Lights during +12V power supply.
EZ1727
4-42
4.5.11 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board)
Power Supply System Check Points
+3.3V: TP1
+3.3V Digital circuit
GND: TP2, TP3, TP5, TP26 or TP27
4
4.5.11
EZ1728
4-43
4.5.12 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board)
+3.3V: TP28
+3.3V Digital circuit
GND: TP3, TP4, TP6, TP8 or TP10
4 +5V: TP2 CP1 (DTA circuit board power supply
+5V Digital circuit
4.5.12 GND: TP3, TP4, TP6, TP8 or TP10 line)
A-12V: TP33
–12V Analog circuit
AGND: TP34
A+12V: TP37
+12V Analog circuit
AGND: TP34
LED Indicators
LED System Condition
LED1 5V energizing flag Lights during 5V energizing
LED2 /SOS signal receiving flag Lights during signal reception
LED3 Frame memory (FM) input operation flag Lights during memory input operation
LED4 FM output operation flag Lights during memory output operation
EZ1729
4-44
4.5.13 LDD20 Circuit board
Test Pins
Test Pin Name Function Voltage Range Range (conversion) Remarks
TP1 AGND Analog system ground - -
TP2 RLDC R-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V

4
TP3 RPDC R-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
4.5.13
TP4 RLDL R-ch limit current 0.0V to 1.28V 100mA/V
TP102 GLDC G-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP103 GPDC G-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP104 GLDL G-ch limit current 0.0V to 6.144V 100mA/V
TP202 BLDC B-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP203 BPDC B-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP204 BLDL B-ch limit current 0.0V to 6.144V 100mA/V
TP302 RT R-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP303 RTDIF R-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP304 RTEO R-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±10V (Max.) -
TP402 GT G-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP403 GTDIF G-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP404 GTEO G-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) -
TP405 GPC G-ch Peltier current Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) 1A/V Voltage on the basis of GPREF
TP406 GPREF G-ch Peltier drive circuit reference voltage 1/2 × (A + 6V) -
TP502 BT B-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP503 BTDIF B-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP504 BTEO B-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) -
TP505 BPC B-ch Peltier current Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) 1A/V Voltage on the basis of BPREF
TP506 BPREF B-ch Peltier drive circuit reference voltage 1/2 × (A + 6V) -
TP602 RPDC R-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP603 GPDC G-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP604 BPDC B-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP605 RLDC R-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP606 GLDC G-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP607 BLDC B-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP608 THA1 Exposure section temperature sensor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
4-45
Test Pin Name Function Voltage Range Range (conversion) Remarks
TP609 THA2 Feed section temperature sensor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP610 RT R-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP611 GT G-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP612 BT B-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C

4 TP613 GTDA G-ch temperature setting A/D output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
4.5.13 TP614 BTDA B-ch temperature setting A/D output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP615 RLDA R-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP616 GLDA G-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP617 BLDA B-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP618 ADIN A/D input voltage - -
TP619 AD+5V +5V power supply for A/D - -
TP701 DGND Digital system ground - -
TP702 D+5V +5V for digital system - -
TP802 A+12V +12V for analog system - -
TP803 A–12V –12V for analog system - -
TP804 L+12V +12V for laser system (B-interlock system) - -
TP805 A+6V +6V for Peltier - -
TP806 L+8V +8V for laser system (internally generated - -

from +12V for laser system)
TP807 PR+5V +5V for protection circuit - -
Circuit Protector
Code Name Function Connected to Connector
CP801 P+6VG G-ch Peltier protection G-ch Peltier element for temperature control LDD8
CP802 P+6VB B-ch Peltier protection B-ch Peltier element for temperature control LDD11
CP803 A+12VTHA Analog +12V system protection Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD7, LDD10, LDD12
G/B-ch laser light sources
CP804 A–12VTHA Analog –12V system protection Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD5, LDD7, LDD10,
G/B-ch laser light sources LDD12
CP805 A+5VTHA Analog +5V system protection Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD4, LDD5, LDD6,
R/G/B-ch laser light sources LDD9, LDD12
4-46
4
4.5.13
EZ1730
4-47
4.6 Processor Section (LP2500P)
4.6.1 Processor Section Drive System
Squeegee Rack Drive Gear

Squeegee Rack
Rack Drive Sprockets

4
4.6.1
Dryer Section Drive

Chain
Drive Bracket
Processor Drive
Motor (M710)
Unit 5 Drive Gear
Processing Rack
Drive Chain
Rack Drive Shafts
P2
Processing Racks P1-1 P1-2 P2-1 P2-2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
GD1495
4-48
4.6 Processor Section (LP2500P)
4.6.2 Variable Paper Width Guide Drive System
Processor Paper Width Guide Motor (M711)
4
Adjustment Knobs
Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shaft 4.6.2
Threaded Shafts
Paper Width Guide

Drive Shafts
Paper Width Guide Processing Racks

Drive Unit
PS4 PS3 PS2 PS1 P2-2 P2-1 P1-2 P1-1
GD1496
4-49
4.7 Processing Solution Circulation and Replenishment System
4.7.1 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System
Solution Level Sensors (FS720 to FS727)
4 Circulation Filters
PS4 Solution Temperature Sensors

4.7.1 (TS720 to TS725)
PS3
PS2
PS1
P2
P1
PS4
PS3
PS2
To W2 Waste Solution Tank PS1
H726
(PS3/ P2-2
PS4) P2-1
H725 P1-2
(PS2)
P1-1
H724
H727
(PS3/ (PS1) H723
PS4) (P2-2) H722
(P2-1) H721
(P1-2)
H720
H728 (P1-1)
(PS4) Solution Drain
To W1 Waste Valves
Solution Tank
PU725 Solution Heaters

(PS2)
PU724
(PS1)
PU723
(P2-2) Circulation Pumps
PU722
(P2-1)
PU721
(P1-2)
PU727 PU720
(PS4) PU726 (P1-1)
(PS3)
GD648
4-50
4.7.2 Piping Diagram for Replenishment and Cartridge Auto-washing System
Replenisher Cartridge
PS-R Tank
4
Washing Valves/P1-R 4.7.2
Replenisher Stirring Valve
(S800 to S803)
P2-RA Tank P2-RB Tank
P2-RA PS-R Air

Level Sensors Bleeding Valve
(FS801/FS805)
P2-RB
Level Sensors
(FS802/FS806) P1-R Tank
Drain Valves
PS-R
P2-RB
P1-R
P2-RA P2-RB
P1-R
P2-RB PS-R P2-RA
P2-RA PS-R P1-R
P1-R Level Sensors (FS800/FS804)
PS-R Level Sensors (FS803/FS807) Filter for Auto-Washing
Auto-washing Pump (PU800)
GD649q
4-51
P2-RB P2-RA
PS-R
4 P1-R
PS4
PS3
4.7.2 PS2
PS1
P2
P1
Replenisher
Filters
P2-RB
P2-RA
P1-R
Replenisher
Nozzles
PU745
(PS-R) PU744
(P2W) PU743 Replenisher Pumps
(P2-RB) PU742
(P2-RA) PU741
(P1W) PU740
(P1-R)
GD649w
4-52
4.7.3 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism
Replenisher Box Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D803)
Replenisher Box Door Lock Lever

Cartridge Opening Motor (M800)
4
Cartridge Setting Sensor 4.7.3
(D800)
Cartridge Box
Upper Sensor (D801)
Cartridge Box
Lower Sensor (D802)
P1-R
P2-RA
P2-RB
Cartridge Washing Water Hoses
Opening Nozzles
GD1584
4-53
4.8 Dryer Section
4.8.1 Dryer Section Configuration
Dryer Inlet Guide
4
4.8.1
Dryer Duct
Dryer Rack
Dryer Heater (H760)
Dryer Fan (F760)
GD1497
4-54
4.9 Cutter and Sorter
4.9.1 Cutter and Sorter Configuration
Cutter Section
Horizontal Sorter 4
Large Size Tray
4.9.1
Slant Sorter
GD1585
4-55
4.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Section
4.10.1 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration
Processor Power
Noise Filters (NF1 to NF3) Supply Section Cooling
Circuit Protectors (CP1 to CP20)
Fan 3/4 (F793/F794)
4 PAD21 Circuit Board
4.10.1
Leakage Breakers
(NFB2 to NFB4)
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Relay (K3)
Relay (K2)
Built-in Circuit Breaker

Relay (K1)
(NFB1)
Power Input Terminal

Block (TB1)
Step-down Transformer Terminal Block (TB3)
Replenisher Tank Connection Step-down Transformer Input

Power Exchange Terminal Block
GD646
4-56
4.10.2 Processor Control Section Configuration
Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fans 1 and 2

(F791 and F792)
4
4.10.2
CTP21 Circuit Board
PAC21 Circuit Board
GD647
4-57
4.10.3 Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions
Parts Symbol Rating Circuit
Built-in Circuit Breaker NFB1 20A/Sensitivity 15mA
Leakage Breakers NFB2
NFB3
4 NFB4
4.10.3 Noise Filters NF1
4.10.4
NF2
NF3
Relays K1 DC24V Dryer heater (H760-1)
K2 DC24V Dryer heater (H760-2)
K3 DC24V Dryer heaters (H760-3/H760-4)
Circuit Protectors CP1 10A 5V DC power supply unit (L)
CP2 10A 5V DC power supply unit (N)
CP3 10A 24V DC power supply unit (L)
CP4 10A 24V DC power supply unit (N)
CP5 15A P1-1, PS2, PS3, and PS4 solution heaters (L)
CP6 15A P1-1, PS2, PS3 and PS4 solution heaters (N)
CP7 10A P1-2 and P2-1 solution heaters (L)
CP8 10A P1-2 and P2-1 solution heaters (N)
CP9 10A P2-2 and PS1 solution heaters (L)
CP10 10A P2-2 and PS1 solution heaters (N)
CP11 10A Step-down transformer (L)
CP12 10A Step-down transformer (N)
CP13 A Replenisher pumps (PU740 to PU745)
CP14 10A Dryer heater (H760-1)(L)
CP15 10A Dryer heater (H760-1)(N)
CP17 10A Dryer heater (H760-2)(N)
CP20 15A Dryer heaters (H760-3/H760-4)(N)
4.10.4 Circuit Board Main Functions
Circuit Board Functions
CTP21 Processor main control circuit board, DC load (motors, solenoids and fans) drive circuit board
PAC21 Processor AC load (heaters and motors), DC load (processor drive motor) drive circuit board
PAD21 Dryer heater drive circuit board
PWC01 Cutter and sorter drive control circuit board
BZR21 Sorter buzzer circuit board
4-58
4.10.5 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
Processor
P5V PAC21 Circuit Board Drive Motor Processor
Interlock
(Primary circuit and
(Processor cover and P24V Driver Drive Motor
squeegee rack cover)
load driver)
4
Paper Width Guide Motors
Temperature Sensors 200V
Circulation Pumps (100V) 4.10.5
Solution Level Sensors
Replenisher Pumps (100V)
Position Sensors
Dryer Fan
RC50 Unit Ambient Solution Heaters
Temperature and
(Optional) Humidity Sensor
PAD21 Circuit Dryer Heater

Board
CTP21 Circuit Board (AC load driver)
(Processor control) BZR21Circuit Board
(Buzzer circuit Sorter Full Sensor
board)
Large-size Tray Set Sensor

Large-size Tray Waiting Sensor
PWC01 Cutter Feed Motor

D5V P5V D24V Circuit Board Cutter Motor
(Load driver) Paper Width Guide Motor
Horizontal Sorter Drive Motor
RS-422 200V Slant Sorter Drive Motor
CTL21
Circuit Board Cut Punch Hole Sensor
200V 100V Sort Punch Hole Sensor
Loop Guide Open Sensor
Loop Guide Close Sensor
Step-down
Transformer
D5V P5V D24V
Cutter and Sorter Section

Built-in Circuit Breaker
Leakage Breakers
AC200V/210V/220V/230V/240V
50/60 Hz
Single Phase/3 Phase 3-wire/3 Phase 4-wire
Interlock
(Replenisher door sensing)
Replenisher Level
Sensors
Position Sensors
Auto-washing Valves
Auto-washing Pump
Opening Motor
Printer DC power
Supply Unit
Replenisher Tank Section
Power Switch
100V
4-59
4.10.6 Relay, SSR and Circuit Protector Map
Power Supply
P1-R Replenisher Pump

Terminal Block (TB1) P2-RA Replenisher Pump
P2-RB Replenisher Pump
PSR Replenisher Pump
4 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) P1W Replenisher Pump
P2W Replenisher Pump
4.10.6 Terminal Block (TB2) RC50 Circulation Pump
RC50 Radiator Fan
Leakage Breakers
(NFB2 to NFB4) PAC21 Dryer Fan
Noise Filters Circuit Board

(NF1 to NF3)
Circulation Pump
Input Voltage Change
Terminal Block DC 5V Power Supply
DC 24V Power Supply
P1-1 Solution Heater

PS3 Solution Heater
PS2 Solution Heater
PS4 Solution Heater

Step-down
Transformer P2-1 Solution Heater

PS1 Solution Heater
Solution Heater
Safety Thermostats
Cooling Fans
Variable Paper Width Guide Motor
Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat
Processor Drive Motor

Processor Cover Sensor
Squeegee Rack Cover Sensor

Cartridge Opening Motor
Replenisher Door Detecting
Interlock Switch
Auto Washing Pump
Dryer Heater (H760-1)
PAD21
Circuit Board
4-60
4.10.7 Processor Interlock System
The power supply for the processor drive motor and dryer heater are turned OFF when the processor cover and/or squeegee rack cover is
removed.
Connector PAC15
Processor Cover Sensor (D700)
PAC15
4
P24V C24V
Squeegee Rack Cover Sensor (D701) 4.10.7
4.10.8
Connector PAC10
Dryer Heater Control Relay
PAC10
P24V Processor Drive Motor
(M710)
K10 K9
4.10.8 Replenisher Tank Section Interlock System
The power supply for the replenisher cartridge opening motor is turned OFF when the replenisher door is opened by means of the
replenisher door detecting interlock switch.
N24V DC Motor Driver
Opening Motor (M800)
Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D803)
K4
4-61
4.10.9 CTP21 Circuit Board
Block Diagram
X’TAL
14.7456MHz
4
CTL21
4.10.9 RS422 Exchange
(Printer Control Circuit Board)
H8S/2355
Serial Communication (TTL level)
Buffer For Debugging
Photo-coupler
D0–D7 DC Motor
Driver Driver
A0–A19 PLD
RD•WR•AS Address
Photo-coupler
Decode
Driver Driver Washing Valve
Auto-washing Pump
A0–A16 SRAM
(For program)
RD•WR PIO
(TX180)
Output Processor Drive Motor
D0–D7 Replenisher Cartridge
Opening Motor
Battery Backup Driver
Solution Heaters
(Lithium Secondary Dryer Heater
Battery) A0–A3
Solution Heater Cooling Fans
D3–D5
Buffer A/D Input Circuit Solution Temperature Sensors
(Latch) Integration
Type
Solution Temperature Sensors
Multiplexer
Timer Input (Pulse Counting) Dryer Temperature Sensor

Input Circuit
D0–D2 Ambient Temperature/
Humidity Sensor
D0–D7
Buffer
Solution Level Sensors
(Latch) Input Circuit
Replenisher Level Sensors
Sorter Sensors
D0–D7
Buffer
Section Sensors
Input Circuit
Paper Sensors
Cover Sensors
Safety Thermostats
Buffer RC50 Unit (Optional)
Cutter Section Motors

Driver Sorter Drive Motors
Buffer Cutter Section Sensors
4-62
+5V Digital circuit (D)+5V: TP8

(D)GND: TP1, TP2, TP9
+5V Analog circuit (A)+5V: TP10

(A)GND: TP11
4
+5V Power circuit (P)+5V: TP6
(P)GND: TP4, TP7 4.10.9
+24V Power circuit (P)+24: TP3

(P)GND: TP4, TP7
Circuit Protectors
Symbol Rating Circuit
CP1 2A Digital +5V (SSR for heaters)
CP2 2A digital +5V (Paper width guide sensors and replenisher tank section sensors)
CP3 2A Analog +5V (PAC21 circuit board)
CP4 3.15A Power +24V (Replenisher tank section)
CP5 4A Power +24V (Cooling fans)
CP6 3.15A Power +24V (Replenisher cartridge washing valves)
CP7 2A Analog +5V (Ambient temperature/humidity sensor)
Jumper Pins
Symbol Set Position Functions
JP1 LED ON LED (D1 to D8) ON

LED OFF LED (D1 to D8) OFF
JP2 OPEN Lithium battery OFF

BACKUP Lithium battery ON
LED Indicators
Condition
Symbol System
Lighted Unlighted
D1 PWR +5V power supply ON OFF
D2 RE Solution level All solutions are present No solution
CPU program Active Not active
D3 H760 Dryer heater ON OFF
D4 P2-2 P2-2 heater ON OFF
D5 M710 Processor drive motor ON OFF
4-63
4
4.10.9
GD1505
4-64
4.10.10 PAC21 Circuit Board
Block Diagram
PAC21 Circuit Board AC200V

5V and 24V ON Signal
CTL21 Circuit Board 5V and 24V DC Power
AC200V
(Printer Section)
5V
Supply Units
4
AC200V 4.10.10
CTP21 Circuit Board Solution Heaters (8)
Control Signal
5V and 24V Power Supply AC100V
JNA21 Circuit Board
Circulation Pumps (8)
(Printer Section)
AC100V AC100V
Step-down Transformer Replenisher Pumps (6)
AC100V AC100V
Power Switch RC50 (Optional) Pump
(Printer Section) and Fans (2)
AC200V AC100V
Power Supply Section Dryer Fan
DC24V DC24V
Dryer heater Safety Processor Drive Motor
Thermostat
DC24V DC24V
Solution Heater Safety Paper Width Guide Motor
Thermostats
Interlock Switches DC24V DC24V Replenisher Cartridge

(Processor Cover and Opening Motor
Squeegee Rack Cover) Auto-washing Pump
DC24V Control Signal

Interlock Switch PWC01 Circuit Board
(Replenisher Door) (Cutter Section)
Relay ON Signal
External Relays
+5V Digital circuit D.5V: TP6

D.GND: TP7
+5V Power circuit P.5V: TP3

P.GND: TP2
P.24V(1) Power circuit P.24V(1): TP1

P.GND: TP2

P.GND: TP2

P.GND: TP2
4-65
Circuit Protector
Circuit Protector Power Supply Protected Circuit
CP1 AC100V AC100V in(PAC1)
CP2 +24V Processor fans (F720, F722, F724, F726, F727, F760 and F790)
CP3 +24V Safety thermostats (D720 to D728 and D760)

4 CP4 +24V Processor paper width guide motor (M711)
4.10.10 CP5 +24V Auto washing pump (PU800)
CP6 +24V Cartridge opening motor (M800)
CP7 AC100V Circulation pumps (PU720 to PU727)
CP8 +24V Processor drive motor (M710)
CP9 AC100V Replenisher pumps (PU740 to PU745), and RC50 pump and fan
CP10 AC100V Dryer fan (F760)
CP11 AC200V PS4 processing solution heater (H728)
CP14 AC200V PS3 processing solution heater (H726 and H727)
CP15 AC200V P1-1 processing solution heater (H720)
4-66
4
4.10.10
GD1510
4-67
4.10.11 PAD21 Circuit Board
Block Diagram
(1) System Block Diagram
4 5V PAD21 Circuit Board

AC200V
CTP21 Circuit Board Dryer Heaters (12)
4.10.11
Control Signal
AC200V
(2) Power Supply System Diagram
Connector PAD1
4A
AC200V CP1 H1-1 Heater
4A
CP2 H1-2 Heater
4A
CP3 H1-3 Heater
4A
CP4 H2-1 Heater
4A
CP5 H2-2 Heater
4A
CP6 H2-3 Heater
Connector PAD5
4A
AC200V CP7 H3-1 Heater
4A
CP8 H3-2 Heater
4A
CP9 H3-3 Heater
4A
CP10 H4-1 Heater
4A
CP11 H4-2 Heater
4A
CP12 H4-3 Heater
4-68
4
4.10.11
GD-1508
4-69
4.10.12 PWC01Circuit Board
+5V Digital circuit D5V: TP3

DGND: TP4
4 +5V Digital circuit SE5V: TP7

SEGND: TP8
4.10.12
+5V Power circuit P5V: TP9
PGND: TP10
+24V Power circuit P24V: TP11

PGND: TP10
Punch Hole Detecting Adjustment VR
Symbol Adjustment Check Points
VR1 Sort punch hole adjustment D53S: TP1

DGND: TP4
VR2 Cut punch hole adjustment D53W: TP2

DGND: TP4
A995
4-70
4.11 135ANL (Optional)
4.11.1 135ANL Configuration
Negative Holder Cover

Circuit Board Section Cover
Negative Holder Unit
Stainless Guide Plate
4
4.11.1
Upper Guide Section
Tray
Switch Guide Unit

Indicator LED (L371)
Negative Storage Box
Negative Catcher Unit
Lower Guide Section
Negative Feed Unit
GD166
NOTE: Automatic Negative Loading System NF2500AG is called the “135ANL”.
4-71
4.11.2 CTF21 Circuit Board (135ANL Control Circuit Board)
Block Diagram
CTF1
Power supply
CP +5V (Photo-interrupters and micro-switches)
CTF17
CP Digital +5V (All digital circuits) For fans
4 CP Analog +12V (Photo-transistor and flood LED drive)
CP Power +24V (Pulse motor, DC motor and solenoid drive)
4.11.2
CP Power +24V interlock control (* marked pulse and DC motor drive)
CTF7 CTF5
For debugging CTB21 I/F
CTF9 CTB21 I/F CTF6 CTF18 (Status communication)
External reset input (Data communication) CTF8 CTB21 I/F For debugging Serial 16 bits for each IN/OUT
(Debugging optional) Debugging For debugging (Data communication) RS422 Parallel 3 bits for each IN/OUT
CTF14
Pulse Motors (3)
RS232C RS232C RS422 RS422 RS422 DRV Negative Feed Motor
Catcher Negative Feed Motor
RESET SW
CTF15
JP2 JP3
DC Motors (3)
Negative Holder Motor
Negative Press Motor
CTF15
RESET Solenoid (3)
CPU EEPROM
Solenoid Valve
XTAL
SH2
4
LED CTF11,CTF12
Photo-interrupters (16)
4 Loop Sensor
DIP SW Negative Holder Open Sensor
Negative Holder Close Sensor
2 Negative Sensor
Circuit Board ID Nip Release Home Position Sensor
Negative Press Home Position Sensor
Negative Overlap Sensor
Negative Full Sensor
Flash ROM 16
512 bytes FPGA

Series/Parallel Conversion CTF10
PM Excitation Pattern Formation Micro-switches (8)
Drive Control, etc. Upper Guide Sensor
SRAM Negative Holder Cover Sensor
32
512 bytes
16
CTF13
ALTERA Configuration Photo-transistors (4)
D/A Negative Standby Sensor
CTF16 Negative Leading End Sensor
Negative Trailing End Sensor
EPROM 16
512 bytes
CTF4
Two-color LED (1)
CTF3
7-segment LED (2)
(Debugging optional)
CTF2
Expansion Bus
4-72
Power Supply System Check Points Circuit Protector LED
+5V Digital circuit TP113 (VCC) to TP116 (GND) NFB1 (2A) LED9 (Red)
+5V Analog circuit TP114 (+5V) to TP12 (AGND) NFB2 (1A) LED10 (Red)
(Photo-interrupter and micro-switch sensors)
+12V Analog circuit (Photo-transistor sensors) TP115 (A12V) to TP121 (AGND) NFB3 (1A) LED11 (Green) 4
+24V Power circuit (Fan connector) Pin 1 to 2 on CTF17 connector NFB4 (1A) —
4.11.2
+24V1 Power circuit (M371 and M373) TP124 (P24V1) to TP122 (PGND) NFB5 (2A) LED12 (Yellow)
+24V2 Power circuit (Spare) TP125 (P24V2) to TP122 (PGND) NFB6 (2A) LED13 (Yellow)
+24V3 Power circuit (M374 and S371) TP126 (P24V3) to TP122 (PGND) NFB7 (2A) LED14 (Yellow)
+24VIL Power circuit (Interlock and negative holder motor) TP127 (P24VIL) to TP122 (PGND) NFB8 (2A) LED15 (Yellow)
LED1 to LED4: For debug
GD1504
4-73
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES
5.1 Scanner ............................................................................................................. 5-3

5.1.1 Basic Operation Flow ..................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Auto Film Carrier ............................................................................................ 5-4

5.2.1 NC240AG Initialization ................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 NC240AG Cartridge Processing .................................................................... 5-7
5
5.2.3 NC240AG Strip Film Processing ................................................................... 5-15
5.2.4 NC135AG Initialization ................................................................................... 5-21
5.2.5 NC135AG Scanning Operation ...................................................................... 5-23
5.2.6 Monitoring Start Timing .................................................................................. 5-29
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG) .................................................................................... 5-30

5.3.1 Normal processing ......................................................................................... 5-30
5.3.2 Interrupt processing ....................................................................................... 5-35
5.4 Paper Feed ...................................................................................................... 5-36

5.4.1 Paper Leading End Feed ............................................................................... 5-36
5.4.2 Paper Feed .................................................................................................... 5-45
5.4.3 Initialization .................................................................................................... 5-49
5.4.4 Shut-down Process ........................................................................................ 5-51
5.4.5 Paper End/Splice ........................................................................................... 5-52
5.4.6 All Process ..................................................................................................... 5-54
5.4.7 Rewind process ............................................................................................. 5-56
5.4.8 Cutter Operation ............................................................................................ 5-65
5.4.9 Single Operation ............................................................................................ 5-68
5.5 Exposure Section ........................................................................................... 5-86

5.5.1 Start-up Initialization ...................................................................................... 5-86
5.5.2 End Process .................................................................................................. 5-87
5.5.3 Feed Start ...................................................................................................... 5-88
5.5.4 Feed Completion ........................................................................................... 5-89
5.5.5 Exposure Start ............................................................................................... 5-89
5.5.6 Exposure Completion .................................................................................... 5-89
5.6 Processor ......................................................................................................... 5-90

5.6.1 Processing Tank Section Temperature Control .............................................. 5-90
5.6.2 Heat-up Operation ......................................................................................... 5-91
5.6.3 Normal Temperature Control ......................................................................... 5-92
5.6.4 Pre-heat Operation ........................................................................................ 5-92
5.6.5 Cool-down Operation ..................................................................................... 5-93
5.6.6 Heater Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 5-93
5.6.7 Monitoring Processing Solution Level ............................................................ 5-94
5.6.8 Normal Operation Drive Control .................................................................... 5-94
5.6.9 Processing Rack/Dryer Rack Paper Width Guide Control ............................. 5-95
5.6.10 Replenishment Start-up Processing .............................................................. 5-96
5-1
5.6.11 Replenisher End Processing ......................................................................... 5-97

5.6.12 Replenisher Level Adjustment ....................................................................... 5-97
5.6.13 Replenisher Amount Calculation .................................................................... 5-98
5.6.14 Replenishment Pump Control ........................................................................ 5-98
5.6.15 P1-R Replenishment Control ......................................................................... 5-99
5.6.16 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control ........................................................... 5-100
5
5.6.17 Evaporation Replenishment Control .............................................................. 5-101
5.6.18 Auto Opening Control .................................................................................... 5-106
5.6.19 Cleaning/Dilution ............................................................................................ 5-107
5.6.20 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control ................................................ 5-108
5.6.21 Power Supply Restoration ............................................................................. 5-110
5.6.22 Error Recovery Control .................................................................................. 5-111
5.6.23 Pump Output Measurement ........................................................................... 5-112
5.6.24 Waste Solution Process ................................................................................. 5-112
5.6.25 Dryer Section Temperature Control ............................................................... 5-113
5.6.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control ....................................................................... 5-114
5.6.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment ......................................................... 5-114
5.6.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control ...................................................................... 5-115
5.6.29 Dryer Section Cool-down Control .................................................................. 5-115
5.6.30 Cutter Operation Sequence Outline ............................................................... 5-116
5.6.31 Paper Leading End Insertion ......................................................................... 5-117
5.6.32 Paper Cutting ................................................................................................. 5-119
5.6.33 Paper Trailing End Output ............................................................................. 5-120
5.6.34 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Operation ................................................ 5-122
5.6.35 Cutter Section Loop Guide Operation ............................................................ 5-122
5.6.36 Cutter Section Exit Guide Operation .............................................................. 5-123
5.6.37 Sorter Operation Sequence ........................................................................... 5-124
5.6.38 Sorter Operation ............................................................................................ 5-124
5.7 Densitometer ................................................................................................... 5-125
5-2
Command
SCSI RS422 Serial 1394
Operating Section (PC) Image Processor Scanner Printer
5.1.1
Image Data
RS422 Parallel Film Set
Feed to Specified Position
Pre-scan Parameter Data
START Start Request Pre-scan Parameter Data
Start Request
Image Processing Mode Set Pre-scan
Pre-scan Data Pre-scan Data

Basic Operation Flow
• Frame Position Detection

• Fine Scan Parameter Setting
(1) Fine Scan Speed
(2) Density Aperture
(3) Electrical Shutter
Auto Setup Operation

Frame Position Data
Image Display (24 - 19) Fine Scan Parameter Data Feed to Specified Position
Pre-scan Data (for correction)
Monitoring Frame Position Data
Setup Parameter Data
Fine Scan Start (24 - 19)
Auto Setup Operation Image Processing Mode Set
Image Display (18 - 13) Image Processing Fine Scan Data (24 - 19)
Parameter Set
Monitoring
Fine Scan Start (18 - 13) Print Data (24- 19)
Image Display (12 - 7) Image Processing

Fine Scan Data (18 - 13)
Parameter Set
Monitoring
Image Display (6 - 1) Print Data (18- 13)
Monitoring
Image Processing Fine Scan Data (12 - 7)

Parameter Set
Print Data (12- 7)
Image Processing Fine Scan Data (6 - 1)

Parameter Set
Print Data (6- 1)
5-3
5.1 Scanner
5
5.1.1
5.2 Auto Film Carrier
5.2.1 NC240AG Initialization
Turn ON Power Switch

(SP-2500)
Is carrier installed? No
(Check on SP-2500)
Yes
5
5.2.1 No
NC240AG? To NC135AG or manual
operation sequence
Yes
L440: lights red, then green.

D441: Door Open/Close Sensor
D442: VEI Sensor
D444: Feed Stop Sensor
D446: Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor
Ver.ID is transferred to SP-2500. D447: MTP Sensor 1 LED
D448: TAP Sensor LED
D453: MTP Sensor 2
D454: MTP Sensor 1
D455: TAP Sensor
Mechanical data is loaded. D456: Cartridge Sensor
L440: Display LED
M441: Door Open/Close Motor
M442: Spool Motor
Optical sensors are initialized.

(D441,D447,D448,D453,D454,D455)
Is pressure cover closed? No

L440: LED blinks red.
D446
Yes
Is cartridge “open” detected? No

D456
Yes
Is a strip film inserted? No

D444
Yes
Is there a film? Yes

D455
No
To next page
5-4
From previous page
VEI 4 position
Is VEI “close” detected? No

D442
Yes Spool motor M442 rotates
CCW 2964 pps
Spool motor M442 rotates
CW 2000 pps Timer 1: ON 1s 5
5.2.1
Timer 2 ON for prescribed time.
Is VEI “open” detected? No

D442
Yes No No
Is timer 1’s time up? Is timer 2’s time up?
Spool motor M442 is turned Yes Yes

OFF just after it stops.
L440 LED blinks red. L440 LED blinks red.
Door close position
Is door “close” detected? No

D441
Yes Door motor M441 rotates
CW 500 pps for 40 pulses.
Door motor M441 rotates
CCW 500 pps Timer 3: ON 1s
Is door “open” detected? No Yes

Is door “close” detected?
D441
Yes No No
Is timer 3’s time up?
Door motor M441 rotates Yes L440 LED blinks red.

CCW 500 pps 21-pulse drive
L440 LED blinks red.
Door motor M441 is turned

Waits prescribed time.
L440 LED is turned OFF.
To next page
5-5
From previous page

Feed-in

D446
Yes
5 L440 LED is turned OFF.
5.2.1
Is a strip film inserted? Yes

D453
No Is it checked 3 times with No
prescribed time interval? D453
No Is a cartridge detected? Yes
D456
Yes No
Is holder detected?
D444
No Is it checked 3 times with Yes Is pressure cover closed? No
prescribed time interval? D444
D446
Yes
L440 LED blinks red. Yes

D446 L440 LED blinks green.
Yes
L440 LED blinks green.

Waits prescribed time. To strip processing

To cartridge processing
5-6
5.2.2 NC240AG Cartridge Processing
Cartridge processing
To loading end
detection D441: Door Open/Close Sensor
D442: VEI Sensor
Is a cartridge detected? No D443: Chucking Sensor
D456 D445: IPI Sensor
D449: C-side Read Magnetic Head
Yes D450:
D451:
P-side Read Magnetic Head
C-side Write Magnetic Head
5
D452: P-side Write Magnetic Head
5.2.2
Waits prescribed time. D454: MTP Sensor 1
D455: TAP Sensor
D456: Cartridge Sensor
L440: Display LED
M440: Film Feed Motor
Cartridge motor M444 rotates M441: Door Open/Close Motor
CW 2500 rpm. M442: Spool Motor
M444: Cartridge Motor
S440: Reduction Clutch 1
S442: Reduction Clutch
Set timer A.
Is chucking OK? No
D443 1st time 2nd time
CW 2964 pps 130 pulses (28.5°).

CCW 2964 pps 260 pulses (57°). * Reduction gear ratio of spool motor:
1/4.1
Is the IPI broken? No
D445
CW 2964 pps 130 pulses (28.5°).

CCW 500 pps 80 pulses.
Is a door “open” detected? No

D441
Yes
To next page
5-7
From previous page
From loading end to

perforation leading end
Feed motor M440 rotates CCW 11663 pps.

Timer 6 is ON for 450 mm. 450 mm=2.8s=35831 pulses

CCW 2964 pps.
5
5.2.2
Is leading end detected? No
D455
Yes No
Spool motor M442 is turned Yes

Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just after it stops.

Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after it stops.
Timer 7: ON 200 mm.
200mm=1.3s=15920 pulses L440 LED blinks red.
Is there magnetic IX data? No

D449, D450
Yes
No magnetic frame No. data.
Magnetic IX data is read.

D449, D450 (magnetic frame No. data)
Is “n”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
*ATP=Anticipation Perforation
Yes No
Is magnetic frame No. data No

Yes
detected? D449, D450
Yes Optical frame No. data is received Feed motor M440 is turned
from SP-2500. OFF just after it stops.
Frame No.=Magnetic frame
No. data
Is magnetic frame No. data No

Yes
Frame No.=Optical frame

No. data
To next page
5-8
From previous page
Pre-scanning*
* Pre-scanning speed: 178.3 mm/sec.
Set “n=1”.
Timer 8: ON 8 mm 5
5.2.2
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No

D454
Yes * MTP=Metering No
Perforation Is timer 8’s time up?
Timer 9: ON 30 mm. Yes
Feed motor M440 is turned

Is “n”th frame’s magnetic IX data

Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
Yes No
Yes Is magnetic frame data read? Yes

D449, D450
Feed motor M440 is turned No
Is magnetic frame data read? No

D449, D450
Yes Magnetic reading error is sent to
SP-2500.
To next page From next page
5-9
From previous page To previous page
No
Is frame data detected?
* TAP=Turn-around Perforation
Yes Is TAP detected? No
D455
No
5 Is “n” the last frame? Yes
5.2.2 Yes Feed motor M440 is driven a specified number of pulses.

Feed motor is driven a specified number of pulses.
M440 is turned OFF just after it stops.
Frame No. input request is sent to

SP-2500.
Is TAP detected? No
D455
Yes
Set “n=n+1”
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just

Fine scanning after it stops. L440 error LED blinks red.
Is the START key pressed on No

SP-2500?
Yes
Speed pattern
A speed pattern* is received from q2.3mm/s w3.5mm/s e5.3mm/s r7.6mm/s * One of the eight speed patterns is
SP-2500 t11.7mm/s y23.3mm/s u120mm/s i51.2mm/s selected depending on the
magnification and film density.
Yes
Is speed pattern q received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No
Spool motor M442 is set to Feed motor M440 is set to

2000 pps. 6801 pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern w received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 10349 pps.
From next page To next page To next page
5-10
To previous page From previous page From previous page
Yes
Is speed pattern e received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 15671 pps. 5
5.2.2
Yes
Is speed pattern r received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 22472 pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern t received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 5769 pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern y received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 11488 pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern u received? Clutch S442 is turned ON.
No

2000 pps. 7850 pps.
No
Is speed pattern i received?
Yes
To next page To next page
5-11
From previous page From previous page
Clutch S442 is turned ON.
Spool motor M442 is set to

5 2000 pps.
5.2.2
Feed motor M440 is set to

3271 pps.
Spool motor M442 rotates CW.
Feed motor M440 rotates CW.

Timer 10: ON.
No
Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? End of Roll Perf.
D454
Yes No
A Is timer 10’s time up?
A
Timer 11: ON 30 mm Yes

Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after it stops. L440 LED blinks red.
S440, S441, S442: OFF
“n”th frame’s magnetic IX data is
written. D451, D452
5-12
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No No

D454
Yes Yes

Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after it stops. L440 LED blinks red. 5
S440, S441, S442: OFF
5.2.2
Is it the leading frame? Yes

Timer 12: ON 8 mm
D454
No
Is “n-1”th frame’s ATP detected? Yes

Set “n=n-1”
D454
No
No
Yes

S440, S441, S442: OFF
L440 error LED blinks red.
Timer 13: ON 200 mm
No
Is all the film fed out?
Yes No
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF Yes

after being driven a given number
of pulses.
S440, S441, S442: OFF
Waits prescribed time. L440 error LED blinks red.
Timer 14: ON
To next page
5-13
From previous page
Is VEI “ON” detected? No

D442
Yes No
Spool motor M442 is turned

5 OFF just after it stops.
Yes
5.2.2 Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just

after it stops. L440 error LED blinks red.
Timer 15: ON for prescribed time.

CCW 500pps.
Is a door “open” detected? No

D441
Yes No
Door motor M441 is turned Yes

OFF after 21-pulses drive.
Door motor M441 is turned OFF just

after it stops. L440 error LED blinks red.
Is a chucking “open” detected? No
D443
Yes
Is a cartridge “open” detected? No

D456
Yes
5-14
5.2.3 NC240AG Strip Film Processing
Strip
Processing
Strip Processing
To loading end
detection
Feed motor M440 rotates CCW

11663 pps. Timer 6 is ON for 450 mm. 450 mm=2.8s=35831 pulses
5
5.2.3
Is leading end detected? No
D455
From loading end to Yes No

perforation leading end
Yes
Timer 7 is ON for 200 mm.
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF.
200mm=1.3s= Wait 200 ms.
15674 pulses
No
Is it the third timeup?
D449: C-side Read Magnetic Head
Yes D450: P-side Read Magnetic Head
D451: C-side Write Magnetic Head
D452: P-side Write Magnetic Head
D453: MTP Sensor 2
D454: MTP Sensor 1
D455: TAP Sensor
L440: Display LED
Is there magnetic IX data? No

D449, D450
Yes
Magnetic IX data is read.

D449, D450 (magnetic frame No. data)
Is “n”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
Yes *ATP=Anticipation perforation No
Yes
To next page To next page
5-15
From previous page From previous page
Is magnetic frame No. data No Feed motor M440 is turned

detected? D449, D450 OFF just after it stops.
Yes Optical frame No. data is received
from SP-2500.
5 No. data
5.2.3 Is magnetic frame No. data No

Yes

No. data
Pre-scanning*
* Pre-scanning speed: 178.3 mm/sec.
Set “n=1”
Timer 8: ON 8 mm
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No

D454
Yes *MTP=Metering No
perforation Is timer 8’s time up?
Timer 9: ON 30 mm. Yes

5-16
Is “n”th frame’s magnetic IX data

No
Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected?
D454
5
Yes No 5.2.3
Yes Is magnetic frame data read? Yes

D449, D450
Feed motor M440 is turned No
Is magnetic frame data read? No

D449, D450
Yes Magnetic reading error is sent to
SP-2500.
No
Is frame data detected? *TAP=Turnaround perforation
Yes Was a TAP detected? No

D455
No Yes
Is “n” the last frame?
Yes Feed motor M440 is turned OFF

after being driven a specified
number of pulses.
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF
after being driven a specified
number of pulses.
Frame No. input request is sent to
SP-2500.
Was a TAP detected? No

D455
Yes
Set “n=n+1”
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just

after it stops. L440 LED blinks red.
To next page
5-17
From previous page
Fine scanning
No
Is the START key pressed?
Yes
Speed pattern
A speed pattern* is received from
q2.3mm/s w3.5mm/s e5.3mm/s r7.6mm/s
5 SP-2500
t11.7mm/s y23.3mm/s u120mm/s i51.2mm/s
* One of the eight speed patterns is
selected depending on the
5.2.3
Yes Feed motor M440 is set to

6801 pps.
No

10349 pps.
No

15671 pps.
No

22472 pps.
No

5769 pps.
No

11488 pps.
No

7850 pps.
No
No
Yes

3271 pps.
To next page
5-18
From previous page

Timer 10: ON.
End of Roll Perf.

Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? No
D454 5
Yes No 5.2.3
A Is timer 10’s time up? A
Timer 11: ON 30 mm Yes

“n”th frame’s magnetic IX data is
written. D451, D452
S440, S441, S442: OFF L440 LED blinks red.
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No No

D454
Yes Yes

S440, S441, S442: OFF L440 LED blinks red.
Is it the leading frame? No

Timer 12: ON 8 mm
D454
Yes
Is “n-1”th frame’s ATP detected? Yes

Set “n=n-1”
D454
No
No
Yes

S440, S441, S442: OFF

To next page
5-19
From previous page
Timer 13: ON 200 mm
Is all the film fed out? No

5 D455
5.2.3 Yes No
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF
Yes
after being driven a specified number
of pulses. S440, S441, S442: OFF
L440 LED blinks green.
S440, S441, S442: OFF

Is the strip film fed out? No

D453
Yes
5-20
5.2.4 NC135AG Initialization
Turn ON power switch

(SP-2500)
Is carrier installed? No
(Check the SP-2500)
Yes
5
No To NC240AG or manual 5.2.4
NC135AG?
operation sequence
Yes
L400: lights red, then green.

D400: Film Leading End Sensor LED
D401: Film Leading End Sensor
D402: Scan Timing Sensor LED
D403: Scan Timing Sensor
D404: Perforation Sensor LED
Ver.ID is transferred to SP-2500.
D405: Perforation Sensor
D407: Nip Home Position Sensor
D409: Film Mask Home Position Sensor
D410: Check Tape Sensor LED
D411: Check Tape Sensor
Mechanical data is loaded. L400: Display LED
M401: Soft Nip Drive Motor
M403: Film Mask Drive Motor
Optical sensors are initialized.

(D400,D401,D402,D403,D404,D405,D410,D411)
Is there film? Yes

D401
No
Is there film? Yes

D403
No
Is there film? Yes

D405
No
Is there film? Yes

D411
No
To next page
5-21
From previous page
LHP initialization
Is LHP home position “ON” detected? No

D409
Yes LHP motor M403 rotates
CCW 960 pps.
5
5.2.4 Is LHP home position “ON” detected? No
D409
Yes
M403 stops for 6-pulse drive after

D409 is turned ON. 0.94mm+ (tolerance)
M403 is turned OFF

just after it stops.
Soft nip initialization
Is soft nip initialization “ON” detected? No

D407
Yes Soft nip motor M401 rotates
ON when floodlight is CW 480pps.
not interrupted
Is soft nip initialization “ON” detected? No

D407
Yes
M401 stops just after D407 is

turned ON, then turned OFF.
L400 is turned OFF.
To scanning
5-22
5.2.5 NC135AG Scanning Operation
START
Pre-scanning* * Pre-scanning speed:

213.8 mm/sec.
Is there film? No
D401
Yes
5
L400 blinks green. 5.2.5
D401: Film Leading End Sensor
D403: Scan Timing Sensor
D405: Perforation Sensor
D407: Nip Home Position Sensor
Soft nip motor M401 rotates D409: Film Mask Home Position Sensor
CCW 480 pps 72 pulses (180°). D411: Check Tape Sensor
L400: Display LED
M401: Soft Nip Drive Motor
M401 is turned OFF just M403: Film Mask Drive Motor
after it stops. S401: Reduction Clutch 2
Is soft nip home position “OFF” No

detected? D407
Yes
LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960 pps.
Is LHP home position “OFF” No

detected? D409
Yes
Feed motor M400 rotates

CCW 13986 pps + (tolerance).
At 160mm after the leading No

end detection by D401 Is the leading end detected
160mm=0.868s=10467 pulses within 160 mm? D403
Yes
At 265mm after the leading No
Is the leading end detected
end detection by D403
within 265 mm? D405
265mm=1.299s=17335 pulses
Yes
Check tape is detected by D411.
Is each perforation length No

within 24 mm?
Yes
To next page
5-23
From previous page
M401 is stopped at 108.2 mm after

the trailing end is detected by D403. 108.2 mm=0.566s=7104 pulses
M400 is turned OFF just

after it stops.
Fine scanning
5
Soft nip motor M401 rotates
5.2.5 CW 480 pps 36 pulses (90°).

after it stops.
Is [Start] key pressed on No

SP-2500?
Yes
Speed pattern
A speed pattern* is received from q3.3mm/s w7.2mm/s e9.2mm/s r13.2mm/s * One of the eight speed patterns is
SP-2500. t19.8mm/s y32.6mm/s u42.8mm/s selected depending on the
Screen size is received from

SP-2500.

9758 pps + (tolerance).
No

No

No

No

No

No

No
From next page To next page To next page
5-24
To previous page From previous page From previous page
No
Yes

5
5.2.5
Waits prescribed time. Electromagnetic clutch’s statically determined time
LHP motor M403 rotates CW 960pps.

2.45 mm 16 pulses.
M403 is turned OFF just AF time by reading chart

after it stops.
Wait.

CCW 960 pps.
Is film mask “ON” detected? No

D409
Yes
M403 stops at 6 pulse after

D409 is turned ON. 0.94 mm + (tolerance)

after it stops.

CW 480 pps 36 pulses (90°).

after it stops.
To next page
5-25
From previous page

M400: ON
10 mm=29586 pulses
M401: ON
No 10 mm=4931 pulses
Is perforation displacement
5 within 10 mm? D405
M402: ON
10 mm=654 pulses
5.2.5 Yes
M401 is driven after paper is fed 5 mm

after the leading end is detected by D405. S400: ON
5 mm=14793 pulses
S401: ON
5 mm=2466 pulses
S402: ON
Soft nip motor M401 rotates 5 mm=327 pulses
CCW 480 pps 36 pulses (90°).

after it stops.
LHP switch
Yes
Is the “n”th frame “P” size?
No LHP motor M403 rotates

CCW 960 pps. 5.3 mm 34 pulses.
No
Is the “n”th frame “H” size?
Yes M403 is turned OFF just

after it stops.
CCW 960 pps 1.95 mm 12 pulses. S400: ON
36 mm=106509 pulses
S401: ON Wait 36 mm.
36 mm=17751 pulses
M403 is turned OFF just S402: ON
after it stops. 36 mm=2355 pulses
Yes
Is the “n+1”th frame “H” size?
Wait 36 mm. No
LHP motor M403 rotates LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960 pps 3.35 mm 22 pulses. CCW 960 pps 5.3 mm 34 pulses.
To next page To next page To next page To next page
5-26
From previous page From previous page From previous page From previous page
M403 is turned OFF just M403 is turned OFF just

after it stops. after it stops.
No
Is the “n+1”th frame “P” size?
Yes Wait 36 mm. 5

5.2.5
LHP motor M403 rotates LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960 pps 3.35 mm 21 pulses. CW 960 pps 1.95 mm 12 pulses.
M403 is turned OFF just M403 is turned OFF just

after it stops. after it stops.
Wait 36 mm.

CW 960 pps 5.3 mm 34 pulses.

after it stops.

CW 960 pps 1.95 mm 12 pulses.

after it stops.
To next page
5-27
From previous page
Is trailing end detected? No

D405
Yes
M401 is driven when paper is fed 5 mm

5 after the leading end is detected by D405. S400: ON
5 mm=14793 pulses
5.2.5 S401: ON
5 mm=2466 pulses
S402: ON
Soft nip motor M401 rotates 5 mm=327 pulses
CCW 960 pps 36 pulses (90°).

after it stops.
Is perforation displacement No
within 10 mm? D403
Yes
L400: LED blinks red
M400 is stopped at 45 mm after the

trailing end is detected by D403. S400: ON
45 mm=133136 pulses
S401: ON
45 mm=22189 pulses
S402: ON
M400 is turned OFF just 45 mm=2944 pulses
after it stops.

CW 480 pps 72 pulses (180°).
Is soft nip home position “ON” No

detected? D407
Yes
Is there film? No
D401
Yes
END
5-28
5.2.6 Monitoring Start Timing
Film loading
Pre-scanning
6 12 18 24 frames
No.24 to 19 No.18 to 13 No.12 to 7 No.6 to 1

6-frame monitoring
All frames are scanned after 6-frame 5
monitoring is completed.
5.2.6
Fine scanning
5-29
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
5.3.1 Normal processing
Turn ON the power switch

(SP-2500).
Sensor calibration (see subsection 5.4.8 -12.)

D371, D373, D377
5
No
5.3.1 Is sensor calibration completed?
Yes Error display

W-1647
Download processing
Others Is ANL in operating position? Waiting position

D379, D391
Error display Operating position

Initialization is not executed.
W-1637
Move ANL to operating position.
Is there a negative in
No ANL or carrier?
D371, D373, D377,
D384, D401, D403
Yes
Error display
W-1601/W-1602 D371: Negative Standby Sensor
D372: Loop Sensor
D373: Negative Leading End Sensor
D375: Negative Holder Close Sensor
D376: Negative Sensor
D377: Negative Trailing End Sensor
D378: Nip Release Home Position Sensor
D379: ANL Operating Position Sensor
D380: Negative Press Home Position Sensor
D381: Upper Guide Sensor
D382: Negative Overlap Sensor
D383: Negative Holder Cover Sensor
D384: Negative Full Sensor
D385: Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch
D391: Slide Lock Sensor
D401: Film Leading End Sensor (Film Carrier)
D403: Scan Timing Sensor (Film Carrier)
D406: Loop Guide Sensor
M371: Negative Feed Motor
M372: Negative Holder Motor
M373: Catcher Negative Feed Motor
M374: Negative Press Motor
S371: Nip Release Solenoid
To next page
5-30
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
From previous page
Moves drive motors to home position.

Initializes communication with scanner.
M372, M374, S371
Set negative and close

negative holder cover.
D383, D385
5
Error display A 5.3.1
W-1601/W-1621/W-1622 From P.5-33/5-34
• Is there a negative in feeder
section?
• Is negative catcher full?
Yes • Is negative holder cover open?
• Is ANL in a position other than
operating position?
D371, D373, D381,
D384, D379, D391
No
Drives negative holder motor.

M372
Is negative holder closed within No

prescribed time?
D375
Drives negative holder motor. Yes Negative holder close
M372 malfunction error
E-1606
No Is there a negative
in the negative holder?
Yes
Drives negative feed motor.

M371
Yes Is negative overlapping

detected?
D382
Negative overlapping error No
W-1607
• Stops negative feed motor (M371).

• Drives negative holder motor (M372).
Is negative leading end detected

No
within prescribed time?
D373
Negative holder section Yes
jamming error
W-1608
Stops negative feed motor.
• Turns negative feed motor (M371) M371
OFF.
To next page
5-31
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
From previous page
Drives negative holder motor.

M372
Prescribed time passes.
5
5.3.1
M371
No Is negative standby detected Is negative holder open detected No

within prescribed time? within prescribed time?
Yes Yes
Negative feed section jamming error Negative holder open malfunction error
W-1609 E-1610
• Turns negative feed motor (M371) OFF. Stops negative feed motor.
M371
Is previous negative being

Yes scanned in film carrier?
No

M371
No Is negative leading end detected

in carrier within prescribed time?
D401
Switch guide section jamming error Yes
W-1612
• Turns negative feed motor (M371) Film carrier’s negative

OFF. feed motor drives.
NC135AG Scanning Operation
To next page
5-32
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
From previous page

NC135AG Scanning Operation
Is a loop detected? No
D372
Yes
Has negative trailing end No

Drives negative feed motor. Stops negative feed motor.
passed negative feed section?
M371 M371 D371
Yes
5
No Is a loop detected? Stops negative feed motor. 5.3.1
D372 M371
Yes
No Is negative trailing end detected at

carrier entrance within prescribed time?
D401
Switch guide section jamming error Yes
W-1613
A To page 5-31 (Feeds next negative to waiting position.)
• Turns negative feed motor (M371) OFF.
Is nip released in negative No

catcher section?
D378
Yes Releases nip.
S371
Yes Is nip released within prescribed time?

D378
Drives catcher negative No
feed motor.
M373
Nip malfunction error
W-1615
Is a loop detected? Yes

D406
No Negative catcher section jamming
error (at negative feed out)
W-1614
Is a negative detected? Yes
D377
No Jamming error at negative feed out
W-1618
No Is carrier’s feed out
operation completed?
Yes
From next page To next page
5-33
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
From previous page

To previous page To page 5-31
A
Nip ON
S371
Is negative trailing end detected in negative No

catcher section within prescribed time?
D377
5 Yes Switch guide section jamming error
(at negative feed out) W-1617
5.3.1
After prescribed time, negative
press motor makes one turn.
M374
Is negative press motor turned No

within prescribed time?
D380
Yes Negative press malfunction error
W-1619
Stops negative press motor.
M374
Releases nip.
S371
Is nip released within No

prescribed time? D378
Yes Nip switching malfunction error
W-1620
Stops catcher negative
feed motor.
M373
No Is a negative catcher full detected?

D384
Yes
Displays error message after

catching pre-scanned negative.
W-1621
Remove negatives.
Open and close

negative holder cover.
5-34
5.3 135ANL (NF2500AG)
5.3.2 Interrupt processing
Open negative holder cover.

D383
No
Has negative holder cover been (Negative holder cover is closed within 2 seconds.)
opened for 2 seconds?
Yes
Continues normal operation. 5
Interrupt processing accepted 5.3.2
(LED blinks quickly in green).
Continues scanning negative.
Feeds next negative (on ANL

negative waiting position) to carrier.
After scanning operation,

catches negative and stops.
Move ANL to waiting position. Close negative holder cover.

D379, D391 D383
Returns to
Perform scanning of rush job.
normal operation.
D379: ANL Operating Position Sensor

Move ANL to operating position. D383: Negative Holder Cover Sensor
D379, D391 D391: Slide Lock Sensor
Close negative holder cover.

D383
Returns to
normal operation.
5-35
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.1 Paper Leading End Feed
Draws the paper from the magazine and feeds the paper’s leading end to the printer exit.
[Paper Leading End Feed Outline]
Start
5 Turn magazine knob to the

"Paper Load" position.
5.4.1
Auto load (See subsection 5.4.1 - 1.)
See subsection 5.2.2 for

Fine scan start NC240AG/5.2.5 for NC135AG
Exposure section entrance

(See subsection 5.4.1 - 2.)
paper feed
Unit 2 entrance paper feed (See subsection 5.4.1 - 3.)
Unit 4 entrance paper feed (See subsection 5.4.1 - 4.)
Processor entrance
paper feed
End
5-36
5.4 Paper Feed
1. Auto Loading
Feeds paper from the paper feed unit to the Unit 1 exit.
Start
D510: Paper End Sensor

D515: Splice Sensor Magazine set
D517: Unit 1 Paper Sensor (See subsection 5.4.9 - 1.)
M510: Paper Feed Motor 5
M511: Loop 1 Guide Plate Motor
M513: Unit 1 Paper Feed Motor 5.4.1
Remaining paper detection

Is remaining paper Yes

detected?
No Paper remaining error

W-2417
Sensor calibration Reverse clutch initialization Back printer initialization

(see subsection 5.4.9 - 12.) (See subsection 5.4.9 - 10.q.) (See subsection 5.4.9 - 5.q.)
Laser unit light-shield Magazine rewind motor drive

shutter initialization transmission initialization
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 8.q.) (See subsection 5.4.9 - 2.q.)
Exposure section feed

Hole punch initialization Loop guide initialization
roller nip initialization
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 3.) (See subsection 5.4.9 - 7.q.)
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 9.q.)
Paper width guide initialization

Cutter initialization
and operation
To next page
5-37
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page
Turns paper feed motor and

Unit 1 paper feed motor CW.
M510, M513
No Does paper end sensor

detect paper?
5 D510
Yes
No Is paper fed for 40 mm?
5.4.1 M510, M513
Yes
No Does splice sensor

detect paper?
D515
No Yes
Is paper fed for 225 mm?
M510, M513
Yes
No Does Unit 1 paper sensor

detect paper?
D517
No Yes
M510, M513
Stops paper feed.
Yes
M510, M513
Stops paper feed.

M510, M513
Moves loop 1 guide plate
in opening direction.
M511
Jamming error
W-2401/W-2402
End
5-38
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Exposure section entrance paper feed
Feeds the paper’s leading end from the Unit 1 exit to the exposure feed unit entrance.
Start
Is image No
monitoring completed?
5
Yes
5.4.1
Reverse clutch
Sensor calibration
drive transmission
(see subsection 5.4.9 - 12.)
(See subsection 5.4.9. - 10.w.)
D531: Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor

M513: Unit 1 Paper Feed Motor
Feeds paper for half of
leading end margin (173 mm).
M531: Pre-exposure Feed Motor
M513, M531
No Is feed length of 1st print

within 257 mm?
Yes
Waits (100 ms) until paper

vibration stops.

Hole punch process vibration stops.
Hole punch process

Feeds paper for half of
(See subsection 5.4.9. - 3.)
leading end margin (173 mm).
M513, M531
Does exposure section

feed unit paper sensor No
detect paper?
D531
Yes Jamming error
W-2402
Moves loop 2 guide plate in
opening direction.
M514
End
5-39
5.4 Paper Feed
3. Unit 2 entrance paper feed
Feeds the paper from the exposure feed unit entrance to the Unit 2 entrance.
Start * When the paper leading end reaches Unit 2,

specified length of the paper exists in loop 2.
D533: Exposure Punch Hole Sensor

No Is paper feed start M531: Pre-exposure Feed Motor
condition* satisfied? M532: Sub-scanning Motor
5 M540: Loop 3 Guide Plate Motor
Yes M542: Unit 2 Feed Motor
5.4.1
Drives sub-scanning motor.

M532
No Does sub-scanning motor Stops move.

reach maximum speed? M532
Yes
Turns pre-exposure No Is paper fed for 316 mm*2?

feed motor and Unit 2 feed
M531, M542
motor CW at same speed.
M531, M542 Yes
Stops paper feed.

No Is paper fed for 74 mm*1? M531, M542
M531, M542
Yes
No Is feed length of 1st print
roller nip release within specified distance?
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 9. w.)
Yes
Is an exposure punch No
hole detected?
D533
Yes
Jamming error
W-2412
roller nip process
(see subsection 5.4.9 - 9.q.)
Moves loop 3 guide plate Pre-exposure section feed

in opening direction motor reverse drive
M540 transmission stop processing
*1 When the paper is fed for 74 mm, the paper is nipped by

the exposure feed roller.
*2 When the paper is fed for 316 mm, the paper is nipped by End
the Unit 2 feed roller.
5-40
5.4 Paper Feed
4. Unit 4 entrance paper feed
Feeds the paper’s leading end from the Unit 2 entrance to Unit 4 entrance.
Start
*1 When the leading end of the paper reaches the
position just before the back printer head,
the specified length of the paper exists in loop 3.
No Is paper feed start
condition*1 satisfied? D543:
D544:
Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1
Back Print Punch Hole Sensor
5
Yes
D548: Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2
5.4.1
D561: Unit 4 Paper Sensor
Turns Unit 2 feed motor CW. M542: Unit 2 Feed Motor
M542 M551: Loop 4 Guide Plate Motor
M561: Unit 4 Feed Motor
Does Unit 2 paper No

sensor 1 detect paper?
D543
Yes Is paper fed from Unit 2 No
feed roller to back
Feeds paper for 56.5 mm. printer head (300 mm)?
Paper reaches just before Yes
back printer head.
M542
*2 When the paper is fed for the print size,
Stops paper feed.
the specified length of the paper exists in
M542
loop 3.
condition*2 satisfied?
Jamming error
Yes
W-2404
Turns Unit 2 feed motor CW.

M542
Is a back print punch hole No

detected?
D544
Yes
Is paper fed for print size? No
M542
Feeds punch hole to
back printer head. Yes
M542
Stops paper feed.

M542
No Is paper's leading end fed
for 400 mm to reach Unit 2
paper sensor 2?
D548
Hole detection error
Yes W-1408
To next page
5-41
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page
Does Unit 2 paper sensor 2 No

detect paper?
D548
Yes
Jamming error
W-2404
condition*2 satisfied?
5
Yes
5.4.1
Turns Unit 2 and Unit 4
feed motors CW.
M542, M561
Is a back print punch hole No

detected?
D544
Yes
Is paper fed for the print size? No
M542, M561
Feeds punch hole to
back printer head. Yes
M542, M561
Stops paper feed.

M542, M561
No Is the paper’s leading end fed
until it reaches the Unit 4 paper
sensor (550 mm)?
Yes Hole detection error
E-2413
Does Unit 4 No
paper sensor detect paper?
D561
Yes
Jamming error
W-2405
Moves loop 4 guide
plate in opening direction.
M551
End
5-42
5.4 Paper Feed
5. Processor entrance paper feed
Feeds paper from the Unit 4 entrance to the processor.
Start
* 2.5 m or longer paper exists in the

reservoir, and the paper width guides of No Is processor entry
the processor are the same width as condition* satisfied?
those of the printer. 5
Yes
5.4.1
Turns Unit 4 feed motor
CW at high speed.
M561
No Does the paper’s leading end

reach just before the processor?
D562: Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor M561
D566: Loop 5 Sensor Yes
D568: Printer Exit Paper Sensor
Turns Unit 4 feed motor and
processor motor CW at same speed.
M561
No Does printer exit paper

sensor detect paper?
D568
Yes
Is the paper’s leading end
No fed for 600 mm to pass
the printer exit paper sensor? Moves loop 5 guide plate
M561 in opening direction
M563
Yes
Stops paper feed.

M561
Jamming error
W-2405
To next page
5-43
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page

CW at high speed.
M561
Does loop 5 sensor No

detect paper?
D566
5 Yes Is paper fed for 800 mm so No
5.4.1 that loop 5 sensor
Is cutter 2 punch hole detects paper?
No
detected? Yes
D562
Yes Is paper fed for 400 mm No Stops paper feed.
(=max. print size + 95 mm)?
M561
M561
Feeds punch hole to cutter 2.
Yes
M561
Stops paper feed. Jamming error

M561 E-2406

E-2415
End
5-44
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.2 Paper Feed
The normal paper feed sequence of each unit is shown below.
[Normal Paper Feed Sequence Outline]
Start
Fine scan start See subsection 5.2.2 for 5

(Monitoring completed) NC240AG/5.2.5 for NC135AG
5.4.2
Unit 1 (See subsection 5.4.2 - 2.)
Paper feed unit (See subsection 5.4.2 - 1.)
Exposure section (See subsection 5.4.2 - 3.)
Unit 2 (See subsection 5.4.2 - 4.)
Unt4, Unit 5 (See subsection 5.4.2 - 5.)
End
[Paper Feed Speed]
Section Speed (mm/sec.)

Paper magazine to Loop 1 220
Loop 1 to Loop 2 205
Loop 2 to Loop 3 80
Loop 3 to Loop 4 (reservoir) 180
Loop 4 (reservoir) to Loop 5 150
Loop 5 to processor entry 75
* Paper leading end feed or paper rewind: approx. 80 mm/sec.
5-45
5.4 Paper Feed
1. Paper feed unit 2. Unit 1
Draws the paper from the magazine and maintains loop 1. Feeds paper according to the print length, and
performs cutting/sorting hole punch.
Start Start
Does loop 1 sensor Yes Is image monitoring No

5 detect paper?
D512 completed?
5.4.2 No Yes
Turns paper feed motor CW. Does loop 2 sensor Yes

D512: Loop 1 Sensor detect paper?
M510: Paper Feed Motor M510
D518
No
No Does loop 1 sensor

No
detect paper? Performs sorting punch?
D512
Yes
Yes
No Is paper fed for 100 mm? Sorting hole punch process

M510 S511
Yes
No Has the motor been driven

for 2 m or longer since sensor
detected “no paper”? Feeds paper for print size.
M513
Yes
Stops paper feed.

M510
Cutting hole punch process

End S510
End
D518: Loop 2 Sensor

S510: Cutting Hole Punch Solenoid
S511: Sorting Hole Punch Solenoid
5-46
5.4 Paper Feed
3. Exposure section
Continuous exposure: Exposure is performed upon detecting exposure punch hole while feeding the paper at maximum speed.
Discontinuous exposure: Exposure is performed upon detecting exposure punch hole while feeding the paper at maximum speed. After
completion of exposure, the paper is fed in the reverse direction for the specified distance. Exposure for the next
print is performed upon detecting exposure punch hole while feeding the paper at maximum speed.

Start M532: Sub-scanning Motor
*1 When the exposure is completed, specified length 5

No of the paper exists in loop 2.
Is exposure section ready
to feed paper*1? 5.4.2
Yes
Has paper been fed in the Yes

reverse direction?
No Exposure section feed

roller nip process
Turns pre-exposure feed motor and

sub-scanning motor at same speed.
M531, M532
Exposure start process Exposure completion process
No Is exposure for one frame Feeds current frame

about to end? and stops paper feed.
M531, M532
Yes
Yes Is exposure section ready

to feed paper*1? Reverse clutch drive Exposure section feed
transmission roller nip release
No (See subsection 5.4.9 - 10.w.) (See subsection 5.4.9 - 9.w)
Yes Is a punch hole detected?

D533
Feeds paper in the reverse *2 Slows down 79 mm.
No
direction for 230 mm*2. Returns to the
M531 position 151 mm
No from the
Is paper fed for
exposure point.
specified distance?
Reverse clutch reverse drive
Yes
transmission stop processing
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 10.q)
Stops paper feed.
M531, M532
End
E-2412
5-47
5.4 Paper Feed
4. Unit 2 5. Unit 4, Unit 5
Feeds paper according to the print length, and then performs back Feeds paper into the processor and maintains loop 5.
printing.
Start
Start
Loop 4 sensor detects paper and No

Is specified length No loop 5 sensor does not detect paper?
fed into loop 3?
5 D541
D551, D566
Yes
Yes
5.4.2
Turns Unit 4
Turns Unit 2
feed motor CW.
paper feed motor CW.
M561
M542
Is a cutter 2 No
Is a back print No punch hole detected?
punch hole detected?
D562
D544
Yes
Yes
Is paper fed for 400 mm No
Is paper fed for the print size? No (max. print size + 95 mm)?
M542 M561
Yes
Yes
Feeds punch hole
Feeds punch hole to
to cutter 2.
center of back printer head.
M561
M542
Stops paper feed.

Stops paper feed.
M561
M542

E-2415
E-2413
End End
D544: Back Print Punch Hole Sensor D551: Loop 4 Sensor

M542: Unit 2 Feed Motor D562: Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor
D566: Loop 5 Sensor
5-48
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.3 Initialization
The initialization sequences when the power is turned ON, and when the door is opened and closed are shown below.
[Power ON]
Start
5
System startup
5.4.3
Initialization (See subsection 5.4.3 - 1.)
End
[Door Open] [Door Close]
Start Start
Remaining paper detection (See subsection 5.4.3 - 2.) Exposure section initialization (See subsection 5.5.1.)
No
Is paper detected? Remaining paper detection (See subsection 5.4.3 - 2.)
Yes
Is paper detected within the area No Yes

Is any remaining paper
from cutter 1 to processor entry?
detected?
D561, D566, D568
Yes No
Door open/paper remaining error Paper remaining error

W-2449 W-2417
Drives cutter 1. Back printer initialization (See subsection 5.4.9 - 5.q.)
Paper feed unit paper width (See subsection 5.4.9 - 6.q.)

End guide initialization

D566: Loop 5 Sensor
End
D568: Printer Exit Paper Sensor
5-49
5.4 Paper Feed
1. Initialization
The start-up initialization sequence is shown below.
Start
Are the doors closed? No

D591, D592
5 Yes
5.4.3
Exposure section initialization

(See subsection 5.5.1.)
Remaining paper detection

Is remaining paper Yes

detected?
No
Paper remaining error
W-2417
Laser unit light-shield Magazine rewind motor drive

Reverse clutch initialization Back printer initialization
shutter initialization transmission initialization

Hole punch initialization Loop guide initialization
roller nip initialization
Cutter initialization Paper width guide initialization

End
5-50
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Remaining paper detection
Detects remaining paper in the printer.

Start D512: Loop 1 Sensor
D513: Rewind Paper Sensor
D515: Splice Sensor
Remaining paper detection D518: Loop 2 Sensor
D510, D512, D513, D515, D531: Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor
D517, D518, D531, D533,
D541, D543, D548, D551,
D541: Loop 3 Sensor 5
D543: Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1
D561, D566, D568 D548: Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 5.4.4
D551: Loop 4 Sensor
D566: Loop 5 Sensor
No D568: Printer Exit Paper Sensor
Is paper detected? D591: Printer Door Interlock Switch 1
D592: Printer Door Interlock Switch 2
Yes
Saves “paper exists” data. Saves "no paper" data.
End
5.4.4 Shut-down Process
At system shut-down, a paper rewind (see subsection 5.4.7. - 2) and roller nip release (see subsection 5.4.9 - 9.w) are performed if any
paper remains in the printer.
5-51
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.5 Paper End/Splice
1. Paper end processing
Detects the paper end and feeds the paper’s trailing end into loop 2.
Start
5 Paper end and

splice sensors do not No
5.4.5 detect paper?
D510, D515
Yes
D510: Paper End Sensor * Trailing end margin:

D515: Splice Sensor Cancels image within max. 410 mm +
D518: Loop 2 Sensor trailing end margin*. print size
No Is trailing end margin

190 mm or less?
Yes
Slows down and
stops paper feed.
Feeds paper to
hole punch unit.
M513

vibration stops.
Yes Does loop 2
D518
No
Hole punch process
Normal paper feed
sequence
Yes Does loop 2

D518
No
Stops with trailing

end nipped by Unit 1
feed roller.
M513
No Has the leading end of

trailing end margin reached
exposure point?
Yes
Stops paper feed after trailing

end passes Unit 1 feed roller.
M513
End
5-52
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Splice
Detects a paper splice and performs splice process.
Start
Paper end sensor detects

D510: Paper End Sensor No
paper and splice sensor
D515:
D518:
Splice Sensor
Loop 2 Sensor
does not detect paper? 5
D510, D515
Yes 5.4.5
No Is the margin to splice hole

distance within 257 mm?
Yes
Slows down and
stops paper feed.
Feeds paper until splice hole
reaches just before
hole punch unit.
Waits 100 ms.
Waits 100ms. To normal paper feed

sequence
Hole punch process

Hole punch process
Yes Does loop 2

D518 Does loop 2
Yes
No sensor detect paper?
D518
No
Paper splice passes

hole punch unit.
M513
Waits 100 ms.
Hole punch process

End
5-53
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.6 All Process
After the print to be subjected to All Process is prepared, its cutting punch hole is fed to cutter 1 and a cutting operation is performed. After
the paper is cut, auto rewind is performed.
1. Unit 1 2. Exposure Section
The Unit 1 All Process sequence is shown below. The exposure section All Process sequence is shown below.
Start Start
5
5.4.6
Does loop 2 No
Yes Has Unit 1 started
All Process?
D518
No Yes
Drives Unit 1 paper feed Feeds paper ignoring

motor for 240 mm*1. paper feed start condition. Normal process
M513 M531, M532
Does loop 2 No Has the punch hole for

Yes
sensor detect paper? All Process passed the
D518 exposure point?
No Yes
Drives Unit 1
Cancels punch hole
paper feed motor for
detection.
85.5 mm*2.
Has a stop request No Has a stop request

No
been received? been received?
(See subsection 5.4.6 - 3.) (See subsection 5.4.6 - 3.)
Yes Yes
End Stops exposure section

paper feed.
D518: Loop 2 Sensor

*1 Paper is fed for 240 mm so that the End

splice is not detected at the next auto
load operation.
*2 Minimum print feed length. M531: Pre-exposure Feed Motor

M532: Sub-scanning Motor
5-54
5.4 Paper Feed
3. Unit 2
The Unit 2 All Process sequence is shown below.
Start
Does the hole for All Process No

stop at the back printer head?
5
Yes D541: Loop 3 Sensor
D550: Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor 5.4.6
No Is the specified length M550: Cutter 1 Motor
fed into loop 3?
D541
Yes
* Stop request
Unit 1 and exposure section
Normal process
stop paper feed.
Turns Unit 2 feed motor CW.

M542
Is a cutter 1 No
punch hole detected?
D550
Yes Is the hole for All No
Process fed to cutter 1?
Feeds punch hole M542
to cutter 1. Yes
M542
Stops paper feed.

M542
Drives cutter 1.
M550

E-2414
End
5-55
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.7 Rewind process
1. Auto rewind
After the All Process operation, the leading end of the paper is rewound from cutter 1 to the auto-load position.
q Auto rewind sequence
Start
5
5.4.7
Moves paper width guide 3-1 to Moves paper width guide Magazine rewind Paper width guide 1 Moves paper width guide 2 to
specified width + 1mm position. to specified width. motor drive transmission initialization specified width + 1 mm position.
M541 M515 (See subsection 5.4.9 - 2.w) M512 M530
Turns paper feed motor Exposure section Turns pre-exposure

Paper feed section
OFF. feed roller nip release feed motor OFF.
feed roller nip release
M510 (See subsection 5.4.9 - 9.w) M531
Unit 1 Paper feed unit Unit 2

auto rewind process auto rewind process auto rewind process
(See subsection 5.4.7 - 1.e.) (See subsection 5.4.7 - 1.w.) (See subsection 5.4.7 - 1.r)
Paper feed section feed D510: Paper End Sensor

roller nip release D515: Splice Sensor
(See subsection 5.4.9 - 11.q) D517: Unit 1 Paper Sensor
M510: Paper Feed Motor
M512: Paper Width Guide 1 Motor
M513: Unit 1 Paper feed Motor
Turns paper feed motor ON.
M510
M515: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide
Motor
Turns paper feed motor CCW. M540: Loop 3 Guide Plate Motor
M510 M541: Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1
No Does the paper end sensor

detect paper?
D510
Is paper fed for the Yes
No
specified distance?
M510 Stops drive with the leading
Yes end nipped by paper feed
unit feed roller.
M510
Stops paper feed.
M510
Jamming error
W-2401 To next page
5-56
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page
Moves paper width guide 3-1 Exposure section feed Turns pre-exposure Moves loop 1, 2, 3 guide plates
to specified width. roller nip release feed motor ON. in closing direction.
M541 (See subsection 5.4.9 - 9.q) M531 M511, M514, M540
Moves paper feed unit paper width guide Magazine rewind motor drive Moves paper width guide 1
to specified width + 8mm position. transmission stop process to specified width.
M515 (See subsection 5.4.9 - 2.q) M512
5
5.4.7
Yes
Performs paper rewind?
No
Auto load
End
5-57
5.4 Paper Feed
w Paper Feed Unit
The rewind process in paper feed unit is shown below.
[Paper Feed Section Auto Rewind Outline]
q After the paper section feed roller nip is released, the magazine w The magazine rewind motor (M500) stops when the loop 1
rewind motor (M500) is turned CCW when the loop 1 sensor sensor (D512) detects “no paper”.
(D512) detects paper.
5
5.4.7
D512 D512
M500 M500
e The magazine rewind motor (M500) turns CCW when Unit 1 feeds r The magazine rewind motor (M500) stops when the rewind
the paper’s leading end into loop 1. paper sensor (D513) detects “no paper”.
D512 D512
M500 M500
D513
To Loop 1
t Paper feed section feed roller nip turns ON and the paper feed y After feeding 10.5 mm when the paper end sensor (D510)
motor (M510) turns CCW. detects “no paper”, the paper feed motor (M510) stops.
M510 D510 M510
D512 D512 10.5 mm
D513 M500 D513 M500
5-58
5.4 Paper Feed
[Paper Feed Section Auto Rewind Sequence]
D512: Loop 1 Sensor

Start D513: Rewind Paper Sensor
M500: Magazine Rewind Motor
Has Unit 1 fed paper No

into loop 1?
Yes
5
Drives magazine Does loop 1
No 5.4.7
rewind motor. sensor detect paper?
M500 D513
Yes
Yes Does rewind paper Drives magazine Stops drive.

sensor detect paper? rewind motor. M500
D513 M500
No
Stops drive.
No Has prescribed time
M500
passed?
Yes
Stops paper feed.

M500
Jamming error
W-2402
End
5-59
5.4 Paper Feed
e Unit 1
Auto rewind process in Unit 1 is shown below.
[Unit 1 Auto Rewind Outline]
q The Unit 1 paper feed motor (M513) turns when the loop 3 w The Unit 1 paper feed motor (M513) turns for the specified length
sensor (D541) detects paper and the loop 1 sensor (D512) when the loop 1 sensor (D512) detects paper.
detects “no paper”.
5
5.4.7 D512
D512
D515 D515
M513 M513
D531 D531
D541 D541
D517 D517
e After Unit 2 has fed the paper’s leading end into loop 3, the Unit r The Unit 1 paper feed motor (M513) turns when the loop 1
1 paper feed motor (M513) when the loop 1 sensor (D512) sensor (D512) detects paper.
detects “no paper”.
D512 D512
D515 D515
M513 M513
D531 D531
D541 D541
D517 D517
t The exposure section feed unit paper sensor (D531) detects “no y The Unit 1 paper feed motor (M513) turns for the specified length
paper”. when the Unit 1 paper sensor (D517) detects “no paper”.
D512 D512
D515 D515
M513 M513
D531 D531
D541 D541
D517 D517
5-60
5.4 Paper Feed
[Unit 1 Auto Rewind Sequence]
Start
Yes Has Unit 2

fed paper into loop 2?
Does loop 1 No
Yes
sensor detect paper? 5
D512
Loop 1 sensor does not No 5.4.7
No
detect paper and loop 3
sensor detects paper?
Turns Unit 1 paper feed
motor CCW. Yes
M513
Turns Unit 1 paper feed
motor CCW.
Does loop 1 M513
Yes
D512
Drives 100 mm CCW No Does loop 1 No
and stops. sensor detect paper?
M513 D512
Yes
Yes Does exposure section feed

Stops drive after
unit paper sensor detect paper?
feeding paper for 100 mm.
D531
M513
Has paper’s leading end No
No reached exposure section
feed unit paper sensor?
M513
Yes
Yes Does Unit 1

D517
No
No Has paper’s leading end
reached Unit 1 paper sensor?
M513 Stops drive after paper’s
leading end passes
Yes Unit 1 feed roller.
M513
Stops paper feed. D512: Loop 1 Sensor

M513 D517: Unit 1 Paper Sensor
D531: Exposure Section Feed
Unit Paper Sensor
Jamming error
W-2402
End
5-61
5.4 Paper Feed
r Unit 2
The auto rewind process in Unit 2 is shown below.
[Unit 2 Auto Rewind Outline]
q The unit 2 feed motor (M542) turns CCW when the loop 3 sensor w The Unit 2 feed motor (M542) turns CCW for specified distance
(D541) detects “no paper”. when the loop 3 sensor (D541) detects paper.
5 M542 M542
5.4.7
D543 D541 D543 D541
e The Unit 2 paper sensor (D543) detects “no paper”. r When the loop 3 sensor (D541) detects “no paper”, the paper is
rewound and fed into loop 3.
M542 M542
D543 D541 D543 D541
5-62
5.4 Paper Feed
[Unit 2 Auto Rewind Sequence]
Start
Yes Does loop 3

D541
No
5
Turns Unit 2 feed motor CCW. D541: Loop 3 Sensor 5.4.7
M542 D543: Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1
Does loop 3 No
D541
Yes Yes
Does Unit 2
paper sensor 1 detect paper?
CCW for 100 mm. No
M542 Has the paper’s leading end No
reached the Unit 2 paper sensor 1?
M542
Yes
No Does loop 3
D541 Stops paper feed.
M542
Yes
Stops motor after feeding

paper for 100 mm.
Jamming error
M542
W-2404
No Is the paper’s leading

end fed into loop 3?
Yes
Yes Does loop 3

No
Turns Unit 2
feed motor CCW.
M542
End
5-63
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Rewind Process
The paper’s leading end is rewound near the Unit 1 paper sensor to the paper magazine.
[Rewind Process Outline]
q The paper’s leading end stops at a distance of 6.7 mm from the e The magazine rewind motor (M500) stops when the loop 1
Unit 1 paper sensor (D517). sensor (D512) detects “no paper”.
w After releasing the paper feed roller nip, the magazine rewind r The unit 1 paper feed motor (M513) drives for 100 mm when the
motor (M500) turns when the loop 1 sensor (D512) detects loop 1 sensor (D512) detects “no paper”.
paper.
5
5.4.7
D512 D512
6.7 mm M500 M500
M513
D517 D517
t The magazine rewind motor (M500) drives when Unit 1 has fed y The magazine rewind motor (M500) stops when the rewind
paper into loop 1. paper sensor (D513) detects “no paper”.
D512 D512
M500 M500
D513
u The paper feed section feed roller nip turns ON and the paper i After feeding 10.5 mm when the paper end sensor (D510)
feed motor (M510) turns CCW. detects “no paper”, the paper feed motor (M510) stops.
M510 M510
D510
D512 D512
M500 M500
D515 D515
[Rewind sequence]
Rewind sequence is the same as auto rewind sequence of Unit 1 (see subsection 5.4.7 - 1.e) and paper feed unit (see subsection 5.4.7 -
1.w).
5-64
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.8 Cutter Operation
1. Splice/Save Cut
Detects a splice or save cut hole, feeds the hole to cutter 1, and performs a paper cut.
[Element] D550 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor

M542 Unit 2 Feed Motor
[Start Condition]
When the next paper feed is performed by Unit 2, and the cutting hole reaches the cutter 1 punch hole sensor.
[End Condition]
5
When the cutting operation is completed and the paper stops for the next back printing.
5.4.8
5-65
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Auto Save Cut
Start
Yes Does loop 5

D551: Loop 4 Sensor
D566
D562: Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor
D566: Loop 5 Sensor No
5 D568: Printer Exit Paper Sensor
M561: Unit 4 Feed Motor Turns Unit 4
5.4.8 M562: Cutter 2 Motor feed motor CW.
M563: Loop 5 Guide Plate Motor M561
No Is a cutter 2 punch hole

detected?
D562
Is paper fed for Yes
No
400 mm (max. print size
+ 95 mm)? Feeds punch hole
Yes to cutter 2.
M561
Stops paper feed.

M561
Does loop 4 Yes
D551
No
E-2415
Drives cutter 2.
M562
Does the printer exit

Yes paper sensor
detect paper?
D568
No
passed?
Moves loop 5 guide plate
Yes in closing direction.
M563
Jamming error
W-2406
End
5-66
5.4 Paper Feed
3. Processor 20 m/19m cut process
When the paper width is less than 203 mm: Cutter 2 cuts the paper when the total amount of the paper entered into the processor reaches
20 m.
When the paper width is 203 mm or wider: Cutter 2 cuts the paper when the total amount of the paper entered into the processor reaches
19 m.
Start
Does loop 5
5
Yes
sensor detect paper? 5.4.8
D566
No
D562: Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor
D566: Loop 5 Sensor
D568: Printer Exit Paper Sensor Turns Unit 4
M561: Unit 4 Feed Motor feed motor CW.
M562: Cutter 2 Motor M561
No Is a cutter 2 punch hole

detected?
D562
Yes
No Is paper fed for 400 mm
(max. print size + 95 mm)?
Feeds punch hole
Yes to cutter 2.
M561
Stops paper feed.

M561
Does total amount of No
paper entered into processor
reach 20 m/19 m?
Hole detection error Yes
E-2415
Drives cutter 2.
M562
Yes Does printer exit

D568
No
passed? Moves loop 5 guide plate
in closing direction.
Yes
M563
Jamming error
W-2406
End
5-67
5.4 Paper Feed
5.4.9 Single Operation
1. Magazine set
Draws the paper’s leading end from the magazine after detecting a magazine nip, magazine set and magazine ID.
Start
5 Is magazine nip detected? No

D505
5.4.9
Yes
No
Has 1 second passed?
Yes
Are the doors open? Yes

D591, D592
No Printer door open error

W-2465
No Is a magazine set detected?
D590
Magazine set error Yes

W-2445
No Is a magazine ID detected?
D500, D501, D502,
D503, D504
Magazine ID error Yes

W-2443
Paper feed unit roller nip
initialization
D500: Magazine ID Sensor 1

D505: Magazine Nip Sensor
D590: Paper Magazine Setting Sensor
M510: Paper Feed Motor
To next page
5-68
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page
Does paper end No

D510
Yes
Turns paper feed motor CCW. Turns paper feed motor CW.
M510 M510
5
5.4.9
Does paper end Yes Does paper end No
sensor detect paper? sensor detect paper?
D510 D510
No Yes
Is paper fed for 40 mm? No No

M510
Yes Yes
Stops paper feed. Stops paper feed.

M510 M510
Stops paper feed. Stops paper feed.

M510 M510
Malfunction Malfunction
W-2416 W-2416
End
5-69
5.4 Paper Feed
2. Magazine rewind motor drive transmission 3. Hole punch
Transmits drive to magazine rewind motor (M500) when Punches a hole in the paper. Printed paper is cut or sorted according to
starting the auto rewind or rewind operation. the hole. The process below is done in both the initialization and
punching operations.
q Initialization/Drive transmission stop
Turns paper magazine rewind clutch (S500) OFF.

Start
Start
5 Turns hole punch
solenoid ON.
5.4.9 S510/S511
Turns paper magazine
rewind clutch OFF.
S500
Waits 20 ms.
Waits 200 ms.
Is “return”
No
position cleared?
D520/D521
End Yes
Waits 20 ms.
S500: Paper Magazine Rewind Clutch
w Drive transmission
Yes Is “return”
Turns paper magazine rewind clutch (S500) ON. position cleared?
D520/D521
No
Start
Turns hole punch Turns hole punch
solenoid OFF. solenoid OFF.
S510/S511 S510/S511
Turns paper magazine
rewind clutch ON.
S500
Waits 70 ms.
Waits 200 ms.

Is “return” No
position detected?
D520/D521
End Yes Malfunction
E-2419/E-2420
S500: Paper Magazine Rewind Clutch
End
D520: Cutting Hole Punch Return Sensor

D521: Sorting Hole Punch Return Sensor
S510: Cutting Hole Punch Solenoid
S511: Sorting Hole Punch Solenoid
5-70
5.4 Paper Feed
4. Cutter operation
Drives the cutter to cut the paper. The process below is done in both the initialization and cutting operations.
Start
Starts cutter drive.

M550/M562
5
D552: Cutter 1 Home Position Sensor 5.4.9
D563: Cutter 2 Home Position Sensor Is the home position Yes
M550: Cutter 1 Motor detected?
M562: Cutter 2 Motor D552/D563
No
No Is the home position

detected?
D552/D563
Yes
No No
Has 1 second passed? Has 1 second passed?
Yes Yes
Stops cutter drive. Stops cutter drive.

M550/M562 M550/M562
Malfunction Stops cutter drive. Malfunction

E-2421/E-2422 M550/M562 E-2421/E-2422
End
5-71
5.4 Paper Feed
5. Back Printing
Prints the back surface of the paper with the dot printer.
q Initialization
Checks if the back printer head is set.
D545: Back printer head set sensor

Start
5
5.4.9 Is the back printer head set? No
D545
Yes
Back printer head setting error
W-2446
End
Note: Back printing ON/OFF can be specified. When back printing is set to OFF, error message W-2446 is not displayed even if the back
printer is not installed.
w Back printing
Prints on back surface of the paper.
D544: Back Print Punch Hole Sensor

Start S540: Rear Back Printer Head Solenoid
S541: Front Back Printer Head Solenoid
Is a back print punch No

hole detected?
D544
Yes
Back printer initialization
Starts back printing after feeding

paper so that the center of the print
matches the center of the paper.
S540, S541
No
Is back printing completed?
Yes
End
5-72
5.4 Paper Feed
6. Paper width guide
Adjusts the paper width guide according to the paper size.

The functional outline of each paper width guide is shown below.
At Paper Feed At Paper Rewind

Name Unit Purpose
(Tolerance) (Tolerance)
1 Paper feed unit paper Paper feed unit Paper width + 8.0 mm Paper width (±0.1 mm) Paper rewind
width guide (±0.1 mm)
2 Paper width guide 1 Unit1 Paper width (±0.1 mm) Widest position Hole punch
3 Paper width guide 2 Exposure Section Paper width + 0.3 mm Paper width + 0.1 mm Exposure With bearing
Feed Unit (±0.1 mm) (±0.1 mm) 5
4 Paper width guide 3-1 Unit 2 Paper width (±0.1 mm) Paper width + 1.0 mm (±0.1 Corrects displacement occurring
mm) in loop 3. 5.4.9
5 Paper width guide 3-2 Unit 2 Paper width (±0.1 mm) Paper width (±0.1 mm) Back printing
6 Paper width guide 3-3 Unit 2 Paper width (±0.1 mm) Paper width (±0.1 mm) Cutter 1
7 Reservoir paper width Reservoir Paper width + 4.0 mm Not applied Collects paper in reservoir.
guide (0.0 + 2.0 mm)
8 Paper width guide 4 Unit 4 Paper width (±0.15 mm) Not applied Cutter 2
9 Paper width guide 5 Unit 5 Paper width (±0.15 mm) Not applied Processor entry
q Initialization
Moves the paper width guide to the home position.
Start
Is paper width guide

home position detected? No
D514, D522, D530, D542,
D546, D547, D555,
D560, D567
Yes
Moves paper width

guide inward.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Is paper width guide home

No position cleared?
D514, D522, D530, D542,
D546, D547, D555,
D560, D567
Does paper width Yes
No guide move for 50 mm?
M512, M515, M530, M541, M543, Stops move.
M544, M552, M560, M564 M512, M515, M530, M541,
Yes M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Stops move.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Malfunction
E-2428 to E-2436
To next page
5-73
5.4 Paper Feed
From previous page
Moves paper width

guide outward.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
5 Is paper width guide

home position detected?
No
D514, D522, D530, D542,
5.4.9
D546, D547, D555,
D560, D567
Does paper width Yes
M512, M515, M530, M541, M543, Stops move.
M544, M552, M560, M564 M512, M515, M530, M541,
Yes M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Stops move.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Malfunction
E-2428 to E-2436
End
D514: Paper Width Guide 1 Home Position Sensor
D522: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor
D542: Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1
D555: Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor
M515: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor
M541: Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1
M552: Reservoir Paper width Guide Motor
5-74
5.4 Paper Feed
w Paper width guide operation (Absolute position movement)
Moves the paper width guide from the home position to the paper size.
Start
Calculates move distance.

5
5.4.9
Moves paper width
guide inward.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Is paper width guide

Yes home position detected?
D514, D522, D530, D542,
D546, D547, D555,
D560, D567
Does paper width No
M512, M515, M530, M541, M543,
Moves paper width guide
M544, M552, M560, M564
the calculated distance.
Yes M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Stops move.
M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564
Malfunction
E-2428 to E-2436

D522: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor
D542: Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1 End
D555: Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor
M515: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor
M552: Reservoir Paper Width Guide Motor
5-75
5.4 Paper Feed
e Paper width guide operation (Relative position movement)
Moves the paper width guide from the current position to the paper size.

Start M515: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor
Calculates move distance. M552: Reservoir paper Width Guide Motor
5 M560:
M564:
5.4.9
Is turn direction outward Inward

or inward?
Outward
Moves paper width guide outward Moves paper width guide inward
the calculated distance. the calculated distance.
M512, M515, M530, M541, M512, M515, M530, M541,
M543, M544, M552, M543, M544, M552,
M560, M564 M560, M564
End
5-76
5.4 Paper Feed
7. Loop guide
Feeds the paper’s leading end to the printer exit without excessive tension.
q Initialization/Loop guide close operation
Moves the loop guide plate to the home position.
D511: Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor

D519: Loop 2 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor Start
D554: Loop 4 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor 5
M511: Loop 1 Guide Plate Motor Is loop guide plate 5.4.9
M514: Loop 2 Guide Plate Motor home position detected? No
M540: Loop 3 Guide Plate Motor D511, D519, D540,
M551: Loop 4 Guide Plate Motor D554, D565
M563: Loop 5 Guide Plate Motor Yes
Moves loop guide plate

M511, M514, M540, M551, M563
Is loop guide plate

D511, D519, D540,
D554, D565
Does loop guide move No
No
30 degrees?
M511, M514, M540, M551, M563
Stops move.
Yes M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
Stops move.
M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
M511, M514, M540,
Malfunction M551, M563
E-2423 to E-2427
No Is loop guide plate

home position detected?
D511, D519, D540, D554, D565
No Does loop guide move Yes
150 degrees?
M511, M514, M540, M551, M563
Stops move.
Yes M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
Stops move.
M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
Malfunction
E-2423 to E-2427
End
5-77
5.4 Paper Feed
w Loop guide open operation
Opens the loop guide plate when the paper’s leading end is fed to the next unit.
Start
Moves loop guide in

opening direction.
5 M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
5.4.9
Is loop guide plate

D511, D519, D540,
D554, D565
Does loop guide move No
No
30 degrees?
M511, M514, M540, Stops move.
M551, M563 M511, M514, M540,
Yes M551, M563
Stops move.
M511, M514, M540,
M551, M563
Malfunction
E-2423 to E-2427
D511: Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor End

5-78
5.4 Paper Feed
8. Laser unit light-shield shutter
Keeps light from reaching the paper to avoid fogging.
q Initialization
Closes the laser unit shutter.
Start
No
5
Is shutter open detected?
D534 5.4.9
Yes
Moves shutter in
D534: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Open Sensor
closing direction.
M533: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor
M533
Yes Is shutter open detected?

D534
No Does shutter moves No

for 27 degrees?
M533
Yes Stops move.
M533
Stops move.
M533
Malfunction Moves shutter in

E-2418 opening direction.
M533
No Is shutter open detected?

D534
No Does shutter move Yes

54 degrees?
M533
Stops move.
Yes
M533
Stops move.
M533
Stops motor after moving
shutter to close position.
M533
Yes Is shutter open detected?

D534
Malfunction No
E-2418
End
5-79
5.4 Paper Feed
w Laser unit light-shield shutter open/close processing
[Open processing]
Opens the laser unit shutter immediately before the start of exposure.
Start
D534: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Open Sensor

5 Moves shutter to
open position.
M533: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor
5.4.9 M533
Is shutter open detected? No

D534
Yes Malfunction
E-2418
End
[Close processing]
Closes the laser unit shutter immediately after the exposure is completed.
Start
Moves shutter to close D534: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Open Sensor
(light-shield) position. M533: Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor
M533
Is shutter open detected? Yes

D534
No Malfunction
E-2418
End
5-80
5.4 Paper Feed
9. Exposure section feed roller nip
Turns ON or releases the exposure section feed roller nip.
q Initialization/Roller nip processing
Turns ON the exposure section feed roller nip.
Start
5
No 5.4.9
Is a feed roller nip detected?
D535
Yes
Releases roller nip.

Drives nip release motor.
M534
M534
Yes
Is a feed roller nip detected?
D535
No Does motor drive No

42 degrees?
M534
Yes
D535: Exposure Section Feed Roller Nip Sensor

Stops drive. M534: Roller Nip Release Motor
M534
Malfunction
E-2437
No Is a feed roller nip detected?

D535
No Does motor drive Yes

418 degrees?
M534
Yes Stops move.
M534
Stops drive.
M534
Malfunction
E-2437
End
5-81
5.4 Paper Feed
w Roller nip release processing 10. Reverse clutch drive transmission
Releases exposure section feed roller nip. Transmits drive to pre-exposure feed motor (M531).
q Initialization/Drive transmission stop

processing
Start
Turns reverse clutch OFF.
Drives nip release motor. Start

M534
5
5.4.9
Yes Turns reverse clutch OFF.
Is a roller nip detected? S530
D535
No Does motor drive No

42 degrees?
M534 Drives to Waits 100 ms.
Yes nip release position.
M534
Stops drive.
M534 End
Malfunction S530: Reverse clutch

E-2437
w Drive transmission
End Turns reverse clutch ON.
Start
D535: Exposure Section Feed Roller Nip Sensor
M534: Roller Nip Release Motor
Turns reverse clutch ON.

S530
Waits 100 ms.
End
S530: Reverse Clutch
5-82
5.4 Paper Feed
11. Paper feed unit feed roller nip process
Turns ON or releases the paper feed unit feed roller nip.
q Initialization/Paper feed unit feed roller nip process
Turns roller nip ON.
Start
5
Nip ON? Yes 5.4.9
D523
No
Is nip released? No
D524
Yes
M516
M516
Is nip released? No
D524
Yes
No
Has 5 seconds passed?
Yes
Is nip released? Yes

D524
No
No
No Nip ON?
Yes
D523
Yes
No Stops drive.
M516
Yes Stops drive.

M516
Stops drive. Malfunction

M516 E-2466
Malfunction
E-2466
End
5-83
5.4 Paper Feed
w Paper feed section feed roller nip release process
Releases roller nip.
Start

M516
5
5.4.9
Nip ON? Yes

D523
No
No
Has five seconds passed?
No Is nip released? Yes

D524
No Yes
Has 5 seconds passed? Stops drive.
M516
Yes Stops drive.

M516
Stops drive. Malfunction

M516 E-2466
Malfunction
E-2466
End
5-84
5.4 Paper Feed
12. Sensor calibration
[Function] Performs hole sensor calibration to detect the hole in the paper.
[Element] PSD Sensor
[Start Condition]
1. When the magazine set is completed and there is no paper in the printer.
2. When the auto load is completed and the leading end of the paper is fed into the exposure feed section.
[End condition]
1. When the sensor calibration is completed normally.
2. When the sensor calibration is completed abnormally. 5
13. Loop jamming detection 5.4.9
[Function] Detects paper jamming in the loop*.
[Elements] D512 Loop 1 Sensor

D518 Loop 2 Sensor
D541 Loop 3 Sensor
D551 Loop 4 Sensor
D566 Loop 5 Sensor
M500 Magazine Rewind Motor
M513 Unit 1 Paper Feed Motor
M531 Pre-exposure Feed Motor
M532 Sub-scanning Motor
[Start Condition]
When the loop formation has started.
[End Condition]
1. Even if the paper is fed for the specified distance, the loop sensor still detects “no paper”.
2. Even if the next unit feeds the paper for the specified distance, the loop sensor still detects “paper exists” (at normal paper feed).
3. Even if the previous unit feeds the paper for the specified distance, the loop sensor still detects “paper exists” (at rewind).
*Loop amounts are shown below.
Name Min. (mm) Max. (mm)

Loop 1 150 250
Loop 2 250 850
Loop 3 180 600
Loop 4 (Reservoir) 750 800 (=8 m) Paper is fed into the processor when the paper length in the reservoir reaches 2.5 m.
Loop 5 150 150 + print size
5-85
5.5 Exposure Section
5.5.1 Start-up Initialization
START
Initializes serial connection.
5 Reads parameters from

EEPROM.
5.5.1
Polygon initialization
Mechanism Fan initialization

control
Shutter initialization
Warming-up judgement
→ Warming-up start
Warming-up
control
AOM temperature G-SHG temperature
warming-up warming-up R-LD warming-up B-SHG warming-up
R-LD exposure
initialization
SOS check
LD exposure
control
G-SHG exposure
initialization
B-SHG exposure
initialization
END
5-86
5.5.2 End Process
START
Light source deterioration

detection
5
Reads total exposure time. 5.5.2
END
5-87
5.5.3 Feed Start
F620: Exposure Section Anti-dust

Start Pressure Fan 1
Pressure Fan 2
Yes Has sensor Pressure Fan 3
status error occurred? S620: Laser Unit Anti-dust Shutter
Solenoid
No
5
Abnormally completed.
5.5.3
Measures pre-exposure
temperature.
SHG exposure
Waits 8 seconds.
No
Within specified current?
Yes
R-LD exposure
Turns ON anti-dust fan.
F620, F621, F622
SOS check
Environment method
calibration
No
Normally completed?
Sets size/position info.

Yes
Stops exposure.
Opens anti-dust shutter.

S620
Sets counter sub-scanning
start position.
Abnormally completed.
End
5-88
5.5.4 Feed Completion 5.5.5 Exposure Start
Start Start
No
Turns OFF R-LD. Is there a next print?
Yes
5
Sets counter sub-scanning 5.5.4
Turns OFF G-SHG.
start position. 5.5.5
5.5.6
Turns OFF B-SHG.

End
Closes anti-dust shutter.

S620 5.5.6 Exposure Completion
Start
Stops anti-dust fan.
F620, F621, F622
No
Is there a next print?
Interval monitoring Yes
Sets size/position info.

End

Pressure Fan 1
End
Pressure Fan 2
Pressure Fan 3
S620: Laser Unit Anti-dust Shutter
Solenoid
5-89
5.6 Processor
5.6.1 Processing Tank Section Temperature Control
There are five operation sequences for temperature control: no temperature control, heat-up in progress, heat-up completed, night
temperature control in progress and night temperature control completed. The diagram below shows the relationship between these
sequences.
Normal Temperature Control Night Temperature Control
5 Heat-up Completed
Night Temperature
Control Completed
5.6.1
Changes Temperature Setting
Reaches Set Temperature

STANDBY Switch ON
Cool-down Operation
Cool-down Operation
STANDBY switch ON Night Temperature
Heat-up in Progress
Changes Temperature Setting Control in Progress
Cool-down Operation Heat-up Start

Cool-down Operation
No Temperature
Control
5-90
5.6 Processor
5.6.2 Heat-up Operation
Heat-up start
Are solution levels in the No

processing tanks normal?
Yes Cool down

(See subsection 5.6.5.) 5
Yes
Heater OFF? To “No temperature control”
operation 5.6.2
No
Yes Current temperature < No

30 minutes passed?
Former temperature +1°C
No Yes
Error processing Former temperature is updated

E-2620 to E-2625 to current temperature.
Yes Current temperature >

Temperature setting +
Controlled range
No
Current temperature < No

Temperature setting
Yes
Heater ON Heater OFF
Current temperature >

Yes Temperature setting or *Upper limit:
Current temperature > Temperature P1: 0.3°C
setting upper limit* P2: 1.0°C
PS1: 1.0°C
No PS2: 1.0°C
PS3: 1.0°C
Sets temperature PS4: 1.0°C
control completion.
No Is heat-up of all processing

tank solutions complete?
Yes
No
Error occurred?
Yes
Cool down
End To normal operation
5-91
5.6 Processor
5.6.3 Normal Temperature Control
Normal temperature
control

Yes Cool down
5 (See subsection 5.6.5.)
Is current temperature No
5.6.3 within controlled range?
5.6.4
Yes

Temperature setting
Yes
Heater OFF
Heater ON
Error processing
E-2627 to E-2632
No Is temperature adjustment of all
processing tank solutions complete?
Yes
End
5.6.4 Pre-heat Operation
The pre-heat operation is designed to keep each solution temperature at 25°C when it might otherwise fall below freezing point. The pre-heat
operation can be set to occur up to two times between 23:00 and 4:00 for two hours each time.
Heat-up

Yes Cool down

Circulation pump ON

Sets heater OFF.
Control temperature
Yes
Sets heater ON.
End
5-92
5.6 Processor
5.6.5 Cool-down Operation
The temperature control of the processing tanks is stopped when the power or heater is turned OFF.
Start
All heaters OFF

5
5.6.5
5.6.6
Circulation pumps OFF
End
5.6.6 Heater Cooling Fan
Start
No Heater cooling fans

are ON?
F720, F722, F724, F726, F727
Yes
No Current temperature > Current temperature > Yes

Temperature setting + offset Temperature setting
Yes No
Turns ON solution heater Turns OFF solution heater

cooling fans of cooling fans of
processing tanks. processing tanks.
No Heater cooling fans Heater cooling fans No

are ON? are OFF?
Yes Yes
ON signal output for OFF signal output for h

heater cooling fans eater cooling fans
End
5-93
5.6 Processor
5.6.7 Monitoring Processing Solution Level
Start
*“Solution exists” continues

Are solution levels in the Yes for 15 seconds.
processing tanks normal*?
No To heat-up operation. “Normal

5 solution level” message is output.

5.6.7
processing tanks abnormal?
5.6.8
Yes
To “No temperature control operation”.

“Processor entry inhibition”
message is output.
“Processor tank levels lowered”

message is output.
W-2641 to W-2646
No Is there a heater
stop operation?
Yes
End
5.6.8 Normal Operation Drive Control
Start
Processor drive motor No

M710 ON requested?
Yes Processor drive motor No

M700 OFF requested?
Is the processor cover Yes

No or squeegee rack cover
closed?
D700, D701
Error processing Yes
W-2618: Processor Cover Drive motor OFF
W-2619: Squeegee Rack Cover
Drive motor ON Dryer heater OFF
End
5-94
5.6 Processor
5.6.9 Processing Rack/Dryer Rack Paper Width Guide Control
Start
No
Paper entry started?
Yes
5
· Paper width is different from the
previous time? No 5.6.9
· I/O check is executed?
· Processor cover is opened and closed?
· Error occurred in cutter section?
Yes

to home position.
Is slit detected within No

prescribed time?
Yes
Is the home position No

detected?
Yes Is the specified number No

of pulses output?
Stops move. Yes

to the specified width.
Is slit detected within No

prescribed time?
Yes
Stops motor drive.
Is the specified number
No of pulses output?
Yes
Error processing
E-2611
Stops move.
End
5-95
5.6 Processor
5.6.10 Replenishment Start-up Processing
Start
Opening was executed No

last time?
Yes
5
Displays “replenisher
5.6.10
cartridge opening” message.
I-2719
Allows replenisher
cartridge opening.
Saved parameters No
are available?
Yes Replaces saved parameters

with parameters received
from host.
Replenisher sequence No
is in error state?
Yes No
Replenisher sequence is
in cartridge opening state?
Error message
Yes
I-2718
To normal processing
I-2718
Waits for error recovery.
To opening sequence
5-96
5.6 Processor
5.6.11 Replenisher End Processing
Start
No
Inhibits opening?
Yes
5
Saves parameters. 5.6.11
5.6.12
End
5.6.12 Replenisher Level Adjustment
Priority q Operation q
Continue
P1-R empty replenishing until P2-RA/RB
Stop replenishment. lower limit detected.
Priority e Operation w
Continue To opening
Priority w P1-R empty replenishing until P2-RB sequence
lower limit detected.
(See subsection
All replenishers P2-RA empty
Priority r 5.6.18.)
exist. Continue with P1-R, P1-RB.
P2-RB empty Waits for P1-R.
Priority e Operation e
Continue
Priority w P1-R empty replenishing until P2-RA
lower limit detected.
P2-RB empty
Continue with P1-R, P2-RA Priority r
P2-RA empty Waits for P1-R.
5-97
5.6 Processor
5.6.13 Replenisher Amount Calculation
Start
No Is the notification
of paper entry into
processor received?
Yes
5
“No control” or “Replenish- No
5.6.13
ment in progress” state?
5.6.14
Yes Replenisher amount
calculation
No
Solution level adjustment
is in progress?
Yes P1-R replenisher amount is No
greater than specified value?
Replenisher amount Yes
calculation
Inhibits paper entry
to processor.
No W-2715
Replenisher amount has
exceeded output?
Yes
Switches to “Replenish”.
5.6.14 Replenishment Pump Control
Start
No
Is the replenisher pump
in operation?
Yes
Remaining time “-1” Sets operating time.*
No
Remaining time is “0”? Starts replenishment.
Yes
Stops operation.
End
*Replenisher pump operating time: 30 seconds.
5-98
5.6 Processor
5.6.15 P1-R Replenishment Control
Start
Receives notification of
paper entry into processor.
5
Replenisher amount 5.6.15
calculation
Replenisher pump operation
Upper level sensor No

is “full”?
Yes
Lower level sensor No

is “full”?
Yes
Number of pump Number of pump

operations “+1” operations “+1”
No Check replenishment Replenishment amount No

amount? is within range?
Yes Yes
No
Replenishment amount
is within range?
Yes
Error Message No
Both P2-RA and P2-RB
E-2700: to upper level sensor
are “empty”?
E-2703: between upper and lower sensors
Yes
Starts opening. To replenisher level adjustment

To error recovery sequence
(See subsection 5.6.18.) (See subsection 5.6.12.)
5-99
5.6 Processor
5.6.16 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control
Start
Receives notification of
paper entry into processor.
5
5.6.16
Replenisher amount
calculation
Replenisher pump operation
Upper level sensor No

is “full”?
Yes
Lower level sensor No

is “full”?
Yes
Number of pump Number of pump

operations “+1” operations “+1”
No Check replenishment No
Replenishment amount
amount? is within range?
Yes Yes
Replenishment amount No
Stops replenishment.
is within range?
Yes
Error Message* * Error message:
To upper level Between upper and

sensor lower level sensors
P2-RA E-2701 E-2704
To error recovery sequence P2-RB E-2702 E-2705
5-100
5.6 Processor
5.6.17 Evaporation Replenishment Control
q Timer operation
Timer operation
Yes
Evaporation replenishment
already performed? 5
No w 5.6.17
Starts evaporation
replenishment.
No
completed?
Yes Yes
Are replenisher and waste
solution levels normal?
Yes Is power switch
turned ON? No
No · Evaporation replenishment interruption

Processor initialization* · Replenisher level error
W-2735 (PS-R)
· Waste solution level error
W-2738: W1
W-2739: W2
To A of
“w Normal operation”
No Are solution levels of

Yes
Solution level error
W-2641 to W-2646
Starts heat up.
Timer operation is completed.

(Power OFF 1 minute after)
To next page
* Processor and cutter paper width guide initialization, cutter position initialization, and dryer section pre-heat and processing
rack drive operation.
5-101
5.6 Processor
From previous page
Yes
Power switch turned ON?
No
Processor initialization*
Has 3 hours passed since Yes

timer operation started?
5
No Timer operation completed.
5.6.17 To B of
(Power OFF)
“wNormal operation”
Yes
Heat-up completed?
No
Yes
Power switch turned ON?
No Has 30 minutes passed
since heat-up started? No
Processor initialization*
Yes
Yes
Is the temperature increase
more than 1:? Normal operation
No
Has 3 hours passed since No
Yes No
Is solution temperature
abnormal?
(Power OFF) Yes
· Temperature control stop · Temperature control stop

· Temperature increase error · Temperature error
E-2620 to E2625 E-2627 to E-2632
Timer operation completed.

(Power OFF 1 minute after)
5-102
5.6 Processor

Yes
Heat-up
5
5.6.17
No
Heat-up completed?
No Yes
Has 30 minutes passed
since heat-up started?
Yes
Yes
abnormal?
No · Stops temperature control.
Is the temperature Yes
· Temperature error
increase more than 1:?
E-2627 to E-2632
No
· Temperature control stop Has 3 hours passed since No e

· Temperature increase error timer operation started?
E-2620 to E-2625
Yes
e Yes
Is power switch turned ON?
Saves data on remaining amount

Interrupts heat-up. No
of evaporation replenishment.
Has 3 hours passed since No

Resumes evaporation
(Power OFF 1 minute after) Yes
replenishment.
Saves data on remaining amount

of evaporation replenishment.
w Timer operation is completed.

(Power OFF)
5-103
5.6 Processor
w Normal operation
Normal operation
Yes
already performed?
No
w
5
5.6.17 Starts evaporation
replenishment.
No
completed?
Yes
(From “q Timer operation”) A Are solution levels in the replenisher Yes
and waste solution tanks normal?
No Are solution levels in the
No
Yes · Evaporation replenishment interruption

Solution level error · Replenisher level error
W-2735 (PS-R)
· Waste solution level error
W-2738: W1
W-2739: W2
No
Normal solution level?
Yes
q
Starts heat-up.
(From “q Timer operation”) B
Yes
Heat-up completed?
No
Normal operation
No Has 30 minutes passed

Yes
Yes Is the temperature

No
· Stops temperature control.

E-2620 to E-2625
5-104
5.6 Processor

processing solutions normal?
Yes
Heat-up
5
5.6.17
No
Heat-up completed?
Yes
Has 30 minutes passed No
Yes
Yes
abnormal?
Yes No · Temperature control stops

Is the temperature
E-2627 to E-2632
No
· Temperature control stops

· Temperature increase error
E-2620 to E-2625
Have the replenisher and waste No
solution levels recovered?
Yes
Interrupts heat-up.
Resumes evaporation
replenishment
5-105
5.6 Processor
5.6.18 Auto Opening Control
Start
Is replenisher cartridge No Error message

loaded? W-2717
Yes
Is replenisher cartridge No Error message

5 box closed? W-2716
Yes
5.6.18
Does replenisher upper level sensor No Error message
(PS-R) detect “solution exists”? W-2713
Yes
Is upper and lower position Yes

detected?
No
Rotates replenisher cartridge

opening drive motor CW.
Is cartridge setting lower No

sensor interrupted?
Yes
No
Has the prescribed time passed?
Waits the prescribed time.
Yes
Stops replenisher cartridge

Error message
opening drive motor.
E-2712
No To error recovery sequence

Has prescribed time passed?
Yes
Do all lower level sensors except No

PS-R detect “solution exists”?
Yes
Do all lower level sensors No Error message
To cleaning/dilution sequence except PS-R detect “empty”? E-2710
(See subsection 5.6.19.) Yes
Rotates replenisher cartridge To error recovery sequence

opening drive motor CW. (See subsection 5.6.22.)
Is cartridge setting upper No

sensor interrupted?
Yes
No
Has the prescribed time passed?
Waits the prescribed time.
Yes

Error message
5-106
5.6 Processor
5.6.19 Cleaning/Dilution
Start
Cleaning/Dilution time Replenisher cartridge

calculation cleaning valve (P2-RB) closes.
5
Starts P1-R auto Replenisher stirring 5.6.19
washing pump. valve (P1-R) opens.
Has the prescribed time No No

Remaining time = “0”?
passed?
Yes Yes
Replenisher cartridge Replenisher stirring

cleaning valve (P1-R) opens. valve (P1-R) closes.
No No
Remaining time = “0”? Remaining time = “0”?
Yes Yes
Does upper replenisher No

Replenisher cartridge Error message
level detector (P1-R) detect
cleaning valve (P1-R) closes. E-2706
“solution exists”?
Yes
Replenisher cartridge No
Operation normal?
cleaning valve (P2-RA) opens.
Yes
No Does upper replenisher No Error message

Remaining time = “0”? level detector (P2-RA) detect
E-2707
“solution exists”?
Yes Yes
Does upper replenisher

Replenisher cartridge No Error message
level detector (P2-RB)
cleaning valve (P2-RA) closes. E-2708
detect “solution exists”?
Yes
Replenisher cartridge Calculation of next

cleaning valve (P2-RB) opens. pump output To error recovery sequence
No To replenisher cartridge cap

Remaining time = “0”? cleaning control
Yes
5-107
5.6 Processor
5.6.20 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control
Start

5
5.6.20 Is cartridge setting upper No
sensor interrupted?
D801
Yes
Has the prescribed time No
passed?
Yes
passed?
Yes
Error message
E-2712
To error recovery sequence

Starts auto cleaning pump.

passed?
Replenisher cartridge
Yes cleaning valve (P2-RA) closes.
cleaning valve (P1-R) opens.
cleaning valve (P2-RB) opens.

passed? No
Has the prescribed time
Yes passed?
Yes
cleaning valve (P1-R) closes.
cleaning valve (P2-RB) closes.
cleaning valve (P2-RA) opens.
Stops auto cleaning pump.

passed?
Yes To next page
5-108
5.6 Processor
From previous page

Is cartridge setting No
lower sensor interrupted?
D802 5
Yes 5.6.20
passed?
Yes
passed?
Yes
Error message
W-2712
To replenishment sequence

passed?
Yes

Is cartridge setting No
upper sensor interrupted?
D801
Yes
passed?
Yes
passed?
Yes
Error message
W-2712
“Opening completed”
is displayed.
5-109
5.6 Processor
5.6.21 Power Supply Restoration
Start
No To replenishment
Status flag = “Replenish”?
sequence
Yes
5
5.6.21 No
Status flag = “Opening”? To opening sequence
Yes
Status flag = No To cleaning/dilution

“Cleaning/Dilution”? sequence
Yes
Status flag = No To replenishment

Status flag = “Replenish”
“Cap cleaning”? sequence
Yes
Status flag “Error”
To error display sequence
End
5-110
5.6 Processor
5.6.22 Error Recovery Control
Start

5
Is cartridge setting 5.6.22
No
upper sensor interrupted?
D801
Yes
passed?
Yes
passed?
Yes
Error message
E-2712
Is replenisher box door No

open?
Yes
Is replenisher box door No

closed?
Yes
Does replenisher lower

No
sensor (P1-R, P2-RA, P2-RB)
detect “Empty”?
Yes Does replenisher lower
No
level sensor (P1-R, P2-RA, P2-RB)
To opening sequence
Yes
Doer replenisher upper level No

sensor (P1-R, P2-RA, P2-RB)
Yes
“Opening completed”
is displayed.
5-111
5.6 Processor
5.6.23 Pump Output Measurement
Start
Specified replenisher pump

30s ON.
PU740, PU741, PU742,
PU743, PU744, PU745
5 * Output of each replenisher pump:
5.6.23 Replenisher pump P1-R P2-RA P2-RB PS-R P1W P2W

End
5.6.24 Pump output (ml) 50Hz 116.0 116.0 116.0 116.0 116.0 116.0
60Hz 139.2 139.2 139.2 139.2 139.2 139.2
5.6.24 Waste Solution Process
Start
Does waste solution tank Yes

level change to “No solution”?
FS740, FS741
No
Resumes replenishment.
“No solution” is displayed.
Yes Does waste solution
tank level change to “Full”?
FS740, FS741
No
Waste tank solution level has
changed to “No solution”.
Is more than 300 ml No
replenished while “Full”
is detected?
Yes
Stops replenishment.
Waste solution
“Completely full” is displayed.
W-2738: W1
W-2739: W2
End
5-112
5.6 Processor
5.6.25 Dryer Section Temperature Control
There are five operation sequences for temperature control: no temperature control, heat-up in progress, heat-up completed, pre-heat in
progress and pre-heat completed. The diagram below shows the relationship between these sequences.
Dryer temperature control Pre-heat control
Heat-up completed Pre-heat completed

5

Changes Temperature Setting
5.6.25
Heat-up start 2
Cool-down operation
Pre-heat
Cool-down operation
Heat-up
Heat-up start 2
Heat-up in progress Pre-heat in progress
Heat-up start 1 Pre-heat start
Cool-down operation Cool-down operation
No temperature
control
Power ON Drive ON Drive OFF
Normal temperature control
Pre-heat
No temperature control
5-113
5.6 Processor
5.6.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control 5.6.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment
Start Start
No Does the current temperature No

Current temperature <
exceed temperature
Temperature setting
setting ±15:?
Yes Yes
5
Error processing
5.6.26 Dryer heater ON setting E-2633
5.6.27
No Current temperature <

Temperature setting
Dryer fan ON output
Yes
Cool down

Upper limit
No Heater (H760) OFF setting Heater (H760) ON setting
Does the temperature increase Yes

more than 1: in 1 minute?
No
Dryer fan (F760) ON output
Error processing
E-2626
Sets status change.
Dryer heater OFF.
End
5-114
5.6 Processor
5.6.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control 5.6.29 Dryer Section Cool-down Control
Start Start
No Dryer heater (H760) OFF.

Pre-heat set?
Dryer fan (F760) OFF.
Yes
5
Current temperature < No End 5.6.28
Lower limit 5.6.29
Yes
Sets temperature to
upper limit.
Heater (H760) ON setting
Dryer fan (F760) ON output

Upper limit
No
Does the temperature Yes

increase more than 1:
in 1 minute?
No
Error processing
E-2626
Dryer heater OFF.

Dryer fan OFF.
Sets status change.
End
5-115
5.6 Processor
5.6.30 Cutter Operation Sequence Outline
[Function] The cutter cuts paper fed from the dryer section to the print size.
[Elements] D770 Cutter entry paper sensor

D771 Cutter loop guide plate open sensor
D772 Cutter loop guide plate close sensor
D773 Cutter loop sensor
D775 Paper leading end sensor
D777 Cutting punch hole sensor
M772 Cutter feed motor
5 M773 Cutter motor
[Start condition]
5.6.30 When the prescribed time has elapsed after the paper has entered the processor.
[End condition]
When all paper in the cutter section has been fed out.
5-116
5.6 Processor
5.6.31 Paper Leading End Insertion
Start
Does cutter entry No

D770
Yes Has at least 4 minutes and
30 seconds elapsed since paper
No 5
has entered the processor?
Moves loop guide plate 5.6.31
Yes
Processor section
jamming error
W-2601
passed?
Yes
No
Has loop guide closed?
Yes Malfunction
E-2610
Does paper leading No

end sensor detect paper?
D775
Yes No
passed?
Paper feed motor operates
at processor speed. Yes
M772
To next page
5-117
5.6 Processor
From previous page
Does cutting/sorting hole No

punch sensor detect paper?
D777/D784
Yes No
passed?
Paper feed motor
stops operating. Yes
A
5 M772
Cutter section jamming error

5.6.31 W-2602
Moves loop guide in

opening direction.
passed?
Yes No
passed?
No
Has the loop guide opened? Yes
Yes No
Has loop guide plate opened?
Malfunction
E-2610
Yes
Malfunction
To paper cutting E-2610
End
5-118
5.6 Processor
5.6.32 Paper Cutting
Start
Does cutter loop sensor No

detect paper?
D773
Yes
passed?
No
5
5.6.32
at normal speed. Yes
M772
To paper trailing end output
Does cutting/sorting hole Yes

punch sensor detect punch hole?
M777/784
No Paper feed motor reduces
speed from normal to 666 pps.
M772
No Has paper feed motor
output the max. number
of pulses?
Yes Paper feed motor stops operating
after feeding paper to cutting position.
M772
Paper feed motor
stops operating.
M772
Cutter motor operates
to cut paper.
Hole detection error M773
E-2608
Is the home position detected? No

D773
Yes Cutter operation error

E-2607
Paper feed motor operates (666 pps) to
feed paper 3 mm and then stops operating.
M772

to cut paper.
M773

D773

E-2607
5-119
5.6 Processor
5.6.33 Paper Trailing End Output
Start
Does cutter entry No

D770
A Yes
5 Moves loop guide in
closing direction.
5.6.33

passed?
Yes
No
Has loop guide closed?
Yes
Malfunction
E-2610
Paper motor operates

at normal speed.
M772
Does cutting/sorting
hole punch sensor detect No
a punch hole?
D777, D784
Yes Has paper feed motor output No
the max. number of pulses?
M772
Paper feed motor reduces
Yes
speed from normal to 666 pps.
M772
Paper feed motor
stops operating.
M772
Paper feed motor stops
operating after feeding paper
to cutting position.
M772 Hole detection error
E-2608
To next page
5-120
5.6 Processor
From previous page
Does cutting/sorting hole No

punch sensor detect paper?
D777/D784
Yes Paper feed motor operates at

normal speed and stops
operating when paper is output.
Cutter motor operates M772
to cut paper. 5
M773
5.6.33
End

D773
Yes
Cutter operation error
E-2607
(666 pps) to feed paper 3 mm
and then stops operating.
M772

to cut paper.
M773

D773
A
E-2607
(666 pps) to feed paper 50 mm
and then stops operating.
M772
5-121
5.6 Processor
5.6.34 Cutter Section Paper Width 5.6.35 Cutter Section Loop Guide Operation
Guide Operation
Start Start
Moves paper width Does cutter entry paper No

guide to home position. sensor detect paper?
M771 D770
5 Yes
5.6.34
Calculates number of No
5.6.35 Does loop guide operate?
pulses from home position
to paper size.
Yes
Moves paper width guide.

Drives loop guide motor.
M771
Has a loop guide No

End
open/close been detected?
D771/D772
Yes
No
Operation time out?
Yes
Error processing
E-2610
Stops loop guide motor.
End
5-122
5.6 Processor
5.6.36 Cutter Section Exit Guide Operation
Start
Has large-size tray Yes

been set?
No No
Feed length > 102 mm 5
Yes Yes 5.6.36
Feed length > 190 mm?
No Drives cutter exit guide.

M774

D778
Yes
No
Time out?
Yes
Error notification
E-2612
Stops drive.
M774
End
5-123
5.6 Processor
5.6.37 Sorter Operation Sequence
[Function] The sorter sorts the prints according to order.
[Elements] D779 Horizontal sorter stop position sensor

D780 Slant sorter stop position sensor
M775 Horizontal sorter drive motor
M776 Slant sorter drive motor
[Start Conditions]
1. When the print for which a sort mark has been detected by the punch hole sensor reaches the sorter slot.
5 2. When 50 prints have collected in a slot.
[End Conditions]
5.6.37 1. When the sorter tray is moved one slot.
5.6.38 2. When the sorter tray is moved two slots (when the print size is 152 mm or shorter and feed length is longer than 190 mm) (one-order-
skipped sorting).
3. When the sorter stop position cannot be detected after the elapse of a specified time.
5.6.38 Sorter Operation
Start
Horizontal sorter drive

motor starts.
M775
Does sensor (D779) No

detect a stop position?
Yes Does sensor detect

Yes
a stop position?
Horizontal sorter drive D779
motor stops. No
M775
Horizontal sorter drive
motor stops.
Slant sorter drive M775
motor starts.
M776
Sorter malfunction error
E-2606
Does sensor detect No
a stop position?
D780
Yes Does sensor detect Yes
a stop position?
Slant sorter drive D780
motor stops No
M776
Slant sorter drive
motor stops
M776
Is it one-order-skipped
Yes sorting?*
No Sorter malfunction error

E-2605
End * Operation ends when the slant sorter has done two sort operations in order to do
one-order-skipped sorting.
5-124
5.7 Densitometer
5.7 Densitometer
RESET (Power ON)
Error ERROR LED lights.

ERROR SUM CHECK (EEPROM parameter damage.)

Initialization
(Density measurement head start point detection error) 5
(White board density measurement error (amplifier offset maladjusted,
or lamp burnt out))
Is the [START] button pressed?

No
Yes

Chart insertion
(Paper is not detected.)

Insertion direction check
(Patch P0 is not black, or the blank next to it is not white.)
Width (narrow or wide) check

(Patch P2 is read.)
Calibration (white board is read.)
Insertion direction image position

offset correction
Cyan density measurement (Patch C11 to C0)

Density measurement head is
moved to the measurement point.
Cyan density measurement

Density check (Reversed density order of patches)
To magenta density measurement
5-125
5.7 Densitometer
From cyan density measurement
Magenta density measurement (Patch M11 to M0)

5 Magenta density measurement

Density check (Reversed density order of patches)
Yellow density measurement (Patch Y11 to Y0)

Yellow density measurement

Density check
(Reversed density order of patches)
Magazine ID measurement
(Patch ID0 to ID5)

Ending processing
(Paper sensor detects paper feed error of more than ±3mm.)
Data sending
Normal completion
* Refer to the “Calibration Chart Dimensions” on page 5-127 for the patch number.
5-126
5.7 Densitometer
Calibration Chart Dimensions
A B
Reference Point 5
C
Allowances for calibration

D
1. A – B ±2mm
2. C = 63.5 + 2mm, –1.5mm
3. D = 59.7 ± 1.5mm
4. E = 167.6 ± 1.5mm
Paper
(in the case of a 3.5 in. width)
White
5-127
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS
6.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................. 6-2
6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ........................................... 6-3
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection ....................................................................... 6-4

6.3.1 Paper Feed Roller Cleaning .......................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning .......................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Scanner ND Filter Inspection ......................................................................... 6-4 6
6.3.4 Paper Reservoir Cleaning .............................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor Cleaning ........................................................... 6-5
6.3.6 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor Cleaning ........................................................... 6-5
6.3.7 Rack Feed Roller Inspection .......................................................................... 6-6
6.3.8 Rack Drive Helical Gear Lubrication .............................................................. 6-6
6.3.9 Processor Lubrication .................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.10 Dryer Rack Cleaning ...................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.11 Dryer Rack Lubrication .................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.12 Heater Cooling Fan (F720 to F727) Cleaning ................................................ 6-8
6.3.13 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement .............................................................. 6-8
6-1
6.1 Maintenance Schedule
Schedule Every Day

Pre-operational Post-operational Every Week Every Month Every 3 Months
Item Check Check
Mirror Box Clean
Auto Film Carrier NC240AG Clean
Auto Film Carrier NC135AG Clean
135ANL Negative Tray Clean
135ANL Feed Rollers Clean
135ANL Negative Feed Guides Clean
135ANL Negative Receiver Box Clean
Scanner
Magnetic Heads of Auto Film Carrier NC240AG Clean
6 Light Source Section Air Filter Clean
135ANL Negative Catcher Clean
Film Cooling Air Compressor Filter Clean
Light Source Optical Filters Clean
Scanner Lamp Replace
Reflector Replace**
Punching Waste Discard
Printer Section Air Filters Clean
Printer
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Execute*
Ink Ribbon Cassettes Replace***
Control Strip Process/Check
Crossover Racks Wash
Squeegee Rack Wash
Cutting Waste Discard
Replenisher Cartridge Replace
Waste Solution Collect
Processor PS-R Replenisher Add
Processing Solution Heater Cooling Fan Air Filters Clean Replace**
Dryer Air Filter Clean Replace**
Circulation Filters Replace
Replenisher Pump Output Amount Measure/Set up
Processing Racks Wash
Densitometer White Board Clean
*: Message to indicate execution will appear on the screen one month after initial installation and every three months.
**: Every Year
***: Or Every 65 thousand Prints
6-2
6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table
Implementation Period (Every)

6 months 1 Year 2 Years 3 Years Refer to Subsection:
Item
ND Filter Clean 6.3.3
Film Cooling Air Filter Inspect/Replace 6.3.13
Scanner 135ANL Anti-static Brush Inspect Replace 25.4.9, 25.5.6
135ANL Loop Guide Entrance Anti-static Brush Replace 25.3.1/4
Light Source Section Air Filter Replace —
Paper Feed Rollers Clean 6.3.1
Laser Unit Air Filter Replace 16.1.4
Paper Reservoir Clean 6.3.4
Sub-scanning Belts Replace 16.3.19/20
Back Printer Heads Replace 17.1.39
6
Printer
Printer Section Air Filters Replace —
Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor Clean 6.3.5
Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor Clean 6.3.6
Unit 2 Feed belt Replace 17.1.14
Cut/Sort Punch Unit Replace 15.4.12
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzles Clean 6.3.2
Rack Feed Roller Inspect 6.3.7
Dryer Rack Clean 6.3.10
Solution Heater Cooling Fan Clean 6.3.12
Solution Temperature Sensors Calibrate 9.7.3
Paper Width Guides Inspect 19.6.10
Cutter Replace 23.1.21
Processing Rack Herical Gears Lubricate 6.3.8
Processor
Dryer Rack Chain, Gears and
Lubricate 6.3.11
Paper Width Guide Shafts
Drive Chain Lubricate 6.3.9
Drive Section Gears Lubricate 6.3.9
Paper Width Guide Drive Gears Lubricate 6.3.9
Punch Hole Sensor Gain Value Calibrate 23.1.24
Drive Motor Gear Head Replace 19.5.3
PS1 to PS4 Processing Rack Bearings Replace 19.5.3/6
6-3
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection
6.3.1 Paper Feed Roller 8. Wipe clean the feed roller of unit 2 6.3.2 Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning form the outside using a cloth Washing Nozzle
moistened with water while turning the
knob.
Cleaning
1. Rewind the paper and turn off the
system by performing the post- Knob 1. Open the replenisher box door and
operational check. remove the replenisher cartridge.
2. Remove the paper magazine. 2. Clean the washing nozzles using a

toothbrush.
3. Open the printer doors.
Washing Nozzles
4. Wipe clean the feed roller of the paper
feed unit using a cloth moistened with
water while turning the knob.
6 Toothbrush
6.3.1 Paper Feed Unit Unit 2 Feed Roller

Knob Feed Roller GD1385
6.3.2
6.3.3 9. Wipe clean the feed roller of unit 2
form the inside using a cloth
moistened with water while turning the
knob.
EZ758
Unit 2 Feed Roller
3. Reinstall the replenisher cartridge and
close the replenisher box door.
GD1382
5. Wipe clean the feed roller of unit 1 6.3.3 Scanner ND Filter

using a cloth moistened with water Inspection
while turning the knob.
Unit 1 Feed Roller 1. Perform the menu “43B ND Dust
Check” (see subsection 9.4.8).
Knob
GD1387 2. If dust adheres to the ND filter, clean
by following the steps below.
10. Reinstall the roller shaft and two coil
springs. 1) Remove the CCD unit (see
subsection 13.1.6).
11. Reinstall the printer side upper cover.
2) Blow off any dirt or dust adhering
12. Wipe clean the feed roller of unit 4 to the ND filter using the blower
using a cloth moistened with water brush.
while turning the knob.
Knob
Blower Brush
GD1383 ND Filter
Unit 4 Feed Roller
6. Remove the printer side upper cover

(see subsection 17.1.1).
7. Remove the two coil springs and the

roller shaft.
Springs (2)
Knob EZ1330
GD1386
3. Reinstall the CCD unit. (see
subsection 13.1.6)
Roller Shaft
4. Perform the “Scanner Correction” of
the pre-operational check menu.
GD1384
6-4
6.3.4 Paper Reservoir 6.3.5 Cutter 1 Punch Hole 6.3.6 Cutter 2 Punch Hole
Cleaning Sensor Cleaning Sensor Cleaning
1. Remove the printer front right cover 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection
(see subsection 17.6.1). and set the built-in circuit breaker and 17.4.1).
the main power supply to OFF.
2. Remove the two screws and open the 2. Remove the two screws securing the
reservoir door. 2. Open the printer left and right doors. bracket and open the harness clamp.
Screws (2)
3. Loosen the rear-side screw, remove Clamp
the front-side screw and move Unit 3
toward Unit 4.
Unit 3 Screw (Loosen)

6
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
Reservoir Door Screws (2) Bracket

GD1392
Screw (Remove) GD1722
3. Clean the inside of the reservoir using

3. Wipe clean the dustproof glass with a
the vacuum cleaner.
clean dry cloth or cotton swab.
Toothed Washer
Reservoir Dustproof Glass

GD1173
4. Wipe clean the dustproof glass with a

cotton swab
Dustproof Glass
GD1723
GD1393
4. Reinstall the bracket and tighten the

4. Close the reservoir door and reinstall
two screws.
the printer front right door.
5. Reinstall Unit 4.
Cotton Swab 6. In the menu 45V “PSD Sensor

Information”, calibrate the sensors
GD995A (see subsection 9.6.23).
5. Reinstall Unit 3.
6. In the menu 45V “PSD Sensor

Information”, calibrate the sensors
6-5
6.3.7 Rack Feed Roller Inspection 6.3.8 Rack Drive Helical Gear
Lubrication
1. Wash the crossover and processing racks with warm water.
1. Remove the No.1 to No.3 crossover
2. Check that the rollers rotate smoothly by turning them by hand. racks.
3. Check that the paper passes the rack smoothly without deflection by turning the 2. Lift the P1-1 and P1-2 processing
sprocket by hand. racks and apply recommended grease
to the drive gears.
4. Inspect the roller surfaces for damage.
Recommended Grease: FUJI
5. Check the coil springs on the racks for deterioration. MINILAB GREACE FOR CHAIN
AND GEAR (P/N 891G02003) or
Silicone foam ø14 equivalent
6 Gray hard ø21
Processing Rack
6.3.7 Beige soft ø21
6.3.8 Beige soft ø21
Gray soft ø21 Drive Gears
Black hard ø21
Gray hard ø42
White soft ø42
Black hard ø30
Beige soft ø30

GD1394
Brown hard ø30
3. Return the P1-1 and P1-2 processing
Beige soft ø48
racks and reinstall the No.1 and No.2
crossover racks.
4. Install the contamination prevention

cover over the P1 processing tank.
5. Remove the squeegee rack, No.4 to

No.9 crossover racks.
6. Lift up each of the processing racks

P2-1 to PS4 in order and apply
grease.
IMPORTANT:
Take special care to prevent overflow
of the P2 solution into the P1 solution.
7. Reinstall the No.4 to No.9 crossover

racks and squeegee rack.
8. Remove the contamination prevention

cover and reinstall the No.3 crossover
rack.
GD654
6. If the soft rollers on the racks are slimy, wipe them clean with a cloth moistened with
warm water.
7. Replace parts if necessary.
8. Reinstall the processing and crossover racks.
6-6
6.3.9 Processor Lubrication
Apply the recommended grease to the processor gears and chains as shown.
Recommended Grease: FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND GEAR (P/N 891G02003) or equivalent
Variable Width Guide Drive Unit Gears
6
6.3.9
6.3.10
Drive Gears
Drive Chains
Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shalt Gears
GD1634
6.3.10 Dryer Rack Cleaning
1. Remove the dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.3).
2. Wipe clean the rollers on the dryer rack using a cloth moistened with water.
NOTE: Pay special attention to the inlet four Teflon-coated rollers because they are subject to be soiling.
Dryer Rack
Teflon-coated Rollers (4)
GD1632
3. Reinstall the dryer rack.
6-7
6.3.11 Dryer Rack Lubrication 6.3.13 Film Cooling Air Filter

Replacement
Apply the recommended grease to the dryer rack chain, gears and shafts as shown.
1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker
Recommended Grease: FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND GEAR (P/N and the main power supply.
891G02003) or equivalent
2. Remove the air filter section cover.
Width Guide Metal Bevel Gears (4) Width Guide Spur Gears
6
6.3.11
6.3.12
6.3.13 Air Filter Section Cover
EZ928
Width Guide Threaded Shafts (4)
3. Remove the wing bolt and the air filter
case.
Wing Bolt Air Filter Case

Rack Drive Chain EZ929
4. Replace the air filter with a new one.

Air Filter
Width Guide Bracket Shafts (2)

GD1633
6.3.12 Heater Cooling Fan (F720 to F727) Cleaning
1. Remove the solution heater cooling fans (see subsection 20.2.3).
2. Wipe clean the fans with a cloth moistened with warm water.
EZ930
Fan
5. Reinstall the removed parts.
EZ1328
3. Reinstall the solution heater cooling fans.
6-8
7. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS
Refer to the separate Service Manual “MESSAGES AND ACTIONS”.
7-1
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
8.1 Simple Upgrade ................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Update .................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Reinstallation ...................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4 New Installation ................................................................................................. 8-10
8.5 Reversion ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit .......... 8-15
8
8-1
8.1 Simple Upgrade
In the “Simple Upgrade”, you can upgrade the FRONTIER390 • The “Procedure Selection 1[C-001]” screen appears.
System software(A1) and Variety Print Software(B1) by following
the simple guidance messages in the screen.
Before the upgrade, make sure that:
1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly connected.

2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not broken.
3) The power cable is plugged into a live outlet.
4) The printer power switch is turned to STANDBY.
5) The scanner is turned ON.
NOTE: For the “Simple Upgrade”, it is assumed that the former

version of “Variety Print(B1)” software is already installed.
If it is not installed, the “Simple Upgrade” screen does
not appear. In this case, use the normal installation
procedure.
NOTE: 1) Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive with its printed

surface facing up.
8 2) To open the tray of the CD-ROM drive, press the eject
5. Select “User version up” and click [Next>].
button.
• The “Starting Update[C-010]” dialog box appears.
1. Insert the FRONTIER 390 System(A1) Disk into the CD-
ROM drive.
FRONTIER 390 System Disk(A1)
6. Click [Yes].
• The updating process starts.
GD1621 • Copying starts.
2. Perform the post-operational checks.
3. Turn ON the scanner’s START switch.
• The installer is started and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
• Upon completion of the upgrade, the “Update

Completion[C-080]” dialog box appears.
4. Click [OK].
NOTE: • If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER390

System(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety
Print Service (B1)” installation screen appears.
8-2
8.1 Simple Upgrade
7. Remove the FRONTIER 390 System (A1) Disk from the CD- • The “SETUP” dialog box appears.
ROM drive.
11. Click [OK].

• The system is restarted.
GD1622
NOTE: When the message “E-2305 Abnormal printer

8. Click [OK].
backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
click [OK] to clear it.
• The “Setup Completion [C-090]” dialog box appears.
8
9. Click [OK].
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “[L-

003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print Service screen
appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the

“Setup” dialog box appears.
10. Click [Cancel].
NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software

is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the
Variety Print Service (B1).
8-3
8.2 Update
In the “Update”, the FRONTIER 390 System Software(A1) is • The Procedure Selection 1 [C-001]” screen appears.
upgraded and the printer’s parameter data is reinstalled.
IMPORTANT:
It is not necessary to delete template data. But if more than
50MB of free space is not available in the hard disk, delete the
template data.

ROM drive.
8 5. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next >].
• The “Procedure Selection 2[C-001]” screen appears.
GD1621 6. Select “Update”, and click [Next>].
3. Press the scanner’s START switch.
• The installer starts and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
• The “Starting Update[C-010]” dialog box appears.
7. Click [Yes].
4. Click [OK].
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER 390 System

(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print
Service (B1)” installation screen appears.
• The message “Capturing the version information of the

printer” appears.
• The free disk space for installation is checked.
NOTE: If enough free space is not available, the error

message “Insufficient disk space on drive D.
Installation not performed.” is displayed. In this case,
delete unnecessary files or template data files, then
start installation again.
8-4
8.2 Update
• The “File Copy[C-020]” screen appears. 11. Click [OK].
• The control software is transferred to the printer.
• The former version is turned out.
• Copying starts.
8. Check version information, and click [Next>]. 8

• The “Installation Media Selection[C-030]” screen appears.
9. Select “Install from CD (scanner/printer software update)”,

and click [Next>].
• The message “Turning out inheritable information”
appears.
• The message “Registering information into registry.”

appears.
• The “Inherited Data Transport Medium Selection[C-050]”

screen appears.
12. Select “Inherit data from former version of application in HD”,

and click [Next>].
NOTE: If downloading only the printer software, select

“Install from hard disk (only printer software)”.
• The “Confirmation[C-040]” dialog box appears.
• The message “Restoring inheritable information” appears.

10. Make sure that:
• After the end of the process, the “Update Completion [C-
1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly
080]” dialog box appears.
connected.
2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not

broken.
8-5
8.2 Update
13. Remove the FRONTIER 390 System(A1) Disk from the CD- • The “Setup” dialog box appears.
ROM drive.
17. Click [OK].

GD1622
14. Click [OK]. backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
• The “Setup Completion [C-090]” dialog box appears.
8
15. Click [OK].

appears.

16. Click [Cancel].

8-6
8.3 Reinstallation
The reinstallation procedure is performed after the main control 4. In the “Run” screen, click “Browse”, and in the “Browse”
unit is replaced. screen, select the CD-ROM drive into which you inserted the
system disk, then click [Open].
NOTE: Make sure that the printer’s (LP2500P) breaker is turned
ON and the power switch is turned to STANDBY.
1. Press the scanner's START switch.
• The Windows NT Desktop screen is displayed.
8
5. In the “Browse” screen, double-click “EZ171” folder, then
double-click “EZSetup”.

ROM drive.
6. Make sure that “N:\EZ171\Setup.exe” is displayed in the

“Open” box, then click [OK].
GD1621
3. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.
8-7
8.3 Reinstallation
7. Click [OK]. 11. Click [Yes].
• The “Procedure Selection(A-001)” screen appears. • The control software is downloaded to the LP2500P.
NOTE: If you select “NO”, downloading of the control

software is skipped.
• The reinstallation is started.
8
8. Select “Re-installation” and click [Next].
• Upon completion of the reinstallation, the “FD
Confirmation” dialog box appears.
9. In the “Starting Re-installation” dialog box, click [Yes].
• The “Information(A-110)” dialog box appears. 12. Click [Yes].
13. Click [Yes].
10. Prepare the “Scanner’s Backup FD” and the “Printer’s

Backup FD”. Click [OK].
NOTE: The system checks the hard disk storage space. If

sufficient storage space is not available, an error
message appears.
• The LP2500P control software is checked. If the versions

of the software on the CD and LP2500P are different, the
“Download Confirmation” dialog box appears.
8-8
8.3 Reinstallation
14. Insert the “Scanner Backup” FD into the FD drive, and click 20. Click [OK].
[OK].
21. Select “Shut Down” from the “Start” menu.
15. Click [Yes].
8
• The “Shut Down Windows” dialog box appears.
16. Remove the “Scanner Backup” FD from the FD drive and
insert the “Printer Backup FD.
17. Click [OK].
• Upon completion of the printer and scanner data backup,

the “Re-installation Completion(A-140)” dialog box
appears.
22. Select “Restart the computer?” and click [Yes].
18. Remove the “Printer Backup” FD from the FD drive. • The system restarted.
19. Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive, and click NOTE: When the message “E-2305 Abnormal printer
[OK]. backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
press [OK] to clear it.
• The “Setup Completion(A-150)” dialog box appears.
8-9
8.4 New Installation
The new installation procedure is performed before the 4. In the “Run” screen, click “Browse”, and in the “Browse”
adjustment of the scanner at the factory. In the field, this screen, select the CD-ROM drive into which you inserted the
installation is performed only when the scanner’s backup FD is system disk, then click [Open].
not found when replacing the main control unit.
1. Turn ON the scanner's START switch.
• The Windows NT Desktop screen is displayed.
8
5. In the “Browse” screen, double-click “EZ171” folder, then
double-click “EZSetup”.

ROM drive.
6. Make sure that “N:\EZ171\Setup.exe” is displayed in the

“Open” box, then click [OK].
GD1621
3. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.
8-10
7. Click [OK]. 10. Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
• The “Procedure Selection(A-001)” screen appears.

GD1622
11. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion(A-030)” dialog box appears.

8
8. Select “New Installation” and click [Next].
12. Click [OK].
13. Select “Shut Down” from the “Start” menu.
9. In the “Starting New Installation” dialog box, click [Yes].
NOTE: The system checks the hard disk storage space. If

sufficient storage space is not available, an error
message appears.
• The installation is started.
• The “Shut Down Windows” dialog box appears.
• Upon completion of the installation, the “New Installation

Completion(A-020)” dialog box appears.
8-11
14. Select “Restart the computer?” and click [Yes]. 19. Perform the post-operational checks, then shut down the
system and restart it.
• The system is restarted and only “3 Post-operational
Check” and “4 Setup and Maintenance” are displayed in • The system is restarted.
the selection box in the Main Menu.
8
• The message “E-1119 Focus position adjustment for each backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
carrier not performed.” Appears. click [OK] to clear it.
15. Click [OK] to clear the message.
16. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “1 System Operation

Setup and Check” - “F Installation Information Setup” using
the “SE2” mode.
17. In the “41F Installation Information Setup” screen, select

“ON” for “Printer” in the “Scanner” setting area.
• The “Printer” setting area is displayed in the right-hand

side area of the screen.
18. If necessary, set other information.
NOTE: For details on the settings, see “41F Installation

Information Setup” in the “9 Maintenance Menu”.
8-12
8.5 Reversion
This procedure reverts the system software to the previous 5. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next >].
version.
• The “Procedure Selection 2[C-002]” screen appears.
NOTE: Prepare the Printer’s Backup FD, then perform the “Data
Backup(417)” to overwrite the FD with the backup data. 6. Select “Reversion to previous version”, and click [Next>].

ROM drive.
8
GD1621
7. In the “Starting Version Back [C-100]” dialog box, click [Yes].
3. Press the scanner’s START switch.
• The installer starts and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
NOTE: If enough free space is not available, the error

message “Insufficient disk space on drive D.
Installation not performed.” is displayed. In this case,
delete unnecessary files or template data files, then
start installation again.
• The “Confirmation[C-110]” message appears.
4. Click [OK].
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER 390 System 8. Make sure that:
(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print
Service (B1)” installation screen appears. 1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly
connected.
• The Procedure Selection 1 [C-001]” screen appears.
2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not
broken.
9. Click [OK].
• The control software is transferred to the printer.
• Reversion starts.
• The message “Registering information into registry.”

appears.
8-13
8.5 Reversion
• The “Inserting Backup FD” screen appears. 16. Click [OK].
NOTE: If “There is no disk in the drive.” Dialog box appears,

click [Ignore] to clear the box.

appears.

10. Click [YES].
• The “Information” dialog box appears.
11. Insert the Printer Backup FD into the floppy disk drive.
12. Click [OK].
• The “Version Back Completion(C-120)” dialog box

appears.
17. Click [Cancel].

• The “Setup” dialog box appears.
13. Remove the FRONTIER 390 System(A1) Disk from the CD-
ROM drive.
18. Click [OK].

FRONTIER 390 System Disk(A1) backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
GD1622
14. Remove the Printer Backup FD from the floppy disk drive.
15. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion (C-130)” dialog box appears.
8-14
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit
Perform the system software installation and the data download

after replacing the main control unit.
1. Prepare the following:
1) New main control unit
2) Scanner Backup FD
3) Printer Backup FD
4) Installer CD
2. Replace the main control unit.
3. Turn the printer power switch to “STANDBY”, and turn ON

the built-in circuit breaker of the printer.
4. Press the START switch of the scanner.
• The main control unit is started up and the Windows NT

8
screen appears.
5. Perform the reinstallation.(See section 8.3.)
6. Restart the system.
7. In response to the “E-2305 Abnormal printer backup

memory” message, click [OK].
• Data is downloaded from the scanner’s main control unit

to the printer.
NOTE: “Initializing printer.” is displayed for about 10 minutes

during the processor upgrade.
NOTE: If a communication error occurs during the

intialization of the printer, loading of the data will fail.
If this happens, perform the following steps.
1. Restart the scanner and printer.

2. Open the “45U Data Download”.
3. Select “All” for item, and click [OK].

All data files are downloaded to the printer.
8-15
9. MAINTENANCE MENU
9.1 Operational Procedure .................................................................................... 9-4

9.1.1 User Identification ............................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41) .................................................. 9-5

9.2.1 Production Information 1 (411) ......................................................................... 9-5
9.2.2 Production Information 2 (412) ......................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Timer Setup (414) ............................................................................................. 9-6
9.2.4 Error Information Check (415) .......................................................................... 9-7
9.2.5 Installation Information Confirmation (416) ....................................................... 9-8
9.2.6 Data Backup (417) ............................................................................................ 9-8
9.2.7 Clear Error Log (41E) ....................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.8 Installation Information Setup (41F) .................................................................. 9-9
9.2.9 Shipping Information Reference (41G) ............................................................. 9-10 9
9.2.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) ........................................................... 9-10
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) ........................................................ 9-11

9.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (421) ............................................................................ 9-11
9.3.2 Processor Temperature Check (422) ................................................................ 9-12
9.3.3 Control Strip Processing (423) .......................................................................... 9-13
9.3.4 Print Size Setup (424) ....................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.5 Monitor Adjustment (426) .................................................................................. 9-16
9.3.6 Image Correction Setup (42C) .......................................................................... 9-16
9.3.7 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) ............................................... 9-17
9.3.8 Special Film CH Setting (42E) .......................................................................... 9-17
9.3.9 Film Type Setting (42F) .................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.10 Monotone Correction Setting (42G) .................................................................. 9-18
9.3.11 Paper Condition Setup (42J) ............................................................................ 9-19
9.3.12 Shop Logo Regist/ Delete (42K) ....................................................................... 9-19
9.3.13 Template Regist/Delete (42L) ........................................................................... 9-20
9.3.14 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) ................................................................ 9-20
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ...................................................... 9-22

9.4.1 Lamp/Reflector Replacement (431) .................................................................. 9-22
9.4.2 Lamp Position Adjustment (432) ....................................................................... 9-25
9.4.3 135 Light Source Aperture Table (433) ............................................................. 9-25
9.4.4 120 Light Source Aperture Table (434) ............................................................. 9-26
9.4.5 Input Check (435) ............................................................................................. 9-26
9.4.6 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area (436) ............................................................ 9-26
9.4.7 I/O Check (43A) ................................................................................................ 9-27
9.4.8 ND Dust Check (43B) ....................................................................................... 9-27
9.4.9 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) ......................................................... 9-28
9.4.10 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) ....................................................................... 9-29
9.4.11 CCD Data Display (43E) ................................................................................... 9-30
9.4.12 Working Information (43F) ................................................................................ 9-32
9.4.13 Lens Registration (43G) .................................................................................... 9-32
9-1
9.4.14 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) .......................................................................... 9-33

9.4.15 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) ............................................................. 9-34
9.4.16 Focus Calibration (43K) .................................................................................... 9-34
9.4.17 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) .............................................................. 9-35
9.4.18 Spectral Calibration (43P) ................................................................................. 9-35
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) ......................................................... 9-37

9.5.1 NC135AG Input Check (441) ............................................................................ 9-37
9.5.2 NC240AG Input Check (442) ............................................................................ 9-37
9.5.3 MFC10Y Input Check (443) .............................................................................. 9-37
9.5.4 135ANL Input Check (444) ............................................................................... 9-37
9.5.5 135ANL Function Setup (445) .......................................................................... 9-38
9 9.5.6 135ANL Negative Catcher Section Cleaning (446) ........................................... 9-38
9.5.7 NC135AG Sensor Calibration (44A) ................................................................. 9-39
9.5.8 NC240AG Sensor Calibration (44B) ................................................................. 9-39
9.5.9 Installation Information Display (44C) ............................................................... 9-40
9.5.10 Installation Information Setup (44D) ................................................................. 9-40
9.5.11 NC135AG I/O Check (44E) ............................................................................... 9-40
9.5.12 NC240AG I/O Check (44F) ............................................................................... 9-41
9.5.13 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) ................................................................................ 9-42
9.5.14 MFC10Y Monitor Image Position Adjustment (44H) ......................................... 9-42
9.5.15 NC135AG Working Information (44J) ............................................................... 9-44
9.5.16 NC240AG Working Information (44K) .............................................................. 9-45
9.5.17 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) ................................................................. 9-46
9.5.18 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) ................................................................... 9-47
9.5.19 NC135AG Machine Data Setup (44Q) .............................................................. 9-48
9.5.20 NC240AG Machine Data Setup (44R) .............................................................. 9-48
9.5.21 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) ................................................................ 9-49
9.5.22 135ANL Sensor Calibration (44T) ..................................................................... 9-49
9.5.23 135ANL I/O Check (44U) .................................................................................. 9-50
9.5.24 135ANL Information Setup (44W) ..................................................................... 9-50
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) .......................................................... 9-51

9.6.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451) .................................................................. 9-51
9.6.2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) ............................................................... 9-51
9.6.3 Test Pattern Printing (453) ................................................................................ 9-52
9.6.4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) ....................................... 9-53
9.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (456) .................................................................... 9-54
9.6.6 Printer Input Check (457) .................................................................................. 9-54
9.6.7 Image Position Fine Adjustment (458) .............................................................. 9-55
9.6.8 Printer I/O Check (45A) .................................................................................... 9-55
9.6.9 Laser Exposure Check (45C) ........................................................................... 9-56
9.6.10 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D) ................................................................................ 9-56
9.6.11 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E) ............................................................................ 9-56
9.6.12 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) ............................................................................. 9-57
9-2
9.6.13 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) .............. 9-57
9.6.14 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ........ 9-57
9.6.15 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) ................................................ 9-58
9.6.16 Laser History Display (45K) .............................................................................. 9-59
9.6.17 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L) ............................................... 9-60
9.6.18 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) ....................................................... 9-60
9.6.19 Back Printer Test (45N) ..................................................................................... 9-62
9.6.20 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ............................................................... 9-62
9.6.21 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) .............................................. 9-62
9.6.22 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) .................................................................... 9-63
9.6.23 Data Saving (45T) ............................................................................................. 9-63
9.6.24 Data Download (45U) ....................................................................................... 9-64
9.6.25 PSD Sensor Information (45V) ......................................................................... 9-64 9
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46) ................................................... 9-65
9.7.1 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461) .................................... 9-65
9.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (462) ............................................................. 9-66
9.7.3 Processor Temperature Calibration (463) ......................................................... 9-66
9.7.4 Replenisher Rate Setting (464) ........................................................................ 9-67
9.7.5 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465) ....................................................... 9-68
9.7.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup (466) ..................................................... 9-68
9.7.7 Processor Input Check (468) ............................................................................ 9-68
9.7.8 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Fine Adjustment Value Setting (469) ......... 9-69
9.7.9 Processor Mechanical Fine Adjustment (46A) .................................................. 9-69
9.7.10 Processor I/O Check (46B) ............................................................................... 9-70
9.7.11 RC50D Measurement/Installation (46C) ........................................................... 9-71
9.7.12 Processor Operation Data Display (46D) ......................................................... 9-71
9.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) ....................................................... 9-71
9.7.14 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46F) .......................................................... 9-72
9.8 Option Adjustment/Maintenance (47) .......................................................... 9-73

9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A) .................................................................................... 9-73
9.9 Special Operations (49) ................................................................................... 9-74

9.9.1 Paint (49A) ........................................................................................................ 9-74
9.9.2 Explorer (49B) ................................................................................................... 9-74
9.9.3 Command (49C) ............................................................................................... 9-74
9-3
9.1 Operational Procedure
9.1.1 User Identification 3. Select the desired item from the item list and press its [+]
button.
NOTE: For mouse operations, see the instruction manual “Basic
Operations”. • The sub-item list appears
1. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” from the main menu.
9 4. Move the cursor to the desired item and click [START].
9.1.1 2. Select “SE2” for the user name and enter “7777” for the • Each screen appears.
password, and click [OK].
5. Perform the operation by following the instructions on the
NOTE: • “SE1” user name is prepared for the user who screen.
manages printing quality. The password is “6666”.
• “SE2” user name is prepared for the service 6. Upon completion of the setup and maintenance operations,
engineer. click [OK] to perform processing or [Cancel] to quit the
screen.
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

screen.
7. Click [END].
8. Operation returns to the main menu.
• The “Setup and Maintenance” screen appears.
9-4
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41)
9.2.1 Production Information 1 (411) 4. Click [OK].
[Selection] • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

screen.
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup
and Check” → “ 1 Production Information 1”
9.2.2 Production Information 2 (412)
[Procedure]
[Selection]
This procedure displays the production information. The data
can be cleared in this menu.
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup
and Check” → “2 Production Information 2”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the production information. The data

can be cleared in this menu.
9
9.2.1
9.2.2
1. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Digital Image” or “All” from

the “Input Type” box.
• The information of the input type is displayed.
2. Record the production information.

1. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Digital Image” or “All” from
3. To clear the data, follow the steps below.
the “Input Type” box.
1) Select “Input Type” to be clear.
• The information of the input type is displayed.
2) Click [Clear].
2. Record the production information.
3. To clear the data, follow the steps below.
1) Click [Clear].
3) Click [OK].
• The data are cleared and clearing date appears.
2) Click [OK].
9-5
• The data are cleared and clearing date appears. 3. Set the preheat timer by following the steps below, if
necessary.
IMPORTANT:
The ON time for a night-time preheating operation must not
overlap with the ON time of the weekly timer since night-time
preheating takes priority and shuts down all power when it is
set OFF.
If, for instance, the calendar timer is set to 5:00 and night-
time preheating is turned ON at 3:30, all the power will be
shut down two hours later at 5:30.
NOTE: Night-time preheating is usually conducted when the

room temperature drops below 10°C (50°F) at night
and the temprature is not controlled for 8 or more
hours.
1) Select “YES” for “Preheat Setting”.
4. Click [OK]. • The 1st and 2nd preheat setting boxes appears.

9 screen.
9.2.3
9.2.3 Timer Setup (414)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and

Check” → “4 Timer Setup (414)”
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the present date/time, timer ON date/

time and preheat setup times.
2) Move the cursor to “1st Preheat” and enter the time.
3) Move the cursor to “2nd Preheat” and enter the time.
NOTE: • For preheating once only, set the same time for
both the first and second times.
• Select “NO” when the preheat timer is not
used.
• The second preheating timer is ignored if the
first preheat time and second preheat time
overlap.
<Example> 1st. pre-heat time: 2:00

2nd. pre-heat time: 3:00
With the above settings, night-time preheating
will occur from 2:00 to 4:00 (2 hours).
1. To update “Present Date/Time”, change the date and time, 4. Click [OK].
and click [OK].
NOTE: To cancel the update, click [Cancel]. screen.
2. To change the timer date and time, enter a check in the day
of the week boxes and enter the time in the “Timer ON Date/
Time Setting” box.
9-6
9.2.4 Error Information Check (415) • The log file is read out and the latest information is
displayed on the screen.
[Selection]

check” → “5 Error Information Check (415)”
[Procedure]
The system error log is listed up in order of date and time.
3. Click [Log Information].
• Operation returns to the “Error log information” screen. 9

9.2.4
1. Click [Accum. Info].
• Accumulated error information is displayed in order of

code and frequency.
4. Click [OK].
2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

screen.
9-7
9.2.5 Installation Information Confirmation 9.2.6 Data Backup (417)

(416)
[Selection]
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and check” → “7 Data Backup (417)”
check” → “6 Installation Information Confirmation (416)”
[Procedure]
[Procedure]
This procedure makes a backup of the data stored on the
This procedure displays the scanner and printer installation hard disk of the main control unit when data, indicated on the
information. data sheet located inside the printer left door, are changed.
The backup floppy disks are used when reinstalling or
reversion of the system software.
9
9.2.5
9.2.6
1. Check the installation information.

1. Prepare a new floppy disk for data backup when backing up
2. Click [Option]. scanner or printer data.
• The “Optional Device Reference” dialog box appears. 2. Insert the diskette into the floppy drive of the main control
unit.
3. Move the cursor to the “Destination” box and select

“Scanner”, “Printer” or “Pricing Unit”.
NOTE: Perform the data backup for the pricing unit when
pricing unit data are changed. Data are backed up
from the pricing unit to the hard disk of the main
control unit.
4. Click [OK].
• The “Making the backup of the data” message appears.
3. Check if PU800BA, External File I/O and F-DI Lab-in Built-in

are used. 5. Upon completion of the backup, click [Cancel].
4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

screen.
• The dialog box disappears.
5. Click [OK].

screen.
9-8
9.2.7 Clear Error Log (41E) 1. Set the delivery date, startup date, lab ID and type for the
scanner.
[Selection]
2. Select “ON” for “Printer” and set the delivery date, startup
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation date”, and max No.of sheets for the printer.
Setup and Check” → “E Clear Error Log”
NOTE: The type, process and sorter for the printer are
[Procedure] changed on the operation panel of the printer.
This procedure clears the system error and printer error 3. Click [Option].
information.
9
9.2.7
4. Select “YES” or “NO” for “External File 9.2.8
I/O”, and “RC50D Use”.
5. Click [OK].
1. Select the item to be cleared and click [Clear].
• The selected information is cleared.
6. Click [OK].
2. Click [OK].
• The following message appears.
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
9.2.8 Installation Information Setup (41F)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation

Setup and Check” → “F Installation Information Setup”
[Procedure]
7. Click [OK].
This procedure sets the installation information for the
scanner and printer. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen.
8. Perform the post-operational checks to stop the system and

then restart the system.
• The new settings are activated.
9-9
9.2.9 Shipping Information Reference (41G)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation

Setup and Check” → “G Shipping Information Reference”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the shipping information.
1. The model, serial no. and shipping date are displayed.
9
9.2.9
9.2.10
2. Click [OK].

screen.
9.2.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)
See the “Installation Manual” of the DI film import/export

software.
9-10
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42)
9.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (421) 4. Click [Print].
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and

Check” → “1 Paper Condition Setup”
[Procedure]
When new paper is to be loaded, do this procedure to set up

the new paper condition.
1. Install the paper magazine to be set up.
Magazine Lock Lever

• After about 5 minutes, a condition setup print is fed out to
the large-size tray.
9
9.3.1
GD1304
2. Move the large-size tray to its use position. 5. After the condition setup print has come out, press the [Dens
Measure] button.
Large-size Tray
GD1378
3. Select “[421] Paper Condition Setup”.

6. Adjust the guide of the densitometer according to the width
of the condition setup print.
Densitometer Guide
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize condition setup data. EZ634
NOTE: If an error occurs, press the orange [RESET] switch.
9-11
7. Insert the condition setup print into the densitometer. • The density measurement result disappears.
NOTE: If the “Density Measurement Result” is not

Densitometer
acceptable, the message shown appears. Perform
steps 4 to 9 again until the result becomes OK.
10. Click [Cancel].

Condition Setup Print
EZ635 screen.
9 8. Press the [START] button on the densitometer.

9.3.2 Processor Temperature Check (422)
9.3.2
[Selection]

Check” → “2 Processor Temperature Check”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processing solution

temperatures.
[START] Button
EZ636
• The measurement is automatically started and the density

measurement result is displayed.
1. Check the processing solution temperatures.
9. Click [OK]. 2. Click [OK].

screen.
9-12
9.3.3 Control Strip Processing (423) 4. Fold over the open end of the inner bag to prevent fogging of
the unused control strips.
[Selection] Emulsion Surface
Upward
Check” → “2 Processor Temperature Check”
[Procedure]
The processing solution performance is evaluated by

processing a control strip, measuring the processed strip
densities, and comparing them to the reference strip
densities.
■ Control Strip Preparation
1. Take the control strip package out of the freezer, and leave it
for about one hour to bring it up to room temperature.
Control Strip
GD1774
5. Take the control strip holder out of the dark box. 9

6. Place the control strip holder on the leader splice stand. 9.3.3
Control Strip Holder
Leader Splice Stand
1841
2. Take the inner bag out of the control strip package and place
it seam side up on to the control strip holder and put them
both in the dark box. Close the dark box cover.
Seamed Surface Control Strip Inner Bag
GD1310
7. Place the control strip leader so that its trailing end (the one
without a vinyl guide) contacts the end of the control strip
and then join the ends with splicing tape for negative film
processing.
IMPORTANT:
• Use the specified splicing tape. Use of improper tape may
cause a paper jam.
• Cut the splicing tape slightly shorter than the width of the
control strip so that it does not protrude. If the tape
protrudes or is too short, a paper jam may result.
Control Strip
EZ740 Control Strip Leader
3. Insert your hands into the sleeves of the dark box, take one
control strip out of the inner bag, and insert it into the control
strip holder, as shown in the figure. Push it in until it reaches
the far end.
Splicing Tape
Vinyle Guide
GD1311
9-13
8. Stick splicing tape to the reverse side as well and press 5. Move the large-size tray to its position and remove the
down on the surface of the tape to ensure proper adhesion. processor cover.
Control Strip Leader 6. Place the control strip holder on the crossover racks by
aligning its first rib with the grooves in the No.2 crossover
rack.
Rib
Splicing Tape
GD1312
■ Control Strip Processing

9 1. Open the “2) Print Condition Setup and Check” menu. (See
Grooves in No.2 Corssover Rack
GD1313
9.3.3 section 3.1.)
7. Insert the end of the control strip leader into the No. 1
2. Select “[423] Control Strip Processing”. crossover rack until the line lies below the index line on the
crossover rack.
3. Proceed to the “[423] Control Strip Processing” screen.
Control Strip Leader
Line
Index Line
GD1314
4. Click [OK] to start the control strip processing.

8. Turn the roller guide toward the dryer side.
Roller Guide
• The message “Set Holder” appears on the operating panel

on the printer.
GD1315
9-14
9. Reinstall the processor cover. 9.3.4 Print Size Setup (424)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition

Setup and Check” → “4 Print Size Setup”.
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the print size to be used.
Processor Cover
GD1306
10. Press the [ENTER] key on the operating panel on the printer.
• The processor starts and the control strip processing

begins. 9
• After about 4 minutes, the control strip is fed out to the 9.3.4
large-size tray.
• Normally, sizes are registered as shown in the following

table.
Upper Lower Left Right

No. Name Width Length Border BD BD BD BD Display
1 89C 89 127.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
2 89P 89 254.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
3 89H 89 158.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
4 102C 102 152.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
5 102P 102 254.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
6 102H 102 178.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
11. Remove the control strip holder from the port in the
7 3R 127 89.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
processor cover.
8 3R 127 89.0 BD 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 OFF
9 5R 127 178.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
12. Click [OK].
10 5R 127 178.0 BD 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 OFF
11 4R 152 102.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
• The message is cleared.
12 4R 152 102.0 BD 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 OFF
13 6R 152 203.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
13. Click [Cancel].
14 6RW 152 216.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
15 8R 203 254.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
• Control returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.
16 8RW 203 305.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
17 A5 210 148.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
18 A4 210 297.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ON
19 8R 254 203.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
20 10R 254 305.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
21 10RW 254 381.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
22 89DSC 89 119.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
23 102DS 102 136.0 BL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OFF
NOTE: • The sizes with 254 mm wide and/or feed length

more than 305 mm are for Digital Image output and
cannot be printed.
• The feed length range for No.1 (89C) to No.6
(102H) is limited to 82.5 mm to 254.0 mm.
1. Select the print size to be modified or registered from the list.
• ID[No.], Name, Width, Length, Border, four BD values and

[Display(ON/OFF)] are displayed.
9-15
2. Move the cursor to the print size to be used, select “ON” or 9.3.6 Image Correction Setup (42C)
“OFF” shown in the “Display”.
This menu is used to enable image correction condition setting
• If you select “ON”, the description appears in the list. If you by selecting “Yes” for each item.
select “OFF”, nothing appears in the list.
[Selection]
3. Click [OK].
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” Setup and Check” → “C Image Correction Setup”
screen.
[Procedure]
9.3.5 Monitor Adjustment (426) Set the image correction type for each input device and input
type.
[Selection]
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
B/W negative
Check” → “6 Monitor Adjustment (426)”
[Procedure]
9 This procedure sets the color balance of the monitor for each
input type.
9.3.5
9.3.6
1. Set the seven items in the Hyper ACCS frame.
2. Click [OK].

screen.
1. Make a print without color and density correction from a
normal film.
2. On the printing screen, select master channel (0) for custom

setting and correct the pre-scanning image so that it
matches the print.
3. Multiply each of the correction values by the “Key Step Width

Setup” value of the master channel (0) in menu “42M
Custom Setting Regist/Delete”. Then enter the results in the
respective boxes on the screen.
4. Click [OK].

screen.
9-16
9.3.7 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting 9.3.8 Special Film CH Setting (42E)
(42D)
[Selection]
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Check” → “E Special Film CH Setting”
Setup and Check” → “D Fine Adjustment of the Print
Mag.Setting” [Procedure]
[Procedure] This procedure to register or delete channel for the DX code

of special monotone films (which use color developer). Also
This procedure sets the fine adjustment values for the print to fine adjust the slope (for color) and balance (for black &
magnification for the film size and print size. white).
9
9.3.7
9.3.8
1. Select the carrier, mask and film types. <Registration>
NOTE: Before channel registration, register the DX code and

Carrier type NC135AG MFC10Y
film name in the menu 42F “Film Type Setting” screen.
Mask type 135F 135F
135HV 135HV 1. Enter the channel number to be registered in the “CH No.”
135P 135P box. There are 128 film channels.
135H 135H
2. Enter the film name in the box next to the “CH No.” box.
240
135 Mount 3. Select “Register”.
240 Mount
110 • The registered channel is added to the window of “Print
(2)” - “Special Film Channel Setting (5)” of the menu bar in
126
the printing screen that appears when the DX code cannot
6 × 4.5
be read.
6×6
6×7 4. Select the graininess control level in the “Graininess Control”
6×8 box.
6×9
Graininess Control Level: Normal
High
2. Select the print size. Low
3. Select “Rate” 5. Select the tone in the “Tone” box.
4. Click [OK]. Tone: Color

Sepia 1
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” Sepia 2
screen. B/W
6. Set “Balance/Slope” for color and the “Balance” for black &
white.
7. Enter the DX code registered in the menu 42F “Film Type

Setting” screen into the “DX Code” box.
8. Click [Register].
• The DX code is listed in the “Registered DX Code” box.
9-17
9. Click [OK]. 9.3.10 Monotone Correction Setting (42G)

• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” [Selection]
screen.
<Deleting> Check” → “G Monotone Correction Setting”
1. Select the channel number to be deleted in the “CH No.” [Procedure]

box.
Do this procedure to fine adjust the balance values for the
• The DX code and name are displayed in the “Registered correction type indicated in the “Monotone Correction” dialog
DX Code” box. box for menu bar “Image Correct (4)” - “Monotone Correct
(3)”.
2. Click [Delete].
• The DX code is deleted.
3. Click [OK].

screen.
9
9.3.9 Film Type Setting (42F)
9.3.9
9.3.10
[Selection]

Check” → “F Film Type Setting”
[Procedure]
1. Select the correction type to be adjusted in the “Correction”
box.
Register the DX code and name of special monotone film
(which use color developer) film in this mode.
Correction: B/W
Sepia 1
1. Pre-scan the film to be registered in the printing screen.
Sepia 2
User B/W
2. Click the input source information icon.
User Sepia 1
• The “Input Source Information” dialog box appears.
2. Change the balance values.
3. Record the DX code.
3. Click [OK].
4. Proceed to the menu 42F screen.
screen.
5. Enter the DX code recorded in the “DX Code” box.
6. Enter the film name (30 letters maximum) in the “Film Name”
box.
7. Click [OK].

screen.
9-18
9.3.11 Paper Condition Setup (42J) 9.3.12 Shop Logo Regist/ Delete (42K)
[Selection] [Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and
Setup and Check” → “J Paper Condition Setup”. Check” → “K Shop Logo Regist/ Delete”
[Procedure] [Procedure]
This procedure sets the paper condition setup method. This procedure registers or deletes the shop logo that
appears on the index prints.
9
9.3.11
9.3.12
1. Select “YES” or “NO” for the ambient variable correction.

<Registration>
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the master magazine registration.
1. Insert the floppy disk containing the shop logo to be
3. If “YES” is selected in step “2”, set the ID, width, paper and registered into the floppy disk drive of the main control unit.
type for the master magazine.
2. Click [Add].
NOTE: • Ambient variable correction: When there is a
sudden change in temperature during the day, it • The “Media Selection” dialog box appears.
influences the color development process of color
papers. To keep the constant printing quality in that
condition, select “YES”.
• Master magazine registration: Paper condition
setup must be performed for all papers if “NO” is
selected.
4. Click [OK].

screen.
3. Select “FD” and click [OK].
• The shop logo is displayed in the dialog box.
4. Click [OK].
• The shop logo is registered.
5. Click [Cancel].
6. Click [OK].

screen.
9-19
<Deleting> 4. Click [Cond. Edit].
1. Select the shop logo to be deleted. • The “Initial Value Selection” dialog box appears.
2. Click [Delete].
• The shop logo is deleted from the list.
3. Click [OK].

screen.
9.3.13 Template Regist/Delete (42L)

5. Select the number to be used as the initial value.
See the “Installation Manual” of the optional Variety Print Service
software. 6. Click [OK].
• The “Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel appears.

9.3.14 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M)
9
[Selection]
9.3.13
9.3.14 “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and
Check” → “M Custom Setting Regist/Delete”
[Procedure]
The 65 (0 + 64) custom conditions can be set up for each

input type.
The custom conditions can be selected on the printing
screen.
7. Set up the “Correct Level”, “Tone Adjust” and “Hypertone”.
<Correct Level>
Tone Correction Color/Density Correction Hypertone
Full Correction: Yes Yes ON
Tone Fixing: No Yes OFF
Condition Confirm: No No OFF
<Tone Adjust>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
1. Select the input type to be set up.
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
<Hypertone>
Black & White Negative Hypertone Process: Yes No
Highlight Level: Lower
2. Select number to be set up.
Low
Normal
3. Enter the name for the back print of custom setting in the High
“Name” box.
Higher
Shadow Level: Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Mode: Mode 1 (Normal Hypertone Mode)
Mode 2 (Preceding acceptance rate by
improving rear light and high
contrast)
9-20
8. Click the “Key Step Width/BL-SL” tab. <Grain Control Process>

Modulation Roughness
• The “Key Step Width/BL-SL” panel appears. Normal Up Up
Lower ↑ ↑
No Down Down
<Sharpness Large-size Setup>

Sharpness can be set up individually for magnification entered in
the “Magnification” box or higher.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2
12. Click the “High-def/Density Correct” tab.
• The “High-def/Density Correct” panel appears.
9. Set up the “Key Step Width” and “Balance/Slope”.

9
<Key Step Width Setup>
C, M, Y: Normally enter “8”. 9.3.14
Dc, Dm, Dy: Normally enter “15”.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter “0”.
Change setting only when the whole slope condition is offset.
10. Click the “Sharpness/Grain Control” tab.
• The “Sharpness/Grain Control” panel appears.
13. Set up the High-definite”, “Density Correction” and

“Saturation”.
<High Definite Process>

If this selection box is not displayed, select “YES” for “RP Tone
Print” or “Face Express” in menu 42C.
RP Tone
RP Tone Print: Yes No
Level: Low
Normal
High
Face Express: Normal High
<Density Correction>
Level: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.)
High (Tungsten correction is increased. )
Type: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.)
11. Set up the “Sharpness”, “Grain Control Process” and
Strobe Pref.
“Sharpness Large-size Setup”.
Back light Pref.
Saturation: –9 to +9 (Color vividness is set up. Normally enter
<Sharpness>
“0”.)
Sharpness Level: Low 3
Low 2
14. Click [OK].
Low 1
Normal
• The condition panel disappears and operation returns to
High 1
the “42M Custom Setting Regist/Delete” screen.
High 2
High 3
• The “Status” changes to the “Use”.
Under Level: –2
–1
15. To delete the custom condition, select number to be deleted
0
and click [Delete].
(Sharpness can be set only individually for under level.)
16. Click [OK].

screen.
9-21
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43)
9.4.1 Lamp/Reflector Replacement (431) • After about five minutes, the screen shown below appears.
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “1 Lamp/Reflector Replacement”
[Procedure]
If the scanning lamp burns out or output deteriorates, replace

it as follows.
! CAUTION
Wait until the scanning lamp cools down.
IMPORTANT:
To prevent fingerprints, always wear clean gloves when handling
the lamp (bulb) and reflector.
2. Release the latch and open the light source section cover.
9
9.4.1
Latch
Light Source Section Cover

EZ870
1. Click [OK].
• The print lamp turns off and lamp cooling count down 3. Disconnect the safety thermostat connector and lamp
starts. connector by releasing the locks.
Safety Thermostat
Connector Lock
Lock
Lamp Connector
GD1421
9-22
4. Remove the two screws securing the lamp unit. 7. Remove the reflector by loosening the screw.
Lamp Unit 8. Remove the scanning lamp.
9. Use a soft dampened cloth to gently wipe any dirt off the
reflector. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace the reflector.
Scanning Lamp Reflector
Screws
EZ873 GD1423
5. Shift the lamp unit to the front and remove it. 10. Push the reflector against the three stoppers, and tighten the
Lamp Unit
screw to secure the retaining plate. 9
Stoppers
9.4.1
EZ874
6. Remove the First IR filter bracket by loosening the screw. Screw Retaining Plate
EZ589
First IR Filter Bracket
11. Install a new lamp.
Screw
GD1422
EZ581
9-23
12. Reinstall the first IR filter bracket and tighten the screw. 15. Connect the two connectors.
Safety Thermostat Connector
Pins
Screw

EZ1261
Lamp Connector
13. Install the lamp unit by engaging its notches with the two EZ877
pins of the filter unit.
16. Secure the light source section cover with the latch.
Pins
9 Latch
9.4.1
Notches
Lamp Unit
EZ875 Light Source Secton Cover
EZ878
14. Hang the lamp unit as shown below, and tighten the two
screws.
17. Click [OK].
• The machine initializes the scanning lamp, and updates

the replacement date.

screen.
18. Perform:
- Lamp Position Adjustment (see subsection 9.4.2).
- 135 Light Source Aperture Table (see subsection 9.4.3).
- 120 Light Source Aperture Table (If 120-size films are
printed with the MFC10Y multi-film carrier) (see
subsection 9.4.4).
Screws - Scanner Correction and Upkeep Printing of the Pre-
operational Check.
EZ876
9-24
9.4.2 Lamp Position Adjustment (432) 9.4.3 135 Light Source Aperture Table (433)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “2 Lamp Position Adjustment” Maintenance” → “3 135 Light Source Aperture Table”
This procedure adjusts the scanning lamp position. This procedure makes a light source aperture table for 135
film.
1. Install the 135 mirror box and auto film carrier NC135AG or
NC240AG.
2. Proceed to the “[433] 135 Light Source Aperture Table”

screen.
9
9.4.2
9.4.3
1. Turn the adjusting screws at the front and right side of the
light source section using a 3 mm hexagonal wrench so that
the green graph on the screen becomes maximum.
NOTE: If the red graph area increases, turn the adjusting

screw in the opposite direction.
Front Adjusting Screw 3. Click [Start].

Hexagonal Wrench
(3 mm) • The machine prepares and displays the light source
aperture table.
4. Click [OK].
Right Side Adjusting Screw

EZ935
2. Click [OK]
3. Perform
- 135 Light Source Aperture Table (see subsection 9.4.3).
- 120 Light Source Aperture Table (If 120-size films are
printed with the MFC10Y multi-film carrier) (see
subsection 9.4.4).
- Scanner Correction and Upkeep Printing of the Pre-
operational Check.
9-25
9.4.4 120 Light Source Aperture Table (434) 9.4.5 Input Check (435)
Maintenance” → “4 120 Light Source Aperture Table” Maintenance” → “5 Input Check (435)”
This procedure makes a light source aperture table for 120 This procedure displays the current status of each section.
film after replacing the scanner lamp or reflector.
9
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
NOTE: Refer to section 10.1 for input parts location.

1. Install the 120 mirror box and multi-film carrier MFC10Y
without the film mask. 1. Click [OK].

screen.
9.4.6 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area (436)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “6 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area”
[Procedure]
EZ1736
This procedure checks for dust or dirt on the film carrier side
2. Proceed to the “[434] 120 Light Source Aperture Table” of the optical system.
screen.
3. Click [Start].
• The scanner creates the 120 light source aperture table

and displays the result on the screen.
4. Click [OK].

screen.
1. Click [OK].
9-26
• The scanner checks for dust and dirt on the carrier side of 1. Press any buttons to specify an operation.
the optical system.
• The selected operation is performed.
• The message below appears if no dust or dirt is detected.
2. Click [OK].

screen.
9.4.8 ND Dust Check (43B)
[Selection]
2. Click [OK]. “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “B ND Dust Check”
screen. [Procedure]
3. If dust or dirt is detected, follow the steps below. This procedure scans the ND filter and check for dusts on it.
1) Clean the diffusion plate. 9

2) Check that there is no foreign matter in or around the 9.4.7
film mask. 9.4.8
3) Clean the mirror box.
4) Perform “Scanner Correction” in the pre-operational

check menu.
9.4.7 I/O Check (43A)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “A I/O Check” 1. Click [OK].
[Procedure] • The dust check is started.
This procedure displays the status of motors, solenoids and • The following messages appears, depending on whether
sensors. dust is found or not.
2. Clean the ND filter if dust is found (see subsection 6.3.3).
NOTE: Refer to section 10.1 for input and output parts

location.
• The status of each part is displayed in real-time. 3. Click [OK].
NOTE: Refer to section 10.1 “I/O Parts Diagram” for parts • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
location. screen.
9-27
9.4.9 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) 5. Install the NC240AG auto film carrier.
[Selection] 6. Select the “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” screen.

Maintenance” → “C Carrier Focus Position Adjustment
[Procedure]
This procedure adjusts the carrier focus position of the

carrier already registered.
1. Install the NC135AG auto film carrier and select the “Carrier
Focus Position Adjustment” screen.
7. Click [Run] for “Cartridge”.

9
9.4.9
8. Insert the negative cartridge into the carrier.
Chart position: Position of charts on both sides of the mask

Film position: Film focus position
2. Click [Run].
3. Insert a piece negative with four to six frames into the carrier.
• The focus position adjustment starts.
9. Select the “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” screen.
4. Click [Regist].

screen.
9-28
10. Click [Run] for “Strips”. 1. Install the NC135AG film carrier.
2. Click [AF].
• The auto focus is started and the position of the focus

pulse in the front and rear sides of the carrier are
displayed.
11. Insert the negative strip into the carrier.
9
9.4.10
3. Install the NC240AG film carrier.
4. Click [AF].
12. Click [Regist].
• The auto focus is started and the position of the focus
pulse in the front and rear sides of the carrier are
screen.
displayed.
13. Make sure focus condition by making actual prints.
5. Click [OK].
If necessary, change the “Focus offset” values in the menu
44Q, 44R or 44S “Machine Data Setup” and found vest focus
by making prints in printing screen.
screen.
9.4.10 Carrier Inclination Display (43D)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “D Carrier Inclination Display”
[Procedure]
This procedure checks the status of the carrier inclination.
NOTE: If value is more than 100, replace the film carrier.
9-29
9.4.11 CCD Data Display (43E)
Use this menu to confirm the CCD settings when there is a CCD-
related imegularity or when lines appear in prints due to dust or
dirt on the CCD.
[Selection] [Procedure]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/ Do this procedure to read the CCD data and display the
Maintenance” → “E CCD Data Display” values in real-time.
Display time setting boxes

Brightness correction
9 button
Brightness correction ON
9.4.11 switch
Graph display switches
Graph stop button Darkness correction button
Real-time graph display buttons Darkness correction ON
Cursor position button button
Cursor position setting box Reference data creation
Switch to move the cursor to the button
center Dust check button
Display scaling buttons S/N value display button
Y-axis display range setting box Save button
Lens magnification setting box End button
Auto focus button Window open button
All screen display button Number of signal/noise samples setting box
NOTE: Entered data become effective when the Screen right/left moving buttons Quantity of light setting box (same as the light
cursor is moved to another field. source aperture)
1. Click [ ]. 2. When changing the pulse position of the motor, click [Status
change] to open the “Status Change” dialog box.
NOTE: The pulse position of the motor should not be

changed except when there is a special instruction
from FUJI FILM.
9-30
3) With the film carrier removed, click [Reference create].

Item Function
Light source aperture Sets the pulse position of the light
source aperture motor (0 to 130)
Balance filter Sets the positions (negative or
positive) of the balance filter motor
Shutter Sets the pulse position of the
shutter motor
Conjugate length Sets the pulse position of the
conjugate length motor
(0 to 11,000) 4) Click [OK].
Lens Sets the pulse position of the lens

motor (0 to 800)
NOTE: Click [Home shift] to shift the motor to the home

position.
5) Click [OK].
3. To check the S/N inspection results, click [S/N value disp.].
9
9.4.11
6) Click [OK].
7. Click [Dust Check] to check for dust on the carrier mask.

4. To perform the brightness correction, click [Bright correct].
Select “Bright cor. ON” to display the brightness correction NOTE: Install the film carrier when performing the dust
data. check.
5. To perform the darkness correction, click [Dark correct].

Select “Dark cor. ON” to display the darkness correction
data.
6. Click [Reference create] to obtain reference data for

checking for dust.
1) Remove the film carrier.
2) Replace the mirror box with the standard mirror box (P/N
8. Click [OK].
96A21424A00).
9. Click [OK].
Mirror Box

Reference Mirror Box (P/N 96A21424A00)
screen.
EZ1816
9-31
9.4.12 Working Information (43F) 9.4.13 Lens Registration (43G)
Maintenance” → “F Working Information” Maintenance” → “G Lens Registration”
This procedure displays the working information of the This procedure sets the lens ID to be used and its focal
scanner. length.
9
9.4.12
9.4.13
1. Click [Clear data] after replacing the compressor. • The current status is displayed.
1. Enter the lens ID number and the lens focal distance

indicated on the label attached to the lens unit.
2. Click [OK].

screen.
3. Perform the following menus.

2. Click [OK].
- 43J “Optical Magnification Calibration”
- 43K “Focus Calibration”
•The compressor working time data are cleared.
- 43C “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” for each carrier
3. Click [OK].

screen.
9-32
9.4.14 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) 3. If the data are out of range (20 or higher), loosen the four
hexagonal socket head bolts securing the carrier base and
[Selection] adjust the optical axis by moving the base together with the
jig.
Maintenance” → “H Optical Axis Adjustment”
[Procedure]
This procedure adjusts the optical axis of the image by

moving the film carrier base.
Focusing Chart Jig

(P/N 96A21423A00)
Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts (4)

EZ1829
9
9.4.14
• The magnification setting is 0.6 when the screen is

opened.
1. Install the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base.
4. Click [1.3].
• The projection magnification is changed to 1.3.
5. Click [AF].
• The calculated value of 1.3 magnification is displayed in

Jig with Chart the “Axis Def.” column in real time.
EZ1460
6. If the optical axis deflection and image rotation values are
2. Click [AF]. within the specified ranges for both magnifications, tighten
the hexagonal socket head bolts securely.
• The calculated values of 0.6 magnification are displayed in
the “Axis Def.” and “Image rotation” columns in real time. 7. Click [OK].
• OK is displayed if the data are within the specified range. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen.
9-33
9.4.15 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) 9.4.16 Focus Calibration (43K)
Maintenance” → “J Optical Magnification Calibration” Maintenance” → “K Focus Calibration”
This procedure calibrates the optical magnification. Perform the focus calibration.
9
9.4.15
9.4.16
• The current status is displayed. 1. Set the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base.
1. Set the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base.
Jig with Chart

EZ1460
Jig with Chart
2. Click [Create table].
EZ1460
• The focus calibration is performed.

2. Click [Run].
• The result is displayed.
• The optical magnification calibration is performed.
3. Click [OK].
• The result is displayed.
3. Click [OK].
screen.
4. Perform the menus 43C “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment”
screen.
for each carrier.
4. Perform the following menus.
- 43K “Focus Calibration”
- 43C “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” for each carrier
9-34
9.4.17 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) 9.4.18 Spectral Calibration (43P)
Maintenance” → “N ND Filter Density Measurement” Maintenance” → “P Spectral Calibration”
This procedure measures the density of the ND filter. Perform the spectral calibration using the following tools.
Tools: - IT-8 charts/Floppy disk set

- MFC10Y multi-film carrier
- 135M mask
9
9.4.17
9.4.18
1. Install the carrier and click [OK].
• The density measurement starts.
1. Install the MFC10Y without the mask.
2. Insert the floppy disk into the main control unit.
3. Click [OK].
• The main control unit reads the floppy disk.
2. Click [OK].

screen.
4. Click [OK].
• The brightness correction starts.
9-35
5. Install the 135M mask and insert chart No. 10010023 into the 10. Click [OK].
mask.
• The scanner reads the image of the chart.
6. Click [OK].
• The scanner reads the image of the chart.
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the

9 [Read again] button to read the image again.
9.4.18 NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the 11. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they are at the
[Read again] button to read the image again. center of each patch by using the arrow keys.
7. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they are at the

center of each patch by using the arrow keys.
12. Click [OK].
13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 for chart No. 10030023, No. 10040023,

8. Click [OK]. No. 10050023, No. 10060023 and No. 10070023, following
the instructions on the screen.
14. Click [OK].

screen.
15. Remove the floppy disk from the main control unit.
9. Replace the chart with No. 10020023.
9-36
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44)
9.5.1 NC135AG Input Check (441) 9.5.3 MFC10Y Input Check (443)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “1 NC135AG Input Check” Maintenance” → “3 MFC10Y Input Check”
This procedure displays the current status of the sensors. This procedure displays the current status of the sensors on
the MFC10Y.
9
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
NOTE: Refer to the MFC10Y Service Manual for input parts
1. Click [OK]. location.
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” 1. Click [OK].

screen.
screen.
9.5.2 NC240AG Input Check (442)
[Selection] 9.5.4 135ANL Input Check (444)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/ [Selection]

Maintenance” → “2 NC240AG Input Check”
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/
[Procedure] Maintenance” → “4 135ANL Input Check”
This procedure displays the current status of the sensors. [Procedure]
This procedure displays the current status of each sensors.
1. Click [OK]. NOTE: Refer to section 10.6 for input parts location.

screen.
9-37
1. Click [OK].

screen.
9.5.5 135ANL Function Setup (445)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “5 135ANL Function Setup”
[Procedure]
If the 135ANL (Option) is malfunctioning, it can be

disconnected from the scanner using this procedure.
1. Remove the auto film carrier NC135AG.
9
9.5.5
9.5.6
Auto Film Carrier NC135AG

GD142
2. Click [Rotate].
1. Select “135ANL Not Use”.
• The feed rollers on the negative catcher section rotate for
2. Click [OK]. 10 seconds.
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” 3. Insert the cleaning tape into the negative catcher section
screen. with its non-glossy surface facing down and hold it until the
feed rollers stop.
9.5.6 135ANL Negative Catcher Section

Cleaning (446)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 carrier Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “6 135ANL Negative Catcher Section
Cleaning”
[Procedure]
This procedure cleans the negative catcher section of the Cleaning Tape
135ANL. GD143
4. Click [End].
9-38
9.5.7 NC135AG Sensor Calibration (44A) 9.5.8 NC240AG Sensor Calibration (44B)
Maintenance” → “A NC135AG Sensor Calibration” Maintenance” → “B NC240AG Sensor Calibration”
This procedure calibrates the optical sensor. This procedure calibrates the optical sensor.
1. Check that no film is installed in the carrier. 1. Check that no film is installed in the carrier.
9
9.5.7
9.5.8
• The following message appears. • The following message appears.
• The calibration results are displayed. • The calibration results are displayed.
4. Click [Cancel]. 4. Click [Cancel].
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen. screen.
9-39
9.5.9 Installation Information Display (44C) 9.5.10 Installation Information Setup (44D)
Maintenance” → “C Installation Information Display” Maintenance” → “D Installation Information Setup”
This procedure displays the serial no. and hard revision no. This procedure sets the serial no. and hard revision no.
1. Install the NC135AG film carrier. 1. Install the film carrier to be registered.
2. Open the “Installation Information Display” menu.
9
9.5.9
9.5.10
9.5.11
2. Set the serial no.
3. Click [OK]. 3. Set the hardware revision.

screen.
• The values are registered to the carrier.
4. Install the NC240AG film carrier.
5. Open the “Installation Information Display” menu. screen.
9.5.11 NC135AG I/O Check (44E)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “E NC135AG I/O Check”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of motors, solenoids and

sensors.
6. Click [OK].

screen.
9-40
NOTE: Refer to section 10.2 for input and output parts 9.5.12 NC240AG I/O Check (44F)
location.
[Selection]
1. Connect the NC135AG carrier to the plug-in connector of the
scanner with the carrier extension cable (P/N 111A8993590). “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “F NC240AG I/O Check”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids

and sensors.
Carrier Extension Cable

(P/N 111A8993590)
EZ1827
2. Open the “44E NC135AG I/O Check” screen.

9
9.5.12
3. Click the operation command buttons and check if each part
is operating normally.
L400: [ON] → LED ON

M401: [OFF] → Motor stop NOTE: Refer to section 10.3 for input and output parts
[Right] → Rear pawl rise location.
[Both] → Both pawls rise
[Left] → Front pawl rise 1. Connect the NC240AG carrier to the plug-in connector of the
M403: [P] → Panorama size scanner with the carrier extension cable (P/N 111A8993590).
[HV] → HV size
[F] → Full size
[Pre] → Pre-scanning position
[Focus] → Focus position
S400 ~ S402: [OFF] → Reduction clutch OFF
[1: ON] → Reduction clutch 1 ON
M400: [Pre] → Pre-scanning
[Fine] → Fine-scanning
4. Click [OK].

screen. Carrier Extension Cable
(P/N 111A8993590)
EZ1827
2. Open the “44F NC240AG I/O Check” screen.
3. Click the operation command buttons and check if each part

is normally operated.
D441: [Open] → Door open

[Close] → Door close
L440: [ON] → LED ON
M442: [Drive] → Spool motor drive
M444: [Drive] → Cartridge motor drive
S440 ~ S442: [OFF] → Reduction clutch OFF
M440: [Pre] → Pre-scanning
[Fine] → Fine-scanning
9-41
4. Click [OK]. 9.5.14 MFC10Y Monitor Image Position

Adjustment (44H)
screen.
[Selection]

9.5.13 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) Maintenance” → “H MFC10Y Monitor Image Position
Adjustment”
[Selection]
[Procedure]
Maintenance” → “G MFC10Y I/O Check” This procedure adjusts the mask edge position on the
monitor screen.
[Procedure]

and sensors.
9
9.5.13
9.5.14
1. Select [Monitor frame max.].
2. Click [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the MFC10Y Service Manual for input and • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
output parts location. screen.
1. Connect the multi-film carrier MFC10Y to the plug-in 3. On the printing screen, pre-scan the reversal film.
connector on the scanner using the carrier extension cable
as shown. 4. If there is black mask edge on the screen, measure its width.
Carrier Extension Cable

EZ1828
2. Proceed to menu 44G.
3. Press the button of the output command and check if each

part operates normally.
4. Click [OK].
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” <Example> Case of a 135 Mount
screen.
The top black edge is 1.0mm, the bottom black edge is
2.0mm, the left-hand black edge is 3.0mm and the right-hand
black edge is 6.0mm.
NOTE: In the case of negative film, the edges are white.
9-42
5. Open the “[44H] MFC10Y Monitor Image Position 8. Enter the input value in the appropriate box in the screen.
Adjustment” screen.
9. Select the [Monitor frame standard].
10. Click [OK].

screen.
11. On the printing screen, pre-scan the reversal film and make
sure there is no black mask edge on the screen.
6. Calculate (A) by using the formulae in the table below.
<Example>
“T(+) D(–)”: (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2 = (1.0 – 2.0) ÷ 2 =
9
–0.5 9.5.14
“R(+) L(–)”: (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 1.0 = (6.0 – 3.0) ÷ 2
– 1.0 = 0.5
7. Calculate input value from value (A) using the formulae in

the table below.
12. If there is black mask edge, repeat steps 1 through 11.
<Example>
“T(+) D(–)”: Since (A) < 0,
Input value = (A) – 0.3 = –0.5 – 0.3 = –0.8
“R(+) L(–)”: Since (A) > 0,
Input value = (A) – 0.3 = 0.5 –0.3 = 0.2
Formula for input value

Item Mask Type Formula for (A)
In the case of (A) ≥ 0 In the case of (A) < 0
T(+) D(–) 135F (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2 Input value = (A) Input value = (A) – 0.3
135M (Mount)
135P
135HV
135H
240 (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2 × 0.86
240M (Mount)
6 × 4.5 (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2 Input value = (A) – 0.1
6×6
6×7
6×8
6×9
110 (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2 × 0.6 Input value = (A) – 0.3
126 (A) = (Top – Bottom) ÷ 2
135F (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 1.5
R(+) L(–) 135M (Mount) (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 1.0
135P
135HV
135H (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 1.5
240 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 × 0.86 – 1.2
240M (Mount)
6 × 4.5 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 0.5 Input value = (A) – 0.1
6×6 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 0.7
6×7 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 0.5
6×8
6×9 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 – 0.7
110 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 × 0.6 – 0.6 Input value = (A) – 0.3
126 (A) = (Right – Left) ÷ 2 + 3.0
9-43
9.5.15 NC135AG Working Information (44J) 5. Click [OK].
[Selection] • Data saving starts.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”→“4 Carrier Adjustment/ • After the completion of saving, the following message
Maintenance”→“J NC135AG Working Information”. appears.
[Procedure]
Check the NC135AG working information. If required, save

the working information to the memory in the carrier or to a
floppy disk.
6. Click [OK].
• The message disappears.
NOTE: To clear the data, follow the steps below.

9 1) Click [Clear] to clear each data.
9.5.15
• The data are cleared.
2) Click [All Clear] to clear all data.
1. Click [Write Working Info.].
• The “Select destination for write.” box appears.
3) Click [OK].
4) All data are cleared and message disappears.
2. Select “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”. 7. Click [OK].
3. If “FD” is selected, insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
drive. screen.
4. Click [Start].
9-44
9.5.16 NC240AG Working Information (44K) 5. Click [OK].
[Selection] • Data saving starts.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”→“4 Carrier Adjustment/ • After completion of saving, the following message
Maintenance”→“K NC240AG Working Information”. appears.
[Procedure]
Check the NC240AG working information. If required, save

the working information to the memory in the carrier or to a
floppy disk.
6. Click [OK].
• The message disappears.
NOTE: To clear the data, follow the steps below.
1) Click [Clear] to clear each data.

9
9.5.16
• The data are cleared.
2) Click [All Clear] to clear all data.
1. Click [Write Working Info.].
• The “Select destination for write.” box appears.
3) Click [OK].
4) All data are cleared and message disappears.
2. Select “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”. 7. Click [OK].
3. If “FD” is selected, insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
drive. screen.
4. Click [Start].
9-45
9.5.17 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) 5. Click [Start].
[Selection] • The dialog box below appears.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “L MFC10Y Working Information”
[Procedure]
Confirm the MFC10Y working information. The working

information can be written to the EEPROM of the carrier or
floppy disk before returning the carrier to the factory.
6. Click [OK].
• Writing starts.
• When writing is completed, the dialog box below appears.
9
9.5.17
7. Click [OK].
1. Select the “Mask Type”.
Mask Type: 135F
135 Mount NOTE: To clear the data, follow the steps below.
135P
135HV 1) Click [Clear] to clear each data.
135H
240 • The data are cleared.
240 Mount
6 × 4.5 2) Click [All Clear] to clear all data.
6×6
6×7 • The following message appears.
6×8
6×9
110
126
2. Click [Write Working Info].
• The dialog below appears.
3) Click [OK].
3. Select the “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”.
4. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive of the main control
unit.
9-46
4) All data are cleared and message disappears. • If the carrier data are already saved, the carrier ID and
type are displayed in the “Backup completion carrier” box.
• If the data for two or more carriers of the same type are
saved, all carrier ID and types are listed in the “Backup
completion carrier” box.
2. Backup:
1) Click [Backup].
• The data are saved from the installed carrier to the

hard disk.
• After completion of saving, the carrier ID and type are
listed in the “Backup completion carrier” box.
3. Download:
1) Select the carrier ID and type to be downloaded from the

“Backup completion carrier” box.
8. Click [OK].
2) Click [Download].
screen.
• The data saved are downloaded from the hard disk to
9
the carrier circuit board. 9.5.18
9.5.18 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) 4. Delete:
[Selection] 1) Select the carrier ID and type to be deleted from the

“Backup completion carrier” box.
Maintenance” → “P Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete” 2) Click [Delete].
[Procedure] • The data are deleted from the hard disk.

This procedure does the following:
5. Click [Close].
Backup: Backs up the carrier’s mechanical data stored in
the internal memory of the film carrier to the hard • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
disk on the main control unit during initial screen.
installation of the machine, etc.
Download: Downloads the carrier’s mechanical data stored

on the hard disk to the internal memory of the
film carrier after replacement of the carrier’s
circuit board.
Delete: Deletes the carrier’s mechanical data stored on

the hard disk.
1. Install the film carrier.
• The carrier ID and type are displayed in the “Installed

carrier” box.
9-47
9.5.19 NC135AG Machine Data Setup (44Q) 9.5.20 NC240AG Machine Data Setup (44R)
Maintenance” → “Q NC135AG Machine Data Setup” Maintenance” → “R NC240AG Machine Data Setup”
This procedure displays the machine data of the NC135AG This procedure displays the machine data of the NC240AG
film carrier. film carrier.
1. Install the NC135AG film carrier. 1. Install the NC240AG film carrier.
2. Open the “NC135AG Machine Data Setup” screen. 2. Open the “NC240AG Machine Data Setup” screen.
9
9.5.19
9.5.20
3. Check the values. 3. Check the values.
NOTE: The values should not be changed except when NOTE: The values should not be changed except when
there is a special instruction from FUJI FILM. there is a special instruction from FUJI FILM.
<Focus Offset Adjustment> 4. Click [OK].
Make actual prints and make sure their focusing. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
If necessary, adjust by following the steps below. screen.
1. Change the value in “Focus offset” box.
2. Make several prints in printing screen and make sure

focusing.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until best focusing prints are obtained.
4. Click [OK].

screen.
9-48
9.5.21 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) 9.5.22 135ANL Sensor Calibration (44T)
Maintenance” → “S MFC10Y Machine Data Setup” Maintenance” → “T 135ANL Sensor Calibration”
This procedure displays the machine data of the MFC10Y. This procedure calibrates the sensors.
1. Install the MFC10Y.
2. Open the “MFC10Y Machine Data Setup” screen.
9
9.5.21
9.5.22
1. Make sure there is no negative in the 135ANL and click [OK].
3. Check the values.
NOTE: The values should not be changed except when

there is a special instruction from FUJIFILM.
4. Click [OK].

screen.
• The results of the calibration are displayed on the screen.
3. Click [End].

screen.
9-49
9.5.23 135ANL I/O Check (44U) 9.5.24 135ANL Information Setup (44W)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 carrier Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “U 135ANL I/O Check” Maintenance” → “W 135ANL Information Setup”
This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids This procedure backs up the 135ANL machine data to the
and sensors. hard disk.
9
9.5.23
9.5.24
NOTE: Refer to section 10.6 for input and output parts 1. Click [Backup].
location.
• The machine data are read out from the CTF21 circuit
NOTE: Refer to section 10.2 “135ANL I/O Parts Diagram” for board and backed up to the hard disk.
parts location.
2. Click [Close].
1. Press the button of the operation command to be checked.
2. Click [OK]. screen.

screen.
9-50
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)
9.6.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451) 9.6.2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintennce” → “5 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “1 Paper Magazine Registration” Maintenence” → “2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment”
This procedure registers the paper magazine to be used. This procedure adjusts the paper feed length of the printer.
NOTE: Change “Type” according to paper to be used.
9
9.6.1
9.6.2
For the selected ID only: Adjustment is applied only to the

paper magazine selected.
NOTE: To register new paper not listed in the table above, For all IDs: Adjustment is applied to all paper
use a magazine ID there is not used. magazines.
<Dryer Temperature Setup> <Example>

Set the dryer temperature to the recommended value listed When using a paper with different paper thickness, the paper
below. feed length may be different. In this case select the
magazine ID and “For only selected ID”.
Paper Width Recommended High Low
(mm) Temperature Temperature Temperature NOTE: It is recommended that 152mm glossy paper
Setting Setting magazine be used when adjusting “For all IDs”.
89 - 151 70˚C 75˚C 65˚C
1. Move the cursor to “Magazine ID” and select the magazine
152 - 210 75˚C 80˚C 70˚C ID.
Except for the reasons indicated below, the dryer temperature 2. Move the cursor to “Feed length” for “Small size” and enter
should not be changed from the recommended value. If the 85.5 (82.5 mm + 3mm).
paper drying problems arise due to the change in the drying
environment and other factors, select the high or low 3. Move the cursor to “Feed length” for “Large size” and enter
temperature setting. The high temperature setting should be 293.0 (290mm + 3mm).
used when the ambient humidity is high. The lower temperature
setting should be used when problems occur in paper collection 4. Click [Print].
due to strong curling in the paper.
• A grid test pattern print will come out in approximately five
1. Move the cursor to “Magazine ID” and enter the ID. minutes.
2. Move the cursor to “Dry temp.” 5. Measure and record the punch hole pitches of the grid test
pattern print.
3. Enter the “High Temperature Setting” or “Low Temperature
Setting” from the table above.
4. Click [Set].
5. Click [End].
85.5 mm 293 mm
GD1490
9-51
6. Move the cursor to “Measured” for “Small size” and enter the 9.6.3 Test Pattern Printing (453)
punch hole pitch recorded.
[Selection]
7. Move the cursor to “Measured” for “Large size” and enter the
punch hole pitch recorded. “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “3 Test Pattern Printing”
8. Select “For only selected ID” or “For all IDs”.
[Procedure]
9. Click [Set].
This procedure creates test pattern prints.
10. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to confirm the feed lengths.
• The offset values on the “Next Page” are changed to near

0.0.
11. Click [End].
<Offset Adjustment>
1. Proceed to menu 452.
2. Click [Next Page].

9
9.6.3
1. Move the cursor to “Test pattern selection”, and select “Grid”,

“Border-less contact”, “Bordered contact”, “Gradation” or
“Step wedge”.
Grid: For color drift and feed length inspection
NOTE: On this screen, the paper feed length can be

adjusted by entering the offset value of the feed
length.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize the offset value.
3. Select the paper magazine ID to be adjusted.
4. Enter the offset value into the “Offset” box.
5. Click [Set]. Borderless contact: For exposure and processing unevenness

inspection
6. Click [End].
7. Perform steps 1 and 2 in the previous screen to confirm the

adjustment.
9-52
Bordered contact: For exposure and processing unevenness, or 2. Move the cursor to “Feed length” and enter the feed length
white board inspection (mm).
3. Click [Print] .
• The message “Printing the test pattern print” appears.
4. Click [All process].
• After about 5 minutes, the print is output to the large size

tray.
■ Color Drift Inspection
1) Make a grid test print.
2) Use a magnifying lens (X25) to check that the vertical

line for the color drift is 1/8 pixel or less in width, and the
horizontal line is 1/4 pixel or less in width.
Gradation: Step wedge:
For gradation inspection For color inspection REFERENCE:
1 pixel width = 0.08mm
4. Click [End].
9
9.6.4
screen.
9.6.4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature

Setup (454)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature
Setup”
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the G, B laser(SHG) optimal

temperature.
NOTE: Wait about 1 hour until the temperature adjustment is

completed.
1. Click [Enter].
9-53
• The optimal temperature setting is started, and the result 1. Click [OK].
is displayed after 5 minutes.
screen.
9.6.6 Printer Input Check (457)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “7 Printer Input Check”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of the sensors.
9
9.6.5
9.6.6
2. Click [End].

screen. NOTE: • Check the hole sensors (D533, D544, D550 and
D562) in menu 45V “PSD Sensor Information”.
• ”YES” for the D515 sensor indicates no paper
because it checks splice hole.
9.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (456)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “6 Printer Temperature Display”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the printer temperature and printer

status.
2. Click [OK].

screen.
NOTE: The temperatures are updated every 5 seconds.
9-54
9.6.7 Image Position Fine Adjustment (458) 8. Click [Set].
[Selection] 9. Click [End].
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
Maintenance” → “8 Image Position Fine Adjustment” screen.
[Procedure]
9.6.8 Printer I/O Check (45A)
Adjust the image position for each paper magazine.
NOTE: Rewind the paper if it is loaded.
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “A Printer I/O Check”
[Procedure]

and sensors.
[Next Page]: Displays the next screen.

9
[Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen. 9.6.7
9.6.8
1. Make a bordered print to be adjusted.
2. Select the paper magazine for print to be adjusted.
3. Measure the paper width and enter its correction value in the
“paper width correct (mm)” box.
<Example>
If the actual measured width of 89.0 mm paper is 88.7 mm,
enter “–0.3” in the box.
4. Measure the image width and enter its correction value in the
“image width correct (mm)” box if necessary.
5. Reprint a bordered print to make sure adjustments.
6. Check that the image is in the center of paper.
7. If necessary, adjust by following the steps below.
1) On the menu 424 “Print Size Setup”, enter initial bordered

width (4.0mm or 5.0mm) in “Upper BD”, “Lower BD”, “Left
BD” and “Right BD” columns.
2) To move the image to the feed direction, decrease the value

in the “Sub-scanning (Y)”.
3) To move the image to the reverse direction, increase the

value in the “Sub-scanning (Y)”.
4) To move the image to the rear direction, decrease the value

in the “Main scanning (X)”.
5) To move the image to the front direction, increase the value

in the “Main scanning (X)”.
NOTE: Adjusting Range: –3.0mm to 3.0mm
9-55
9.6.10 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “D R Laser(R-LD) Data”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the R laser(R-LD) data in the

EEPROM.
1. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates if it is normal.
9 2. Click [Cancel].
9.6.9 • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

9.6.10 screen.
9.6.11
9.6.9 Laser Exposure Check (45C)

1. Click [OK].
[Selection]
screen.
Maintenance” → “C Laser Exposure Check”
[Procedure] 9.6.11 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E)

This procedure performs an RGB test exposure and displays [Selection]
the results.
Maintenance” → “E G Laser(G-SHG) Data”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the G laser(G-SHG) data in the

EEPROM.
1. Click [OK].

screen.
1. Click [OK].

screen.
9-56
9.6.12 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) 2. Click [OK] to set the parameters.
[Selection] 3. Click [Cancel].
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
Maintenance” → “F B Laser(B-SHG) Data” screen.
[Procedure]
9.6.14 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
This procedure displays the B laser(B-SHG) data in the Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
EEPROM.
(45H)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “H Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment”
[Procedure]
This procedure performs the scanning adjustment and laser

beam synchronization rough adjustment. 9
9.6.12
9.6.13
9.6.14
1. Click [OK].

screen.
9.6.13 Scanning Position/Scanning Home

Position Parameter Setup (45G)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ 1. Load the paper magazine.

Maintenance” → “G Scanning Position/Scanning Home
Position Parameter Setup” NOTE: It is recommended that the 152 glossy paper
magazine is used.
[Procedure]
2. Proceed to menu 45H.
This procedure displays the parameters for exposure
positions. 3. Click [Print].
• The message “Adjust-printing” appears.
• The message “I-2692 Turn out the large-size tray”

appears.
4. Move the large-size tray to its standby position.
1. Enter the scanning position/scanning home position

parameters.
Large-size Tray
GD1379
9-57
5. Click [OK]. 15. Find the Y coordinate with the least color drift on the print for
the horizontal lines using an inverted magnifier (x20-40), and
• The print is output to the large-size tray. record the coordinate value and drifted color (CMY) order
from the top.
← →
16. Move the cursor to “X(Width)” and enter the measured X
C value
17. Move the cursor to “Y(Feed)” and enter the measured Y

value.
A→ ← → ←B
18. Click [Enter] for “Coordinate with least amount of color drift”.
9 19. Click [OK].
9.6.15 20. Click [End].

6. Measure A, B and C, and then record them.
NOTE: Margin of error: ± 0.5mm
screen.
7. Move the cursor to “A: Left measured value” and enter the
measured A value.
9.6.15 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print
8. Move the cursor to “B: Right measured value” and enter the (45J)
measured B value.
[Selection]
9. Click [Enter] for “Width direction (main scanning position)”.
Maintenance” → “J Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”
[Procedure]
This procedure performs the fine adjustment of the laser

beam synchronization.
10. Click [OK].
11. Move the cursor to “C: Top measured value” and enter the
measured C value.
12. Click [Enter] button for “Feeding direction (sub-scanning

position)”.
1. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for main

scanning” and enter the drifted color order from the left
13. Click [OK].
recorded in “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam
Sync. Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”.
14. Find the X coordinate with the least color drift on the print for
the vertical lines using an inverted magnifier (x20-40), and
2. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for sub-scanning”
record the coordinate value and the drifted color (CMY) order
and enter the drifted color order from the top recorded in
from the left.
“Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”.
9-58
3. Click [Print]. 10. Click [OK].
• The message “Adjust-printing” appears. 11. Click [End].
• The message “I-2690 Set the large-size tray” appears. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen.
4. Move the large-size tray to its use position.
Large-size Tray
9.6.16 Laser History Display (45K)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “K Laser History Display”
[Procedure]
Display the exposure time and current value of R-LD, G-

SHG and B-SHG.
GD1378
5. Click [OK].
9
9.6.16
• The print is outputted to the large-size tray in about five
minutes.
1. Click [Switch display] to switch between the graph and

numeric displays.
6. Find numbers that have the minimum color drift on the output
print for the vertical and horizontal lines using the magnifier
(x20-40).
7. Move the cursor to the “Best main scanning position” and

enter the number of the vertical line found.
8. Move the cursor to the “Best sub-scanning position” and

enter the number of the horizontal line found.
2. Click [OK].
9. Click [Set].
screen.
9-59
9.6.17 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy 9.6.18 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment
(45L) (45M)
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “L Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy” Maintenance” → “M Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment”
This procedure copies the LUT (Look-up Table) from one This procedure adjusts the printer mechanism.
magazine to another.
[Next Page]: Displays the next screen.
[Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen.
[Set]: Sets up entered data.
[End]: Returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen.
9
9.6.17
9.6.18
1. Specify the ID of the source magazine.
2. Specify the ID of the destination magazine.
3. Click [OK].
Adjust the home position of each paper width guide.
• Copying is performed and operation returns to the
“4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. F. A value (–5.0 ~ 5.0mm):
Enter data indicated on the “Printer Parameter Sheet”.
Aim width (89.0 ~ 210.0mm):
Width of paper width guide
[Home pos.]: Moves the guide to its home position.
[Drive]: Moves the guide to the aim width.
9-60
Adjust the movement for each paper width guide. Adjust the printer paper feed system.
Base value (89.0 to 210.0mm): Nominal paper width Enter the values indicated in “Printer Parameter Sheet” into
Measured (base value ±5.0mm): Actual paper width the boxes.
[Drive]: Moves the guide to the “Measured” position.
Adjust the paper width guides for each paper magazine.

Adjust the sub-scanning motor speed to 80mm/sec. for each
paper magazine.
9
9.6.18
Magazine ID: Selects the magazine ID. Mag. ID: Selects magazine ID.
All (–5.0 ~ 5.0mm): Adjusts all paper width Selected ID: Speed only for the selected magazine
guides. is adjusted.
P. feed to G5 (–5.0 to 5.0mm): Adjusts each guide. All ID: Speed adjustment is applied for all
paper magazines.
Speed (–8.0 ~ 8.0%): Enters the adjustment value for sub-
scanning motor speed.
1. Make the following print in menu 453.
Print feed length: 290mm

Print type: Grid
2. Measure the length of 15 squares in the feed direction of the

print.
Standard length of 15 squares: 254.0mm
Adjust the home position of each loop guide.
F. A. value (–10.0 to 10.0mm):

Enters the adjustment value (data indicated on the
“Printer Parameter Sheet)”.
[Drive]: Moves the loop guide to its home position.
15 Squares (254.0mm)
3. Calculate difference between the measured value and the

standard value and enter its correction percentage in the
“Speed” box.
4. Click [OK].
9-61
9.6.19 Back Printer Test (45N) 9.6.20 Printer Operation Data Display (45P)
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “N Back Printer Test” Maintenance” → “P Printer Operation Data Display”
This procedure makes a test print using the back printer. This procedure displays the printer operation data.
9
9.6.19
9.6.20
9.6.21
1. Set “Q’ty” and “Feed length”. 1. Click [OK].
2. Select the magazine to be used. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
screen.
• The test print is output to the large-size tray.
9.6.21 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data

(45Q)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “Q Clearing Selected Printer Operation
Data”
3. Click [End].
[Procedure]
screen. This procedure clears specific items of printer operation
data.
9-62
1. Select the item to be cleared. 9.6.23 Data Saving (45T)

2. Click [OK]. [Selection]
• The selected data item is cleared. “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “T Data Saving”
screen. [Procedure]
This procedure saves the printer data to the hard disk of the
9.6.22 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) main control unit.
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “R Clearing All Operation Data”
[Procedure]
This operation clears specific items of printer and processor

operation data.
9
9.6.22
9.6.23
1. Select the item to be saved.
2. Click [OK].
• The data is saved.

screen.
NOTE: Total sorts and total number of prints are not cleared.
1. Click [OK].
• All operating data items are cleared.
2. Click [Cancel].

screen.
9-63
9.6.24 Data Download (45U) 9.6.25 PSD Sensor Information (45V)
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “U Data Download” Maintenance” → “V Sensor Information”
This procedure loads the printer data into the printer after the This procedure calibrates the sensors.
CTL21 circuit board has been replaced.
9
9.6.24
9.6.25
Reference: PSD (Position Sensing Device)

1. Select the item to be downloaded. The D533, D544, D550 and D562 sensors output two signals
VA and VB. No hole is detected when VA minus VB is
2. Click [OK]. smaller than threshold. They are calibrated just before print
starting.
• The data is downloaded.
<Calibration Values>
LED lighting lower limit: 0
LED lighting upper limit: 255
LED lighting initial value: 52
Comparison voltage lower limit: 20
Comparison voltage upper limit: 204
Comparison voltage adding value: 10
Comparison voltage operating factor: 24%
3. Click [OK]. Light-intercepting lower limit: 160
Light-intercepting upper limit: 167
screen. 1. Click [Calib.].
• The calibration is performed and the result is displayed in

the “Calib. Result” box.
2. Click [End].

screen.
9-64
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46)
9.7.1 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/ PS-R Replenisher Nozzle

Setting (461)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “1 Pump Output Measurement/Setting”
[Procedure]
This procedure measures and corrects the replenisher pump

output.
Measuring Cylinder
GD1276
4. Before the pump starts discharging, disconnect the PS-R

replenisher nozzle and insert it into the measuring cylinder.
9
9.7.1
• The replenisher pump starts discharging.
• The alarm beeps when discharging is completed.
5. Insert the PS-R replenisher nozzle into the PS sub-tank.

1. Prepare a measuring cylinder.
6. Place the measuring cylinder on a level surface, and then
read and record the output.
2. Remove the sub-tank cover.
7. Pour the replenisher solution from the measuring cylinder
into the waste recovery tank.
8. Select the “Measured value” box, and enter the recorded

output value using the numeric keys or the [ ] and [ ]
keys.
NOTE: • The machine automatically measures and adjusts

the pump output for P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB.
• P2W is not used for CP-48S processing solutions.
10. Click [OK].
Sub-tank Cover • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”

screen.
GD1316
11. Reinstall the sub-tank cover.

3. Click [Start] for the box to be measured.
12. Clean the measuring cylinder.
• The alarm beeps intermittently for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Click [Cancel] to stop the operation.
9-65
9.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (462) 9.7.3 Processor Temperature Calibration (463)
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/ “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/
Maintenance” → “2 Processing Temperature Setting” Maintenance” → “3 Processor Temperature Calibration”
This procedure sets the processing temperatures. This procedure calibrates the processor section
temperatures.
9
9.7.2
9.7.3
1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1”, “P2” and “PS”

processing temperatures. 1. Check that the display values have reached the “Setting”
temperatures.
Range Default Value
P1 30.0 to 40.0 38.5 2. Turn the P1 filter holder 90° counterclockwise, remove the
P1 circulation filter and place it on a tray.
P2 30.0 to 40.0 38.0
PS 30.0 to 40.0 38.0
NOTE: Do not let the solution drip or run.
2. Click [OK]. P1-1 Circulation Filter Rod

screen.
GD1277
9-66
3. Measure the temperature of the processing solution and 9.7.4 Replenisher Rate Setting (464)
record it.
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “4 Replenisher Rate Setting”
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the replenishment amounts.
GD1279
4. Reinstall the filter by aligning the fastening tab with the

cutout, and then turn it 90° clockwise.
Fastening Tab
9
9.7.4
1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1-R”, “P2-R”, “PS-R” and

“P2W” replenishment amount.
Range Default Value

P1-R 30.0 to 200.0 45.0
P2-R 20.0 to 300.0 35.0
Cutout
GD1278 PS-R 100.0 to 300.0 242.0
P2W 50.0 to 200.0 50.0
5. If the “Setting” temperatures differ from the values displayed,
move the cursor to the “Measured value” and enter the 2. Click [OK].
values recorded in step 3.
Range : 0.0 to 99.9 screen.
6. Click [Enter].
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for P2, PS1, PS2, PS3 and PS4.
8. Click [OK].

screen.
9-67
9.7.5 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting 1. Select “YES” for “Dryer section pre-heat”.
(465)
2. Select “YES” for “Cutting”.
[Selection] 3. Enter the temperature into the “Dryer pre-heat lower temp”
box.
Maintenance” → “5 Evaporation Correction Rate Settting”
Standard lower temperature: 45 °C
[Procedure] NOTE: If the “Dryer pre-heat lower temperature” is changed
from the standard lower temperature (45˚C), the
This procedure sets the evaporation correction rate.
paper drying problems arise due to the change in the
drying environment and other factors.
4. Enter the number of sheets in the “Sorter Max. No. of

Sheets” box.
5. Click [OK].

screen.
9
9.7.7 Processor Input Check (468)
9.7.5
9.7.6
[Selection]
9.7.7
Maintenance” → “8 Processor Input Check”
1. Select “YES” for “Evaporation Correction” and “Auto” for
“Humidity”. [Procedure]
2. Click [OK]. This procedure displays the status of the sensors.
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” NOTE: Refer to section 10.5for input parts location.
screen.
9.7.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup

(466)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “6 Processor Operating condition Setup”
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up the processor operating condition.
9-68
2. Click [End]. 9.7.9 Processor Mechanical Fine Adjustment

(46A)
screen.
[Selection]

9.7.8 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Fine Maintenance” → “A Processor Mechanical Fine Adjustment”
Adjustment Value Setting (469)
[Procedure]
[Selection]
This procedure adjusts the processor mechanism.
[OK]: Sets the entered value and returns operation to the
Maintenance” → “9 Cutter Section Paper Width Guide Fine
“4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.
Adjustment Value Setting”
[Cancel]: Cancels the entered value and returns operation to
the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.
[Operation]
This procedure finely adjusts the paper width guide at the

cutter section for each paper width.
9
9.7.8
9.7.9
Processor paper width guide:
1. Make several prints in order to feed paper to the processor.

Check that the print paper is fed smoothly and without
1. Select “Magazine ID”.
skewing.
2. Enter the fine adjustment value in the “F. adjust” box.
2. If necessary, adjust the value in the “Value” box.
3. Click [Set].
Value range: –5.0 to 5.0mm
4. Click [End]
Paper Interference: Increase value to widen the width
guides.
Paper Skew: Decrease value to narrow the width
screen.
guides.
3. Repeat step 1 to make sure of the adjustment. Repeat steps

1 and 2, if necessary.
9-69
Cutting position: Cutter stop position:
Value range: –2.0 to 2.0mm Set up the cutter blade stop-waiting time.
1. Check the punch hole position of the cutting waste. 1. Check that the cutter blade is above the white roller as
shown.
2. If cutting is advanced, decrease the value.
Cutter
Feed Direction
White Roller
GD1636
3. If cutting is late, increase the value.
2. If necessary, change the value in “Cutter stop position” to
9 Feed Direction
adjust cutter position.
9.7.10 Value range: 1 to 10 msec
9.7.10 Processor I/O Check (46B)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “B Processor I/O Check”
Cutter paper width guide:
[Procedure]
1. Insert the paper through the cutter loop guide plate, and
check for paper interference or skewing. This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids
and sensors.
2. Make sure the value in the “Value” box is the same as the
value indicated on the label of the cutter unit. [Next Page]: Displays the next screen.
[Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen.
3. If the value is not the same as the indication on the label, [End]: Operation returns to the “4 Setup and
change the value. Maintenance” screen.
Value range: –1.0 to 1.0mm NOTE: Refer to section 10.15for input parts location.
Paper Interference: Increase the value to widen the width
guide.
Paper Skew: Decrease the value to narrow the width
guide.
9-70
9.7.12 Processor Operation Data Display (46D)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “D Processor Operation Data Display”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processor operation data. The

data can be cleared using menu 46F (see subsection
9.7.13).
9
9.7.11
9.7.12
9.7.13
1. Click [OK].

screen.
9.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “E Processor Operation Data Display 2”
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processor operation data. The

data can be cleared using menu 46F (see subsection
9.7.13).
1. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates, if it is normal.
2. Click [End].

screen.
9.7.11 RC50D Measurement/Installation (46C)
(This menu is not used.) 1. Click [OK].

screen.
9-71
9.7.14 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46F)
[Selection]

Maintenance” → “F Clearing Selected Operation Data”
[Procedure]
This procedure clears specific items of processor operation

data (displayed in menus 46D and 46E).
9
9.7.14
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Click [OK].
• The selected data item is cleared.

screen.
9-72
9.8 Option Adjustment/Maintenance (47)
9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintenance” → “7 Option Adjustment/

Maintenance” → “A COM Port Setting”
[Procedure]
This procedure selects the COM port for the PU800BA and
the bar-code reader.
9
9.8.1
1. Select the COM port for the PU800BA from “COM1” through
“COM6”.
2. Select the COM port for the bar-code reader from “COM1”
through “COM6”.
3. Click [OK].

screen.
NOTE: The specified parts will remain valid even after

restarting the system.
9-73
9.9 Special Operations (49)
9.9.1 Paint (49A) 1. Press the [X] button on the upper side of the screen.
[Selection] NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “9 Special Operations” → “A • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance”
Paint” screen.
[Procedure]
9.9.3 Command (49C)
Do this procedure to use “Paint”.
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “9 Special Operations” → “C

Command”
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to perform MS-DOS command operations.
9
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
NOTE: For information on “Paint” operations, see the

Windows NT® manual.
1. Press the [X] button in the upper side of the screen.

NOTE: For information on “Command” operations, see the
NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button. MS-DOS® manual.
1. Press the [X] button on the upper side of the screen.
screen.
screen.
9.9.2 Explorer (49B)
[Selection]
“4 Setup and Maintence” → “9 Special Operations” → “B

Explorer”
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to use “Explorer”.
NOTE: For information on “Explorer” operations, see the

Windows NT® manual.
9-74
10. I/O PARTS DIAGRAM
10.1 Scanner (SP2500) ......................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Film Carrier NC135AG ................................................................................. 10-4
10.3 Film Carrier NC240AG ................................................................................. 10-5
10.4 Printer Section ................................................................................................. 10-6
10.5 Processor Section .......................................................................................... 10-10
10.6 Automatic Negative Loading System NF2500AG (Optional) ............ 10-14
10
10-1
10
Micro Switch
Motor
Temperature Sensor
Safety Thermostat
Photo Interrupter
Fan
Lamp
EZ1194
10-2
■ Light Source Section
Symbol Name Remark
D201 Light Source Aperture Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter

D202 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D203 Light Source Aperture Standby Sensor Photo Interrupter
D204 135 Mirror Box Sensor (1) Micro Switch
D205 120 Mirror Box Sensor (2) Micro Switch
D301 Light Source Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
F302 Light Source Section Suction Fan
F303 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan
F308 Light Source Cooling Fan
L201 Scanning Lamp Halogen Lamp
M201 Light Source Aperture Motor Pulse Motor
M202 Balance Filter Drive Motor Pulse Motor
ST201 Safety Thermostat To monitor abnormalities in the light source section temperature
■ Scanner Section
Symbol Name Remark

10
D101 CCD21
D102 Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D103 Conjugate Length Variable Upper Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D104 Conjugate Length Variable Lower Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D105 Lens Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D106 Lens Temperature Sensor IC
D107 Shutter Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D351 Cooling Air Flow Sensor
F301 CCD Cooling Fan
M101 Conjugate Length Variable Motor Pulse Motor
M102 Lens Drive Motor Pulse Motor
M103 Shutter Motor Pulse Motor
■ Electrical Equipment Section
Symbol Name Remark
F304 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan

F305 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan
F306 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (L)
F307 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (R)
PU351 Compressor
10-3
10.2 Film Carrier NC135AG
10
Light Source Switch

Motor
Solenoid
Photo Interrupter
Display LED
EZ1195
Symbol Name Remark
D400 Film Leading Tip Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)

D401 Film Leading Tip Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D402 Scan Timing Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)
D403 Scan Timing Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D404 Perforation Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)
D405 Perforation Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D406 Loop Guide Sensor Photo Interrupter
D407 Nip Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D409 Film Mask Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D410 Check Tape Sensor LED Flood, LED(Infrared)
D411 Check Tape Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
L400 Display LED 2-color LED(Red, Green)
M400 Film Feeding Motor Pulse Motor
M401 Soft Nip Drive Motor Pulse Motor
M403 Film Mask Drive Motor Pulse Motor
S400 Reduction Clutch 1 Solenoid Clutch
10-4
10.3 Film Carrier NC240AG
Micro Switch
Light Source Switch
Motor
Solenoid 10
Photo Interrupter
Display LED
EZ1196
Symbol Name Remark
D441 Door Open/Close Sensor Photo Interrupter

D442 VEI (Status Mark) Sensor Photo Interrupter
D443 Chucking Sensor Photo Interrupter
D444 Feeding Stop Sensor Photo Interrupter
D445 IPI (Unexposed Tab) Sensor Photo Interrupter
D446 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor Micro Switch
D447 MTP (Positioning Perforation) Sensor 1 LED Flood, LED (Green)
D448 TAP (Turn-around Perforation) Sensor LED Flood, LED (Green)
D449 C-side Read Magnetic Head
D450 P-side Read Magnetic Head
D451 C-side Write Magnetic Head
D452 P-side Write Magnetic Head
D453 MTP (Positioning Perforation) Sensor 2 Photo, Photo-transistor
D454 MTP (Positioning Perforation) Sensor 1 Photo, Photo-transistor
D455 TAP (Turn-around Perforation) Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D456 Cartridge Sensor Photo Interrupter
D457 MTP (Positioning Perforation) Sensor 2 LED Flood, LED (Green)
L440 Display LED 2-color LED (Red, Green)
M440 Film Feeding Motor Pulse Motor
M441 Door Open/Close Motor Pulse Motor
M442 Spool Motor Pulse Motor
M444 Cartridge Motor DC Motor
10-5
10.4 Printer Section
10
Switch
Micro Switch
Photo Transistor
Motor
Solenoid
Temperature Sensor
Photo Interrupter
Fan
Clutch GD1719A
10-6
■ Paper Supply Section
Symbol Name Remark
D500~D504 Magazine ID Sensor Photo Interrupter

D505 Magazine Nip Sensor Photo Interrupter
D510 Paper End Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D511 Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D512 Loop 1 Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D513 Rewind Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D514 Paper Width Guide 1 Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D515 Splice Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D517 Unit 1 Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D520 Cutting Hole Punch Return Sensor Photo Interrupter
D521 Sorting Hole Punch Return Sensor Photo Interrupter
D522 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D523 Nip Sensor Photo Interrupter
D524 Nip Release Sensor Photo Interrupter
D590 Magazine Set Sensor Micro Switch
10
M500 Paper Magazine Rewind Motor DC Geared Motor
M510 Paper Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M511 Loop 1 Guide Plate Motor Pulse Motor
M512 Paper Width Guide 1 Motor Pulse Motor
M513 Unit 1 Paper Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M515 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor Pulse Motor
M516 Nip Release Motor Pulse Motor
S500 Paper Magazine Rewind Clutch Solenoid Clutch
S510 Cutting Hole Punch Solenoid DC Solenoid
S511 Sorting Hole Punch Solenoid DC Solenoid
■ Exposure Section
Symbol Name Remark

D531 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D533 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED (infrared), Photo-transistor
D534 Laser Unit Shutter Open Sensor Photo Interrupter
D535 Exposure Section Feed Roller Nip Sensor Photo Interrupter
D620 Laser Unit Anti-dust Shutter Sensor Photo Interrupter
D624 Polygonal Scanner Status Sensor
F620 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1
M531 Pre-exposure Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M532 Sub-scanning Motor Pulse Motor
M533 Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor Pulse Motor
M534 Roller Nip Release Motor Pulse Motor
M623 Polygonal Scanner Motor
S530 Reverse Clutch Solenoid Clutch
S620 Laser Unit Shutter Solenoid DC Solenoid
TS580 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor Thermistor
10-7
■ Post-exposure Feed Section/Printer Front Door Section
Symbol Name Remark

D542 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1 Photo Interrupter
D543 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D544 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED (infrared), Photo-transistor
D545 Back Printer Head Setting Sensor Micro Switch
D548 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D550 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED (infrared), Photo-transistor
D551 Loop 4 Sensor Flood LED (infrared), Photo-transistor
D552 Cutter 1 Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D555 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D561 Unit 4 Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
10 D562 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED (infrared), Photo-transistor
D563 Cutter 2 Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D568 Printer Exit Paper Sensor Photo Interrupter
D591 Printer Door Interlock Switch 1 Micro Switch
D592 Printer Door Interlock Switch 2 Micro Switch
M541 Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1 Pulse Motor
M542 Unit 2 Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M550 Cutter 1 Motor DC Motor
M552 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Motor Pulse Motor
M561 Unit 4 Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M562 Cutter 2 Motor DC Motor
S540 Rear Back Printer Head Solenoid DC Solenoid
S541 Front Back Printer Head Solenoid DC Solenoid
10-8
■ Printer Electrical Section
Symbol Name Remark
D594 Power Switch Rocker Switch

F570 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1
F571 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 2
F572 Air Intake Fan 1
F573 Air Intake Fan 2
F577 AOM Cooling Fan 1
F580 AOM Exhaust Fan 1
F584 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1
F585 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 2
F587 Printer Air Intake Fan 1
F588 Printer Air Intake Fan 2
10
10-9
10.5 Processor Section
Photo Transistor
Micro Switch
Motor
Solenoid
Temperature Sensor
Safety Thermostat
Heater
Solution Level Sensor
Pump
Switch
Photo Interrupter
Fan
10
GD1719B
10-10
■ Processor
Symbol Name Remark
D700 Processor Cover Sensor Micro Switch

D701 Squeegee Rack Cover Sensor Micro Switch
D710 Processor Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D711 Paper Width Guide Position Encoder Sensor Photo Interrupter
M710 Processor Drive Motor DC Motor
M711 Processor Paper Width Guide Motor DC Motor
F790 Processor Exhaust Fan
HS790 Ambient Temperature Sensor
■ Processing Solution Circulation System
Symbol Name Remark
D720 P1 Safety Thermostat Self-recovery Thermostat

10
D724 PS1 Safety Thermostat Self-recovery Thermostat
F720 P1 Heater Cooling Fan
F722 P2 Heater Cooling Fan
F724 PS1, PS2 Heater Cooling Fan
F726 PS3 Heater Cooling Fan
F727 PS4 Heater Cooling Fan
FS720 P1 Solution Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS722 P2 Solution Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS724 PS1 Solution Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS740 W1 Solution Level Sensor Float Switch
FS741 W2 Solution Level Sensor Float Switch
TS720 P1 Solution Temperature Sensor Thermistor
TS721 P2 Solution Temperature Sensor Thermistor
TS722 PS1 Solution Temperature Sensor Thermistor
H720 P1-1 Solution Heater
H724 PS1 Solution Heater
10-11
Symbol Name Remark
PU720 P1-1 Circulation Pump

PU724 PS1 Circulation Pump
■ Processing Solution Replenishment System
Symbol Name Remark
D800 Cartridge Setting Sensor Photo Interrupter

D801 Cartridge Box Upper Sensor Photo Interrupter
D802 Cartridge Box Lower Sensor Photo Interrupter
D803 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
10 M800 Cartridge Open Motor DC Motor
FS800 P1-R Upper Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS801 P2-RA Upper Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS802 P2-RB Upper Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS803 PS-R Upper Level Sensor Float Switch
FS804 P1-R Lower Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS805 P2-RA Lower Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS806 P2-RB Lower Level Sensor Fluorine resin sensor
FS807 PS-R Lower Level Sensor Float Switch
FS810 Replenisher Tank 1 Level Sensor (External) Float Switch
PU740 P1-R Replenisher Pump
PU741 P1W Replenisher Pump
PU742 P2-RA Replenisher Pump
PU743 P2-RB Replenisher Pump
PU744 P2W Replenisher Pump
PU745 PS Replenisher Pump
PU800 Auto Washing Pump
S800 P1-R Cartridge Washing Valve
S801 P2-RA Cartridge Washing Valve
S802 P2-RB Cartridge Washing Valve
S803 P1-R Stirring Valve
■ Dryer Section
Symbol Name Remark
D760 Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat Manual Recovery Thermostat

F760 Dryer Fan
H760 Dryer Heater
TS760 Dryer Temperature Sensor Thermistor
10-12
■ Cutter and Sorter
Symbol Name Remark
D770 Cutter Entry Paper Sensor Micro Switch

D771 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Open Sensor Photo Interrupter
D772 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Close Sensor Photo Interrupter
D773 Cutter Loop Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D774 Cutter Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D775 Paper Leading End Sensor Micro Switch
D776 Cutter Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D777 Cutting Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D778 Cutter Exit Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D779 Horizontal Sorter Stop Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D780 Slant Sorter Stop Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D781 Sorter Full Sensor Photo Interrupter
D782 Sorter Drive Switch
D783 Large-Size Tray Waiting Sensor Micro Switch
D784 Sorting Punch Hole Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D785 Large-Size Tray Set Sensor Micro Switch
M770 Cutter Loop Guide Motor DC Motor
10
M771 Cutter Paper Width Guide Motor Pulse Motor
M772 Cutter Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M773 Cutter Motor DC Motor
M774 Cutter Exit Guide Motor DC Motor
M775 Horizontal Sorter Drive Motor DC Motor
M776 Slant Sorter Drive Motor DC Motor
■ Processor Electrical Section
Symbol Name Remark
F791 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 1

10-13
10.6 Automatic Negative Loading System NF2500AG (Optional)
Micro Switch
Photo Interruptor
Photo Transistor
Solenoid
10 Motor
GD167
10-14
10.6 Automatic Negative Loading System NF2500AG (Optional)
Symbol Name Remark
D371 Negative Standby Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor

D372 Loop Sensor Photo Interrupter
D373 Negative Leading End Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D374 Negative Holder Open Sensor Photo Interrupter
D375 Negative Holder Close Sensor Photo Interrupter
D376 Negative Sensor Photo Interrupter
D377 Negative Trailing End Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D378 Nip Release Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D379 ANL Operating Position Sensor Micro Switch
D380 Negative Press Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D381 Upper Guide Sensor Micro Switch
D382 Negative Overlap Sensor Photo Interrupter
D383 Negative Holder Cover Sensor Micro Switch
D384 Negative Full Sensor Photo Interrupter
D385 Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch Micro Switch
D387 Negative Standby Sensor LED Flood, LED
D388 Negative Leading End Sensor LED Flood, LED
D389 Negative Trailing End Sensor LED Flood, LED
10
D391 Slide Lock Sensor Photo Interrupter
L371 Indicator LED LED
M371 Negative Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M372 Negative Holder Motor DC Motor
M373 Catcher Negative Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M374 Negative Press Motor DC Motor
S371 Nip Release Solenoid Solenoid
10-15
11. OPERATION SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 11-3
11.1 Monitor and Keyboard .................................................................................. 11-4

11.1.1 Monitor Replacement ..................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.2 Table Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/KYA20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................... 11-4
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Replacement .......................................................................... 11-5
11.1.5 Mouse Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier Replacement ........................................... 11-5
11.1.7 Monitor Color Adjustment .............................................................................. 11-6
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG ....................................................................... 11-7

11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 11-7
11.2.2 Film Leading End Sensor LED (D400) Replacement .................................... 11-7
11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Sensor LED (D402/D410) Replacement ............... 11-7
11.2.4 Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409) Replacement ............................... 11-7
11.2.5 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection ........................................................... 11-7 11
11.2.6 Variable Film Mask Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 11-7
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) Replacement ................................................ 11-8
11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) Replacement ............................................... 11-8
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller Replacement ......................................................................... 11-8
11.2.10 Film Retainer Replacement ........................................................................... 11-8
11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ................................................................ 11-8
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller Replacement ................................................................ 11-9
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 11-9
11.2.14 Pressure Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 11-9
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ........................................................ 11-10
11.2.16 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 11-10
11.2.17 Nip Home Position Sensor (D407) Replacement .......................................... 11-10
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor (D405) Replacement ....................................................... 11-10
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 11-11
11.2.20 Film Leading End Sensor (D401) Replacement ............................................ 11-11
11.2.21 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement ..................................................... 11-11
11.2.22 Check Tape Sensor (D411) Replacement ..................................................... 11-11
11.2.23 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) Replacement .................................................... 11-12
11.2.24 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement ................................................................... 11-12
11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Motor (M401) Replacement .................................................... 11-12
11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Section Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 11-12
11.2.27 Soft Nip Cam Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................... 11-13
11.2.28 Film Feed Roller/Drive Belt Replacement ...................................................... 11-13
11.2.29 Pressure Cover Hook Replacement .............................................................. 11-14
11.2.30 Display LED (L400) Replacement ................................................................. 11-14
11.2.31 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ...................................... 11-14
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor (M400) Replacement .......................................................... 11-15
11.2.33 Reduction Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ......................................................... 11-15
11-1
11.2.36 Reduction Belt Replacement ......................................................................... 11-18

11.2.37 Plug-in Connector Replacement .................................................................... 11-18
11.2.38 Loop Sensor (D406) Replacement ................................................................ 11-18
11.3 Auto Film Carrier NC240AG ....................................................................... 11-19

11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 11-19
11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) Replacement .............. 11-19
11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller Replacement .................................................................. 11-19
11.3.4 Film Retainer Replacement ........................................................................... 11-19
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 11-20
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90) Circuit Board Replacement ......................................... 11-20
11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) Replacement ...................................................... 11-20
11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement ..................................................... 11-20
11.3.9 Dummy Head Replacement ........................................................................... 11-21
11.3.10 Magnetic Head Replacement ........................................................................ 11-21
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................ 11-22
11 11.3.12 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 11-22
11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) Replacement .............................. 11-22
11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445) Replacement .................................................................... 11-22
11.3.15 Display LED (L440) Replacement ................................................................. 11-22
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 11-23
11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D406) Replacement ........................... 11-23
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt Replacement ............................................................... 11-23
11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal Roller/Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement .... 11-24
11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ...................................... 11-24
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ........................................................ 11-25
11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor (D444) Replacement ........................................................ 11-25
11.3.23 Film Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... 11-25
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................ 11-26
11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Replacement .............................................................. 11-26
11.3.26 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 11-26
11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor (D456) Replacement ......................................................... 11-26
11.3.28 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement ............................................ 11-27
11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Replacement ......................................... 11-27
11.3.30 Nest Section Unit Replacement ..................................................................... 11-27
11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444) Replacement ........................................................... 11-27
11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442) Replacement ................................................................. 11-27
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Replacement .......................................................................... 11-28
11.3.34 Cartridge Holder Locking Release Method .................................................... 11-28
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 11-28
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) Replacement .......................................................... 11-29
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement .......................................................................... 11-29
11.3.40 Reduction Belt Replacement ......................................................................... 11-31
11.3.41 Plug-in Connector Replacement .................................................................... 11-32
11-2
Parts Location
Monitor Auto Film Carrier NC240AG
Operation Keyboard
11
Full Keyboard
Mouse
Auto Film Carrier NC135AG
GD119
11-3
11.1 Monitor and Keyboard
11.1.1 Monitor Replacement Installation 11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/

KYA20 Circuit Board
Removal Install the monitor in the reverse order of
removal.
Replacement
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see After installation, perform the following
adjustments. Removal
subsection 14.1.1).
• Monitor Color Adjustment (see 1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker
2. Disconnect the power cable from the and main power supply.
monitor. subsection 11.1.7).
• Menu 426 “Monitor Adjustment” (see
Monitor subsection 9.3.6). 2. Remove the table left cover (see
subsection 11.1.2)
3. Remove the four screws and the two

11.1.2 Table Left Cover collars and keyboard bracket.
Removal/Reinstallation
4. Disconnect the two cables from the
Removal keyboard.
1. Move the monitor from the monitor

table. Screws (4)
2. Remove the four screws and the

monitor table.
Power Cable
EZ917 Monitor Table
3. Open the eight clamps and remove

11 the monitor cable.
11.1.1
11.1.2
Keyboard Bracket Collars (2) Cables
11.1.3
EZ921
5. Remove the three screws and the

KYA20 circuit board.
Screws (4) Screws (3)

EZ919
Clamp (8)
3. Remove the twelve screws and the

Monitor Cable table left cover.
GD1372
Screws (12)
4. Disconnect the monitor cable from the
main control unit.
KYA20 Circuit Board

EZ922
6. Release the lock of the connector and

disconnect the flat print cable from the
circuit board.
Lock Connector
Table Left Cover
EZ920
Reinstallation
Monitor Cable
Main Control Unit Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse
GD1365 order of removal.
Flat Print Cable

EZ923
11-4
7. Remove the four screws and the 11.1.5 Mouse Replacement 4. Open the clamp and remove the
keyboard. screw securing the clamp.
Removal
Screws (4)
1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the
connector.
Screw/Clamp
Mouse
Clamp
Keyboard
EZ924
EZ1234
Installation
5. Remove the screw securing the
Cable grounding wire.
Install the keyboard in the reverse order of
removal. EZ926
6. Remove the two screws and the plug-
Installation in connector.
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Install the mouse in the reverse order of Screw/Grounding Wire
Replacement removal.
Removal 11
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for 11.1.4
1. Open the cable clamp.
Film Carrier 11.1.5
2. Disconnect the cable from the Replacement 11.1.6
connector.
Removal
1. Remove:
Plug-in Connector Screws (2)
• Table right cover (see subsection
EZ1235
13.1.10).
• Scanner rear cover (see subsection
Installation
14.1.1).
Cable Install the plug-in connector in the reverse

2. Disconnect the CN1 connector from
order of removal.
the CTB21 circuit board.
Full Keyboard 3. Disconnect the CCN01 connector.
EZ925 CCN01 Connector
Installation
Install the full keyboard in the reverse

order of removal.
CN1
CTB21 Circuit Board
EZ1231
11-5
11.1.7 Monitor Color

Adjustment
1. Press the [MENU] switch on the

bottom of the monitor.
Display Setting Menu

H–Size/Posi
V–Size/Posi
PIN/P-Bal. A
KRY/K-Bal.
Tilt/Color
OSD B
Degauss
Cancel
Initialize
MENU:Save/Go
FH:37.8KHz/FV: 60.2Hz
2. Press the [SELECT] switch 4 times to

select “Tilt/Color”.
Display Setting Menu

H–Size/Posi
V–Size/Posi
PIN/P-Bal. A
KRY/K-Bal.
Tilt/Color 5500K 9300K
11 OSD B
Degauss
11.1.7 Cancel
Initialize
MENU:Save/Go
FH:37.8KHz/FV: 60.2Hz
3. Make sure the number of the lower

bar graph is 10. If not adjust it using
the [ ] or [ ] switch of “B”.
4. Press the [MENU] switch.
• The display setting menu

disappears.
5. Adjust the brightness using the [ ] or

[ ] switch of “A”.
6. Adjust the contrast using the [ ] or

[ ] switch of “B”.
Standard: Brightness: 14 bars

(half the bar)
Contrast: All bars
Bright
Cont
11-6
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135AG
11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/ 11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Installation

Reinstallation Sensor LED (D402/D410)
Install the parts in the reverse order of
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the two screws and the
upper cover. 1. Remove the upper cover (see 11.2.5 Variable Film Mask
Upper Cover subsection 11.2.1). Timing Inspection
2. Disconnect the connector from the 1. Remove the upper cover (see
sensor LED. subsection 11.2.1).
3. Remove the screw and the sensor 2. Open the mask fully.
LED.
3. Make sure the dot marks on the gear
Connector align with the “K” marks on the racks
as shown.
“•” Marks
on Gear
Screws (2)
EZ440
Reinstallation
Screw Scan Timing/Check Tape “ ” Marks
11
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Sensor LED (D402/D410) on Racks 11.2.1
removal.
EZ442
11.2.2
EZ1596
11.2.3
Installation
11.2.2 Film Leading End 4. If the marks are not aligned, replace 11.2.4
Sensor LED (D400) Install the parts in the reverse order of the variable film mask (see subsection 11.2.5
Replacement removal. 11.2.6). 11.2.6
After installation, perform the menu 44A
“NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see 5. Reinstall the upper cover.
Removal
subsection 9.5.7).
1. Remove the upper cover (see
subsection 11.2.1). 11.2.6 Variable Film Mask
11.2.4 Film Mask Home Removal/Reinstallation
2. Disconnect the connector from the Position Sensor (D409)
sensor LED.
Replacement Removal
3. Remove the screw and the sensor
Removal 1. Remove the upper cover (see
LED.
subsection 11.2.1).
Connector 1. Remove the upper cover (see
subsection 11.2.1). 2. Disconnect the two connectors (D409
and M403).
2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor. 3. Remove the two screws and the
variable film mask.
3. Remove the screw and the sensor.
D409 M403
Connector Screw
Film Leading End

Screw
Sensor LED (D400)
EZ441
Installation

removal. Screws Variable Film Mask
After installation, perform the menu 44A Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409)
EZ1294
“NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see EZ1296
subsection 9.5.7).
11-7
Reinstallation Installation 11.2.10 Film Retainer

Replacement
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
Removal
“NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see
1. Remove the variable film mask (see
subsection 9.5.7).
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor subsection 11.2.6).
(M403) Replacement
2. Remove the four screws and the leaf
Removal
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller springs and the film retainers.
Replacement
1. Remove the variable film mask (see Leaf Springs (2)
Screws (2)
subsection 11.2.6). Removal
2. Remove the two screws and the 1. Remove the variable film mask (see
motor. subsection 11.2.6).
Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) 2. Remove the two belts.
Film Retainers (2)

EZ450
11 Installation
11.2.7
Screw Install the parts in the reverse order of
11.2.8
Belts (2)
removal.
11.2.9
EZ1295
11.2.10 EZ448
11.2.11 Installation
3. Remove the eight screws and the two 11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller
rollers. Replacement
removal. Rollers (2) Removal

11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED subsection 11.2.1).
(D404) Replacement
2. Loosen the two screws and remove
the dust removal roller and two coil
Removal
springs.
1. Remove the variable film mask (see
subsection 11.2.6). Dust Removal Roller Screws (2)

sensor LED. Screws (8)
EZ449
LED.
Installation
Connector
Screw Install the rollers in the reverse order of
removal.
Coil Springs (2)

EZ451
Perforation Sensor LED (D404)

EZ447
11-8
Installation Installation 3. Disconnect the three connectors

(M403, CYB1-1 and CYB1-2).
Installation is essentially in the reverse Install the parts in the reverse order of
order of removal. removal.
NOTE: Screw in the two screws until they

bottom lightly, then back them 2.5
turns counterclockwise.
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover
2.5 Turns Screws (2)
Removal
1. Open the pressure cover.
2. Remove the two screws and the drive

Connectors (3)
section cover.
EZ455
Drive Section Cover
pressure cover.
EZ452
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller

Replacement 11
Removal Screws (2) 11.2.12
EZ444
11.2.13
11.2.14
subsection 11.2.1). Screws (2) Pressure Cover
Reinstallation
2. Remove the screw and the roller
retaining plate and two coil springs. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of EZ456
removal.
Roller Retaining Screw Coil Springs (2)
Reinstallation
Plate
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse
11.2.14 Pressure Cover order of removal.
NOTE: Lightly tighten the two mounting
Removal screws and close and open the
pressure cover several times.
1. Remove: Close the cover, push it against
the right side and tighten the
• upper cover screws.
• drive section cover
EZ453 (see subsection 11.2.13).
3. Remove the two rollers, roller shaft 2. Remove the screw and the harness
and two poly-sliders. cover.
Harness Cover
Poly-sliders (2)
Roller Shaft
Pressure Cover Screws (2)
EZ457
Screw
Rollers (2) EZ1329
EZ454
11-9
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion 11.2.16 Bottom Cover 11.2.17 Nip Home Position
Plate Replacement Removal/Reinstallation Sensor (D407)
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Open the pressure cover. 1. Place the auto film carrier NC135AG
up side down. 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
2. Remove the film mask. subsection 11.2.16).
2. Remove the three white screws and
the bottom cover. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
White Screws (3) Bottom Cover
Screw Nip Home Position

Sensor (D407)
Film Mask
EZ1297
GD120
diffusion plate.
Reinstallation
11 Connector
Screws (2) Diffusion Plate Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse
11.2.15 order of removal. EZ462
11.2.16
NOTE: Insert the tab on the bottom cover Installation
11.2.17
into the slot in the carrier as
11.2.18 Install the parts in the reverse order of
shown.
removal.
Tab
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor

White Screws (3) (D405) Replacement
EZ1300 Removal
Installation 1. Remove the bottom cover (see

Slot
subsection 11.2.16).
Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
GD121
Connector Screw
Perforation Sensor (D405)

EZ463
11-10
Installation Installation 11.2.21 Lower Dust Removal

Roller Replacement
Install the parts in the reverse order of Installation is essentially in the reverse
removal. order of removal.
Removal
“NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see NOTE: Press the guide rail against the
1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see
subsection 9.5.7). locating shoulders and tighten the
two white screws.
White Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and the roller.
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board
Replacement Screws (2) Dust Removal Roller
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see

2. Remove the two white screws and the

guide rail.
White Screws (2)

Guide Rail Guide Rail
EZ473 EZ468
After installation, perform the menu 44P Installation

“Film Carrier Information Setup” to
download the machine data from the hard Install the parts in the reverse order of 11
disk into the memory on the CYB20 circuit removal.
board (see subsection 9.5.15). 11.2.19
11.2.20
11.2.22 Check Tape Sensor 11.2.21
EZ464
11.2.20 Film Leading End (D411) Replacement 11.2.22
Sensor (D401)
3. Disconnect all connectors from the Replacement Removal
circuit board.
Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
4. Remove the three screws and the subsection 11.2.16).
circuit board. 1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see
subsection 11.2.19). 2. Disconnect the connector from the
Screws (3) sensor.
CYB20 Circuit Board 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor. 3. Remove the screw and the sensor.
3. Remove the screw and the sensor. Check Tape Sensor (D411)
Connector Screw
EZ465
Connector Screw
EZ469
Film Leading End Sensor (D401)
EZ466 Installation
Installation Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
Install the parts in the reverse order of After installation, perform the menu 44A
removal. “NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see
After installation, perform the menu 44A subsection 9.5.7).
subsection 9.5.7).
11-11
11.2.23 Scan Timing Sensor Installation 4. Remove the two screws and the
(D403) Replacement motor from the bracket.
order of removal. Motor (M401)
Removal
NOTE: Loosen the two motor bracket
mounting screws. Move the motor
to adjust the belt to the specified
tension. Tighten the two screws.
sensor.
Specified belt tension:10–20g/mm
Belt Tension Gauge
Screw Connector
Bracket Screws (2)
EZ475
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust belt

Screws (2) Motor tension (see subsection 11.2.24).
Pre-scan Start Sensor (D403) EZ472
11 EZ470
11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Section
11.2.23 Installation 11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Motor Removal/Reinstallation
11.2.24 (M401) Replacement
11.2.25 Install the parts in the reverse order of Removal
removal.
11.2.26 Removal
After installation, perform the menu 44A 1. Remove the soft nip drive belt (see
“NC135AG Sensor Calibration” (see subsection 11.2.24).
subsection 9.5.7).
2. Disconnect the connector (D407)
2. Disconnect the motor connector.
3. Cut the cord tie, remove the four
11.2.24 Soft Nip Drive Belt screws and the soft nip drive section.
Replacement 3. Remove the two screws and the
motor bracket.
Soft Nip Drive Section
Removal
Motor Bracket Connector
2. Loosen the two screws securing the

soft nip drive motor bracket.
3. Remove the belt.
Soft Nip Drive Motor
Screws (4) Cord Tie Connector (D407)

Screws (2) EZ476
EZ474
Reinstallation

order of removal.
Belt Screws (2)(Loosen)

EZ471
11-12
NOTE: Align the inlet side arms with the <Phase Adjustment> 11.2.28 Film Feed Roller/Drive
roller of the upper guide, then the Belt Replacement
outlet side arms with the roller as 1. Align the notch in the sensing plate
shown. with the notches in the frames.
Removal
Roller
2. Align the notches in the pulleys with
1. Remove:
the notches in the frame as shown.
• CYB20 circuit board
3. Install the belt
• soft nip drive section
Frames Align Sensing Plate
Notches (see subsection 11.2.26).
2. Loosen the three screws securing the

belt tensioner arms using the 3mm
open-end wrench.
3. Move the belt tensioner arms to their

Inlet Side Arms loosening side and tighten the screws.
EZ477
Belt
Align Pulley Pulley

Align
Notches Notches
EZ546 Screws (3)
4. Press the tensioner pulley with the

specified force using the tension
11
gauge and tighten the screw.
11.2.27
Specified Force: 200 to 240g/mm 11.2.28
Outlet Side Arms
Tensioner Pulley Screw Belt Tensioners (3)
EZ478
EZ481
4. Remove the six screws, roller holders,

11.2.27 Soft Nip Cam Drive
rollers and belt.
Belt Replacement
Screws (6)
Removal
1. Remove the soft nip drive section (see

2. Loosen the screw securing the

tension pulley and remove the belt. Tension Gauge
EZ480
Belt
Screw 5. Align the notch in the sensing plate
with the notches in the frames and
make sure the notches in the pulleys
align with the notches in the frame. Roller Holders Rollers Belt
EZ482
Installation

order of removal.
Tension Pulley
EZ479
Installation

order of removal.
Perform the phase adjustment below.
11-13
NOTE: • Face the glossy surface of the 4. Remove the two screws and the 11.2.31 Film Feed Motor Driver
belt out. pressure cover hook. Circuit Board
• Tighten the screws while
pressing the roller holders to the Screws (2) Pressure Cover Hook
Replacement
inside.
Removal
Roller Holder

guide rail.
White Screws (2)
EZ487
Installation

EZ483
removal.
• Loosen the three screws
securing the tensioner arms,
then re-tighten them. 11.2.30 Display LED (L400)
Replacement Guide Rail
11 11.2.29 Pressure Cover Hook Removal

EZ489
Replacement 3. Disconnect all connectors from the

11.2.29 1. Remove the bottom cover (see driver circuit board.
11.2.30 subsection 11.2.16).
Removal
11.2.31 4. Remove the two screws and the
2. Disconnect the connector from the motor driver circuit board.
display LED.
Screws (2)
3. Remove the screw and the display Connectors (3)
2. Remove the screw and the hook
LED.
release lever.
Screw
Screw Connector
Motor Driver Circuit Board

EZ490
Installation
Display LED
EZ485 Installation is essentially in the reverse
EZ488 order of removal.
3. Remove the guide screw and the
Installation
release plate.
Hook Release Lever Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
Release Plate Guide Screw

EZ486
11-14
NOTE: • The VR1 and VR2 have been 3. Loosen the screw securing the belt 11.2.33 Reduction Pulley Shaft
adjusted at the factory. Do not tensioner arm. 1 Replacement
try to turn them.
• Tighten the two guide rail 4. Move the tensioner arm to the
mounting white screws while loosening side and secure it with the
Removal
pressing the guide rail against screw.
1. Remove:
the locating shoulders.
5. Remove the screw and the belt
White Screws (2) • drive section cover (see subsection
tensioner.
11.2.13).
Screw Tensioner Arm • bottom cover (see subsection
11.2.16).
• film winding section.
2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the

clutch connector (S402).
Cord Tie
Guide Rail
EZ491 Belt Tensioner
Belt Tensioner Arm Screw
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor (M400) EZ1016
Replacement
Removal
motor.
Connector (S402)
11
Film Feed Motor (M400) EZ1018 11.2.32
1. Remove:
11.2.33
3. Loosen the four screws securing the
• drive section cover (see subsection
belt tensioner arms.
11.2.13).
• bottom cover (see subsection
4. Move the four tensioner arms to the
11.2.16).
loosening side and secure them with
the screws.
motor connector (M400).
5. Remove the screws and the four belt
tensioners.
Cord Tie Connector (M400)
Tensioner Rear Tensioner

Screws (2) Arms (4)
Screws (4) Rear
EZ1017 Tensioner (1)
Installation

removal.
Front
EZ1015
Tensioner (4) Tensioners (3)
Spring With Tensioner Arm

Paint Mark Securing Screws (4)
EZ993
11-15
6. Remove the two screws and the two • Tighten the two screws while 3. Loosen the three screws securing the
bearing holders, collar, pulley shaft 1, pressing the bearing holders tensioner arms.
clutch plate, spacer and four bearings. against the winding section and
the locating shoulders. 4. Move the three tensioner arms to the
Bearing Holders (2) loosening side and secure them by
Bearing Holders (2) the screws.
Screws (2) 5. Remove the three screws and the

three tensioners.
Screws (3)
Screws (2)
Pulley Shaft 1 EZ997
EZ994
• The rear tensioner is higher than
7. Remove the three screws and the the others.
crown pulley from the clutch plate. • The spring of the motor side
Tensioner Tensioners (3)
tensioner has a paint mark
Bearing Holder Arms (3) Tensioner Arm
Bearing Securing Screws (3)
Collar Crown EZ1338
Bearings Pulley 11.2.34 Reduction Pulley Shaft
2 Replacement 6. Remove the two screws, pulley shaft
11 2, bearing holder, three bearings,
Pulley Shaft 1 spacer, crown pulley and collar.
11.2.34
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove:
Clutch Plate
Screws (3) 11.2.13).
Spacer
11.2.16).
Bearing
Holder Bearing • winding section.
EZ995
connector (S400).
Installation
Cord Tie
Bearing Holder Pulley Shaft 2
order of removal.
EZ1339
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
with the stop tab as shown. 7. Remove the three screws and the
crown pulley from the clutch plate.
Clutch
Spacer
Clutch Plate
Groove Crown Pulley
Connector (S400) Bearings

EZ1023 Collar
Screws (3)
Stop Tab Bearing

Bearing
Holder
EZ996
Pulley Shaft 2
EZ1001
Installation

order of removal.
11-16
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch 3. Loosen the two screws securing the 8. Remove the two screws, two bearing
with the stop tab as shown. tensioner arms. holders, two bearings and pulley shaft
• Tighten the two screws while 3.
pressing the bearing holders 4. Move the two tensioner arms to the
against the winding section and loosening side and secure them by Screws (2)
the locating shoulders. the screws.
Screws (2)
5. Remove the two screws and the two
tensioners.
Screws (2) Tensioner

Tensioner Arms (2)
Clutch
Bearing
Pulley Shaft 3
Holders (2)
Bearing Holders (2) GD123
Stop Tab Bearing Holder

Groove
Bearing
EZ1002
Tensioner Arm Pulley Shaft 3
Securing Screws (2)
GD122
11.2.35 Reduction Pulley Shaft
3 Replacement 6. Loosen the screw securing the arm of
the bottom tensioner.
11
Removal 11.2.35
1. Remove: tensioner. Bearing
• drive section cover Bearing Holder

Tensioner Arm
(see subsection 11.2.13). Screws (2) GD124
Securing Screw
• bottom cover
(see subsection 11.2.16). Installation
• winding section.
2. Disconnect the clutch connector order of removal.
(S401).
with the stop tab as shown.
• Tighten the two screws while
pressing the bearing holders
against the winding section and
Tensioner
EZ1031 Screws
Bearing Holder
Clutch
Connector (S401)
EZ1028
Bearing Holder
Groove Stop Tab

GD125
11-17
11.2.36 Reduction Belt 3. Disconnect the three connectors 11.2.38 Loop Sensor (D406)
Replacement (M403, CYB1-1 and CYB1-2). Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Remove: 1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see

• reduction pulley shaft 1 2. Disconnect the sensor connector and
(see subsection 11.2.33). remove the two screws securing the
• reduction pulley shaft 2 sensor and then remove the sensor.
• reduction pulley shaft 3 Sensor Connector
2. Remove the reduction belts. Connectors (3)
EZ455
Reduction Belts
4. Disconnect the three connectors
(CYB2, CYB3 and CYB4) from the
CYB20 circuit board.

grounding wire.
Screws (2)
CYB4 CYB3 CYB2 GD1637
3. Remove the two screws and then the

11 Pulley Shaft 1 sensor from the bracket.
11.2.36 Pulley Shaft 2
Pulley Shaft 3 Sensor Bracket
11.2.37
11.2.38 GD126
Installation
Screws (2)
order of removal. Sensor (D406)
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the belt Screw/Grounding Wire GD1638
out.
EZ1333
Installation
6. Remove the two screws and the plug- Install the sensor in the reverse order of
11.2.37 Plug-in Connector in connector. removal.
Replacement
Removal

2. Remove the screw and the harness

cover.
Harness Cover
Screws (2)
Plug-in Connector
EZ1334
Installation

removal.
Screw
EZ1329
11-18
11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/ Installation 11.3.4 Film Retainer

Reinstallation Replacement
removal.
Removal After installation, perform the menu 44B
Removal
1. Open the pressure cover. 1. Remove the upper cover (see
subsection 9.5.8).
subsection 11.3.1).
upper cover. 2. Remove the two screws and the
11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller spring retaining plate.
Upper Cover Replacement
Screws (2) Spring Retaining Plate
Removal
1. Remove the sensor LED (D447/D448)


spring retaining plates.
EZ521
White Screws (2) 3. Remove the leaf spring and the two
EZ1152
film retainers. 11
Leaf Spring 11.3.1
Reinstallation Holes (2) 11.3.2
Screws (4) 11.3.3
Spring Retaining Plates
order of removal. 11.3.4
Locating
EZ519
Pins (2)
3. Remove the six white coil springs, six

11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED rollers, three roller shafts and six poly-
(D447)/TAP Sensor LED sliders.
(D448) Replacement
Removal
White Coil
Springs (6)
1. Remove the upper cover (see Film Retainers (2)
subsection 11.3.1). EZ522
2. Disconnect the connector from the Installation

sensor LED.
3. Remove the two screws and the order of removal.
sensor LED and spacer.
NOTE: Align the holes in the leaf spring
Screws (2) Connector Sensor LED with the two locating pins as
(D447/D448) shown.
Poly-sliders (6)
Rollers (6) Roller Shafts (3)
EZ520
Installation

removal.
Spacer
EZ518
11-19
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) 3. Disconnect the FPC (Flat Printed 11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal
Circuit Board Circuit) from the circuit board by Roller Replacement
following q to e in the figure below.
Replacement
Removal
Removal circuit board.
1. Remove the upper cover (see subsection 11.3.1).
subsection 11.3.1). circuit board.
2. Disconnect the FPC (Flat Printed P Read Head Circuit Board sensor.
Circuit) from the circuit board by
following q to e in the figure below. Screws (2) Screws (2)

circuit board.
4. Remove the screw and the circuit

board.
FPC
C Write Head Circuit C Read Head

Board (MWH01) Circuit Board
Sensor
FPC
EZ1270
EZ525
11 Installation
the dust removal roller and two coil
11.3.5 springs.
11.3.6
removal.
11.3.7 Dust Removal Roller
Screws (2)
11.3.8
P Write Head Circuit Connector 11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED
Board (MWH01)
(D457) Replacement
EZ523
Removal
Installation
subsection 11.3.1).
removal.
2. Disconnect the connector (LEG1)
from the sensor LED.
Coil Springs (2)
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90)
Circuit Board 3. Remove the screw, the sensor LED EZ529
and spacer.
Replacement Installation
Sensor 2 LED (D457)
Screw
Removal Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
subsection 11.3.1). NOTE: Screw in the two screws until they
bottom lightly, then back them 2.5
2. Remove the two white screws and the turns counterclockwise.
circuit board cover.
Screws (2) 2.5 Turns
White Screws (2) Circuit Board Cover
Spacer Connector (LEG1)

EZ1305
Installation

removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44B
Screw in Until Bottoms Lightly.
EZ530
EZ524 subsection 9.5.8).
11-20
11.3.9 Dummy Head 11.3.10 Magnetic Head 5. Remove the two E-rings and the
Replacement Replacement magnetic head.
Removal Removal
1. Remove the upper dust removal roller 1. Remove the upper cover (see
(see subsection 11.3.8). subsection 11.3.1).
2. Remove the two E-rings and move the 2. Remove the two screws and the
pressure cover hook link. circuit board cover.
Link E-rings (2) Circuit Board Cover

Screws (2)
E-rings (2) Magnetic Head

EZ533
Installation

order of removal.
Follow the steps below when tightening
EZ1271 EZ524 the magnetic head.
3. Remove the screw and the dummy 3. Disconnect the four FPC (Flat Printed 1. Close the pressure cover.
head. Circuit) from each circuit board.
2. Remove the screw and the stop. 11
Screw Dummy Head Write Head Circuit Boards
Stop 11.3.9
11.3.10
EZ1272
FPC (4)
Screw
Installation Read Head Circuit Boards
EZ1374
EZ531
3. Tighten the two screws while pressing
removal. 4. Remove the two screws securing the
the magnetic heads to the inside as
magnetic head.
shown.
4. Install the stop and tighten the screw.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ532
Press Heads to Inside.

EZ534
11-21
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip 11.3.12 Bottom Cover 11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445)
Roller Replacement Removal/ Replacement
Reinstallation
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove the upper cover (see 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
subsection 11.3.1). 1. Place the auto film carrier NC240AG subsection 11.3.12).
upside down.
2. Remove the screw and the circuit 2. Disconnect the connector from the
board. 2. Remove the two screw and the sensor.
bottom cover.
Screws Circuit Board 3. Remove the two screws and the
Bottom Cover sensor.
IPI Sensor (D445)
EZ1273 Screws (2)

EZ492
3. Remove the two screws securing the Connector Screws (2)
11 upper nip roller and the nip roller unit. Reinstallation EZ494
11.3.11 Screws (2) Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Installation
11.3.12 removal.
removal.
11.3.14
11.3.15 11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/
TAP Sensor (D455)
11.3.15 Display LED (L440)
Replacement
Replacement
Removal
Removal
subsection 11.3.12). 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
Nip Roller Unit subsection 11.3.12).
EZ1274
sensor. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
4. Remove the two rollers and roller display LED.
shaft. 3. Remove the two screws and the
sensor. 3. Remove the screw and the display
LED.
Connector Screws (2)
Display LED (L440)
Roller Shaft
Rollers (2)
EZ1275
Installation MTP1/TAP Sensors (D454/D455)

EZ493
Install the parts in the reverse order of Connector Screw
removal. Installation EZ495
Install the parts in the reverse order of Installation

removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44B Install the parts in the reverse order of
“NC240AG Sensor Calibration” (see removal.
subsection 9.5.8).
11-22
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board 11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/ 3. Remove the screw and the tensioner
Replacement Close Sensor (D406) section cover.
Replacement
Screw
Removal
Removal
subsection 11.3.12). 1. Remove the CYC20 circuit board (see
2. Disconnect all connectors from the
CYC20 circuit board. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
3. Remove the five screws and the
circuit board. 3. Remove the screw and the sensor.
Screws (5) Connector Tensioner Section Cover

EZ1304

tensioner arms, move the arms to the
loosening side and secure them with
the screws.
Tensioner Arms (3)
CYC20 Circuit Board Screw Sensor 11

EZ496 EZ497
11.3.16
Installation Installation 11.3.17
11.3.18
Install the parts in the reverse order of Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44P Screws (3)
“Film Carrier Information Setup” to
EZ499
download the machine data from the hard
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt
disk into the memory on the CYC20 circuit
Replacement 5. Remove the two screws and the
board (see subsection 9.5.15).
harness guide.
Removal
perforation /TAP sensor.
1. Remove:
7. Remove the two screws and the IPI
• CYC20 circuit board (see
sensor.
• film winding unit (see subsection
11.3.23). Screws (2)
Harness Guide

tensioner arm at the bottom of the
carrier, move the arm to the loosening
side and secure it with the screw.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
Perforation/TAP
Sensors
IPI Sensor
Screws (2)
EZ500
EZ498
11-23
8. Remove the six screws, roller holders, 11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal 11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver
three roller and belts. Roller/Dummy Head Circuit Board
Opposite Roller Replacement
Roller Holder Screws (6) Rollers (3)
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 11.3.12).
2. Disconnect the three connectors guide rail.
(CYC1, CYC4 and CYC5) from the
CYC20 circuit board. Guide Rail
White Screws (2)
harness guide.
Belts
EZ501 CYC20 Circuit Board
Installation
CYC1
Installation is essentially in the reverse CYC4
order of removal. CYC5
EZ506
NOTE: • Face the glossy surface of the

belt out. 3. Disconnect all connectors from the
driver circuit board.
11 • Tighten the screws while
pressing the roller holders
against the inside as shown. Harness Guide Screws (2) 4. Remove the two screws and the driver
11.3.19 circuit board.
11.3.20 EZ503
4. Remove the two screws and the lower

dust removal roller.
Lower Dust Removal Roller

Screws (2)
Roller Holder
Screws (2) Driver Circuit Board
EZ502 EZ507
• After installation, loosen the Installation

three screws securing the
tensioner arm, then re-tighten EZ504 Installation is essentially in the reverse
them. order of removal.
5. Remove the four springs, two rollers,
two roller shafts and four collars. NOTE: • Do not try to turn the VR1 and
VR2. They have been adjusted
Springs (4) Collars (4) at the factory.
• Tighten the two white screws
while pressing the guide rail
against the locating shoulders
as shown.
VR
White Screws (2)
Rollers (2) Roller Shafts (2)

EZ505
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of Guide Rail

removal. EZ508
11-24
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion 11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor 4. Disconnect the two connectors (D444
Plate Replacement (D444) Replacement and D453).
D444
Removal Removal
1. Open the pressure cover. 1. Remove the CYC20 circuit board (see
2. Remove the film mask.

sensor.
Connector
Screw
D453
EZ1306
5. Remove the screw and the film

winding unit.
Film Mask
EZ1301 Screw

diffusion plate.
Feed Stop Sensor (D444)
Diffusion Plate EZ1153 11
Installation 11.3.21
11.3.22
Install the parts in the reverse order of 11.3.23
removal.
Film Winding Unit

11.3.23 Film Winding Unit EZ512
Reinstallation
Screws (2) Removal
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of
EZ1303 removal.
1. Remove:
Installation
• CYC20 circuit board
order of removal.
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the
diffusion plate down.
tensioner arm, move the arm to the
loosening side and re-tighten the
screw.

tensioner.
Tensioner
Screws (2)
Arm Securing Screw

EZ511
11-25
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Reassembly 11.3.26 Nest Section Cover

Disassembly/ Removal/Reinstallation
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse
Reassembly order of disassembly.
Removal
Disassembly NOTE: Hold the sensing plate on the gear
shaft and make sure the gear
1. Remove the film winding unit (see turns only in the arrow direction.
subsection 11.3.23). 2. Remove the screw and the nest
section cover.
2. Remove the two E-rings, gears, Sensing Plate
bearings, drive shaft and poly-slider in Screw
this order.
Drive Shaft
Poly-slider
Gears (2)
EZ517
Nest Section Cover
EZ1154
11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453)
Replacement Reinstallation
Bearings (2)
11 E-rings (2)
EZ513 Removal Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of
removal.
11.3.24
3. Remove MTP sensor 2 (see 1. Remove the film winding unit (see
11.3.25 subsection 11.3.23).
11.3.26 11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor
11.3.27 4. Remove the two springs, four E-rings, 2. Remove the two screws and the (D456) Replacement
shaft and nip roller. cover.

Removal
Springs (2)
E-rings (4) 1. Remove the nest section cover (see
Nip Roller
Cover

sensor.
Shaft Screw
Connector
EZ515
5. Remove the two E-rings, gear, Screws (2) Screw

winding roller, shaft, two bearings and
MTP Sensor 2 (D453)
poly-slider.
EZ1307
E-rings (2) Winding Roller
Installation

removal. Cartridge Sensor (D456)
After installation, perform the menu 44B EZ536
subsection 9.5.8). Installation

removal.
Poly-slider
Shaft
Bearings (2)
Gear
EZ516
11-26
11.3.28 Door Open/Close 11.3.30 Nest Section Unit 11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444)
Sensor (D441) Replacement Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: Replace the door open/close Removal
Removal motor (M441) together with the
nest section unit. 1. Remove the nest section unit (see
1. Remove the drive section cover (see subsection 11.3.30).
subsection 11.3.35). Removal
2. Disconnect the connector from the 1. Remove: motor.
sensor.
• nest section cover (see subsection Screws (2)
3. Remove the screw and the sensor. 11.3.26).
Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) 11.3.35).

five connectors (M444, D456, CYC2A,
M441 and M442).
M442
Cord Tie
Cartridge Motor (M444)
D456 EZ541
Connector Screw
Installation
EZ537 11
Installation removal. 11.3.28
M441
11.3.29
11.3.30
removal.
CYC2A
M444 11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442) 11.3.31
EZ539 Replacement 11.3.32
11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor

(D442/D443) 3. Remove the three screws and the Removal
nest section unit.
Replacement 1. Remove the nest section unit (see
Nest Section Unit subsection 11.3.30).
Removal
1. Remove the drive section cover (see motor bracket.

sensor.

sensor.
Connector VEI/Chucking Sensors

(D442/D443)
Screws (3)
EZ540
Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
Installation
EZ543

removal.
Screws (2)
EZ538
Installation

removal.
11-27
3. Remove the two screws and the 11.3.34 Cartridge Holder 3. Turn the release knob to release the
motor. Locking Release cartridge holder.
Method Release Knob
Screws (2)
1. Remove:

11.3.35).
• nest section cover (see subsection
11.3.26).
2. While pushing in the rack, press the

pin down and push in the rack fully to
release locking.
EZ1268
Spool Motor (M442) 4. Turn the gear to insert the cartridge

into the holder and set the holder.
EZ544
5. Make sure the cartridge is released by

Installation
turning the release knob.
removal.
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Rack

11 Replacement
EZ1265
11.3.33
Removal
11.3.34
11.3.35 1. Remove: Cartridge
• VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Gear

EZ1269
• spool motor bracket (see
6. Reinstall the removed covers.
2. Remove the two E-rings, bearings,
torque limiter and shaft.
Pin
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover
E-rings (2) EZ1266
Bearings (2) Shaft
Push in Rack Fully.
Torque Limiter Removal

drive section cover.
Screws (3)
Drive Section Cover
EZ1267
EZ545
Installation

removal.
EZ1155
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of

removal.
11-28
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) 6. Remove the two screws and the 3. Loosen the four screws securing the
Replacement motor. belt tensioner arms.
Film Feed Motor (M440) 4. Move the four tensioner arms to the
Removal loosening side and secure them with
Screws (2)
the screws.
1. Remove:
5. Remove the four screws and the four
belt tensioners.
11.3.12).
• drive section cover (see subsection Tensioner Rear Tensioner
11.3.35). Arms (4)
Screws (4) Rear
2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the Tensioner (1)
connector (M440).
Cord Tie Connector (M440) EZ991
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of Front

Tensioner (4) Tensioners (3)
removal.
Spring With Tensioner Arm
Paint Mark Securing Screws (4)
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 EZ993
Replacement
6. Remove the screw and the cover
EZ989
Removal
bracket. 11
3. Loosen the screw securing the belt 11.3.36
7. Remove the two screws, two bearing
tensioner arm. 1. Remove:
holders, collar, pulley shaft 1, clutch 11.3.37
plate, spacer and four bearings.
4. Move the tensioner arm to the • bottom cover
loosening side and secure it with the (see subsection 11.3.12). Bearing Holders (2)
screw. • drive section cover
5. Remove the screw and the belt
tensioner. 2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the
clutch connector (S442).
Tensioner Arm
Cord Tie Connector (S442)
Screws (2)
Pulley Shaft 1
EZ994

Screw EZ992
Belt Tensioner Bearing Holder
Belt Tensioner Arm Screw Bearing
EZ990
Collar Crown
Bearings Pulley
Pulley Shaft 1
Clutch Plate
Screws (3)
Spacer
Bearing
Holder Bearing
EZ995
11-29
Installation 11.3.38 Pulley Shaft 2 6. Remove the two screws, pulley shaft
Replacement 2, bearing holder, three bearings,
Installation is essentially in the reverse spacer, crown pulley and collar.
order of removal.
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove:
Clutch
11.3.12).
Groove 11.3.35).
2. Disconnect the clutch connector

(S440).
Bearing Holder Pulley Shaft 2

EZ1000
Stop Tab 7. Remove the three screws and the

EZ996
Spacer
• Tighten the two screws while Clutch Plate
pressing the bearing holders Crown Pulley
the locating shoulders. Bearings
11 Bearing Holders (2)
Connector (S440) Collar
EZ998 Screws (3)
11.3.38 Screws (2)
tensioner arms. Bearing
Bearing
Holder
4. Move the three tensioner arms to the Pulley Shaft 2
loosening side and secure them by
EZ1001
the screws.
Installation
three tensioners.
EZ997 order of removal.
Screws (3) Tensioner Arms (3)
• The rear tensioner is higher than NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
the others. with the stop tab as shown.
• The spring of the motor side • Tighten the two screws while
tensioner has a paint mark. pressing the bearing holders
Screws (2)
Arm Securing Screw

Tensioners (3)
Clutch
EZ999
Bearing Holders (2)
Stop Tab
Groove
EZ1002
11-30
11.3.39 Pulley Shaft 3 5. Loosen the two screws securing the Installation
Replacement tensioner arms.
6. Move the two tensioner arms to the order of removal.
Removal loosening side and secure them by
the screws. NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
1. Remove:
7. Remove the two screws and the two • Tighten the two screws while
• bottom cover
tensioners. pressing the bearing holders
Screws (2) Tensioner (2) the locating shoulders.
Tensioner Arms (2) Screws (2)
2. Disconnect the clutch connector
(S441).
Bearing
Holder (2)
Clutch
Tension Arm Securing Screws (2)

Groove Stop Tab
EZ1005
EZ1008
8. Remove the two screws, two bearing
Connector (S441)
holders, two bearings and pulley shaft 11
EZ1003 3.
11.3.40 Reduction Belt 11.3.39
3. Loosen the screw securing the arm of Screws (2) Replacement 11.3.40
the bottom tensioner.
Removal
tensioner. 1. Remove:
Tensioner Arm Securing Screw • reduction pulley shaft 1

• reduction pulley shaft 2
• reduction pulley shaft 3
Bearing Holders (2) Pulley Shaft 3 • film feed rollers/belts
EZ1006 (see subsection 11.3.18).
Bearing 2. Remove the reduction belts.

Pulley Shaft 3 Reduction Belts
Tensioner Screws (2)
EZ1004
Bearing Holder
Bearing
Bearing Holder
EZ1007
Pulley Shaft 1
Pulley Shaft 2 Pulley Shaft 3
EZ1009
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the belt

out.
11-31
11.3.41 Plug-in Connector

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• bottom cover
2. Disconnect the connector (CYC6)

from the CYC20 circuit board.
3. Disconnect the two connectors

(CYC4A and CYC5A).
CYC20 Circuit Board
11
11.3.41
CYC6 CYC5A CYC4A

EZ1331
4. Cut the five cord ties.

grounding wire.
6. Remove the two screws, the plug-in

connector and bracket.
Grounding Wire
Screw
Bracket
Screws (2)
Plug-in Connector
EZ1332
Installation
Install the part in the reverse order of

removal.
11-32
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1 Scanning Lamp Section ............................................................................... 12-3

12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 12-3
12.1.2 Lamp Socket Replacement ............................................................................ 12-3
12.1.3 First IR Filter Replacement ............................................................................ 12-4
12.1.4 Safety Thermostat (ST201) Replacement ..................................................... 12-4
12.1.5 Light Source Section Detecting Interlock Switch (D301) Replacement ......... 12-4
12.1.6 Light Source Section Suction Fan (F302) Replacement ................................ 12-5
12.1.7 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan (F303) Replacement ............................... 12-5
12.1.8 Light Source Cooling Fan (F308) Replacement ............................................ 12-6
12.2 Light Source Filter Section .......................................................................... 12-7

12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 12-7
12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 12-7
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor (D202) Replacement .......................... 12-7
12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ........................................... 12-7
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement ........................................................ 12-7
12.2.6 Filter Replacement ......................................................................................... 12-8
12
12.2.7 Light Source Aperture Home Position/Standby Sensor (D201/D203)
Replacement ............................................................................................ 12-8
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture Motor (M201) Replacement ....................................... 12-9
12.2.9 Light Source Aperture Belt Replacement ....................................................... 12-9
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box Sensor (D204/D205) Replacement ................................ 12-10
12-1
Parts Location
Mirror Box

Suction Fan (F302)
Light Source Filter Unit

Exhaust Fan (F303)
12
Air Filter
Light Source Aperture

Motor (M201)
Light Source Cooling Fan (F308)
Scanning Lamp Unit
EZ914
12-2
12.1 Scanning Lamp Section
12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit 4. Hold the bottom of the lamp unit and 4. Close the light source section cover.
Removal/Reinstallation remove the unit by pulling it slightly.
5. Perform the following adjustments.
Lamp Unit
Removal • Menu 432 “Lamp Position
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.2).
1. Release the latch and open the light
• Menu 13 “Scanner Correction”.
source section cover.
• Menu 16 “Print Condition Upkeep”
12.1.2 Lamp Socket

Replacement
IMPORTANT:
EZ874 Wear clean gloves to prevent leaving
fingerprints.
Reinstallation
Removal
1. Align the two cutouts in the lamp unit
with the pins on the filter unit. 1. Remove the lamp unit (see subsection
Light Source Section Cover 12.1.1).
Filter Unit
EZ870
2. Remove the screw and the first IR
filter bracket.
2. Release the locking tabs and
disconnect the lamp and safety
thermostat connectors.
Safety Thermostat Connector

Pins (2) 12
Cutouts (2) 12.1.1
12.1.2
Lamp Unit
EZ875
2. Secure the lamp unit by tightening the

two screws. GD1422
Lamp Connector
3. Remove the screw and the reflector.
GD1421 4. Remove the scanning lamp.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Scanning Lamp Reflector

lamp unit.
Screws (2)
EZ876
3. Connect the two connectors.
Connectors
Screw
Screws (2) GD1423
EZ873
GD1427
12-3
5. Remove the two screws and the lamp Installation 12.1.4 Safety Thermostat
socket. (ST201) Replacement
Screws (2) order of removal.
Removal
NOTE: • Face the coating surface of the
1. Remove the lamp unit (see subsection
filter down.
12.1.1).
Filter
2. Disconnect the two wires from the
safety thermostat.

safety thermostat.
Lamp Socket Safety Thermostat (ST201) Screws (2)

EZ583
Installation

removal. GD1429
After installation, perform the following • While push the filter against the
adjustments. two locating pins, secure the
filter with the two retaining plates
• Menu 432 “Lamp Position Adjustment” and tighten the two screws.
• Menu 433 “135 Light Source Aperture Locating Pins (2)
Table” (see subsection 9.4.3). Wires
12 • Menu 434 “120 Light Source Aperture

Table” (see subsection 9.4.4).
EZ591
• Menu 13 “Scanner Correction”. Installation

12.1.3
12.1.5 removal.
12.1.3 First IR Filter
Replacement
Retaining
IMPORTANT: Plates (2) Screws (2) Filter
Detecting Interlock
Wear clean gloves to prevent leaving Switch (D301)
GD1430
fingerprints. Replacement
After installation, perform the following
Removal Removal
adjustments.
1. Remove the lamp unit (see subsection 1. Open the light source section cover.
• Menu 432 “Lamp Position Adjustment”
12.1.1).
• Menu 433 “135 Light Source Aperture 2. Remove the two screws and the
2. Remove the two screws and the first switch cover.
IR filter.
• Menu 434 “120 Light Source Aperture
Table” (see subsection 9.4.4). Screws (2)
First IR Filter Screws (2) Switch Cover
EZ880
GD1428
12-4
3. Disconnect the connector from the 12.1.6 Light Source Section Installation
switch. Suction Fan (F302)
Replacement order of removal.
Removal NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow

points towards the scanning lamp
1. Open the light source section cover. side.
2. Remove the light source section air

filter.
3. Disconnect the connector (F302). Exhaust Fan (F303)
Connector (D301) Replacement
EZ881
Removal
switch cover. 1. Open the light source section cover.
Switch Cover Screws (2) 2. Disconnect the connector (F303).
Connector (F302)
EZ884
4. Remove the two screws, lift the

bracket slightly and remove it.
12
12.1.6
EZ882 Connector (F303)
12.1.7
EZ887
5. Remove the spring, E-ring, shaft and
the switch. 3. Remove the four screws and the fan
bracket.
E-ring
Fan Bracket
Screws (2) Bracket

EZ885
5. Remove the two screws and the fan

from the bracket.
Switch
Screws (2)
Spring Shaft
EZ883
Installation Screws (4)

EZ888
removal.
Arrow
Fan (F302)
EZ886
12-5
4. Remove the four screws and the two 4. Remove the two screws securing the
bracket from the fan. fan to the bracket, then the fan.
Screws (4) Bracket
Screws (2)
Fan (F303)
Outside
Bracket (2) Fan (F308)
Arrow
EZ889 Arrow
GD1432
Installation
Installation
order of removal.
order of removal.
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
points towards the outside.
points towards the light source.
12.1.8 Light Source Cooling

12 Fan (F308) Replacement
12.1.8 Removal
1. Remove the lamp unit (see subsection

12.1.1).
2. Open the clamp and disconnect the

fan connector.
3. Remove the four screws securing the

fan bracket, then the bracket.
Clamp
Screws (4)
Fan Bracket Fan Connector
GD1431
12-6
12.2 Light Source Filter Section
12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/ 3. Disconnect the two connectors (M202 12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive
Reinstallation and D202). Motor (M202)
Replacement
Connector (M202)
Removal
Connector (D202)
Removal
1. Remove the filter bracket (see
2. Remove the two screws securing the subsection 12.2.2).
filter unit.
2. Remove the harness from the two
3. Remove the filter unit by pulling it clamps.
toward the front.
3. Remove the two screws, the motor
Filter Unit and bracket.
EZ597
Reinstallation

removal.
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home

Screws (2)
Position Sensor (D202)
Bracket Screws (2) Motor (M202)
Motor Connector Replacement
EZ600
EZ879
Removal
Reinstallation
Installation 12
Installation is essentially in the reverse 12.2.1
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse subsection 12.2.2).
order of removal.
order of removal. 12.2.2
2. Remove the two screws and the 12.2.3
NOTE: Note the direction of the bracket
sensor bracket.
and the harness routing. 12.2.4
12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Screws (2) 12.2.5
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive
Removal Gear Replacement
1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection Removal
12.2.1).
2. Remove the two screws and the filter subsection 12.2.2).
bracket.
2. Remove the screw, the filter and shaft.
Screws (2)
Filter Bracket EZ598
Screw
3. Release the locking tab and remove
the sensor from the bracket.
Bracket
Locking Tab
EZ596
Sensor (D202)
EZ599 Shaft Filter
EZ601
Installation

removal.
12-7
3. Remove the drive gear and two poly- 3. Remove the screw and the retaining After installation, perform the following
sliders. plate and second IR filter. adjustments.
Drive Gear Second IR Filter • Menu 433 “135 Light Source Aperture
Screw Table” (see subsection 9.4.3).
Poly-sliders (2) • Menu 434 “120 Light Source Aperture
12.2.7 Light Source Aperture

Home Position/Standby
Sensor (D201/D203)
Replacement
EZ602 Retaining Plate
EZ603
Removal
Installation
4. Remove the two screws, the filter 1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection
Install the parts and gear in the reverse holder and the heat-absorbing filter. 12.2.1).
order of removal.
Filter Holder
After installation, perform the following Screws (2) bracket.
adjustments.
Sensor Bracket
12 • Menu 13 “Scanner Correction”.
12.2.6
12.2.7
12.2.6 Filter Replacement Heat-absorbing Filter
EZ604
Removal
Screw
Installation
1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection EZ1228
12.2.1).
order of removal. 3. Disconnect the connector from the
2. Remove the screw and the filter sensor.
bracket.
NOTE: Face the transparent surface of
the heat-absorbing filter down. 4. Remove the screw and the sensor
Screw from the bracket.
Face the coating (painted) surface
of the second IR filter down.
Sensor (D201)
Second IR Filter
Filter Bracket
Connector
EZ593
Screws (2)
Sensor (D203)
Heat-absorbing Transparent Coating EZ607
Filter Surface Surface
EZ605
12-8
Installation <Belt Tension Adjustment> 3. Remove the two screws and the
aperture plate guide.
Install the parts in the reverse order of 1. Loosen the two motor mounting
removal. screws. 4. Remove the four screws and the two
belt holders and leaf springs.
After installation, perform the following 2. Adjust the belt tension by moving the
adjustments. motor. Aperture Plate Guide
• Menu 433 “135 Light Source Aperture Specified Tension: 250 to 300g/3mm
• Menu 434 “120 Light Source Aperture 3. Tighten the two motor mounting
Table” (see subsection 9.4.4). screws.
• Menu 16 “Print Condition Upkeep” Motor Belt
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture

Motor (M201)
Replacement Belt Holders (2)
Leaf Springs (2)
Removal EZ611
1. Remove the balance filter bracket 5. Loosen the two screws securing the
(see subsection 12.2.2). motor and remove the belt from the
Tension Gauge
Screws (2) pulleys.
2. Remove the two screws and the EZ610
bracket. Screws (2)
Screws (2) Belt

12.2.9 Light Source Aperture 12
Belt Replacement
12.2.8
Removal 12.2.9
1. Remove the balance filter bracket

2. Remove the two screws securing the Pulley

Bracket bracket. EZ612
Screws (2)
EZ608
6. Remove the belt.

motor.
Screws (2)
Bracket
EZ608
Belt
EZ1665
Motor (M201)
EZ609
Installation

order of removal.
Aftere installation, adjust belt tension by
following the steps below.
12-9
Installation 5. Install the two leaf springs and belt 3. Disconnect the connector (D204 or
holders and tighten the four screws. D205).
1. Install the belt and adjust its tension
(see subsection 12.2.8). Screws (4) Belt Holders (2) 4. Remove the two screws, the sensor
and holder plate.
2. Install the aperture plate guide so that
its groove aligns with the aperture 120 Sensor Sensor
plates and tighten the two screws. (D205) Holder Plate
135 Sensor
Screws (2) (D204)
Aperture
Plate Guide
EZ614 Screws (2)
6. Re-install the removed parts in the

reverse order of removal. Connector (D204) Connector (D205)
EZ616
7. After installation, perform the following
Aperture Plates adjustments.
Installation
EZ1666
• Menu 433 “135 Light Source
3. Install the leaf spring over the two Aperture Table” (see subsection
removal.
bushings and slider. 9.4.3).
• Menu 434 “120 Light Source
Aperture Table” (see subsection
Leaf Springs (2) 9.4.4).
12 • Menu 13 “Scanner Correction”.
12.2.10
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box

Sensor (D204/D205)
Replacement
Slider Bushings (2)

Removal
EZ1667 1. Remove the scanner section cover

4. Position the aperture plates to the fully
open position and engage the belt 2. Remove the four screws and the
teeth with the teeth on the sliders. mirror box guide.

Belt Holder
Slider
Belt Mirror Box Guide

EZ613 EZ615
12-10
13. SCANNER SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 13-2
13.1 Scanner Section ............................................................................................. 13-3

13.1.1 Scanner Section Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 13-3
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 13-3
13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 13-3
13.1.4 Conjugate Length Variable Belt Replacement ............................................... 13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) Replacement ................................ 13-4
13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 13-4
13.1.7 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107) Replacement .................................... 13-5
13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement ................................................................................ 13-5
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement ......................................................... 13-6
13.1.10 Table Right Cover (Scanner Section Rear Cover) Removal/Reinstallation ... 13-6
13.1.11 Conjugate Length Variable Home Position (D102)/Upper Position (D103)/
Lower Position (D104) Sensor Replacement ........................................... 13-6
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow Sensor (D351) Replacement .............................................. 13-7
13.2 Lens Section .................................................................................................... 13-8

13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) Replacement ........................................... 13-8
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................... 13-8
13
13.2.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) Replacement ........................................ 13-8
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Replacement ......................................................... 13-9
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement ................................................................................. 13-9
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle Replacement ........................................................... 13-10
13-1
Parts Location
CCD Cooling Fan (F301)
Conjugate Length
Variable Motor (M101)
CCD21 Unit
ND Filter
Lens Unit
Film Cooling Air Nozzle
13
EZ915
13-2
13.1 Scanner Section
13.1.1 Scanner Section Top 13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover 13.1.4 Conjugate Length
Cover Removal/ Removal/Reinstallation Variable Belt
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove the film carrier.
1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker 1. Remove the scanner section cover
and main power supply. 2. Remove the CCD cooling fan bracket (see subsection 13.1.3).
2. Remove the screw securing the 2. Loose the two screws securing the
scanner section top cover, and the 3. Move the conjugate length variable belt tensioner.
cover. unit to the top position by turning the
pulley clockwise using a standard 3. Remove the belt from the pulleys.
Scanner Section (–) screwdriver.
Screw
Top Cover Belt
Pulley
Standard (–)
Screwdriver
EZ547 Screws (2)

EZ549 EZ551
Reinstallation
4. Remove the scanner section cover Installation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of while lifting it up and turning its top
removal. toward the front as shown. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. 13
After installation, adjust the belt tension by
following the steps below. 13.1.1
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan
13.1.2
Bracket Removal/ <Belt Tension Adjustment> 13.1.3
Reinstallation
13.1.4
Removal belt tensioner.
1. Remove the scanner section top 2. Rotate the pulley several turns and
cover (see subsection 13.1.1). secure the belt tensioner by tightening
the two screws.
2. Disconnect the fan connector (F301). Scanner Section Cover
Rotate Pulley Several Turns.
EZ550
3. Remove the eight screws and the fan
bracket.
Reinstallation
Fan Bracket
removal.
Screws (2) Belt Tensioner

EZ552
Connector (F301)
Screws (8) After installation, perform the following

adjustments.
EZ548
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification

Reinstallation Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.15)
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of subsection 9.4.16)
removal. • Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.9)
13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length 13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/ 7. Remove the four screws and the two
Variable Motor (M101) Reinstallation dust-proof covers.
Replacement Dust-proof Covers
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the scanner section cover
1. Remove the conjugate length variable (see subsection 13.1.3).
belt (see subsection 13.1.4).
2. Remove the two screws securing the
2. Disconnect the motor connector. grounding wires.
3. Remove the two screws and the 3. Cut the two cord ties securing the
motor. noise suppressors.
4. Open the clamp and disconnect the R,

G and B cables from the CCD21 unit. Screws (2) Screws (2)
EZ1229
Cord Ties (2) Clamp
8. Open the three clamps and
disconnect the two connectors (M103
and D107).
Clamps (3)
Connector (M103) Connector (D107)
Screws (2) Noise
Connector
Motor (M101) Suppressors
(2)
EZ553
Screws/
Installation Grounding
R Cable G Cable B Cable Wires (2)
13 removal.
EZ560
13.1.5 After installation, perform the following 5. Remove the screw securing the
grounding wires (FG1 and FG2).
13.1.6 adjustments. EZ562
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification 6. Open the clamp and disconnect the
three connectors (CCD, CN4 and 9. Remove the three screws and the
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.15) CCD unit.
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see CN5) from the CCD unit.
subsection 9.4.16) CCD Unit
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position Clamp
CCD
Screw/Grounding CN5
Wires (2) CN4 Screws (3)
EZ563
EZ561
13-4
Reinstallation 13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement 7. Remove the three special screws,
springs and the ball screw.
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of Removal
removal. NOTE: Do not try to turn the ball
1. Remove the conjugate length variable screw shaft. The balls come
After installation, perform the following belt (see subsection 13.1.4). out of the screw when the
adjustments. thread section of the shaft is
2. Remove the three screws securing out of the nut.
• Menu 43H “Optical Axis Adjustment” the clamps.
(see subsection 9.4.14) Ball Screw
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification 3. Remove the screw securing the
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.15) grounding wire.
subsection 9.4.16) 4. Remove the three screws, the bearing
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position and bracket.
• Menu 43N “ND Filter Density Screw/Grounding Wire
Measurement” (see subsection 9.4.17) Screws/Clamps (3)
• Menu 43B “ND Dust Check” (see
subsection 9.4.8)
Springs (3)
Special Screws (3)
13.1.7 Shutter Home Position
EZ1672
Sensor (D107)
Replacement Installation
Removal Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection Screws (3) Bearing
13.1.6). Bracket
NOTE: Make sure the R, G and B cables
EZ1669 are not stretched when the
sensor. 5. Remove the four screws securing the
scanner is moved up and down by
turning the belt by hand.
13
ball screw shaft bracket.
13.1.7
3. Release the locking tabs and remove Belt
the sensor. Ball Screw Shaft Bracket 13.1.8
Connector
R, G and B Cables
Screws (4) EZ1673
Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107) EZ1670

EZ564
6. Remove the bracket, bearing and adjustments.
collar.
Installation • Menu 43J “Optical Magnification
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.15)
Install the parts in the reverse order of • Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see
removal.
subsection 9.4.16)
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position
Collar
Bearing
Bracket
EZ1671
13-5
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301) 13.1.10 Table Right Cover 13.1.11 Conjugate Length
Replacement (Scanner Section Rear Variable Home Position
Cover) Removal/ (D102)/Upper Position
Removal Reinstallation (D103)/Lower Position
(D104) Sensor
1. Remove the cooling fan bracket (see Removal
subsection 13.1.2).
Replacement
1. Remove the scanner section cover Removal
2. Remove the fan connector from the (see subsection 13.1.3).
bracket.
1. Remove the table right cover (scanner
2. Remove the mat from the table. section rear cover) (see subsection
3. Remove the two screws, duct and fan.
13.1.10).
Duct
grounding wires. 2. Disconnect the sensor relay
Screws (2)
connector.

sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
D103 Screws (2)
Relay Connector
Fan
Fan Connector
EZ570 Screws/Grounding Wires (2)
EZ1668
Installation
4. Remove the fourteen screws and the
table right cover (scanner section rear
order of removal.
cover).
13
Relay Connector D104 D102
13.1.9 points down.
Screws EZ573
13.1.10
Duct Screws (2) (14)
13.1.11 4. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
Fan 5. Release the locking tab and remove

Table Right Sensor Connector

Cover
Locking Tab
Arrow Bracket EZ572
EZ571
Reinstallation

removal. EZ574
Installation

removal.

adjustments.

subsection 9.4.16)
13-6
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow

Sensor (D351)
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the table right cover (scanner

section rear cover) (see subsection
13.1.10).

sensor.
3. Push the hose joints against the

sensor and disconnect the two hoses.
Hose
Connector Hose Joint
Hose Joint Hose

EZ575
4. Remove the two screws and the 13

sensor.
13.1.12
Air Flow Sensor (D351) Screws (2)
Arrow
EZ576
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Install the sensor so that its arrow

points up.
13-7
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor 3. Remove the four screws securing the 13.2.3 Lens Home Position
(D106) Replacement bracket. Sensor (D105)
Bracket Replacement
Removal
Removal
(see subsection 13.1.3). 1. Remove the variable aperture lens
bracket (see subsection 13.2.2).
sensor. 2. Cut the three cord ties.
3. Remove the two screws and the 3. Remove the connector from the
sensor. bracket.
Screws (4) Connector

EZ891
Screws (2)
4. Align the cutout in the bracket with the
sensor plate and remove the bracket.
Sensor Plate
Connector
Cord Ties (3)
Lens Temperature Sensor (D106)
EZ893
EZ556
Installation sensor.
Install the parts in the reverse order of Screws (2)

removal.
13
13.2.1 adjustments.
13.2.2
13.2.3 • Menu 43J “Optical Magnification Cutout Bracket
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.15) EZ892
subsection 9.4.16) Reinstallation
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.9) Lens Home Position Sensor (D105)
removal. EZ894
Installation
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens
Bracket Removal/ Install the parts in the reverse order of
Reinstallation removal.
Removal After installation, perform the following

adjustments.
(see subsection 13.1.3). • Menu 43J “Optical Magnification
2. Disconnect the three connectors • Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see
(D105, D106 and M102). subsection 9.4.16)
D106
D105 M102
EZ890
13-8
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Installation 4. Remove the three screws securing
Replacement the lens unit.
Install the parts and gear in the reverse
order of removal. 5. Lift the lens unit to clear it from the
Removal locating pins and remove it by turning
After installation, perform the following it 60 degrees counterclockwise.
1. Remove the variable aperture lens
adjustments.
NOTE: Do not loosen the other
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification screws.
2. Cut the three cord ties.
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see Lens Unit
3. Remove the connector from the
subsection 9.4.16)
bracket. 60°
Connector Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.9)
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection

13.1.6). Screws (3)
EZ568
2. Disconnect the connectors (D105,
D106 and M102). 6. Remove the four screws and the lens
Cord Ties (3)
from the bracket.
EZ895
D106
Lens
4. Remove the clamp from the motor
bracket.

motor bracket. 13
13.2.4
13.2.5
Screws (4)
D105 M102 Lens Bracket

EZ566 EZ569
3. Remove the three screws and the Installation

lens cover.
Lens Cover removal.
Motor Bracket Clamp
Screws (3)
EZ896
adjustments.
• Menu 43H”Optical Axis Adjustment”
motor from the bracket.
(see subsection 9.4.14)
• Menu 43G “Lens Registration” (see
Screws (4)
Bracket subsection 9.4.13)
Screws (3)
subsection 9.4.16)
EZ567 • Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position
Motor (M102)
EZ559
13-9
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle 4 ) Tighten the two hex. socket head
Replacement bolts securely.
Mirror Box Hex. Socket Head Bolts (2)

Removal

2. Remove the two hex. socket head

bolts and the nozzle and two plain
washers.
3. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the

hose from the nozzle. Rod with OD of
Less Than 5mm
Clamp Hose Nozzle
EZ578
Nozzle Hex. Socket

Head Bolts (2)
EZ577
Installation
13
13.2.6 order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust the nozzle

position by following the steps
below.
<Nozzle Position Adjustment>
1) Loosen the two hex. socket head

bolts.
2) Insert a rod with an OD of less

than 5mm (such as a straw) into
the nozzle.
NOTE: Take care not to damage

the mirror box.
3) Adjust the nozzle position so that

the rod points towards the center
of the left edge on the mirror box
as shown.
13-10
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 14-2
14.1 Power Supply Section ................................................................................... 14-3

14.1.1 Main Control Unit Section Cover and Scanner Rear Cover Removal/
Reinstallation ............................................................................................ 14-3
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................... 14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ............................................................ 14-4
14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement .................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 Transformer Replacement ............................................................................. 14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP16) Replacement ............................................. 14-5
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 14-5
14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1 Replacement ................................................................ 14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply Replacement .............................................................. 14-6
14.1.10 DC24V Voltage Adjustment ........................................................................... 14-6
14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply Replacement ................................................................ 14-6
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment .............................................................................. 14-7
14.1.13 DC Power Supply Replacement .................................................................... 14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ....................................................... 14-8

14.2.1 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (F306/F307) Replacement ......... 14-8
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation ............................................................................................ 14-8 14
14.2.3 CTB21 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 14-8
14.2.4 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan (F304/F305)
Replacement ............................................................................................ 14-8
14.2.5 Image Processing Circuit Board (CDS21/GFM20/GIP20/GLO20/
GIS20/GMC20) Replacement ................................................................... 14-8
14.2.6 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Removal/Reinstallation ....................... 14-9
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air Compressor Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................ 14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank Replacement ............................................................... 14-11
14.2.9 Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351) /
Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement .................................................. 14-11
14.2.10 Main Control Unit Replacement ..................................................................... 14-12
14.2.11 Noise Filter Replacement .............................................................................. 14-12
14.2.12 Start Switch Replacement ............................................................................. 14-12
14-1
Parts Location
Image Processing Image Processing Circuit DC24V

Board Box Cooling Fans Power Supply Noise Filter (NF1)
Circuit Board Box
(F304/F305)
Transformer
Electrical Equipment Section PWR20 Circuit Board
Exhaust Fans (F306/F307) Circuit Breaker (NFB1)
Input Terminal
Lamp Power Supply Block (J1)
Circuit Protectors
(CP11 to CP16)
Relay (K2)
Relay (K1)
Start Switch
14
CTB21 Circuit Board Input Power Supply Unit
Main Control Unit DC Power Supply Film Cooling Air Compressor

(PU351)
GD1367
14-2
14.1 Power Supply Section
14.1.1 Main Control Unit 4. Remove the scanner rear cover. 4. Open the three clamps securing the
Section Cover and harness to the PWR20 circuit board.
5. Loosen the four screws and remove
Scanner Rear Cover the fifteen screws securing the 5. Disconnect the three connectors.
Removal/Reinstallation scanner rear cover.
6. Remove the two screws and pull out
Removal Screws (15)(Remove) the power supply unit.

and main power supply.
! WARNING
The main power supply must be

switched OFF.
Even if the built-in circuit breaker is
turned OFF, electricity will still be
supplied, so the power supply area
can cause electric shocks and short-
circuiting. Clamps (3)
Scanner Rear Cover Screws (2)
2. Remove the six screws and the main Screws (4)(Loosen) Connectors (3)
control unit section cover. EZ900 EZ953
Screws (4) (Remove) 7. Disconnect the four connectors

Reinstallation
(PER1, PER5, PER8 and PER9).
removal.
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit

Removal
Main Control Unit
Section Cover Screws (2) (Remove) 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see 14
GD1551 subsection 14.1.1).
Connectors (4) 14.1.1
3. Remove the two screws and the cable 2. Disconnect the input power cable from 14.1.2
EZ954
cover. the terminal block (J1).
3. Remove the nut and the power cable 8. Disconnect the two connectors (CNO1
guide. and CNO2) and open the two clamps.
Power Cable Guide
Connectors
(2)
Screws (2) Cable Cover
Clamps (2)
EZ1190
Nut
EZ952 EZ955
Reinstallation

removal.
14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) 14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) 14.1.5 Transformer
Replacement Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal Removal
1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the input power supply unit
(see subsection 14.1.2). (see subsection 14.1.2). (see subsection 14.1.2).
2. Remove the four screws and the 2. Remove the two screws and the noise 2. Disconnect the input connector.
circuit breaker. filter.
3. Disconnect the grounding wire by
Circuit Breaker removing the screw.
4. Disconnect the output connector.

clamp.
Screw Output Connector

Input Connector
Screws (2)
Noise Filter
Screws (4) EZ958
E2Z956
3. Disconnect the wires from the noise
3. Disconnect the four wires from the filter by removing the five terminal
circuit breaker by removing the four nuts.
terminal screws.
Noise Filter (NF1) Grounding Wire
Clamp Screw
Wires (4)
EZ960
14 6. Remove the four screws and the

transformer.
14.1.3
14.1.4 Transformer
14.1.5
Nuts (5)
Screws (4)
EZ959
EZ957
Installation
Installation
Install the circuit breaker in the reverse removal.
order of removal. Screws (4)
EZ961
Installation

removal.
14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 Installation 4. Disconnect all connectors from the
to CP16) Replacement relay.
removal. 5. Remove the two screws and the relay
Removal from the bracket.
1. Remove the input power supply unit Screws (2) Relay
(see subsection 14.1.2). 14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1
Replacement
2. Disconnect the wires from the circuit
protector.
Removal
3. Release the locking tabs and remove
1. Remove the input power supply unit
the circuit protector from the bracket.
Circuit Protector
Locking Tabs
PWR20 circuit board bracket.
Connectors (6)
EZ966
6. Disconnect the four wires from the

SSR1.

SSR1 from the bracket.
Wires PWR20 Circuit Board Bracket Screws (2) SSR1
EZ962 Screws (3)
EZ964
Installation
relay bracket.
removal.
14
14.1.6
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board 14.1.7
Replacement 14.1.8
Removal
Wires (4)
1. Remove the input power supply unit
EZ967
Installation
circuit board. Relay Bracket Screws (2) Install the parts in the reverse order of
EZ965 removal.
3. Release the locking tabs of the
spacers and remove the circuit board.
Connectors (3) Spacers (5)
PWR20 Circuit Board

EZ963
14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply 14.1.10 DC24V Voltage 14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply
Replacement Adjustment Replacement
Removal 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see Removal

subsection 14.1.1).
1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the CTB21 circuit board (see
(see subsection 14.1.2). 2. Turn ON the main power supply and subsection 14.2.3).
built-in circuit breaker.
2. Disconnect the four wires from the 2. Disconnect the connector (LCN1)
terminal block by removing the four ! WARNING from the lamp power supply.
screws. The next steps are performed with the
power ON.
3. Disconnect the connector (CN5). Take care to avoid short-circuiting and
electric shocks.
CN5
Terminal Block 3. Measure the voltage between TP11
(+24V) and TP10 (GND) on the
CTB21 circuit board.
Specified Voltage: +24V ± 0.3V
LCN1
EZ940
Screws (4) Wires (4)
RZ968
3. Loosen the screw and remove the
three screws securing the lamp power
4. Remove the four screws and the supply.
DC24V power supply. CTB21 Circuit Board
4. Remove the lamp power supply.
EZ970
DC24V Power Supply
NOTE: The two clamps are tightened
14 4. If necessary, adjust the voltage by
together with the two right
turning VR51 on the DC24V power screws.
14.1.9 supply.
14.1.10 5. Disconnect the two connectors (LCN4
14.1.11 and LCN10).
VR51
Screw (Loosen)
LCN4
Screws (4)
EZ969
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of EZ971
removal. Screws (3)(Remove)

5. Reinstall the scanner rear cover.
LCN10
EZ941
14-6
6. Remove the output terminal block 14.1.13 DC Power Supply

cover. Replacement
7. Disconnect the two wires (TB1-1 and
TB1-2) by removing the screws.
Removal
Cover 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see

subsection 14.1.1).

DC power supply.
3. Disconnect the output wires (5V,

GND5, 3.3V and GND3) by removing
the four terminal screws.
5G 3.3V
5V 3.3G
TB1-2 TB1-1
Lamp Power Supply
EZ942
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust the lamp

voltage (see subsection 14.1.12).
Connectors (8)
GD1373
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage

4. Remove the four harness clamps by
Adjustment releasing their locking tabs.
14
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see 5. Remove the three screws and the
subsection 14.1.1). clamps. 14.1.12
14.1.13
2. Turn ON the main power supply and 6. Remove the three mounting screws
built-in circuit breaker. and the DC power supply.
! WARNING
The next steps are performed with the

power ON.
Take care to avoid short-circuiting and
electric shocks.
3. Turn the adjusting knob on the lamp

power supply so that the voltage at
the lamp connector is the specified
voltage.
Lamp Voltage : 30,5V ± 0.3V

Clamps (4)
Adjusting Knob Lamp Power Supply (Remove)
Screws/Clamps (3)
GD1374
Installation

order of removal.
Lamp Connector
EZ943
4. Reinstall the scanner rear cover.
14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section
14.2.1 Electrical Equipment 4. Disconnect the fan connectors. 14.2.4 Image Processing
Section Exhaust Fan Circuit Board Box
Fan Connectors (2)
(F306/F307) Replacement Cooling Fan (F304/F305)
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
subsection 14.1.1). 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
subsection 14.1.1).
2. Disconnect the fan connector and
remove it from the bracket. 2. Disconnect the fan connector and
remove it from the bracket.
3. Remove the two screws, the fan
guard and fan. 3. Remove the two screws, the fan
EZ938
guard and fan.
Fan (F306) Connectors
Fan (F304) Fan (F305)
Reinstallation
Arrow Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
14.2.3 CTB21 Circuit Board

Replacement
Outside
Screws (2)
Guard Removal
Outside Inside
Fan (F307)
1. Remove the electrical equipment Connectors
EZ936
section exhaust fan bracket (see Inside
subsection 14.2.2). Arrow
Installation EZ944
Installation is essentially in the reverse circuit board. Installation
14 order of removal.
3. Remove the circuit board from the Installation is essentially in the reverse
14.2.1 NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow nine circuit board spacers. order of removal.
14.2.2
14.2.3 NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
14.2.4
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment
14.2.5
Section Exhaust Fan
Bracket Removal/ 14.2.5 Image Processing
Reinstallation Circuit Board (CDS21/
GFM20/GIP20/GLO20/
Removal GIS20/GMC20)
Replacement
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
subsection 14.1.1).
Removal
CTB21 Circuit Board
2. Loosen the screw and remove the
other screw securing the fan bracket. Circuit Board Spacers (9) 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
EZ939
subsection 14.1.1).
3. Remove the fan bracket.
Installation 2. Disconnect the connectors (CDS4,
Screw (Loosen) Fan Bracket CDS5 and CDS2) and R, G and B
Install the parts in the reverse order of cables from the CDS21 circuit board.
removal.
3. Remove the screw and the clamp.
4. Disconnect the grounding wires (FG3

and FG4) by removing the screw.
5. Disconnect the connector (GLO) from

the GLO20 circuit board.
6. Disconnect the fan connectors (F304

and F305) and remove the harness
Screw (Remove)
from the two clamps.
EZ937
14-8
7. Disconnect the interface cable and 10. Remove the six screws, the holding 14.2.6 Image Processing
cable to the main control unit. plate and connector box from the Circuit Board Box
GIS20 circuit board.
Interface Cable
Cable to Main Screws (6)
CDS2
B Control Unit Removal
R G
1. Remove:
• scanner rear cover (see subsection

14.1.1).
• table left cover (see subsection
11.1.2).
2. Open the six clamps on the image

Holding Plate processing circuit board box.
Connector Box
F305 EZ949
F304 GLO
FG3/FG4 CDS5/CDS4
Screw/Clamp 11. Disconnect the connector (GMC) from
the GMC20 circuit board.
EZ945
12. Disconnect the wires from the terminal

8. Remove the eighteen screws and the block by removing the four screws.
circuit board box cover.
13. Remove the thirteen screws and the
Circuit Board Box Cover GMC20 circuit board.
Screws (4)/Wires Screws (13)
Clamps (6)
EZ972
3. Disconnect the wires from the terminal 14

block on the DC power supply by
14.2.6
removing the four terminal screws.
Screws (18)
EZ946
9. Remove the CDS21, GFM20, GIP20, GMC GMC20 Circuit Board

GLO20 and GIS20 circuit boards. EZ948
GLO20 Installation
GIP20 Circuit Board
Circuit Board GIS20
Circuit Board
removal.
Screws (4)/Wires
EZ973
4. Disconnect the two connectors (F304

and F305) and open the six clamps.
5. Disconnect the three connectors

(CDS2, CDS4 and CDS5).
CDS21 GFM20 6. Open the four clamps and disconnect

Circuit Board Circuit Board the R, G and B cables.
EZ947
clamps.
8. Disconnect the two grounding wires

(FG3 and FG4) by removing the
screw.
14-9
9. Disconnect the interface cable and 13. Remove the circuit board box. 4. Remove the wing bolt and the air filter
cable to the main control unit. case.
Circuit Board Box
CDS2 Cable to Main
R Cable Control Unit
G Cable F304
EZ977
Wing Bolt Air Filter Case
F305 EZ929
B Cable CDS4/CDS5
Screw/Clamps(4) Reinstallation
FG3/FG4 5. Disconnect the hose from the outlet
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of joint.
EZ974
removal.
10. Remove the two screws securing the 6. Disconnect the connector.
circuit board box.
Hose
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air
Compressor Unit
Removal/Reinstallation Connector
Removal

and main power supply.
Outlet Joint
2. Remove the ten screws and the air
compressor section cover.
14 Screws (2) EZ980
Air Compressor Section Cover
14.2.7 EZ975
7. Remove the three screws securing
11. Remove the keyboard cable from the the bracket and the compressor unit.
clamp.

circuit board box.
Screws (2)
Screws (10)
Screws (3)
EZ979
3. Remove the air filter section cover.

Compressor Bracket
EZ981
Reinstallation

Clamp Keyboard Cable removal.
EZ976
Air Filter Section Cover

EZ928
14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank 14.2.9 Film Cooling Air 6. Remove the four screws and the
Replacement Compressor (PU351) / bracket from the air compressor.
Vibration Isolation Screws (4) Bracket
Removal Rubber Replacement
1. Remove the air compressor unit (see Removal
subsection 14.2.7).
1. Remove the air compressor unit (see
2. Disconnect the hose from the hose subsection 14.2.7).
joint.
2. Disconnect the grounding wire by
Hose
removing the screw.
3. Disconnect the hose from the hose

joint.
EZ987
Hose Hose Joint

7. Hold the lower nut of the rubbers with
the 21mm open-end wrench and
remove the four nuts.
8. Remove the lock washers and

vibration isolation rubbers.
Hose Joint
EZ983 Bracket Nuts/Lock Washers (4)
3. Remove the four screws and the air

tank from the bracket.
Screw/Grounding Wire
EZ985
4. Hold the upper nut of the vibration

isolation rubbers with the 21mm open-
end wrench and remove the four nuts
and lock washers.
Vibration Isolation
14
5. Remove the air compressor. 21mm Open-end Rubbers (4) 14.2.8
Wrench 14.2.9
NOTE: Take care not to apply EZ988
Air Tank Screws (4) excessive stress to the
EZ984
rubbers. Excessive stress may Installation
shorten the service life of the
Installation rubbers. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
removal. NOTE: • Take care not to apply excessive
Nuts (4)
stress to the rubbers. Excessive
stress may shorten the service
life of the rubbers.
• After replacing the compressor,
perform “Clear data” in menu
43F “Working Information” (see
Air Compressor
subsection 9.4.12).
Vibration Isolation Rubber

21mm Open-end Wrench
EZ986
14-11
14.2.10 Main Control Unit Installation Installation

Replacement
removal. removal.
Removal
1. Remove the main control unit section
operation.
cover (see subsection 14.1.1). 14.2.12 Start Switch
• Software Installation in “Replacing the Replacement
2. Remove the front main control unit
Main Control Unit” (see section 8.5)
section cover.
Removal
main control unit holder. 14.2.11 Noise Filter and main power supply.
Replacement
4. Lift the holder and tighten the two
2. Remove the two screws and the start
screws.
Removal switch bracket.
Screws (2) Main Control Unit Holder 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see Start Switch Bracket
subsection 14.1.1).

harness holders, then the holders.

harness holder box.
Harness Holders
Screws (4)
Screws (2)
EZ1219
GD1368
5. Disconnect all cables from the main 3. Disconnect the switch connector.
14 control unit.
4. Release the locking tabs and remove
the start switch from the bracket.
14.2.10
14.2.11 Connector
14.2.12
Harness Holder Box Fixing Screws (4)
GD1370
4. Disconnect the power cable from the

main control unit.
5. Disconnect the power cable from the

noise filter.
Monitor Cable
Main Control Unit
6. Remove the two screws and the noise
GD1365
filter.
6. Remove the main control unit. Screws (2)

Start Switch
EZ978
Installation

removal.
Main Control Unit

GD1369 Noise Filter
GD1371
14-12
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 15-3
15.1 Magazine Rewind Unit .................................................................................. 15-4

15.1.1 Magazine Rewind Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 15-4
15.1.2 Paper Magazine Rewind Motor (M500) Replacement ................................... 15-4
15.1.3 Gear/One-way Clutch Shaft Replacement ..................................................... 15-5
15.2 Magazine Interface Unit ............................................................................... 15-6

15.2.1 Magazine Interface Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 15-6
15.2.2 Magazine Interface Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 15-6
15.2.3 Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 15-6
15.2.4 Magazine ID Sensor (D500 to D504) Replacement ...................................... 15-7
15.2.5 Magazine Nip Sensor (D505) Replacement .................................................. 15-7
15.2.6 Feed Section Press Roller Release Shaft Replacement ............................... 15-7
15.2.7 Magazine Lock Release Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly ............................. 15-8
15.2.8 Paper Magazine Setting Sensor (D590) Replacement .................................. 15-8
15.2.9 Magazine Locking Mechanism Disassembly/Reassembly ............................ 15-9
15.3 Paper Feed Unit ............................................................................................. 15-10

15.3.1 Paper Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... 15-10
15.3.2 Paper End Sensor (D510P) Replacement ..................................................... 15-10
15.3.3 Paper End Sensor LED (D510L) Replacement ............................................. 15-10
15.3.4 Paper Feed Motor (M510) Replacement ....................................................... 15-11
15.3.5 Press Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 15-11 15
15.3.6 Paper Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................... 15-11
15.3.7 Paper Feed Idler Gear Replacement ............................................................. 15-12
15.3.8 Nip or Nip Release Sensor (D523 or D524) Replacement ............................ 15-13
15.3.9 Nip Release Motor (M516) Replacement ...................................................... 15-13
15.3.10 Nip Release Gear Replacement .................................................................... 15-13
15.3.11 Nip Release Motor Driver (PDM21) Circuit Board Replacement ................... 15-14
15.3.12 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D522) Replacement .... 15-14
15.3.13 Paper Width Guide Replacement .................................................................. 15-14
15.3.14 Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor (M515) Replacement ................ 15-15
15.3.15 Paper Width Guide Belt/Drive Gear Replacement ......................................... 15-15
15.3.16 Paper Width Guide Shaft Replacement ......................................................... 15-16
15.3.17 Paper Width Guide Centering ........................................................................ 15-16
15.3.18 Paper Width Guide Adjustment ...................................................................... 15-17
15.3.19 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................. 15-18
15.3.20 Loop 1 Sensor (D512) Replacement ............................................................. 15-18
15.4 Unit 1 .................................................................................................................. 15-19

15.4.1 Unit 1 Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................ 15-19
15.4.2 Loop 1 Sensor LED (D512L) Replacement ................................................... 15-19
15.4.3 Loop 1 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor (D511) Replacement ................. 15-19
15.4.4 Loop 1 Guide Plate Motor (M511) Replacement ........................................... 15-20
15-1
15.4.5 Loop 1 Guide Roller Replacement ................................................................. 15-20

15.4.6 Loop 1 Support Roller Replacement .............................................................. 15-20
15.4.7 Loop 1 Guide Plate Height Adjustment .......................................................... 15-21
15.4.8 Rewind Paper Sensor (D513P) Replacement ............................................... 15-21
15.4.9 Rewind Paper Sensor LED (D513L) Replacement ........................................ 15-21
15.4.10 Splice Sensor (D515P) Replacement ............................................................ 15-22
15.4.11 Splice Sensor LED (D515L) Replacement .................................................... 15-22
15.4.12 Cutting/Sorting Hole Punch Unit Replacement .............................................. 15-22
15.4.13 Unit 1 Paper Sensor (D517P) Replacement .................................................. 15-22
15.4.14 Unit 1 Paper Sensor LED (D517L) Replacement .......................................... 15-23
15.4.15 Unit 1 Feed Belt Replacement ....................................................................... 15-23
15.4.16 Unit 1 Feed Motor (M513) Replacement ....................................................... 15-23
15.4.17 Inlet Left Guide Plate/Roller Replacement ..................................................... 15-23
15.4.18 Unit 1 Feed Roller Replacement .................................................................... 15-24
15.4.19 Feed Roller Section Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .............................. 15-25
15.4.20 Unit 1 Feed Roller Belt/Roller Replacement .................................................. 15-25
15.4.21 Paper Width Guide 1 Home Position Sensor (D514) Replacement .............. 15-26
15.4.22 Paper Width Guide 1 Motor (M512) Replacement ......................................... 15-26
15 15.4.28 Loop 2 Guide Plate Home Position Sensor (D519) Replacement ................. 15-29
15.4.29 Loop 2 Guide Plate Motor (M514)/Gear Replacement .................................. 15-29
15.4.30 Loop 2 Sensor (D518P) Replacement ........................................................... 15-30
15-2
Parts Location
Nip Release Motor (M516)

Paper Feed Motor (M510)
Paper Feed Unit
Loop 1
Paper Feed Unit Paper Width Guide Motor (M515)
Loop 1 Guide Plate

Motor (M511)
Paper Magazine
Unit 2
15
Paper Magazine
Rewind Motor (M500)
Unit 1 Feed Motor (M513)

Paper Width Guide 1 Motor (M512)
Loop 2
Loop 2 Guide Plate Motor (M514)
GD1236
15-3
15.1 Magazine Rewind Unit
15.1.1 Magazine Rewind Unit 15.1.2 Paper Magazine Installation

Removal/Reinstallation Rewind Motor (M500)
Removal
Removal NOTE: • Align the hex. socket head
1. Remove the two screws, counter-sunk
setscrew with the D-cut surface
screw and then the magazine guide 1. Remove the magazine rewind unit of the motor shaft.
and cover. (see subsection 15.1.1). • Align the end surface of the gear
with the end of the motor shaft.
Magazine Guide 2. Remove the screw securing the
Cover grounding wire. Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
D-cut Surface
3. Remove the four screws and then the
motor.
Toothed Washer
Grounding Wire
Screws (2)
End of Motor Shaft
Counter-sunk Head Screw Screw (1)

End Surface of Gear
GD1118 GD1122
2. Disconnect the two connectors. • Align the grounding wire

Screws (4) mounting screw with the groove
3. Remove the two screws and then the on the one-way clutch.
magazine rewind unit. GD1120
Groove
Magazine Rewind Unit 4. Loosen the two hex. socket head
setscrews using a 2-mm Allen. wrench
and remove the gear.
Gear
15
15.1.1
Connectors (2) Screw
15.1.2
GD1123
Screws (2)
GD1119
Reinstallation
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of GD1121
removal.
15-4
15.1 Magazine Rewind Unit
15.1.3 Gear/One-way Clutch

Shaft Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the magazine rewind unit

2. Remove the two E-rings, gears, pin

and spacer.
Pin
Spacer
E-rings (2) Gears (2)

GD1124
3. Remove the paper magazine rewind

motor (see subsection 15.1.2).
4. Remove the two screws and separate

the brackets.
Bracket
Screws (2)
15
15.1.3
Bracket
GD1125
5. Remove the E-ring, bearing, two poly-

sliders and then the clutch shaft.
Bracket
Poly-sliders (2)
Bearing
E-ring
GD1126
Installation

removal.
15-5
15.2 Magazine Interface Unit
15.2.1 Magazine Interface 3. Turn the magazine lock lever all the <Position Adjustment>
Section Cover way to the left, and remove the screw,
seal and lever. 1. Temporarily install the magazine
Removal/Reinstallation interface unit with the four screws.
Magazine Lock Lever
Removal 2. Install the paper magazine and turn
the magazine lock lever all the way to
1. Perform the post-operational checks the left.
to shut down the system, turn the
power switch to STANDBY, and turn Paper Magazine
the built-in circuit breaker and the
main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the paper magazine.
3. Remove the seven screws and then Seal

Screw
the cover.
GD1140
Screws (7) Cover

magazine interface unit.
Magazine Lock Lever

GD1143
3. Tighten the four screws while pressing

the unit against the front stopper.
GD1117
Screws (4)
Reinstallation
Magazine Inteface Unit
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse GD1141
order of removal.
5. Remove the magazine interface unit.
Stopper
NOTE: Align the bosses with the holes in
15 the frame and tighten the screws. 6. Remove the light-shielding plate from Screws (4)
the magazine lock shaft. GD1144
15.2.1
15.2.2 15.2.2 Magazine Interface Unit
15.2.3 Removal/Reinstallation 15.2.3 Lower Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
Shaft
Removal
Removal
1. Remove Unit1 (see subsection
15.4.1). 1. Remove the magazine interface unit
2. Disconnect the two connectors. Magazine
Interface Unit
2. Remove the six screws and the lower
Light-shielding Plate cover.
GD1142
Reinstallation

Connectors (2) order of removal. Perform the position
adjustment by following the steps below.
Screws (6)
Lower Cover
GD655
GD1139
15-6
Reinstallation 5. Fully loosen the two screws securing 15.2.5 Magazine Nip Sensor
the guide plate. (D505) Replacement
removal. Screws (2) (Loosen)
Removal
1. Remove the magazine interface unit

15.2.4 Magazine ID Sensor (see subsection 15.2.2).
(D500 to D504)
Replacement 2. Remove the screw securing the
clamp.
Removal 3. Remove the screw and then the

sensor.
1. Remove the lower cover (see
subsection 15.2.3). GD659 4. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
2. Remove the two screws and then the 6. Remove the two screws and springs.
sensor circuit board. Clamp Mounting Screw
7. Remove the guide plate, five springs
Screws (2) Sensor Circuit Board and push buttons.
Springs (2)
Screws (2)
Push Buttons (5)
Screw
Sensor (D505)
GD662
Installation
GD656
Guide Plate
Springs (5) Install the parts in the reverse order of
GD660 removal.
sensor circuit board.
Installation

15.2.6 Feed Section Press 15
order of removal. Perform the sensor Roller Release Shaft
15.2.4
height adjustment. Replacement
15.2.5
<Sensor Height Adjustment> 15.2.6
Removal
Adjust the guide plate mounting position 1. Remove the magazine interface unit
by turning the two screws so that each (see subsection 15.2.2).
push button protrudes 11±0.3 mm when
Connector Sensor Circuit Board pressing it. 2. Remove the screw securing the
grounding wire and the nip detecting
GD657 plate.
11±0.3 mm
4. Remove the two screws securing the 3. Remove the E-ring securing the feed
guide plate. section press roller release shaft.
Screw
E-ring
Shaft
Screws (2)
GD661
Guide Plate
Screws (2) Grounding Wire
GD658 Toothed Washer
GD663
15-7
4. Disassemble the release shaft. 4. Remove the E-ring and move the NOTE: Make sure the handle, cam and
bearing and collar. stopper are positioned correctly.
Nip Detecting Plate
Collars (2) Bearings (2) Cam
Shaft
E-rings (2) E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Poly-sliders (2) Stopper
Collars (2)
GD666 GD669
GD664
5. Remove the two E-rings and the lock

Installation release shaft from the unit.
15.2.8 Paper Magazine Setting
Install the parts in the reverse order of Shaft Sensor (D590)
removal. Replacement
Removal
15.2.7 Magazine Lock Release
Shaft Disassembly/ 1. Remove the lower cover (see
Reassembly subsection 15.2.3).
2. Remove the connector from the unit.

Disassembly
E-rings (2)
3. Open the four clamps.
1. Remove the magazine interface unit GD667
(see subsection 15.2.2). Harness Clamps (4)
6. Remove the two E-rings and
2. Remove the screw securing the disassemble the lock release shaft.
grounding wire and nip detecting
plate.
Shaft
15 3. Remove the E-ring, stopper, pin, poly-

slider and collar.
15.2.7 E-ring
15.2.8
Connector
Bearings (2)
GD670
Collars (2)
E-rings (2) Cams (2)
4. Unhook the spring.
E-ring Pins (2)
Collar
GD668 5. Remove the two screws, E-ring, poly-
slider and then the sensor bracket.
Poly-slider
Reassembly
Sensor Bracket
Pin Reassemble the parts in the reverse order
Stopper of removal.
GD665
Screws (2)
Poly-slider E-ring
GD671
15-8
6. Remove the E-ring and two screws 4. Remove the four screws and then the
and then the sensor from the bracket. magazine lock bracket.
Screws (2) Sensor Bracket Magazine Lock Bracket
E-ring
Sensor (D590) Screws (4)
GD676
GD672
Installation 5. Remove the two springs and guide

shafts.
removal. Magazine Lock Bracket
15.2.9 Magazine Locking

Mechanism Springs (2)
Disassembly/
Shafts (2)
Reassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the lower cover (see

subsection 15.2.3).
2. Remove the two E-rings securing the

link. E-rings (2)
GD677
15
6. Disassemble the magazine lock 15.2.9
bracket.
Magazine Lock Bracket
E-rings (2)
GD673
3. Unhook the two springs.

GD678
Reassembly

order of removal.
NOTE: Apply thread locking agent to the

four magazine lock mounting
Springs (2) screws.
Thread Locking Agent:

LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
GD674
15-9
15.3 Paper Feed Unit
15.3.1 Paper Feed Unit 6. Hold the motor and gear sections and 15.3.2 Paper End Sensor
Removal/Reinstallation remove the paper feed unit. (D510P) Replacement
Paper Feed Unit
Removal Gear Section Removal
Motor Section
1. Remove: 1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
subsection 15.3.1).
• magazine interface section cover
(see subsection 15.2.1). 2. Open the harness clamp and
• printer rear cover (see subsection disconnect the connector.
18.3.1).
• Unit 1 (see subsection 15.4.1). 3. Remove the screw and then the
sensor.
2. Turn the magazine lock lever all the
way to the left. Screw Sensor (D510P)
GD1134
Reinstallation

order of removal.
NOTE: • Install the paper feed unit so that

its flanges align with the rails.
• Align the hole on the paper feed
unit with the pin on the printer
Magazine Lock Lever body. Connector Clamp
GD1133 GD679
Rails (2) Flanges (2)
Pin
3. Disconnect the U11, U12, M510 Installation
connectors.
M510 U10 U11 D523 removal.
15.3.3 Paper End Sensor LED

15 D524
(D510L) Replacement
15.3.1
Removal
15.3.2
15.3.3 GD1135
1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
subsection 15.3.1).
U12
GD1130 2. Open the three harness clamps and

disconnect the connector.
bracket securing the paper feed unit. 3. Remove the screw and then the
sensor LED.
paper feed unit. Connector Sensor (D510L)
Screws (2) Paper Feed Unit
Screw
Harness Clamps (3)

Bracket Screws (2) GD680
GD1131
Installation

removal.
15-10
15.3.4 Paper Feed Motor 15.3.5 Press Roller Screws (2)

(M510) Replacement Replacement Press Roller
Removal Removal
1. Remove the paper feed unit (see 1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
subsection 15.3.1). subsection 15.3.1).
2. Remove the four screws and then the 2. Open the four harness clamps and
connector bracket. disconnect the M515 connector.
3. Disconnect the connector from the 3. Remove the three screws and then
Sensor Bracket
bracket. the nip release motor bracket. GD689
Connector Bracket Nip Release Motor Bracket 8. Remove the E-ring, two bearings and
Screws (4) Clamps (4) then the roller.
Shaft
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Roller
Connector Screws (3) GD690
M515 Connector
GD684
GD686 Installation
motor. 4. Remove the two springs. Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Screws (2) Toothed Washer
15.3.6 Paper Feed Roller

Replacement
15
Removal
15.3.4
1. Remove: 15.3.5
15.3.6
Springs (2) • paper feed unit (see subsection
Motor (M510)
GD688
15.3.1).
GD685
• paper feed motor (see subsection
5. Remove the E-ring, bearing, two poly- 15.3.4).
Installation • guide plate (see subsection
sliders and shaft support.
15.3.19).
removal. Poly-sliders (2)
2. Open the four harness clamps and
disconnect the M515 connector.
Shaft Support
3. Remove the three screws and then
the nip release motor bracket.
Nip Release Motor Bracket

Clamps (4)
E-ring
Bearing
GD1513

sensor bracket.
7. Remove the press roller.

Screws (3)
M515 Connector
GD686
15-11
4. Open the six harness clamps. 10. Remove the E-ring, idler gear, two Installation
bearings, cam, resin collar and
5. Remove the three screws and then bearings. Installation is essentially in the reverse
the paper feed motor bracket. order of removal.
Idler Gear
Harness Clamps (6) Screws (3) NOTE: Install the idler gear so that the
nip release and cam gears are
E-ring positioned as shown.
Idler Gear
Resin Collar
Bearing Cam
Paper Feed Motor Bracket Bearings (2)
GD691 GD1515
6. Remove the idler gear. 11. Remove the E-ring and then the idler Nip Release Gear Cam Gear
gear and roller.
GD1517
7. Remove the three truss screws and
then the bracket. E-ring

sensor bracket.
Idler Gear
Sensor Bracket
Screws (2)
Cam Gear Nip Release Gear

Idler Gear
GD1519
GD1516
15 Truss Screws (3) 12. Remove the E-ring and then the knob.
15.3.7 Bracket 15.3.7 Paper Feed Idler Gear
GD1734 Replacement
9. Remove the E-ring and then the gear Knob Removal
and pin. E-ring
1. Remove the paper feed motor bracket
Pin Gear E-ring (see subsection 17.3.6).
2. Remove the idler gear.

GD692
13. Remove the E-ring, two bearings,

cam, resin spacer and bearing from
the roller.
Roller
Idler Gear
GD1514
Idler Gear
GD694
Bearing
E-ring Installation
Resin Spacer
Cam Bearings (2)
GD693
removal.
15-12
15.3.8 Nip or Nip Release 15.3.9 Nip Release Motor 4. Remove the two E-rings and then the
Sensor (D523 or D524) (M516) Replacement two gears.
Replacement E-rings (2) Gears (2)
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the nip release motor (see subsection 15.3.1).
subsection 15.3.9).
2. Remove the motor connector M516.
2. Remove the screw and then the
sensor bracket. 3. Open the harness clamp.
Screw Sensor Bracket 4. Remove the four screws and then the
motor.
Connector Clamp GD1520
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Install the idler gear so that the

nip release and cam gears are
positioned as shown.
Sensor Bracket Screw
GD1523 Screws (4)
Motor (M516)
GD1525
sensor.
Idler Gear
Installation
sensor.
removal.
Connector
15.3.10 Nip Release Gear

Replacement
Nip Release Gear Cam Gear
15
GD1517
15.3.8
Removal 15.3.9
15.3.10
1. Remove:
• nip release motor bracket (see Idler Gear

Screw Sensor subsection 15.3.6).
• paper feed motor bracket (see
GD1524
subsection 15.3.6).
Installation
2. Remove the two E-rings and then the
Install the parts in the reverse order of two gears.
removal. Cam Gear Nip Release Gear
detecting plate. GD1519
Gears (2)
E-rings (2)
Detecting Plate Screws (2)

GD1518
15-13
15.3.11 Nip Release Motor 15.3.12 Paper Feed Unit Paper 15.3.13 Paper Width Guide
Driver (PDM21) Circuit Width Guide Home Replacement
Board Replacement Position Sensor (D522)
Replacement Removal
Removal
Removal 1. Remove the upper guide plate (see
1. Remove the paper feed unit (see subsection 15.3.19).
subsection 15.3.1). 1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
subsection 15.3.1). 2. Remove the four screws and then the
2. Remove the four screws and then the paper width guides.
connector bracket. 2. Remove the screw and then the
sensor bracket.
Screws (4) Connector Bracket
Sensor Bracket
Paper Width Guides

GD696
GD1521
Installation
Screw
3. Disconnect the PDM1 and PDM2
GD681 Installation is essentially in the reverse
connectors from the circuit board.
order of removal.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector and
4. Remove the PDM21 circuit board from
remove the screw and then the NOTE: Tighten the two screws while
the four circuit board spacers.
sensor. pressing the paper width guide in
Circuit Board Spacers (4) the paper feed direction and
Sensor (D522) against the boss.
PDM21 Circuit Board
15
15.3.11
15.3.12
15.3.13
Screws (2)
Connectors (2)
GD1522 Sensor Connector Screw Bosses (2)
GD682
Installation GD1526
removal.
order of removal. After installation,
perform the paper width guide adjustment
15-14
15.3.14 Paper Feed Unit Paper 15.3.15 Paper Width Guide 6. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
Width Guide Motor Belt/Drive Gear
Bearing
(M515) Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Remove the nip release motor (see 1. Remove the guide plate (see
2. Open the harness clamp and 2. Remove the two screws securing the
disconnect the motor connector. belt to the threaded shaft.
E-ring Belt Drive Shaft
3. Remove the two screws and then the Screws (2)
motor. GD703
Motor Connector 7. Remove the belt drive shaft and the

belt.
Belt
Belt
GD701
Motor
(M515)
3. Remove the three screws and the nip
Harness Clamp Screws (2) release motor bracket.
GD687
Nip Release Bracket Gear
Bearing E-ring
Installation
Screws (3) GD704

removal. 8. Remove the pulley, gear and
bearings.
Drive Shaft
Bearings (2) 15
Gear
15.3.14
Pulley 15.3.15
GD1528

belt tensioner.
5. Remove the belt from the pulley.
E-rings (2)
GD705
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Pulley Belt
GD702
15-15
Installation 3. Loosen the two screws securing the Installation

belt tensioner.
Installation is essentially in the reverse Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. 4. Remove the belt from the pulley. order of removal.
NOTE: • Install the gear so that its one- NOTE: • Tighten the screws while
way clutch faces toward the pressing the belt-holding bracket
pulley. against the edge of the slider as
• Tighten the screws while shown.
pressing the belt-holding bracket
against the edge of the slider as Screws (2)
shown.
Screws (2)
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Pulley Belt
GD702

paper width guide drive bracket.
Screws (3) GD706
• After installation, perform “Paper

GD706 Width Guide Centering” (see
subsection 15.3.17) and “Paper
• After installation, perform “Paper Width Guide Adjustment” (see
Width Guide Centering” (see subsection 15.3.18).
Width Guide Adjustment” (see
Paper Width Guide 15.3.17 Paper Width Guide
Drive Bracket Centering
GD707
15.3.16 Paper Width Guide 1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
Shaft Replacement 6. Remove the six screws, three guide subsection 15.3.1).
15 Removal
shafts and two sliders.
15.3.16 the inlet side bracket.
1. Remove: Guide Shafts (3)
15.3.17
• nip release motor bracket (see
subsection 15.3.6).
• paper feed motor bracket (see
subsection 15.3.6).

belt to the threaded shaft.
Screws (2) Screws (6) Inlet Side Bracket Screws (3)
GD708 GD1634
Screws (4)
Belt
GD701
Guide Shafts (3)
Sliders (2)
GD709
15-16
3. Place the paper width guides in the 7. Place the paper width guides in the 15.3.18 Paper Width Guide
widest position. narrowest position by turning the drive Adjustment
gear, and then press the rear paper
4. Align the positioning boss with the width guide against the jig.
hole of the bracket, and then secure
Rear Paper Width Guide subsection 15.3.1).
the jig with the two screws.
2. Connect the paper feed unit extension
Jig: Paper Feed Unit Paper Width
harness to the paper feed unit
Guide Centering Jig (Part No.
harness on the frame side.
890C9956220)
Paper Feed Unit Extension Harness:
Screws (2)
Jig Part No. 858C978077
Jig
Paper Width Guide Drive Gear

GD1639
8. Tighten the two screws while pressing

the front paper width guide against
GD1636
the jig.
Paper Feed Unit Extension Harnesses (6)
front paper width guide bracket. GD1642
Screws (2) (Loosen) 3. Connect the extension harness to the

paper feed unit.
Paper Feed Unit
GD1640
9. Make sure there is no clearance 15

between the paper width guide and
the jig. 15.3.18
GD1637
10. Remove the jig.
6. Move the front paper width guide 11. Install the inlet side bracket. Extension Harnesses (6)
bracket to the front side.
GD1643
Front Paper Width Guide Bracket
4. Install the paper magazine and close
the printer left and right doors.
NOTE: Do not rotate the magazine

lock lever. If it is rotated, paper
may be fogged.
5. Start up the system.
6. Open the menu “45M Printer

Mechanical Fine Adjustment”.
GD1638
15-17
7. Enter “0” for the fine adjustment value 15.3.19 Guide Plate Removal/ 8. Remove the E-ring, shaft, seven
of the paper feed unit paper width Reinstallation upper guide rollers and six spacers.
guide.
Rollers (7)
8. Enter “152.0” for the aim width value
Removal
Spacers (6)
of the paper feed unit paper width
guide.
subsection 15.3.1).
9. Press [Home pos.] to move the paper
feed unit paper width guide to the
sensor bracket.
home position.
Sensor Bracket
10. Press [Drive] to set the paper feed
Screws (2)
unit paper width guide to the Shaft E-ring
152.0 mm position.
GD710
11. Set the paper width measurement jig
against the inside of the flange, and 9. Remove the E-ring, shaft and seven
then determine the fine adjustment rollers from the lower guide.
value so that the paper width guide is
within the specified range. Reinstallation
Specified Range: Jig (152.0mm) GD695 Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of
±0.15mm removal.
3. Remove the screw and then the paper
<Example> width guide home position sensor
When the inside width is 153.0 mm: (D522) bracket.
15.3.20 Loop 1 Sensor (D512)
Fine adjustment value = –1.0 mm
When the inside width is 151.5 mm: 4. Remove the harness clamp from the Replacement
Fine adjustment value = 0.5 mm side plate.
Removal
Flanges (2) 5. Remove the two screws and then the
upper guide plate. 1. Remove the paper feed unit (see
subsection 15.3.1).
Upper Guide Plate Screws (2)
2. Open the harness clamp and
15 3. Remove the screw and then the

sensor.
15.3.19
15.3.20 Screws
Jig
GD1644
Screw Harness Clamp

12. Enter the determined fine adjustment
value for the paper feed unit paper GD699
width guide.
6. Place the paper width guides in the
13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 until the paper widest position.
width guide is within the specified
range. 7. Remove the two screws and then the Harness Clamp Connector
lower guide plate.
GD683
Paper Width Guides (2)
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
Lower Guide Plate
GD700
15-18
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.1 Unit 1 Removal/ 5. Remove Unit 1. 15.4.2 Loop 1 Sensor LED

Reinstallation (D512L) Replacement
NOTE: Remove Unit 1 while pressing
it against the right-hand side
Removal guide, taking care not to make
Removal
contact with the roller of the
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
exposure feed section sub-
subsection 18.3.1). 15.4.1).
unit.
2. Lower the loop 1 and 2 guide plates. 2. Open the harness clamp.
Loop 1 Guide Plate 3. Disconnect the connector and remove

the screw and then the sensor LED.
Sensor LED (D512L)

Screw
Loop 2 Guide Plate

GD1138
GD1606
3. Disconnect the U14, U15, U16, U18 Reinstallation

Connector Clamp
and U19 connectors.
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse GD791
order of removal.
Installation
NOTE: Take care not to damage the
following parts: Install the parts in the reverse order of
• light-shielding plate on the removal.
printer right door.
• paper width guide 1 motor gear.
15.4.3 Loop 1 Guide Plate
Home Position Sensor
(D511) Replacement 15
GD1136 Removal 15.4.2
15.4.3
4. Remove the three screws securing 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
Unit 1. Gear 15.4.1).
Unit 1 2. Disconnect the connector and remove

the screw and then the sensor.
Light-shielding Plate
Sensor (D511) Connector

GD1145
Screw
Toothed Washer Screws (3) GD806

GD1137
Installation

perform the loop 1 guide plate height
adjustment (see subsection 15.4.7).
15-19
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.4 Loop 1 Guide Plate 15.4.5 Loop 1 Guide Roller Installation

Motor (M511) Replacement
Replacement order of removal. After installation,
Removal perform the loop 1 guide plate height
Removal adjustment (see subsection 15.4.7).
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection 15.4.1).
15.4.1).
2. Remove the E-ring and bearing. 15.4.6 Loop 1 Support Roller
2. Open the harness clamp. Replacement
E-ring
Harness Clamp Removal

15.4.1).

roller shaft.
Roller Shaft
Bearing
GD819
GD807
3. Remove the screws and then the
3. Disconnect the motor connector. detecting arm and gear.
4. Remove the two screws and then the 4. Move the bearing and remove the
motor. roller shaft.
Screws (2) Screw Gear Screws (2)

GD837
3. Remove the two E-rings and rollers.
15
15.4.4
15.4.5
15.4.6
Rollers (2)
Detecting Arm
E-rings (2)
GD820
GD838
Motor (M511) 5. Remove the two screws, loop 1 guide
Motor Connector
plate, two spacers, ten rollers and
GD808 Installation
bearing.
Installation Screws (2) Install the parts in the reverse order of

Loop 1 Guide Plate removal.
Bearing
removal.
Shaft
Rollers (10)
Spacers (2)
GD821
15-20
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.7 Loop 1 Guide Plate 9. Enter the fine adjustment value for the 15.4.9 Rewind Paper Sensor
Height Adjustment loop 1 guide plate to make the LED (D513L)
distance “A” to 13.5 mm.
Replacement
1. Turn ON the printer door interlock
10. Click [OK].
switches 1 and 2. Removal
11. Click [Drive].
2. Open the loop 1 guide plate by hand. 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
• The loop 1 guide plate moves to the 15.4.1).
fine-adjusted position.
Mechanical Fine Adjustment”. 2. Disconnect the connector.

15.4.8 Rewind Paper Sensor sensor bracket.
(D513P) Replacement
Removal bracket.
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection Screws (2) Sensor Bracket

15.4.1).

4. Click [Next Page] three times. 3. Remove the screw and then the
sensor.
5. Click [Drive].
Connector
Connector
GD793
5. Remove the flat-head screw and then

the sensor LED.
Harness Clamp Screw Sensor (D513P)

Sensor LED (D513L) Flat-head Screw 15
GD792 15.4.7
6. Enter “–1” into the fine adjustment 15.4.8
value for the loop 1 guide plate. Installation 15.4.9
7. Click [Drive]. Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
• The loop 1 guide plate moves to the
finely adjusted position.
8. Measure the distance “A” in the figure

GD794
below.
Installation
Standard distance A: 13.5 mm maximum
Paper Feed Unit
Guide Plate removal.
Loop1 Guide Plate
GD1389
15-21
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.10 Splice Sensor (D515P) 4. Disconnect the connector from the 5. Disconnect the S510 and S511
Replacement bracket. connectors.
5. Remove the flat-head screw and then S510 Connector S511 Connector
Removal the sensor LED.
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection Sensor LED (D515L) Flat-head Screw
15.4.1).


sensor.
Harness Clamp Sensor (D515P)

GD816

Connector hole punch unit.
GD797
Screws (2)
Installation

removal.
Connector Screw
GD795 15.4.12 Cutting/Sorting Hole
Punch Unit
Installation Replacement
Install the parts in the reverse order of GD817
Removal
removal.
Installation
15.4.1).
15.4.11 Splice Sensor LED removal.
(D515L) Replacement 2. Place the paper width guides in the
15 widest position.
15.4.10 Removal
3. Disconnect the D520 and D521 15.4.13 Unit 1 Paper Sensor
15.4.11 connectors. (D517P) Replacement
15.4.12 15.4.1).
15.4.13 4. Open the eight harness clamps.
Removal
2. Disconnect the connector. D521 Connector
3. Remove the two screws and then the 15.4.1).
sensor bracket.
2. Open the two harness clamps and
Screws (2) Connector disconnect the connector.

sensor.
Harness Clamps (2) Connector
D520 Connector Harness Clamps (8)
GD815
Sensor Bracket
GD796
Screw Sensor (D517P)

GD800
15-22
15.4 Unit 1
Installation 15.4.15 Unit 1 Feed Belt 3. Remove the two screws and then the
Replacement motor.
removal.
Removal

15.4.14 Unit 1 Paper Sensor 15.4.1).
LED (D517L)
Replacement 2. Loosen the two screws securing the
belt tensioner.
Removal 3. Remove the belt.
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection Belt

15.4.1).
2. Open the harness clamp.
3. Disconnect the connector and remove Motor (M513)

Screws (2)
GD812
Connector Harness Clamp Screw
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
Belt Tensioner 15.4.17 Inlet Left Guide Plate/

GD810
Roller Replacement
Installation Removal
Sensor (D517L)
Install the belt in the reverse order of 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
GD801
removal. 15.4.1).
Installation 2. Remove the screw and then the paper
Install the parts in the reverse order of 15.4.16 Unit 1 Feed Motor
width guide home position sensor 15
bracket.
removal. (M513) Replacement 15.4.14
Screw 15.4.15
Removal 15.4.16
15.4.17
1. Remove the Unit 1 feed belt (see

Harness Clamps (2)

Sensor Bracket
GD798
Connector
GD811
15-23
15.4 Unit 1
3. Remove the two screws and then the 7. Remove the four screws securing the 15.4.18 Unit 1 Feed Roller
rewind paper sensor (D513) and guide plate. Replacement
splice sensor (D515).
Guide Plate
Sensor (D513P) Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove:
• unit 1 feed belt (see subsection

15.4.15).
• cutting/sorting hole punch unit (see
Screws (4) 2. Loosen the two hex. socket head

setscrews using a 2-mm Allen. wrench
and remove the collar and bearing.
Sensor (D515P) GD823
Bearing
GD822
8. Remove the guide plate.
4. Disconnect the D520 and D521
Guide Plate
connectors.
5. Disconnect the S510 and S511

connectors and open the eight
harness clamps.
Harness Clamps (8)

D521 Connector
Collar Hex. Socket Head
Setscrews (2)
GD839
GD1537
3. Remove the roller shaft as shown.
9. Remove the E-ring, shaft and two
rollers. Roller Shafts
Rollers (2)
15 E-ring
D520 Connector S511 Connector
15.4.18 S510 Connector
GD1539

sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket GD842

Shaft
GD824
4. Remove the screw and then the knob.
Installation
Roller Shaft
removal. Knob
Screws (2)
GD1538
Screw
GD843
15-24
15.4 Unit 1
Installation 4. Remove the E-ring, shaft and eight 3. Remove the two screws securing the
rollers. turn guide.
order of removal. Shaft 4. Remove the two screws and then the
Rollers (8) loop 2 guide plate and two spacers.
NOTE: Tighten the two hex. socket head
setscrews while pressing the Turn Guides (2)
Screws (2)
collar to remove play as shown.
Allen Wrench (2 mm) Collar
E-ring
GD845
Reinstallation
Loop 2 Guide Plate
removal.
Spacers (2) Screws (2)
GD844 GD847
15.4.20 Unit 1 Feed Roller Belt/
Roller Replacement 5. Remove the four screws and the hole
15.4.19 Feed Roller Section punch bracket.
Guide Plate Removal/ Removal
Screws (4)
Reinstallation
1. Remove:
Removal • feed roller section guide plate (see

1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection • unit 1 feed roller (see subsection
15.4.1). 15.4.18).
• loop 2 guide plate motor bracket/
2. Open the five harness clamps and gear (see subsection 15.4.29).
disconnect the D517P connector.
D517P Connector punch waste container bracket. Hole Punch Bracket
15
GD850
15.4.19
6. Unhook the two springs. 15.4.20
7. Remove the two screws, E-ring,

bearing and then the three roller
shafts.
Roller Shafts (3)

Springs (2) Screws (2)
Harness Clamps (5) Bearing
Punch Waste
GD840 Screw Container Bracket
E-ring
GD846
guide plate.
Guide Plate
GD849
Screws (2)
GD841
15-25
15.4 Unit 1
8. Remove the E-ring and then the turn 15.4.21 Paper Width Guide 1 15.4.22 Paper Width Guide 1
guide shaft and belt. Home Position Sensor Motor (M512)
(D514) Replacement Replacement
Belts (2)
Removal Removal
E-rings 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection 15.4.1).
15.4.1).
2. Open the three harness clamps and
2. Remove the screw and then the disconnect the motor connector.
sensor bracket.
Harness Clamps (3)
Screw
Turn Guide Shaft

GD1530
9. Remove the E-rings and roller shafts.
Turn Guide Shaft

Belts (2)
Turn Guides (2)
Rollers (6)
Sensor Bracket
GD798
3. Disconnect the connector from the Motor Connector

sensor. GD1535
Spacers (2)
4. Remove the screw and then the 3. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor. motor.
Roller Shafts (3) Screws (2)
Loop 2 Guide Plate Connector Sensor (D514)
GD851
Installation
15
15.4.21 order of removal.
15.4.22
NOTE: • Install the belt so that its glossy
surface faces the outside.
pressing the hole punch bracket
against the rear side plate. Screw Screws (2) Motor (M512)
GD799
GD809
Installation Installation
Side Plate
removal.
Screws (4)
GD852
15-26
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.23 Paper Width Guide 15.4.24 Paper Width Guide 6. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
Replacement Belt/Drive Gear
7. Remove the belt drive shaft and the
Replacement belt.
Removal
Removal Belt
1. Remove the inlet left guide plate (see
subsection 15.4.17). 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
15.4.1).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the guide
shaft. 2. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor bracket.
Guide Shaft
Screws (2)
E-ring
Belt Drive Shaft
Bearing
GD830
8. Remove the pulley, gear and bearing

from the belt drive shaft.
Sensor Bracket Drive Shaft
GD836 Bearings (2)

E-ring
Gear
GD1536
belt to the guide. Pulley
3. Remove the six screws and then the
two paper width guides.
Screws (2)
Screws (6) Paper Width Guies (2)
E-rings (2)
GD705
Installation
15
15.4.23
Belt Installation is essentially in the reverse
15.4.24
order of removal.
GD828
GD825
NOTE: • Install the gear so that its one-way
4. Loosen the two screws securing the clutch faces toward the pulley.
Installation
belt tensioner. • Tighten the screws while pressing
Installation is essentially in the reverse the belt holding bracket against
5. Remove the belt from the pulley. the edge of the slider as shown.
perform “Paper Width Guide Centering” Pulley
(see subsection 15.4.26) and “Paper Belt Screws (2) Sliders (2)
Width Guide Adjustment” (see subsection
15.4.27).
Brackets (2)
GD831
Screws (2)
GD829 • After installation, perform “Paper
Width Guide Centering” (see
15-27
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.25 Paper Width Guide 6. Remove the sliders from the guide 4. Loosen the two screws securing the
Shaft Replacement shafts. front paper width guide bracket.
Alminium Brackets (2) Screws (4) 5. Tighten the three screws while
Removal pressing the front paper width guide
against the jig.
1. Remove:
Front Paper Width Guide
• paper width guide belt (see Screws (3)
Shafts (2)
• paper width guide (see subsection
15.4.23).
2. Open the three harness clamps and

Sliders (2)
disconnect the motor connector.

paper width guide motor bracket.
GD835
Screws (2) Harness Clamps (3)
Installation
Jig
GD1648
order of removal.
NOTE: Make sure the mounting 6. Make sure there is no clearance

orientation of the sliders is between the paper width guide and
the jig.
correct.
7. Remove the jig.
Paper Width Guide 15.4.26 Paper Width Guide 8. Install the removed parts.
Motor Connector
Motor Bracket Centering
GD832
1. Remove: 15.4.27 Paper Width Guide
4. Remove the two screws and then the Adjustment
pulley bracket. • Unit 1 (see subsection 15.4.1).
• inlet left guide plate (see subsection
15 Screws (2) Pulley Bracket 15.4.17).
15.4.1).
15.4.25 2. Connect the Unit 1 extension harness
widest position.
15.4.26 to the Unit 1 harness on the frame
15.4.27 3. Install the jig and then tighten the two side.
screws while pressing the jig toward
Unit 1 Extension Harness:
the rear side.
Part No. 858C978078
Jig: Unit 1 Paper Width Guide
Centering Jig (Part No.
GD833
890C998616)
5. Loosen the four screws and remove

the two guide shafts.
Unit 1 Extension Harness

GD1645
Screws (4)
(Loosen)
Screws (2) Jig
Guide Shafts (2)
GD1647
GD834
15-28
15.4 Unit 1
3. Connect the extension harness to 11. Set the paper width measurement jig Installation
Unit 1. against the inside of the flange, and
then determine the fine adjustment Installation is essentially in the reverse
Unit 1 value so that the paper width guide is order of removal. After installation,
within the specified range. perform the loop 2 guide plate height
Specified Range: Jig (152.0mm)
±0.15mm
<Example>
When the inside width is 153.0 mm: Motor (M514)/Gear
Fine adjustment value = –1.0 mm Replacement
When the inside width is 151.5 mm:
Fine adjustment value = 0.5 mm Removal
Flanges (2) 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
Unit 1 Extension Harness 15.4.1).
GD1649
harness cover.
4. Close the printer left and right doors.
Harness Cover

Jig
GD1650

value for the paper width guide 1.
13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 until the paper

width guide is within the specified Screws (2)
range.
GD1532

disconnect the motor connector.
15
7. Enter “0” for the fine adjustment value Home Position Sensor 15.4.28
of the paper width guide 1. 4. Remove the three screws and then
(D519) Replacement 15.4.29
the motor bracket.
of the paper width guide 1. Removal
Screws (3)
9. Press [Home pos.] to move the paper 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
15.4.1). Motor Bracket
width guide 1 to the home position.
10. Press [Drive] to set the paper width 2. Disconnect the connector and remove
guide 1 to the 152.0 mm position. the screw and then the sensor.
Sensor (D519)
Harness Clamp
Motor Connector
GD1531
Screw
Sensor Connector
GD1534
15-29
15.4 Unit 1
5. Remove the gear. 15.4.30 Loop 2 Sensor (D518P) 15.4.31 Loop 2 Sensor LED
Replacement (D518L) Replacement
motor.
Removal Removal
Gear
1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection 1. Remove Unit 1 (see subsection
15.4.1). 15.4.1).
2. Remove the four flat-head screws and 2. Remove the four flat-head screws and
then the sensor bracket. then the sensor LED bracket.
Flat-head Screws (4) Sensor LED Bracket
Motor (M514)
Screws (2)
GD1533
7. Remove the E-ring and then the loop

2 guide plate gear.
Sensor Bracket
E-ring GD1608

disconnect the connector. Flat-head Screws (4)
GD1607
sensor. 3. Open the harness clamp and
Screw Sensor Bracket
sensor LED.
Gear Harness Clamp

Sensor Bracket
15 GD1529
15.4.31
perform the loop 2 guide plate height Harness Clamp
adjustment (see subsection 15.5.32). Sensor (D518P) Connector
GD1147 Connector
Screw
Installation
Sensor LED (D518L)
removal.
Installation

removal.
15-30
15.4 Unit 1
15.4.32 Loop 2 Guide Plate 6. If the clearance is outside the

Height Adjustment specified range, perform the following
adjustment.
1) Enter the fine adjustment value for
switches 1 and 2.
the loop 2 guide plate.
2) Click [Drive].
• The loop 2 guide plate moves
to the fine-adjusted position.
3) Check if the clearance is within

the specified range.
4) If necessary, repeat steps 1 to 3.
3. Click [Next Page] three times.
4. Click [Drive].
15
5. While turning ON the loop 2 guide
plate motor (M514), measure the 15.4.32
clearance between the loop 2 guide
plate and the upper guide plate stop.
Specified Clearance: 1 ± 0.5 mm
Unit 2
Stop on the
Upper
Guide Plate
1±0.5mm
Loop 2 Guide Plate
GD1388
15-31
16. EXPOSURE SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1 Laser Unit ......................................................................................................... 16-3

16.1.1 Printer Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 16-3
16.1.2 Air Duct Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 16-3
16.1.3 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 and 3 (F620, F621 and F622) Replacement ... 16-3
16.1.4 Air Filter Replacement ................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.5 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................. 16-4
16.2 Light-shield Shutter Unit ............................................................................... 16-6

16.2.1 Light-shield Shutter Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 16-6
16.2.2 Laser Unit Shutter Open Sensor (D534) Replacement ................................. 16-6
16.2.3 Shutter Opening/Closing Belt Replacement .................................................. 16-6
16.2.4 Laser Unit Light-shield Shutter Motor (M533) Replacement .......................... 16-6
16.2.5 Light-shield Shutter Replacement .................................................................. 16-7
16.2.6 Exposure Point Cooling Fan (F574) Replacement ........................................ 16-7
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit ....................................................................... 16-8

16.3.1 Exposure Section Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................... 16-8
16.3.2 Upper Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .................................... 16-8
16.3.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor (D531P) Replacement .............. 16-8
16.3.4 Upper Stainless Guide Roller Replacement .................................................. 16-9
16.3.5 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor LED (D531L) Replacement ....... 16-9
16.3.6 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor (D533P) Replacement ................................... 16-9
16.3.7 Exposure Punch Hole Sensor LED (D533L) Replacement ........................... 16-9
16.3.8 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................... 16-10
16.3.9 Pre-exposure Feed Motor (M531) Replacement ........................................... 16-10
16.3.10 Pre-exposure Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement ..................................... 16-10
16
16.3.11 Reverse Clutch (S530)/One-way Gear Replacement .................................... 16-10
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide 2 Replacement ............................................................... 16-11
16.3.19 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement .......................................................... 16-14
16.3.20 Sub-scanning Rubber Belt Replacement ....................................................... 16-15
16.3.21 Sub-scanning Motor (M532) Replacement .................................................... 16-15
16.3.22 Sub-scanning Pulley Replacement ................................................................ 16-16
16.3.23 Sub-scanning Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................... 16-16
16.3.24 Exposure Section Feed Roller Nip Sensor (D535) Replacement .................. 16-16
16.3.25 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (TS580) Replacement ......................... 16-16
16.3.26 Roller Nip Release Motor (M534) Replacement ............................................ 16-17
16.3.27 Nip Releasing Mechanism Disassembly/Reassembly ................................... 16-17
16.3.28 Outlet-side Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 16-18
16.3.29 Outlet-side Upper Guide Roller Replacement ............................................... 16-18
16.3.30 Lower Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .................................... 16-19
16.3.31 Exposure Section Feed Sub Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ........................ 16-19
16-1
Parts Location
Roller Nip Release Laser Unit Light-shield Pre-exposure

Paper Width Guide 2
Motor (M534) Shutter Motor (M533) Feed Motor (M531)
Laser Unit Motor (M530)
16
Sub-scanning Steel Belt Sub-scanning Reverse Clutch (S530)

Exposure Section
Motor (M532)
Feed Unit
GD1237
16-2
16.1 Laser Unit
16.1.1 Printer Upper Cover 16.1.3 Exposure Section Anti- 16.1.4 Air Filter Replacement
Removal/Reinstallation dust Pressure Fan 1, 2
and 3 (F620, F621 and Removal
Removal F622) Replacement
1. Remove the air duct (see subsection
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 16.1.2).
Removal
and the built-in circuit breaker and the
main power supply OFF. 2. Remove the three screws securing
1. Remove the air duct (see subsection the filter.
16.1.2).
2. Remove the four truss-head screws
with toothed washers and then the NOTE: Take care not to apply
2. Hold the fan and disconnect the fan excessive force to the
cover. connectors (F620, F621, F622).
Truss-head Screws Excessive force may shorten
NOTE: Take care not to apply the rubber’s service life.
with Toothed Washers (4)
excessive force to the
Excessive force may shorten Air Filter Screws (3)
the rubber’s service life.
Fan
GD1148
GD1152
Reinstallation
3. Remove the air filter.
removal. F620 F621 F622 Air Filter
GD1150
3. Remove the fan connectors from the

16.1.2 Air Duct Removal/
bracket.
Reinstallation
Removal three fans.
1. Remove the printer upper cover (see 16

Fans (3)
subsection 16.1.1).
16.1.1
GD1153
2. Remove the four screws and then the 16.1.2
air duct. Installation 16.1.3
16.1.4
removal.
Fan Connectors (3) Screws (6)
GD1151
Installation
Screws (4) Air Duct Install the parts in the reverse order of
GD1149 removal.
Reinstallation

removal.
16-3
16.1 Laser Unit
16.1.5 Laser Unit Removal/ 5. Disconnect the R, G and B cables 8. Remove the three short connectors
Reinstallation from the AOM drivers. from the clamp on the laser unit and
connect them to the connectors
(LDD5, LDD7, LDD10) of the harness
Removal as shown.
1. Remove: Short Connectors (3)
• air duct (see subsection 16.1.2). LDD7

• printer rear cover (see subsection
18.3.1).
2. Hold the fan and disconnect the three

fan connectors (F620, F621 and
F622).
NOTE: Take care not to apply Cables (3)

excessive force to the
vibration isolation rubbers. GD1156
Excessive force may shorten LDD10 LDD5

the rubber’s service life. 6. Wear the grounding wrist band to the
GD1159
left wrist and connect the other end to
3. Disconnect the four connectors the exposure section frame as shown.
9. Remove the grounding wrist band.
(OPT1, S620, OPT3 and D620).
Exposure Section Frame
Fan Connectors (3) laser unit.
Grounding Wrist Band

Connectors (4)
GD1157
GD1154 Laser Unit Screws (4)
7. Open the three clamps and
4. Remove the screw and then the GD1160
16 harness bracket and move it to the
disconnect the eight connectors
(LDD4 to LDD11) from the LDD20
side. 11. Grasp the handles on the laser unit
16.1.5 circuit board.
and remove the unit.
Harness Bracket NOTE: When disconnecting or
NOTE: Do not grasp the fan bracket
connecting the LDD20 circuit
when removing the unit.
board connectors, always
wear the grounding wrist
Laser Unit
band.
Connectors (8)
LDD20 Circuit Board
Screw
GD1155
Handle
GD1161
GD1158 NOTE: • Do not remove any covers

from the laser unit to prevent
dust from entering into the
unit.
• Do not place the laser unit
directly on the floor without
anything under it.
16-4
16.1 Laser Unit
Reinstallation

order of removal.
NOTE: • Make sure there is no foreign

matter on the unit’s mounting
surfaces.
• Tighten the four unit mounting
screws in a criss-cross pattern in
two to three steps.
• Resecure the three short
connectors with the clamp on
the laser unit.
GD1167

adjustments.
• Menu 45H “Main Scanning Position

Adjustment/Laser Beam Synchronous
Rough Adjustment” (see subsection
9.6.13).
• Menu 45J “Laser Beam Synchronous
Fine Adjustment Print” (see subsection
9.6.14).
• Menu 454 “G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup” (see subsection
9.6.4).
• Pre-operational check “Print Calibration 16
Upkeep” (see “Basic Operating
Instructions”). 16.1.5
16-5
16.2 Light-shield Shutter Unit
16.2.1 Light-shield Shutter 3. Disconnect the sensor connector from NOTE: Adjust the belt to the specified
Unit Removal/ the sensor. tension by moving the motor, and
then tighten the screws.
Reinstallation 4. Remove the screw and then the
sensor. Belt Tension: 2 to 3 mm/50 g
Removal
Sensor (D534)
1. Remove the laser unit (see subsection
16.1.5).
2. Disconnect the M533, U25 and F574

connectors.

the anti-dust shutter unit.
Screw
F574 Connector Sensor Connector Belt Adjustment Screw
U25 Connector
M533 Connector GD754 Shutter Opening/Closing Belt
GD756
Installation

removal. 16.2.4 Laser Unit Light-shield
Shutter Motor (M533)
Replacement
16.2.3 Shutter Opening/
Closing Belt Removal
Replacement
Screws (2) (Loosen) 1. Remove the shutter opening/closing
Light-shield Shutter Unit Removal belt (see subsection 16.2.3).
GD1162
2. Remove the connector from the
1. Remove the light-shield shutter unit
(see subsection 16.2.1). bracket and open the harness clamp.
Reinstallation
Harness Clamp
Reinstall the unit in the reverse order of 2. Loosen the two belt adjustment
removal. screws and remove the belt.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
16 16.2.2 Laser Unit Shutter

Open Sensor (D534)
16.2.1 Replacement
16.2.2
16.2.3 Removal
16.2.4
1. Remove the light-shield shutter unit Connector (M533)
GD757
2. Remove the screw and then the Shutter Opening/Closing Belt 3. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor bracket.
GD755 motor.
Sensor Bracket Screws (2)

Installation Motor (M533)

order of removal.
Screw
GD753
GD758
16-6
16.2 Light-shield Shutter Unit
Installation 16.2.6 Exposure Point

Cooling Fan (F574)
removal.
Replacement
Removal
16.2.5 Light-shield Shutter 1. Remove the light-shield shutter unit
Replacement (see subsection 16.2.1).
Removal 2. Open the harness clamp and then

disconnect the fan connector from the
1. Remove the shutter opening/closing bracket.
2. Loosen the two hex. socket head fan bracket.
setscrews and remove the pulley.
Screws (2) Fan Connector
Pulley
Harness Clamp
Hex. Socket Head
GD1544
Setscrews (2)
GD759 4. Remove the two screws and then the
fan and fan guard.
shutter.
Fan Guard
4. Remove the E-ring and then the Screws (2)

shutter shaft.
E-ring
Arrow
16
16.2.5
Fan
16.2.6
GD1545
Shutter Shaft
Installation
Screws (2)
order of removal.
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of mark points towards the motor.
removal.
16-7
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit
16.3.1 Exposure Section Feed Reinstallation 4. Open the two harness clamps and
Unit Removal/ disconnect the sensor connector.
Reinstallation order of removal. Harness Clamps (2)
Removal NOTE: Insert two Phillips screwdrivers

with a 6.35 mm OD into the two
1. Remove the light-shield shutter unit locating holes. Lift the frame
(see subsection 16.2.1). slightly so that the screwdrivers
fall into the locating holes, and
2. Disconnect the U20, U21 and U22 then tighten the four mounting
connectors at the rear side of the screws.
printer.
Phillips Screwdrivers (2) Screws (4)
Connectors (3)
Sensor Connector
GD715
Reinstallation

removal.
16.3.3 Exposure Section Feed

Unit Paper Sensor
GD1163
GD1165
(D531P) Replacement
3. Remove the three screws securing Removal

the grounding wire.
16.3.2 Upper Stainless Guide 1. Remove the exposure section feed
4. Remove the four screws securing the Plate Removal/ unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
unit. Reinstallation
2. Open the harness clamp and then
disconnect the sensor connector.
Removal
1. Remove the roller nip release motor 3. Remove the screw and then the
sensor.
Sensor (D531P)
16 2. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft
for the exposure feed section sub unit.
Sensor Connector
16.3.1
16.3.2
upper stainless guide plate.
16.3.3
Unit-securing Screws (4) Shaft
E-ring
Grounding Wire Securing Screws (3)
GD1164
5. Remove the unit, taking care not to Harness Clamp

Screw
damage the drive roller shaft and sub-
scanning belt. GD716
6. Remove the four screws and then the Installation

exposure section feed sub-unit.
Screws (4) Roller Shafts (2) removal.
Screws (4) Upper Stainless
Guide Plate
GD714
GD1546
16-8
16.3.4 Upper Stainless Guide 16.3.5 Exposure Section Feed 3. Disconnect the sensor connector from
Roller Replacement Unit Paper Sensor LED the sensor.
Cover Screws (2)
(D531L) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the upper stainless guide 1. Remove the exposure section feed
plate (see subsection 16.3.2). unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
2. Remove the four roller springs and 2. Disconnect the connector.

then the two roller shafts.
Springs (4) sensor LED.
Sensor LED (D531L)

Slit Plate Sensor (D533P)
GD724
Installation

removal.
Roller Shafts (2)

GD717
16.3.7 Exposure Punch Hole
Connector Screw Sensor LED (D533L)
3. Remove the two E-rings, four ball Replacement
GD722
bearings, two rollers and bearings.
E-rings (2) Installation Removal

Ball Bearings (4)
Install the parts in the reverse order of 1. Remove the exposure section feed
Rollers (2)
removal. unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
Bearings (2) 2. Remove the cover, sensor LED and

slit plate.
16.3.6 Exposure Punch Hole
Sensor (D533P) Screw Cover
Shaft
Replacement
Removal
16
1. Remove the exposure section feed
16.3.4
unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
16.3.5
GD718
2. Remove the two screws and then the 16.3.6
Installation cover, sensor and slit plate. 16.3.7
Installation is essentially in the reverse GD725

order of removal.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector from
NOTE: Install the thicker and stronger the sensor LED.
springs onto the inlet-side roller.
Sensor LED (D533L) Connector
Cover Screws (2)

GD723
Slit Plate
GD726
Installation

removal.
16-9
16.3.8 Sub-scanning Steel 16.3.9 Pre-exposure Feed 16.3.10 Pre-exposure Feed

Belt Section Cover Motor (M531) Roller Drive Gear
Removal/Reinstallation Replacement Replacement
1. Open the printer right and left doors. 1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt 1. Remove:
section cover (see subsection 16.3.8).
2. Remove the two screws and then the • reverse clutch (see subsection
center pillar. 2. Open the two harness clamps and 16.3.11).
disconnect the connector. • sub-scanning motor bracket (see
Screws (2) subsection 16.3.23).
Harness Clamps (2)
gears, one-way gear and spacer.
Gears (2)
E-rings (2)
Connector
GD728
Center Pillar
Spacer
motor. One-way gear
3. Remove the two screws and then the Screws (2) GD783
cover.
Installation
Cover
removal.
16.3.11 Reverse Clutch (S530)/

One-way Gear
16 Replacement
16.3.8 Removal
16.3.9 Motor (M531)
Screws (2)
16.3.10 GD729 1. Remove the exposure section feed
GD727
16.3.11 unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
Reinstallation vibration isolation rubber. 2. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt
removal. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove
the clutch-side connector from the
side plate.

Harness Clamp
Screws (2)
GD730
Installation

removal.
Connector
GD742
16-10
5. Loosen the two hex. socket head Installation 3. Disconnect the sensor connector from
setscrews and remove the collar, the sensor.
clutch and clutch plate. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. 4. Remove the screw and then the
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2) sensor from the bracket.
NOTE: • Align the hole on the clutch with
the bracket. Sensor (D530)
• Tighten the two hex. socket
head setscrews while pressing
the collar with the chamfered
side towards the clutch.
Hole
GD743
Screw
6. Remove the key and the clutch gear.
GD713
Key
Installation
Hex. Socket Head
Setscrews (2) Install the parts in the reverse order of
Bracket
removal.
GD746
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide 2

16.3.12 Paper Width Guide 2 Replacement
(D530) Replacement Removal
Clutch Gear
1. Remove the upper stainless guide
GD744 Removal
plate (see subsection 16.3.2).
7. Remove the one-way gear and 1. Remove the exposure section feed
spacer. 2. Remove the six screws and then the
One-way Gear 2. Remove the screw and then the Screws (6)
sensor bracket.

16
16.3.12
16.3.13
GD745

GD712 GD719
Installation

16-11
16.3.14 Paper Width Guide 2 4. Loosen the two screws securing the 10. Remove the pulley, gear and bearing
Motor (M530) belt tensioner. from the belt drive shaft.
Replacement 5. Remove the belt from the pulley. Drive Shaft
Bearings (2)
Removal Screws (2) (Loosen)
Gear
1. Remove the exposure section feed Pulley
Pulley
Spacer

motor.
E-rings (2)
Connector GD705
Belt Installation
GD773
6. Remove the paper width guide motor order of removal.
connector and open the harness
clamp. NOTE: • Install the gear so that its one-
way clutch faces toward the
7. Remove the two screws and then the pulley.
Screws (2) motor bracket. • Tighten the screws while
pressing the belt holding bracket
Motor (M530) Harness Clamp Connector against the edge of the slider as
shown.
GD736 Motor Bracket
Installation

removal.
16.3.15 Paper Width Guide

Harness Clamp
Belt/Drive Gear
16 Replacement
GD774
16.3.14 Removal Belt Holding Brackets (2)

8. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
16.3.15 GD776
9. Remove the belt drive shaft and the
belt. • After installation, perform “Paper
2. Place the unit upside down. Belt
Belt Drive Shaft subsection 16.3.17) and “Paper
belt to the guide.
Belt
E-ring
Bearing
GD775
Screws (2)
GD772
16-12
16.3.16 Paper Width Guide 8. Remove the four screws and then the Installation
Shaft Replacement two aluminium brackets.
Removal
Aluminium Brackets (2)
NOTE: • Make sure the mounting
1. Remove:
orientation of the sliders is
correct.
• sub-scanning motor bracket (see
• Tighten the screw while pressing
the aluminium bracket against
• lower stainless guide plate (see
the side plate.
Side Plate Side Plate
2. Place the unit upside down.

belt to the guide.
Screws (2)
Belt
GD777
9. Remove the four screws and plain

washers, and then the two guide
shafts and sliders.
Screws (4)

Aluminium Bracket Aluminium Bracket
Screws (2) GD780
GD772
4. Loosen the two screws securing the 16.3.17 Paper Width Guide
belt tensioner.
Centering
5. Remove the belt from the pulley.
GD778 1. Remove the exposure section feed
Screws (2) (Loosen) unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
Aluminium Screws (4)
Pulley Brackets (2) 2. Remove the upper stainless guide
plate (see subsection 16.3.2).
Paper Width Sliders (2)
Guide Shafts (2)
3. Place the paper width guides in the 16
widest position.
16.3.16
4. Align the jig with the two pins on the 16.3.17
frame, and then tighten the two
screws.
Jig: Exposure Section Feed Unit

Belt Paper Width Guide Centering Jig
GD773 (Part No. 890C995562A)
GD779
6. Disconnect the paper width guide Jig
Screws (2)
motor connector and open the
harness clamp.

motor bracket.
Connector
Motor Bracket
Screws (2)
GD1655
Harness Clamp
GD774
16-13
5. Loosen the six screws securing the 3. Connect the extension harness to the <Example>
paper width guides. exposure section feed unit. When the inside width is 153.0 mm:
6. Tighten the six screws while pressing Exposure Section Feed Unit When the inside width is 151.5 mm:
the paper width guides against the jig. Fine adjustment value = 0.5 mm
Screws (6) Jig Flanges
Extension Harnesses
Paper Width
Guides (2) GD1657 Jig
GD1658
GD1656 5. Start up the system. value for the paper width guide 2.
7. Make sure that there is no clearance 6. Open the menu “45M Printer 13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 until the paper
between the bearings of the paper Mechanical Fine Adjustment”. width guide is within the specified
width guides and the jig. range.
8. Remove the jig.

16.3.19 Sub-scanning Steel
Belt Replacement
Removal
Adjustment 1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt
unit (see subsection 16.3.1). 2. Loosen the screw securing the belt
tensioner.
7. Enter “0” for the fine adjustment value
2. Connect the exposure section feed
of the paper width guide 2.
16 unit extension harness to the
exposure section feed unit harness on
3. Move the belt tensioner to loosen the
tension, and then secure it with the
16.3.18 the frame side. screw.
of paper width guide 2 and click [Set].
16.3.19
Exposure Section Feed Unit Extension 4. Wear gloves and remove the belt.
9. Press [Home pos.] to move the paper
Harness: Part No. 858C978079
width guide 2 to the home position. Tensioner Screw
10. Press [Drive] to set the paper width

guide 2 to the 152.0 mm position.

against the inside of the flange, and
then determine the fine adjustment
within the specified range.
Specified range: 152.0±0.1mm [Jig

(152.0)±0.1mm]
Extension Harnesses Sub-scanning Steel Belt Belt Tensioner
GD737
GD1651
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when

handling the belt and pulley.
Fingerprints to the belt and
pulley may cause slippage or
corrosion of the belt.
16-14
Installation 3) Secure the bracket by tightening 16.3.21 Sub-scanning Motor

the screw. (M532) Replacement
order of removal. 4) Rotate the pulley more than 30
times and make sure the belt is in
Removal
NOTE: • Tighten the tensioner-securing the center of the pulley. If
screw after installing the belt necessary, readjust belt position.
and rotating the pulleys several
times. Screw
2. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt
• Take care not to bend or
damage the belt as this may
shorten its service life.
Belt
Harness Clamp
Adjusting Screw
GD1193
Tensioner
GD1191
16.3.20 Sub-scanning Rubber
Belt Replacement
NOTE: After installation, perform the belt
Connector
alignment adjustment by following Removal
GD738
the steps below.
4. Remove the two flange nuts and then
<Belt Alignment Adjustment> unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
the motor.
1. Rotate the pulley 30 times or more 2. Remove the belt while rotating the Motor (M532)
and make sure the belt is in the center roller shaft. Flange Nuts (2)
of the pulley.
Sub-scanning Rubber Belt
Pulley
16
16.3.20
16.3.21
Roller Shaft GD739
GD766
Belt Installation
GD1192 Installation Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
2. If the belt is not in the center of the Install the belt in the reverse order of
pulley, adjust it by following the steps removal.
below.
1) Loosen the screw securing the

adjusting bracket.
2) Adjust the belt position by turning

the adjusting screw.
Clockwise: The belt moves to the

outside.
Counterclockwise:
The belt moves to the
inside.
16-15
16.3.22 Sub-scanning Pulley 3. Remove the five screws and then the Installation
Replacement motor bracket.
Screws (5)
removal.
Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt

(see subsection 16.3.19). 16.3.25 Exposure Point
Temperature Sensor
2. Loosen the two hex. socket head (TS580) Replacement
setscrews using a 2-mm hex. wrench
and then remove the pulley.
Removal
Sub-scanning Motor Bracket
2. Release the two circuit board spacers
GD749
and then remove the sensor.
Reinstallation
removal.
Pulley
16.3.24 Exposure Section Feed
GD747 Roller Nip Sensor
(D535) Replacement
Installation
Removal
Installation is essentially in the reverse 1. Remove the exposure section feed Circuit Board Spacers (2)
order of removal. unit (see subsection 16.3.1). GD733
NOTE: • Align the end surface of the 2. Open the harness clamp and remove
pulley boss with the shoulder of 3. Disconnect the sensor connector from
the screw and then the sensor the sensor.
the shaft as shown. bracket.
• Perform the belt alignment
adjustment (see subsection 4. Remove the circuit board spacer from
Screw the sensor.
16.3.19).
Circuit Board Sensor Connector
Spacers (2)
16 16.3.23 Sub-scanning Motor
16.3.22 Bracket Removal/
16.3.23 Reinstallation
16.3.24
16.3.25
Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning pulley (see

subsection 16.3.22). Harness Clamp Sensor Bracket
GD731
disconnect the sub-scanning motor 3. Disconnect the sensor connector from Sensor (TS580)
connector. the sensor. GD734
Harness Clamp 4. Remove the screw and then the Installation

sensor.
Connector
removal.
Connector
GD748
Sensor (D535)
GD732
16-16
16.3.26 Roller Nip Release 16.3.27 Nip Releasing 6. Remove the two E-rings, bearings and
Motor (M534) Mechanism cam shaft.
Replacement Disassembly/
Reassembly
Removal
Disassembly
unit (see subsection 16.3.1). 1. Remove the sub-scanning motor
disconnect the connector. 2. Place the nip rollers in a nip ON state
by turning the nip release gear.
Harness Clamp Connector
3. Remove the three E-rings, gears and Bearings (2)
Camshaft
pin. E-rings (2)
GD761
Gears (3)
Pin 7. Remove the four springs.

two bearing-holding plates.
Springs (4)
GD740

motor.
E-rings (3)
Screws (2) GD750
4. Loosen the four nip guide plate

adjusting screws.
Screws (4) Bearing-holding Plates (2)
Screws (2) (Loosen) Screws (2) (Loosen)
GD762
9. Remove the two nip rollers.

Bearing-holding Springs (4)
Plates (4)
Bearings (4)
16
Motor (M534) Ball Bearings (4)
16.3.26
GD741
16.3.27
GD751
spacer from the motor.
5. Remove the two nip guide plates.
Screws (2)
Nip Guide Plates (2)
Nip Rollers (2)

GD763
Reassembly

order of disassembly. After installation,
perform the following adjustments.
GD752
Spacer
GD1547
Installation

removal.
16-17
<Bearing Clearance Adjustment> 16.3.28 Outlet-side Roller 16.3.29 Outlet-side Upper

Replacement Guide Roller
1. Insert the 0.03-mm feeler gauge
between the bearing holding plate and
Replacement
the bearing, and tighten the screws
Removal
while pressing the plate against the Removal
bearing.
unit (see subsection 16.3.1). 1. Remove the exposure section feed
2. Remove the feeler gauge. unit (see subsection 16.3.1).
bracket. 2. Remove the two screws and then the
Screws (2) upper guide.
shafts from the front side.

shafts at the rear side and remove the
roller shafts.
Screws (4)
Feeler Gauge Roller Shafts

Screws (2) Upper Guide
GD764
GD769
<Guide Plate Adjustment>

3. Remove the E-ring and then the roller
1. Align the two pins on the guide plate shaft.
Bracket
with the holes in the bearings. Roller Shaft
2. Tighten the screws while pressing the

two adjusting screws toward the inlet
side.
Screw
GD767
5. Remove the E-ring and then the two

rollers and spacer.
E-ring
E-rings (2) GD770
16
16.3.28 seven rollers and four spacers.
16.3.29
Press toward the inlet side Shaft
E-rings (2)
GD765
Bracket
Rollers (2)
GD768
Rollers (7)
Installation
Spacers (4)
removal.
GD771
Installation

removal.
16-18
16.3.30 Lower Stainless Guide 16.3.31 Exposure Section Feed

Plate Removal/ Sub Unit Disassembly/
Reinstallation Reassembly
Removal Disassembly
1. Remove: 1. Remove the exposure section feed

• paper width guide 2 (see
subsection 16.3.13). 2. Remove the four screws and then the
• sub-scanning motor bracket (see two roller shafts.
3. Remove the two hex. socket head
2. Release the locking tab and then setscrews and E-rings, and then
remove the resin guide plate. disassemble the roller shaft.
Roller Shaft
Locking Tab
E-rings (2)
Resin Guide Plate
GD1548
GD781
Reassembly
lower stainless guide plate.
Lower Stainless Guide Plate order of disassembly.
NOTE: Tighten the hex. socket head

setscrews so that each roller is
aligned horizontally.
16
16.3.30
16.3.31
Screws (4)
GD782
Reinstallation Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

GD1549
removal.
16-19
17. POST-EXPOSURE FEED SECTION/PRINTER FRONT DOOR SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 17-4
17.1 Unit 2 .................................................................................................................. 17-5

17.1.1 Printer-side Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 17-5
17.1.7 Loop 3 Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................... 17-6
17.1.10 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 (D543P) Replacement ............................................... 17-7
17.1.11 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 LED (D543L) Replacement ....................................... 17-8
17.1.12 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 (D548P) Replacement ............................................... 17-8
17.1.13 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 LED (D548L) Replacement ....................................... 17-8
17.1.16 Unit 2 Inlet-side Feed Roller Replacement .................................................... 17-9
17.1.17 Inlet-side Press Roller/Guide Roller/Guide Plate Replacement ..................... 17-10
17.1.18 Unit 2 Outlet-side Feed Roller Replacement ................................................. 17-11
17.1.19 Outlet-side Press Roller Replacement ........................................................... 17-11
17.1.20 Outlet-side Guide Plate Replacement ........................................................... 17-11
17.1.21 Paper Width Guide 3 Home Position Sensor 1 (D542) Replacement ........... 17-12
17.1.24 Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1, 2 and 3 (M541, M543 and M544)
17
Replacement ............................................................................................ 17-13
17.1.25 Inlet-side Paper Width Guide Belt/Drive Gear/Guide Shaft Replacement ..... 17-13
17.1.26 Inlet-side Paper Width Guide Replacement ................................................... 17-14
17.1.27 Middle Paper Width Guide Replacement ....................................................... 17-14
17.1.28 Middle Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement ............................................... 17-14
17.1.29 Middle Paper Width Guide/Slider/Shaft Replacement ................................... 17-15
17.1.30 Outlet-side Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement ......................................... 17-15
17.1.31 Outlet-side Paper Width Guide Shaft Replacement ...................................... 17-16
17.1.34 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor (D544P) Replacement .................................. 17-19
17.1.35 Back Print Punch Hole Sensor LED (D544L) Replacement .......................... 17-19
17.1.36 Back Printer Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 17-19
17.1.37 Back Printer Head Setting Sensor (D545) Replacement ............................... 17-20
17.1.38 Back Printer Head (JNE20) Circuit Board Replacement ............................... 17-20
17.1.39 Back Printer Head Replacement ................................................................... 17-20
17.1.40 Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement ........................................................... 17-21
17.1.41 Back Printer Drive Gear (Unit Side) Replacement ......................................... 17-22
17-1
17.1.42 Back Printing Section Guide Plate Replacement ........................................... 17-22

17.1.43 Back Printer Head Platen Replacement ........................................................ 17-22
17.1.44 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor (D550P) Replacement ..................................... 17-23
17.1.45 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D550L) Replacement .............................. 17-23
17.1.46 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment ..................................................... 17-23
17.2 Unit 3 .................................................................................................................. 17-25

17.2.2 Cutter 1 Home Position Sensor (D552) Replacement ................................... 17-25
17.2.3 Cutter 1 Unit Replacement ............................................................................ 17-25
17.3 Reservoir Section ........................................................................................... 17-28

17.3.3 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 17-28
17.3.4 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 17-28
17.3.5 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D555) Replacement . 17-29
17.3.6 Reservoir Paper Width Guide Motor (M552) Replacement ........................... 17-29
17
17.4 Unit 4 .................................................................................................................. 17-32
17.4.2 Unit 4 Paper Sensor LED (D561L) Replacement .......................................... 17-32
17.4.3 Unit 4 Paper Sensor (D561P) Replacement .................................................. 17-32
17.4.4 Paper Sensor Section Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation .......................... 17-32
17.4.5 Belt Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 17-33
17.4.8 Outlet-side Guide Plate/Roller Replacement ................................................. 17-33
17.4.10 Unit 4 Press Roller/Inlet Roller/Inlet-side Guide Replacement ...................... 17-34
17-2
17.4.18 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D562L) Replacement .............................. 17-38
17.4.19 Cutter 2 Punch Hole Sensor (D562P) Replacement ..................................... 17-38
17.4.20 Cutter 2 Home Position Sensor (D563) Replacement ................................... 17-39
17.4.21 Cutter 2 Unit Replacement ............................................................................ 17-39
17.5 Unit 5 .................................................................................................................. 17-41

17.5.9 Unit 5 Inlet Guide Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... 17-44
17.5.14 Loop 5 Guide Drive Gear Replacement ......................................................... 17-45
17.5.17 Unit 5 Press Roller Replacement ................................................................... 17-46
17.5.19 Feed Drive Gear Replacement ...................................................................... 17-48
17.5.20 Printer Exit Paper Sensor (D568) Replacement ............................................ 17-48
17
17.6 Printer Door/Front Cover Section .............................................................. 17-49
17.6.1 Printer Front Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 17-49
17.6.2 Printer Front Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 17-49
17.6.3 Printer Door Interlock Switch 1 (D591) Replacement .................................... 17-49
17.6.4 Printer Door Interlock Switch 2 (D592) Replacement .................................... 17-49
17-3
Parts Location
Paper Width Guide 3 Motor 1 Loop 5 Guide Plate Motor

(M541) (M563)
Unit 2
Paper Width Guide 5
Motor (M564)
Loop 3 Guide
Plate Motor
(M540)
Unit 2 Feed Motor

(M542)
Cutter 2
Paper Width Loop 3 Unit
Guide 3 Motor 2 Loop 4 Guide Plate
(M543) Motor (M551)
Back Printer
Loop 5
Paper Width
Guide 3 Motor 3
(M544)
Unit 5
Unit 4 Feed Motor

17 (M561) Cutter 2 Motor
(M562)
Cutter 1 Motor (M560)
(M550) Cutter 1 Unit
Loop 4 Reservoir Paper Width Guide
Motor (M552)
Unit 3
GD1238
17-4
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.1 Printer-side Upper 3. Remove the four screws securing 17.1.3 Loop 3 Guide Plate
Cover Removal/ Unit 2. Home Position Sensor
Reinstallation (D540) Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, Screws (4) 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection
and set the built-in circuit breaker and 17.1.2).
2. Remove the four truss-head screws remove the screw and the then
with toothed washers and then the sensor.
cover.
Sensor (D540)
Toothed Washer
GD1170
4. Grasp the handle and the edge of the

opening as shown and then remove
Unit 2.
Screw
Truss-head Screws Handle
with Toothed Washers (4) Sensor Connector
GD1169
GD975
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Installation

removal.
removal.
17.1.2 Unit 2 Removal/ Opening

Reinstallation GD1171
17.1.4 Loop 3 Sensor (D541P)
Reinstallation
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer-side upper cover Installation is essentially in the reverse Removal
order of removal.
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection 17
2. Disconnect the U30, U31, U32, U33 NOTE: Tighten the screws while pressing 17.1.2).
17.1.1
and U34 connectors. Unit 2 against the frame.
2. Remove the two screws and raise the 17.1.2
Connectors (5) guide plate. 17.1.3
Screws (4)
17.1.4
Screws (2) Guide Plate

GD976
Unit 2
GD1168 GD1735
17-5
17.1 Unit 2
3. Open the harness clamp and 17.1.6 Loop 3 Guide Plate 17.1.8 Loop 3 Guide Roller
disconnect the connector. Motor (M540) Replacement
Replacement
sensor.
Removal
Removal
Screw 1. Remove the loop 3 drive gear (see
Sensor (D541P) Harness Clamp
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection subsection 17.1.7).
17.1.2).
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and the
2. Open the harness clamp and guide roller shaft.
Guide Roller Shaft
motor. Bearing
Harness Clamp
Connector
GD977
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of E-ring

removal. GD1021
Screws (2) 3. Remove the two screws and then the

17.1.5 Loop 3 Sensor LED Motor (M540) guide plate.
Connector
(D541L) Replacement Guide Plate
GD997
Removal
Installation
17.1.2).
removal.
3. Remove the screw and then the 17.1.7 Loop 3 Drive Gear
sensor LED. Replacement
Screws (2)
Removal GD1022
17
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection 4. Remove the E-ring and disassemble
17.1.5 the roller.
17.1.2).
17.1.6
17.1.7 2. Remove the two E-rings and gears. E-rings
17.1.8
Sensor LED
Screw
Connector
Harness Clamp
GD978
Installation

removal.
Gears (2)
E-rings (2) E-ring
Shafts (2)
GD1023
GD1020
Installation

removal.
17-6
17.1 Unit 2
5. Remove the two screws, plain 17.1.9 Loop 3 Guide Plate 6. If the clearance is outside the
washers and the roller shaft. Height Adjustment specified range, perform the following
adjustment.
Roller Shaft
switches 1 and 2.
2) Click [Drive].
to the fine-adjusted position.

Screws (2)
GD1024
6. Remove the two E-rings and roller 17.1.10 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1
shafts. (D543P) Replacement
E-rings (2) 3. Click [Next Page] three times. Removal
4. Click [Drive]. 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection

17.1.2).
2. Disconnect the connector and remove

Screw
Rollers (2)
GD1025A
Installation

order of removal. 5. While turning ON the loop 3 guide
plate motor (M540), measure the
NOTE: Align the roller shaft with the clearance between the loop 3 guide
groove on the paper width guide. plate and the upper guide plate
Sensor (D543P)
stopper. Connector
GD985
17
Specified Clearance: 2 to 3 mm 17.1.9
Roller Installation 17.1.10
Stopper Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Groove
Loop 3 Guide Plate

GD1026
GD1701
17-7
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.11 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 1 17.1.12 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2 17.1.14 Unit 2 Feed Belt
LED (D543L) (D548P) Replacement Replacement
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection 17.1.2). 17.1.2).
17.1.2).
2. Disconnect the connector and remove 2. Remove the two screws and then the
2. Remove the two screws and raise the the screw and then the sensor. lower belt cover.
guide plate.
Sensor (D548P) 3. Loosen the screw securing the belt
Connector tensioner and remove the belt.
Tensioner- Feed Belt

securing Screw

Screw
GD976
GD987
Installation Lower Belt Cover
Screws (2)
Sensor LED (D543L)
Connector Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
GD999
Installation
17.1.13 Unit 2 Paper Sensor 2
LED (D548L) Installation is essentially in the reverse
Removal NOTE: • Install the belt as shown.

Screw
17.1.2).
17
GD986 2. Disconnect the connector and remove
17.1.11
17.1.13 Sensor LED (D548L)
17.1.14 Install the parts in the reverse order of Connector
removal.
Feed Belt
GD1027
Screw
• Perform the belt tension
GD988 adjustment by following the
steps below.
Installation

removal.
17-8
17.1 Unit 2
<Belt Tension Adjustment> 17.1.15 Unit 2 Feed Motor 17.1.16 Unit 2 Inlet-side Feed
(M542) Replacement Roller Replacement
the upper belt cover.
Removal Removal
Upper Belt Cover
1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection 1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection
17.1.14). 17.1.14).
2. Remove the two screws and raise the 2. Loosen the two hex. socket head
guide plate. setscrews and remove the collar,
bearing and then the feed roller.

Feed Roller Shaft

Screws (2)
GD976
GD1540
3. Open the two harness clamps and Bearing
2. Screw the belt-adjusting screw (M4 × Collar
20) into the adjusting screw hole.
GD1028
3. Adjust the belt to the specified tension

by turning the belt adjusting screw. Installation
Belt Tension: 3 to 5 mm/ 100 g (10N)
Tensioner-securing Screw order of removal.
NOTE: Tighten the two hex. socket head

Belt-adjusting setscrews while pressing the
Screw collar to remove bearing play as
shown.
Connector Harness Clamps (2) Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
Bearing
GD1001 17
4. Remove the two screws and then the 17.1.15
Feed Belt motor. 17.1.16
Motor (M542)
GD1000
4. Tighten the tensioner-securing screw.
5. Remove the belt-adjusting screw.

Collar
6. Install the upper belt cover.
GD1029
Screws (2)
GD1002
Installation

removal.
17-9
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.17 Inlet-side Press Roller/ 6. Remove the two screws and raise the 10. Remove the six screws and then the
Guide Roller/Guide guide plate. inlet-side lower guide plate.
Plate Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the inlet-side feed roller (see

2. Remove the two springs, E-rings,

bearings and then the press roller
shaft.

GD976 Screws (6)
Lower Guide Plate
GD1034
sensor bracket.
8. Remove the screw securing the lower
press rollers from the shaft.
guide plate from the inside.
Shaft Supports (2)
Shaft Bearings (4)
Rollers (2)
Bearings (2)
Springs (2)
E-rings (2) Spacer
GD1030
E-rings (4)
roller shaft.
4. Remove the two screws and then the Shaft

guide shaft.
GD1025B
Guide Shaft Screw
GD1035 Installation
Screws (2)
9. Remove the two screws and then the Install the parts in the reverse order of
middle paper width guide shaft. removal.
Middle Paper Width Guide Shaft
17
17.1.17 Roller Shaft Screws (2)
GD1031
5. Remove the five screws and then the

inlet-side upper guide plate and roller
shaft.
Upper Guide Plate Screws (5)

Screws (2)
GD1036
GD1033
17-10
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.18 Unit 2 Outlet-side Feed 17.1.19 Outlet-side Press 17.1.20 Outlet-side Guide Plate
Roller Replacement Roller Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection 1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection 1. Remove:
17.1.14). 17.1.14).
• paper width guide 3 motor 3 (see
2. Remove the screw and the knob. 2. Remove the four springs and then the subsection 17.1.24).
two press roller shafts. • outlet-side feed roller (see
3. Loosen the two hex. socket head subsection 17.1.18).
setscrews and remove the collar and Roller Shafts (2) • outlet-side press roller shaft (see
bearing. subsection 17.1.19).
• back printer bracket (see
4. Remove the feed roller. subsection 17.1.36).
Hex. Socket 2. Remove the three screws and then

Feed Roller Shaft Head Setscrews (2) the sensor LED bracket.
Sensor LED Bracket
Springs (4)
GD1039
Bearing 3. Remove the two E-rings and then the

two shaft supports.
Collar Knob
GD1037 4. Remove the E-ring, two rollers, four
bearings and spacer. Screws (3)
Installation
Shaft Supports (2) GD1041
Installation is essentially in the reverse Bearings (4)

3. Remove the two screws and the guide
order of removal. Rollers (2)
shaft.
NOTE: Tighten the two hex. socket head Spacer
Screws (2) Guide Shaft
setscrews while pressing the
collar to remove bearing play as E-rings (4)
shown.
Collar Bearing
Shaft
17
17.1.18
GD1025B
17.1.19

removal.

GD1038
17-11
17.1 Unit 2
4. Remove the seven screws and then 17.1.21 Paper Width Guide 3 17.1.22 Paper Width Guide 3
the guide plate. Home Position Sensor Home Position Sensor
Screws (6)
1 (D542) Replacement 2 (D546) Replacement
Removal Removal

17.1.2). 17.1.2).
2. Remove the screw and then the 2. Remove the screw and then the
sensor bracket. sensor bracket.
Screw Sensor Bracket Sensor Bracket
GD1044
GD979
Screw Screw
GD1541 3. Disconnect the sensor connector and GD981
remove the screw and then the
5. Remove the six screws and then sensor. 3. Disconnect the sensor connector and
separate the upper and lower guide remove the screw and then the
plates. Sensor Connector Screw sensor.
Upper Guide Plate Sensor Connector Screw

Lower Guide Plate
17 Sensor (D542)
Screws (6) GD980
17.1.21
GD1542
Sensor (D546)
17.1.22
Installation GD982
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of order of removal. After installation,
removal. perform the paper width guide adjustment Installation is essentially in the reverse
(see subsection 17.1.33). order of removal. After installation,
17-12
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.23 Paper Width Guide 3 17.1.24 Paper Width Guide 3 3. Loosen the two screws securing the
Home Position Sensor Motor 1, 2 and 3 (M541, belt tensioner.
3 (D547) Replacement M543 and M544) 4. Remove the belt from the pulley.
Replacement
Removal Belt
Removal
17.1.2). 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection
17.1.2).
sensor bracket. 2. Disconnect the connector and remove
the motor connector from the bracket.
Sensor Bracket
motor.
Screws (2) Pulley
Motor Connector GD1048
6. Remove the belt drive shaft and then

Screws (2)
the belt.
Belt Drive Shaft

Screw
GD983

sensor.
Bracket
Sensor Connector GD998
Installation

removal. E-ring
Bearing
GD1049
17.1.25 Inlet-side Paper Width

7. Remove the pulley, gear and bearings
Guide Belt/Drive Gear/ from the belt drive shaft.
Guide Shaft 17
Screw Sensor (D547) Replacement Drive Shaft
17.1.23
Bearings (2)
GD984 17.1.24
Removal Gear
17.1.25
Installation
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection Pulley
Installation is essentially in the reverse 17.1.2).
perform the paper width guide adjustment 2. Remove the two screws securing the
(see subsection 17.1.33). belt to the guides.
Screws (2) Belt

E-rings (2)
GD705
GD1046
17-13
17.1 Unit 2
8. Remove the two screws and then the Installation 17.1.27 Middle Paper Width
motor bracket. Guide Replacement
Removal
NOTE: • Install the gear so that its one-
1. Remove the back printer bracket (see
pulley.
against the edge of the slider as
shown.
Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
GD1050

two guide shafts.
Screws (4)
GD1056
Installation
Sliders (2) Install the parts in the reverse order of
Belt-holding Brackets (2)
removal.
GD1047
Guide Shafts (2) Screws (4)
GD1052 Width Guide Centering” (see 17.1.28 Middle Paper Width
subsection 17.1.32) and “Paper Guide Belt
10. Remove the four screws and then the Width Guide Adjustment” (see Replacement
two sliders from the brackets. subsection 17.1.33).
Brackets (2)
Removal
17.1.26 Inlet-side Paper Width 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection

Guides (2) 17.1.2).
Guide Replacement
Removal
17 belt to the guides.
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection Belt Screws (2)

17.1.26 17.1.2).
17.1.27 Shafts (2)
17.1.28 2. Remove the four screws and then the
Sliders (2) paper width guides.
GD1053
Screws (4)
GD1057

GD1051
Installation

removal.
17-14
17.1 Unit 2
3. Loosen the two screws securing the • Tighten the screws while 3. Remove the four screws and then the
belt tensioner. pressing the belt-holding bracket two guide shafts.
4. Remove the belt from the pulley. shown.
Pulley Screws (2)
Guide Shafts (2) Screws (4)
GD1062
Belt
two brackets from the sliders.
Sliders (2)
Tensioner-securing Screws (2) Belt-holding Brackets (2) Screws (4)
GD1059 GD1058 Paper Width

Guides (2)
5. Remove the E-ring and bearing. • After installation, perform “Paper
Screws (4)
6. Remove the belt drive shaft and then subsection 17.1.32) and “Paper
the belt. Width Guide Adjustment” (see
Belt
Belt Drive Shaft 17.1.29 Middle Paper Width

Guide/Slider/Shaft Shafts (2)
Replacement
Sliders (2)
Removal GD1063
1. Remove the middle paper width guide Installation

2. Remove the two screws and then the removal.
motor bracket.
E-ring
17
Bearing 17.1.30 Outlet-side Paper
GD1060 Width Guide Belt 17.1.29
Replacement 17.1.30
Installation
Removal
order of removal. 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection
17.1.2).
way clutch faces toward the 2. Place Unit 2 upside down.
pulley. Screws (2) Motor Bracket
GD1061 3. Remove the two screws securing the
Drive Shaft
belt to the guides.
Bearings (2)
Gear Screws (2)
Pulley
E-rings (2)
Belt
GD705
GD1066
17-15
17.1 Unit 2
4. Loosen the two screws securing the • Tighten the screws while 3. Remove the four screws and then the
belt tensioner. pressing the belt-holding bracket two guide shafts.
5. Remove the belt from the pulley. shown. Guide Shafts (2)
Screws (2) Sliders (2)
Screws (4)
GD1073
Belt Pulley Screws (2)
GD1070
Belt-holding Brackets (2) two paper width guides.
6. Remove the E-ring and bearing. GD1067
• After installation, perform “Paper two brackets from the sliders.
the belt. Width Guide Centering” (see
E-ring Bearing Width Guide Adjustment” (see
Belt subsection 17.1.33).
Brackets (2)
17.1.31 Outlet-side Paper

Width Guide Shaft
Replacement
Removal
Shafts (2)
1. Remove the outlet-side paper width Sliders (2)
guide belt (see subsection 17.1.30).
GD1074
Belt Drive Shaft
GD1071 Installation
motor bracket.
Installation Screws (2) Motor Bracket
removal.
17 Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
17.1.31
pulley.
Drive Shaft
Bearings (2)
Gear
Pulley GD1072
E-rings (2)
GD705
17-16
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.32 Paper Width Guide 6. Loosen the two screws securing the 4. Place the paper width guides in the
Centering front paper width guide. widest position.
7. While pressing the rear paper width 5. Install the jig as shown and secure it
<Inlet-side Paper Width Guide guide against the jig, and the front with the screw removed in step 3.
(Paper Width Guide 3-1)> paper width guide against the jig and
slider, tighten the two screws. Jig: Unit 2 Paper Width Guide
17.1.2).
Screws (2) (Loosen) 890C995614)
Jig
inlet guide.
Screws (4)
Rear Paper
Width Guide
Screw
Front Paper Width Guide GD1668
Inlet Guide Screws (2) (Tighten)
GD1664 GD1666 6. Loosen the two screws securing the
front paper width guide.
3. Place the paper width guides in the 8. Make sure there is no clearance
widest position. between the paper width guide and 7. While pressing the rear paper width
the jig. guide against the jig, and the front
4. Remove the screw from the jig. paper width guide against the jig and
9. Remove the jig. slider, tighten the two screws.
5. Install the jig as shown and then
tighten the screw. 10. Install the removed parts. Screws (2) (Loosen)
Jig: Unit 2 Paper Width Guide 1 <Middle Paper Width Guide (Paper
Centering Jig (Part No. Width Guide 3-2)>
890C995613)
17.1.2).
2. Move the back printer bracket to its

waiting position. 17
3. Remove the upper screw securing the 17.1.32
guide. Rear Paper
Width Guide
Screw
Screw
Jig
Screws (2) (Tighten)
GD1665
GD1669
8. Make sure there is no clearance

between the paper width guides and
the jig.
9. Remove the jig.

GD1667
10. Install the removed parts.
17-17
17.1 Unit 2
<Outlet-side Paper Width Guide 17.1.33 Paper Width Guide 8. Enter “152.0” for the aim width value
(Paper Width Guide 3-3)> Adjustment of paper width guides 3-1, 3-2 and
3-3.
17.1.2) 9. Press [Home pos.] to move paper
17.1.2).
width guides 3-1, 3-2 and 3-3 to the
2. Remove the back printer bracket (see home position.
2. Connect the Unit 2 extension harness
to the Unit 2 harness on the frame
10. Press [Drive] to set paper width
side.
3. Place the paper width guides in the guides 3-1, 3-2 and 3-3 to the 152.0
widest position. mm position.
Part No. 858C978080
4. Loosen the screw of the jig. 11. Set the paper width measurement jig
5. Install the jig as shown and tighten the then determine the fine adjustment
screw. value so that each paper width guide
is placed within the specified range.
Jig: Unit 2 Paper Width Guide 1
Centering Jig (Part No. Specified range: 152.0±0.1 mm
890C995613) [Jig (152.0)±0.1 mm]
<Example>
Jig When the inside width is 153.0 mm:
Fine adjustment value = 0.5 mm
Unit 2 Extension Harnesses
GD1652
Flanges (2)
3. Connect the Unit 2 extension harness

to Unit 2.
Unit 2
Screw
GD1670
Jig
GD1672
Flanges (2)
7. While pressing the rear paper width
guide against the jig, and the front
17 paper width guide against the jig and
slider, tighten the two screws.
17.1.33
Rear Paper Width Guide
Screws (2) (Loosen) Unit 2 Extension Harness
GD1675

Jig
GD1673
Front Paper
Width Guide

GD1671

the jig. Jig
9. Remove the jig.
10. Install the removed parts. Flanges (2)

of paper width guides 3-1, 3-2 and 3- GD1674
3.
17-18
17.1 Unit 2
12. Enter the determined fine adjustment 17.1.35 Back Print Punch Hole 17.1.36 Back Printer Bracket
value for each paper width guide. Sensor LED (D544L) Removal/Reinstallation
Replacement
width guide is within the specified
Removal
range. Removal
1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection 17.1.2).
17.1.2).
17.1.34 Back Print Punch Hole 2. Remove the two screws and raise the
Sensor (D544P) 2. Remove the two screws and raise the guide plate.
Replacement guide plate.
Removal

17.1.2).

sensor cover, sensor and spacer.
Sensor Cover
GD976
GD976 3. Disconnect the two back printer
connectors.
cover, sensor LED and spacer. Back Printer Connectors (2)
Screws (2)
GD989

the sensor.
Sensor Connector Sensor (D544P)

Cover GD1003
Screw
GD991 4. Loosen the thumbscrew.
17
4. Disconnect the connector from the 5. Remove the two screws, washers and
sensor LED. guides, and then the back printer 17.1.34
bracket. 17.1.35
Sensor LED (D544L) Sensor Thumbscrew Back Printer Bracket 17.1.36
Spacer
GD990
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
Connector
GD992 Washers (2)
Installation
Guides (2)
removal.
Installation

removal.
17-19
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.37 Back Printer Head 4. Remove the screw and then the circuit 4. Remove the screw and then the circuit
Setting Sensor (D545) board bracket. board bracket.
Replacement Circuit Board Bracket Circuit Board Bracket
Removal


the two screws and then the sensor.
Connector
Screw Screw
GD1007 GD1007
5. Disconnect the four connectors from 5. Remove the screw and then the front
the circuit board. head.
6. Remove the four screws and then the Front Head

Screws (2) circuit board.
Sensor (D545)
GD1005
Installation

removal.
17.1.38 Back Printer Head

Screw
(JNE20) Circuit Board
Screws (4) Connectors (4) GD1009
Replacement
GD1008
Removal head bracket.
Installation
1. Remove the back printer bracket (see Head Bracket
subsection 17.1.36). Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
2. Remove the ink ribbon cassette.
17
3. Remove the two screws and then the 17.1.39 Back Printer Head
17.1.37 circuit board cover.
Replacement
17.1.38 Screws (2)
17.1.39 Removal

Screws (2)
2. Remove the ink ribbon cassette. GD1010
3. Remove the two screws and then the 7. Remove the screw and then the rear
circuit board cover. head.
Screws (2)
Rear Head Screw
Circuit Board Cover
GD1006
Circuit Board Cover

GD1006 GD1011
17-20
17.1 Unit 2
8. Disconnect the two flat cables from 4. Open the two harness clamps. 9. Withdraw the shaft and remove the
the JNE20 circuit board. gear and four bearings.
inner cover. 10. Release the locking tab and remove
the gear.
Harness Clamps (2)
Bearings (4)
Gear Gear
Inner Cover
JNE20 Circuit Board
Flat Cables (2)
GD1012

GD1014
Installation is essentially in the reverse Shaft
order of removal. After installation, adjust GD1017
the back printer head clearance (see 6. Remove the E-ring and then the gear.
subsection 17.1.46). 11. Remove the E-ring, one-way gear, ink
ribbon drive shaft, two bearings and
two spacers in this order.
17.1.40 Back Printer Drive
Gear Replacement Ink Ribbon Drive Shaft
Bearings (2)
Removal
Spacer
Spacer
Gear
E-ring
2. Remove the ink ribbon cassette.
GD1015
cover. 7. Remove the spring.
Cover 8. Remove the two E-rings, bearings and

Screws (4)
then the gear shaft.
Gear Shaft Spring

E-ring One-way Gear 17
EZ817 17.1.40
Installation

removal.
GD1013
Bearings (2) E-rings (2)

GD1016
17-21
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.41 Back Printer Drive 17.1.42 Back Printing Section 17.1.43 Back Printer Head
Gear (Unit Side) Guide Plate Platen Replacement
Replacement Replacement
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection 1. Remove the back printer bracket (see 17.1.2).
17.1.14). subsection 17.1.36).
2. Remove the four screws and the gear 2. Remove the four screws and then the platen bracket.
bracket. sensor bracket.
Platen Bracket Screws (2)
Screws (4)
Sensor Bracket
Screws (4) GD1077

Gear Bracket
GD1018 3. Remove the two E-rings, springs and
GD1543 platens.
3. Remove the three E-rings and gears.
3. Remove the five screws and then the E-rings (2)
printer head-side guide plate.
E-rings (3)
Screws (5) Printer Head-side Guide Plate
Springs (2)
Gears (3)
GD1019 Platens (2)
17 Installation
GD1075
GD1078
17.1.41 4. Remove the five screws and then the

platen-side guide plate. Installation
removal.
17.1.43 Screws (5) Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Platen-side Guide Plate

GD1076
Installation

removal.
17-22
17.1 Unit 2
17.1.44 Cutter 1 Punch Hole 17.1.45 Cutter 1 Punch Hole 17.1.46 Back Printer Head
Sensor (D550P) Sensor LED (D550L) Clearance Adjustment
Removal Removal 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection

17.1.2).
17.1.2). 17.1.2). 2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes.
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the screw and then the 3. Install the platen fixing plate jig to the
sensor cover, sensor and spacer. sensor LED cover, sensor LED and plastic bracket with the screw.
spacer.
Screws (2) Screw
Sensor LED Cover

Sensor Cover
Platen Fixing Plate Jig
GD993 Screw
GD1724
GD995
the sensor. 4. Measure the rear head clearance with
sensor LED. a feeler gauge.
Sensor (D550P)
Sensor Sensor LED (D550L)
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.60mm
Rear Head
Connector
Sensor Connector
GD994 Spacer 17
GD996 Feeler Gauge
GD1725
removal. Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
17-23
17.1 Unit 2
If necessary, adjust the clearance by 6. Remove the platen fixing plate jig.
7. Install the ink ribbon cassettes and
1) Loosen the three screws. then Unit 2.
2) Adjust the clearance to within the

specified range by turning the
cam.
Screws (3)
Cam
GD1726
3) Tighten the three screws.
5. Measure the front head clearance with

a feeler gauge.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.60mm
Front Head
Feeler Gauge
17 GD1727
17.1.46
If necessary, adjust the clearance by
1) Loosen the two screws.
2) Adjust the clearance to within the

specified range by turning the
cam.
Screws (2)
Cam
GD1728
3) Tighten the two screws.
17-24
17.2 Unit 3
17.2.1 Unit 3 Removal/ 6. Remove Unit 3. 17.2.3 Cutter 1 Unit

Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove Unit 3 (see subsection

and set the built-in circuit breaker and 17.2.1).
2. Disconnect the M550 and D552
2. Open the printer left and right doors. connectors and open the two harness
clamps.
center pillar. Connectors (2)
Screws (2)
Unit 3
GD1175
Reinstallation
Reinstall the unit in the reverse order of

removal. Harness Clamps (2)
GD865
17.2.2 Cutter 1 Home Position 3. Remove the two screws and then the
Sensor (D552) upper guide plate.
Center Pillar
Replacement Upper Guide Plate
GD1453 Screws (2)
4. Disconnect the U40, U43 and M551 Removal

connectors.
17.2.1).

Connector Sensor (D552)
GD866

17
cutter.
17.2.1
GD1172 17.2.3
5. Loosen the rear-side screw and then

remove the front-side screw securing
Unit 3.
Screw
Screw (Loosen)
GD860
Installation
Screws (2)
removal.
Screw (Remove)
Toothed Washer
GD1173
17-25
17.2 Unit 3
5. Remove the cutter unit. 17.2.4 Loop 4 Guide Plate 17.2.5 Loop 4 Guide Plate
Home Position Sensor Motor (M551)
! CAUTION
Take care not to touch the blade

(D554) Replacement Replacement
surfaces. This can cause corrosion.
Removal Removal

17.2.1). 17.2.1).
2. Remove the screw and then the 2. Open the harness clamp and remove
sensor bracket. the connector from the bracket.
Screw 3. Remove the three screws and then

the motor bracket.
Cutter Unit Connector Harness Clamp
GD868
Installation

perform All Process and check that the
trailing end of the last print is cut at right
angles. If necessary, perform the following Sensor Bracket
adjustment. GD861 Motor Bracket
Screws (3)
1. Loosen the three cutter positioning 3. Disconnect the sensor connector and
screws. remove the screw and then the GD863
sensor.
Sensor Connector bracket from the motor.
Screw
Motor (M551)
Motor Bracket
17
Sensor (D554)
17.2.4 GD862
17.2.5 Screws (3)
Screws (2)
GD869 Installation
GD864
2. Rotate the cam shaft and adjust the Installation is essentially in the reverse
Installation
angle of the cutter unit. order of removal. After installation,
Cam Shaft adjustment (see subsection 17.2.7).
removal.
GD870
3. Tighten the three cutter positioning

screws.
4. Perform All Process and check the cut

angle.
17-26
17.2 Unit 3
17.2.6 Loop 4 Guide Roller 5. Remove the two screws and then the 3. Click [Next Page] three times.
Replacement guide plate.
4. Click [Drive].
Guide Plate
Removal
1. Remove the loop 4 guide plate motor

2. Remove the E-ring and then the drive

gear.
Drive Gear
Screws (2)
GD874
6. Remove the seven rollers from the

shaft. 5. While turning ON the loop 4 guide
Spacers (2) height between the loop 4 guide plate
(black) and the unit 4 reinforcement
bracket.
Specified Height: 77±1 mm
E-ring Shaft Unit 4 Reinforcement

GD871
Bracket
3. Remove the E-ring, poly-slider and

Rollers (7)
bearing.
GD875
Bearing
Installation 77±1 mm

adjustment (see subsection 17.2.7). Loop 4 Guide Plate (Black)
GD1390
17.2.7 Loop 4 Guide Plate 6. If the height is outside the specified

Height Adjustment range, perform the following
E-ring Poly-slider adjustment. 17
GD872 1. Turn ON the printer door interlock
switches 1 and 2. 1) Enter the fine adjustment value for 17.2.6
4. Remove the E-ring, move the bearing the loop 4 guide plate.
17.2.7
and spacer, and remove the stainless 2. Open the menu “45M Printer
guide plate. Mechanical Fine Adjustment”. 2) Click [Drive].
Stainless Guide Plate • The loop 4 guide plate moves

to the finely adjusted position.
3) Check if the height is within the

specified range.
E-ring Spacer
Bearing
GD873
17-27
17.3 Reservoir Section
17.3.1 Loop 4 Sensor (D551P) 17.3.3 Reservoir Paper Width 5. Remove the reservoir paper width
Replacement Guide Unit Removal/ guide unit.
Reinstallation Reservoir Paper Width Guide Unit
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the printer front right cover
(see subsection 17.6.1). 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection
17.4.1).
cover, sensor and spacer. 2. Lift the paper width guide locking pin
and turn it 90 degrees.
the sensor. Locking Pins (2)
Cover
Sensor (D551P) Screw GD1182
Spacer
Reinstallation

order of removal.
NOTE: Align the locking pin with the hole

on the paper width guide and turn
it 90 degrees.
GD1181 Locking Pins (2)

GD1195
3. Disconnect the UR1 and M552
Installation connectors.

removal.
17.3.2 Loop 4 Sensor LED

(D551L) Replacement
GD1185
Removal
1. Remove the printer-side lower cover Connectors (2)

17.3.4 Reservoir Paper Width
(see subsection 18.1.1). Guide Removal/
17 GD1179
Reinstallation
17.3.1 cover, sensor LED and spacer. 4. Remove the two screws securing the
unit. Removal
17.3.2
17.3.3 Sensor LED (D551L)
Screw 1. Remove:
Cover Spacer
17.3.4
• Unit 3 (see subsection 17.2.1).
• reservoir paper width guide unit

two paper width guide plates.
Screws (6)
Screws (2)
GD1180
GD1608
Installation

removal.
Paper Width Guide Plates

GD1184
17-28
3. Open the six harness clamps and 17.3.5 Reservoir Paper Width 17.3.7 Paper Width Guide
disconnect the harnesses. Guide Home Position Belt/Drive Gear
Sensor (D555) Replacement
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the reservoir paper width
1. Remove the reservoir paper width guide unit (see subsection 17.3.3).
guide unit (see subsection 17.3.3).
2. Open the two harness clamps. belt to the sliders.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector and Sliders (2)

Harnesses (3) remove the screw and then the sensor. Screws (2)
Harness Clamps (6)
GD1611
Sensor (D555)
Herness
4. Remove the four screws and then the Clamps (2)
paper width guides.
Paper Width Guides
Belt
GD878

Screw belt tensioner and remove the belt
Sensor Connector
from the pulley.
GD876
Screws (4) Installation
GD1183 Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of 17.3.6 Reservoir Paper Width
removal.
Guide Motor (M552)
Replacement
Pulley Belt
Screws (2)
Removal
GD879 17
1. Remove the reservoir paper width
guide unit (see subsection 17.3.3). 4. Remove the E-ring, bearing, drive 17.3.5
gear shaft and belt. 17.3.6
2. Disconnect the motor connector from 17.3.7
the bracket. Belt

motor and spacer.
Bracket
Shaft
Screws (2) Bearing E-ring

GD880
Motor Connector Motor (M552)

GD877
Installation

removal.
17-29
5. Remove the gear, spacer and bearing 17.3.8 Paper Width Guide 17.3.9 Paper Width Guide
from the shaft. Shaft Replacement Centering
E-ring
Shaft Removal 1. Remove Unit 2 (see subsection
17.1.2).
Bearing 1. Remove the paper width guide belt
Spacer Gear
(see subsection 17.3.7). 2. Place the paper width guides in the
widest position.
two paper width guide brackets. 3. Tighten the screw while pressing the
jig against the pin.
Screws (4)
Jig: Reservoir Paper Width Guide
Bearing E-ring 890D995592)
GD881
Pin Jig
Installation

order of removal.
Paper Width Guide Brackets (2)
NOTE: • Tighten the screws while GD882
against the edge of the slider as 3. Remove the four screws and then the
shown. two paper width guide shafts.
Screw
Belt-holding Brackets (2) Paper Width Guide Shafts (2)
GD1677
Screws (4) 4. Loosen the two screws securing the


paper width guide against the jig and
slider, tighten the two screws.
Jig Rear Paper Width Guide

Screws (2) Sliders (2)
GD885 GD883
17 • After installation, perform the Installation

“Paper Width Guide Centering”
17.3.8 (see subsection 17.3.9) and Installation is essentially in the reverse
17.3.9 “Paper Width Guide Adjustment” order of removal.
NOTE: Make sure the mounting
correct. Screws (2) (Loosen)
Shafts (2) Screws (2)

(Tighten)
GD1678

the jig.
Sliders (2)
7. Remove the jig.
Screws (4)
Paper Width Guide Brackets (2) 8. Install the removed parts.
GD884
17-30
17.3.10 Paper Width Guide 9. Make sure the “Go-side” of the jig is
Adjustment inserted and the “Not Go-side” is not
inserted between the paper width
guides.
17.1.2).
10. Determine the fine adjustment value
so that the paper width guide is within
switches 1 and 2.
Specified range: 156 ~ 158 mm
<Example>
When the inside width is 1 mm wider:
When the inside width is 0.5 mm narrower:
Not Go-side

of the reservoir paper width guide. Go-side
Jig
6. Enter “152.0” for the aim width value GD1679
of the reservoir paper width guide.

7. Press [Home pos.] to move the value for the reservoir paper width
reservoir paper width guide to the guide.
home position.
8. Press [Drive] to set the reservoir width guide is within the specified
paper width guide to the 152.0 mm range.
position.
17
17.3.10
17-31
17.4 Unit 4
17.4.1 Unit 4 Removal/ 5. Remove Unit 4. Installation

Reinstallation
removal.
Removal
1. Open the printer left and right doors.

17.4.3 Unit 4 Paper Sensor
2. Remove the two screws and then the (D561P) Replacement
center pillar.
Removal
Screws (2)
Unit 4
17.4.1).
GD1178
Reinstallation the screw and then the sensor.
Reinstall Unit 4 in the reverse order of Screw

removal.
Connector
17.4.2 Unit 4 Paper Sensor
LED (D561L)
Center Pillar Replacement
GD1453
Removal
3. Disconnect the U50, U51, U52 and Sensor (D561P)
U53 connectors. 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection
17.4.1). GD892
2. Remove the two screws and then the Installation

sensor cover.
Sensor Cover order of removal.
NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing

the sensor bracket toward the rear
side.
Connectors (4) 17.4.4 Paper Sensor Section

17 GD1176 Guide Plate Removal/
4. Remove the two screws securing Screws (2)
17.4.2
Unit 4.
17.4.3 GD888 Removal
17.4.4
3. Open the harness clamp and 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection
disconnect the connector. 17.4.1).
4. Remove the screw and then the 2. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor LED. sensor bracket.
Harness Clamp Sensor Bracket

Connector Screw
Screws (2)
Toothed Washer
GD1177
Screws (2)
Sensor LED (D561L)
GD893
GD889
17-32
17.4 Unit 4
3. Loosen the two thumbscrews and Reinstallation 3. Remove the two screws and then the
remove the turn guide plate. motor.
Thumbscrews (2) Turn Guide Plate removal. Motor (M561)
17.4.6 Unit 4 Feed Belt Screws (2)

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the belt cover (see

subsection 17.4.5).
GD894
2. Remove the screw securing the belt
Toothed Washer
4. Remove the four screws and then the tensioner and remove the belt.
guide plate. GD905
Belt
Screws (4) Guide Plate Screw Installation

removal.
17.4.8 Outlet-side Guide

Plate/Roller
Replacement
GD895 Belt Tensioner
Removal
GD903
Reinstallation 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection
Installation 17.4.1).
order of removal. Install the parts in the reverse order of 2. Loosen the two thumbscrews and
removal. remove the outlet-side upper guide
NOTE: When installing the sensor plate.
bracket, first tighten the screw at
the rear side, and then tighten the Thumbscrews (2)
screw at the front side. 17.4.7 Unit 4 Feed Motor
(M561) Replacement Outlet-side Upper Guide Plate
Removal
17.4.5 Belt Cover Removal/ 17
Reinstallation 1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection
17.4.6). 17.4.5
Removal 17.4.6
2. Open the two clamps and disconnect 17.4.7
1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection the connector. 17.4.8
17.4.1).
Harness Clamps (2)
GD906
2. Remove the screw and then the knob.
the belt cover. lower guide plate.
Screws (3) Screws (4) Lower Guide Plate

Knob
Connector
GD904
Screw Belt Cover

GD907
GD902
17-33
17.4 Unit 4
4. Remove the E-ring, shaft and then the Installation 3. Remove the three screws securing
rollers. the inlet guide.
order of removal. Screws (3) Inlet Guide
E-ring NOTE: Tighten the two hex. socket head

collar to remove the bearing play
as shown.
GD929
Shaft Roller
GD908 4. Place the paper width guides in the
narrowest position.
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of the paper width guide 4 motor
removal. bracket.
Shaft
Collar
6. Remove the two screws, roller shaft
GD927
and then the inlet roller/inlet-side
17.4.9 Unit 4 Feed Roller guide.
Replacement
17.4.10 Unit 4 Press Roller/ Motor Bracket
Removal Inlet Roller/Inlet-side
Guide Replacement
1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection
17.4.6).
Removal
feed roller cover. 1. Remove:
Feed Roller Cover • Unit 4 feed roller (see subsection

17.4.9).
Screws (2)
• paper sensor section guide plate Screws (3)
Roller Shaft
2. Loosen the two thumbscrews and Screws (2)
remove the turn guide. GD930
17 Turn Guide 7. Remove the two springs, bearings
17.4.9 Thumbscrews (2)
and then the press roller shaft.
17.4.10
GD918 Press Roller Shaft
3. Loosen the two hex. socket head

setscrews and remove the collar and
bearing.
Bearing
GD928
Bearings (2)
Springs (2)
GD931
Collar
GD926
4. Remove the feed roller.
17-34
17.4 Unit 4
8. Remove the two E-rings, four Installation 17.4.13 Paper Width Guide
bearings, two rollers and spacer from Belt/Drive Gear
the shaft. Installation is essentially in the reverse
Replacement
(see subsection 17.4.17). Removal
Shaft
17.4.1).
Motor (M560) 2. Remove the two screws securing the
Spacer Replacement belt to the guides.
Rollers (2)
Bearings (4) Removal
E-rings (2)
GD932
17.4.1).
Installation
removal.
Belt Screws (2)
GD915
Home Position Sensor 3. Loosen the two screws securing the
(D560) Replacement belt tensioner.
Removal 4. Remove the belt from the pulley.
Screws (2)
17.4.1). Connector Harness Clamps (2)
Belt
GD900
3. Remove the screw and then the motor.
sensor.
Screws (2)
Sensor (D560)
Pulley
GD916
17
17.4.11
6. Remove the belt drive shaft and then 17.4.12
the belt. 17.4.13
E-ring
Motor (M560)
Bearing
GD901
Harness Clamp Screw
GD886 Installation
4. Disconnect the sensor connector from Install the parts in the reverse order of
the sensor. removal.
Sensor (D560)
Sensor Connector
Belt
GD917
GD887
17-35
17.4 Unit 4
7. Remove the pulley, gear and bearing 17.4.14 Paper Width Guide 17.4.15 Paper Width Guide
from the belt drive shaft. Replacement Shaft Replacement
Drive Shaft
Removal Removal
Bearings (2)
Gear 1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection 1. Remove:
17.4.1).
Pulley • paper width guide belt (see
2. Remove the two screws and then the subsection 17.4.13).
feed roller cover. • paper width guide (see subsection
17.4.14).
Feed Roller Cover
Screws (2) 2. Remove the three screws and then
the paper width guide motor bracket.
E-rings (2)
Paper Width Guide Motor Bracket
GD705
Installation

order of removal.
GD918
pulley.
two paper width guides and brace
plates.
against the edge of the slider as Screws (3)
Screws (4)
shown.
GD920
Sliders (2)

guide shaft, slider, spacer and
detecting plate.

GD919
Belt-holding Brackets (2) Installation

17 GD923
17.4.14 removal.
17.4.15 Width Guide Centering” (see
subsection 17.4.16) and “Paper Screws (4)
subsection 17.4.17). GD921
17-36
17.4 Unit 4
Installation 5. Remove the screw and then the knob. 9. Loosen the two screws securing the
Installation is essentially in the reverse 6. Remove the three screws and then
order of removal. the belt cover. 10. While pressing the rear paper width
NOTE: Make sure the mounting Knob Screw paper width guide against the jig and
orientation of the sliders is correct. slider, tighten the two screws.
Screws (4) Rear Paper Width Guide

Shafts (2)
Detecting
Plate
Sliders (2)
Screws (3) Belt Cover
GD1681

widest position. Screws (2) (Loosen)
GD922
8. Align the three pins of the jig with the

holes on the frame, and then secure
17.4.16 Paper Width Guide the jig with the two screws. GD1686
Centering
Jig: Unit 4 Paper Width Guide 11. Make sure there is no clearance
Centering Jig (Part No. between the paper width guide and
1. Remove Unit 4 (see subsection the jig.
890C995630)
17.4.1).
Jig 12. Remove the jig.
feed roller section guide plate. 13. Install the removed parts.

inlet upper guide plate.
Feed Roller Section Guide Plate Adjustment
Screws (2)
17.4.1).

feed roller section guide plate. 17
3. Remove the two screws and the inlet 17.4.16
upper guide plate. 17.4.17
Pins (3) Screws (2)
Inlet Upper Guide Plate Screws (2)
GD1685 Feed Roller Section Guide Plate
GD1683 Screws (2)
4. Loosen the two thumbscrews and

then the turn guide plate.
Thumbscrews (2) Turn Guide Plate
Inlet Upper Guide Plate Screws (2)

GD1683
GD1684
17-37
17.4 Unit 4
4. Connect the Unit 4 extension harness 12. Press [Drive] to set paper width guide 3. Remove the screw and then the
to the Unit 4 harness on the frame 4 to the 152.0 mm position. cover, sensor LED and spacer.
side.
13. Set the paper width measurement jig Screw
Unit 4 Extension Harness: to the inside of the flange, and then
Part No. 858C978082 determine the fine adjustment value
so that the paper width guide is within
Specified range: Jig (152.0mm)

±0.15mm
<Example>
Fine adjustment value = –1.0 mm Cover
When the inside width is 151.5 mm: GD890
Unit 4 Extension Harnesses Flanges (2) sensor LED.
GD1659
Screw
Cover
5. Connect the extension harness to Sensor LED (D562L)
Unit 4.
Unit 4
Jig
GD1687
Spacer
14. Enter the determined fine adjustment Sensor Connector
value for paper width guide 4. GD891
15. Repeat steps 11 to 14 until the paper Installation

Unit 4 Extension Harness width guide is within the specified
GD1688 range. Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
17.4.18 Cutter 2 Punch Hole
17 Sensor LED (D562L) 17.4.19 Cutter 2 Punch Hole
8. Open the menu “45M Printer Replacement Sensor (D562P)
17.4.18 Mechanical Fine Adjustment”. Replacement
17.4.19 Removal
Removal
17.4.1). 1. Remove the paper sensor section
guide plate (see subsection 17.4.4).
sensor cover. 2. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor bracket.
Sensor Cover
Sensor Bracket

of paper width guide 4.

Screws (2)
11. Press [Home pos.] to move paper
GD888
Screws (2)
GD896
17-38
17.4 Unit 4
3. Remove the two screws and then the 17.4.20 Cutter 2 Home Position 3. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor cover. Sensor (D563) upper guide plate.
Sensor Cover Replacement Upper Guide Plate

Screws (2)
Removal

17.4.1).
2. Place Unit 4 upside down.

sensor.
GD910
Screws (2) Sensor Connector
Sensor (D563)
GD897 4. Remove the two screws securing the
cutter.
cover, sensor and spacer. Screws (2)

the sensor.
Screws (2)
Cover
Sensor (D562P)
Screw
GD899
GD911
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of 5. Remove the cutter unit.
removal.
! CAUTION
Take care not to touch the blade surfaces.

This can cause corrosion.
17.4.21 Cutter 2 Unit
Spacer
Replacement
GD898
Removal
Installation
1. Remove: 17
removal. 17.4.20
• outlet-side guide plate (see
subsection 17.4.8). 17.4.21
NOTE: When installing the sensor • paper sensor section guide plate
bracket, first tighten the screw at (see subsection 17.4.4).
the rear side, and then tighten the Cutter Unit
screw at the front side. 2. Disconnect the M562 and D563 GD912
connectors and open the two harness
clamps.
Harness Clamps (3) M562 Connector
D563 Connector
GD909
17-39
17.4 Unit 4
Installation

order of removal. After installation, perform
printing until the reservoir becomes full
and the paper is fed into the processor.
After the processing is completed, check
that the trailing end of the last print is cut
at right angles. If necessary, perform the
following adjustment.
1. Loosen the four cutter positioning

screws and hex. socket head bolt (3
mm).
Screws (4)
Hex. Socket
Head Bolt (3mm)
GD913
2. Rotate the cam shaft to adjust the

angle of the cutter unit.
Cam Shaft
17
17.4.21
GD914
3. Tighten the four cutter positioning

screws and the hex. socket head bolt.
4. Perform All Process and check the cut

angle.
17-40
17.5 Unit 5
17.5.1 Unit 5 Removal/ 5. Remove the three screws securing 2. Loosen the screw securing the drive
Reinstallation Unit 5. gear bracket.
Screws (3) 3. Place the jig on the gear shafts and

Removal tighten the screw to secure the
bracket.
1. Remove:
Gear-locating Jig
• printer rear cover (see subsection
18.3.1).
• Unit 4 (see subsection 17.4.1)
2. Disconnect the U60 and U61

connectors.
Unit 5
GD1189
6. Remove Unit 5.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the

Screw
outlet-side guide.
GD1090
4. Remove the gear-locating jig and

Connectors (2) install it on Unit 5 using the screw.
GD1186
3. Remove the three screws and then 17.5.2 Paper Width Guide 5
the Unit 5 drive gear cover. Home Position Sensor
Screws (3)
(D567) Replacement
Unit 5 Drive Gear Cover
Outlet-side Guide Removal

Unit 5 17.5.1).
GD1190
Reinstallation remove the screw and the sensor.
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse Sensor (D567)

order of removal. Perform the following
adjustment. 17
GD1081 17.5.1
<Gear Adjustment>
17.5.2
4. Loosen the screw securing the gear
1. Remove the screw and then the gear-
bracket, move the bracket to the left
locating jig from Unit 5.
and tighten the screw.
Gear-locating Jig
Unit 5 Drive Gear Bracket
Screw Sensor Connector

GD937
Installation

Screw perform the paper width guide adjustment
GD1438
GD1188
17-41
17.5 Unit 5
17.5.3 Paper Width Guide 5 3. Remove the two screws and then the 3. Loosen the two screws securing the
Motor (M564) paper width guide shaft. belt tensioner.
Replacement Paper Width Guide Shaft 4. Remove the belt from the pulley.
Removal

17.5.1).

3. Loosen the two screws and then

remove the motor. Screws (2)
GD946
Connector Pulley Belt
Screws (2)
two paper width guides. GD949
Paper Width Guides (2) 5. Remove the E-ring and bearing.

Screws (4)
the belt.
Screws (2)
Motor (M564)
Harness Clamps (2)
GD947
GD941
removal. removal.
E-ring Bearing
GD950
17.5.4 Paper Width Guide 17.5.5 Paper Width Guide

7. Remove the pulley, gear and bearings
Replacement Belt/Drive Gear from the belt drive shaft.
Replacement
17 Removal Drive Shaft
Removal Bearings (2)
17.5.3 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection Gear
17.5.4 17.5.1). 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection
17.5.5 17.5.1). Pulley
paper width guide cover. 2. Remove the two screws securing the
belt to the guides.
Screws (2) Belt Screws (2)
E-rings (2)
GD705
Paper Width Guide Cover
GD943
GD948
17-42
17.5 Unit 5
Installation 4. Remove the four screws and then the 3. Place the paper width guides in the
guide shaft and spacer. widest position.
order of removal. Screws (4) 4. Align the pin of the jig with the hole on
the frame, and then secure the jig with
NOTE: • Install the gear so that its one- Guide Shafts (2)
the two screws.
pulley. Jig: Unit 5 Paper Width Guide
• Tighten the screws while Centering Jig (Part No.
pressing the belt-holding bracket 890C995631)
shown. Jig
Sliders (2)
GD952 Pin

Screws (2) two aluminum brackets.
Screws (4)
Belt-holding Brackets (2) Shafts (2)
GD954
Screws (2)
GD1691
subsection 17.5.8).
Sliders (2) guide against the jig, and the front
17.5.6 Paper Width Guide Spacer paper width guide against the jig and
Alminum Brackets (2) slider, tighten the two screws.
Shaft Replacement
GD953
Removal
Installation
1. Remove:
Installation is essentially in the reverse Rear Paper
order of removal. Width Guide
• paper width guide belt (see
subsection 17.5.5).
• paper width guide (see subsection NOTE: Make sure the mounting 17
17.5.4).
correct. 17.5.6
2. Open the two harness clamps and 17.5.7
remove the motor connector.
3. Remove the three screws and the Centering
motor bracket.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Harness Clamps (2) 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection
Motor Bracket 17.5.1).
Motor Connector
GD1692
paper width guide cover. 7. Make sure there is no clearance
Paper Width Guide Cover the jig.
Screws (2) 8. Remove the jig.
9. Install the removed parts.
Screws (3)
GD951
GD1690
17-43
17.5 Unit 5
17.5.8 Paper Width Guide 7. Enter “0” for the fine adjustment value 17.5.9 Unit 5 Inlet Guide
Adjustment of paper width guide 5. Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
17.5.1).
9. Press [Home pos.] to move paper
2. Connect the Unit 5 extension harness 17.5.1).
to the Unit 5 harness on the frame
side. 2. Remove the four screws and then the
10. Press [Drive] to set paper width guide
inlet guide.
5 to the 152.0 mm position.
Part No. 858C978083 Screws (4)
then determine the fine adjustment
within the specified range.
Specified range: Jig (152.0mm)

±0.15mm
<Example>
Fine adjustment value = –1.0 mm Inlet Guide
When the inside width is 151.5 mm: GD933
Unit 5 Extension Harnesses Fine adjustment value = 0.5 mm
GD1660 Reinstallation
Flanges (2)
3. Connect the extension harness to Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of
Unit 5. removal.
Unit 5

(D565) Replacement
Jig
Removal
GD1693 1. Remove the inlet guide (see
subsection 17.5.9).
value for the paper width guide 5. 2. Disconnect the sensor connector and
17 Unit 5 Extension Harnesses
sensor.
GD1695 width guide is within the specified
17.5.8
range. Screw
17.5.9 4. Close the printer left and right doors. Sensor (D565)
17.5.10

Sensor Connector
GD934
Installation

17-44
17.5 Unit 5
17.5.11 Loop 5 Sensor (D566P) 17.5.13 Loop 5 Guide Plate 17.5.15 Loop 5 Guide Roller
Replacement Motor (M563) Replacement
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection 1. Remove the inlet guide (see
17.5.1). 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection subsection 17.5.7).
17.5.1).
2. Disconnect the connector and remove 2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and then
the screw and then the sensor. 2. Open the harness clamp and the guide roller shaft.
Sensor (D566P) Bearing
motor.
Motor (M563)
Screw Connector
Shaft
GD935 E-ring
GD969
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of inlet-side guide roller shaft.
removal.
Connectors
GD942
17.5.12 Loop 5 Sensor LED

Installation
(D566L) Replacement
Removal removal.

17.5.1).
17.5.14 Loop 5 Guide Drive
Inlet-side Guide Roller Shaft Screw
2. Disconnect the connector and remove Gear Replacement
Removal GD970
Screw Sensor LED (D566L) 17
Connector 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection 4. Remove the springs from the arms of
17.5.1). the guide plate. 17.5.11
17.5.12
2. Remove the E-ring and then the two Guide Plate Springs (2)
17.5.13
gears. 17.5.14
17.5.15
Gears (2)
GD936
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of Arm

removal. GD971
E-ring
GD968
Installation

removal.
17-45
17.5 Unit 5
5. Remove the two screws and then the 17.5.16 Loop 5 Guide Plate 6. If the height is outside the specified
guide plate. Height Adjustment range, perform the following
adjustment.
Guide Plate 1. Turn ON the printer door interlock
switches 1 and 2.
2) Click [Drive].
to the finely adjusted position.

Screws (2) the specified range.
GD972
6. Remove the E-ring and disassemble
the roller shaft.
17.5.17 Unit 5 Press Roller
Replacement
3. Click [Next Page] three times. Removal
4. Click [Drive]. 1. Remove Unit 5 (see subsection

17.5.1).
2. Remove the screw securing the D568

sensor bracket.

E-rings Roller Shaft outlet-side upper guide plate.
GD973 Guide Plate Securing Screws (2)
Screw
7. Remove the E-ring and disassemble
the inlet-side roller shaft.
5. While turning ON the loop 5 guide

height of the rear and front upper
guides from the upper surface of the
17 loop 5 guide plate, and then calculate
the average.
GD955
17.5.16
Specified height: 4±0.5 mm
17.5.17 4. Remove the two screws and then the
paper width guide cover.
Rear Front
Inlet-side Roller Shaft E-ring
guide plate support shaft.
Installation
Guide Plate Support Shaft
Install the parts in the reverse order of Guide Plate Cover
removal. Screws (2)
4±0.5 mm
4±0.5 mm
Guide Plate Upper Surface

Loop 5 Guide Plate Upper Surface
GD1391
Screws (2)
GD956
17-46
17.5 Unit 5
6. Remove the four springs, E-rings, 17.5.18 Unit 5 Feed Roller 6. Open the nine harness clamps,
bearings, two outlet-side press roller Replacement disconnect the paper width guide
shafts and the guide plate. home position sensor connector and
pull out the harness.
Springs (2) Removal
Shaft
1. Remove:
Bearings (2) • press roller (see subsection

17.5.17).
• printer exit paper sensor (see

outlet-side lower guide plate.
E-rings (2)
Sensor Connector
GD957
GD964
E-rings (2)
Shaft
setscrews and remove the collar and
bearing.
Bearing
Collar
Outlet-side Lower Guide Plate

Bearings (2)
GD960
Springs (2)
GD958
3. Remove the E-ring and then the feed
roller gear.
7. Remove the E-rings and disassemble
the roller shafts. 4. Remove the screw securing the gear
bracket.
Shafts (2) Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
E-ring GD963
Rollers (4)
Gear
8. Remove the drive gear from the
Installation

order of removal.
17
GD959 17.5.18
Installation
collar to remove bearing play as
Gear Bracket shown.
removal. Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
Screw
GD961

feed roller cover.
Collar
GD965
Screws (4)
GD962
17-47
17.5 Unit 5
17.5.19 Feed Drive Gear 17.5.20 Printer Exit Paper Installation

Replacement Sensor (D568)
Removal
Removal
17.5.1). 1. Remove the inlet guide (see
subsection 17.5.7).
2. Remove the screw securing the gear
bracket. 2. Open the four harness clamps and
disconnect the connector at the inlet
side.
Harness Clamps (4)
Gear Bracket
Screw
GD966
3. Remove the three E-rings, gears, two Connector

poly-sliders, spacer and bearing.
GD938
4. Remove the E-ring and the bearing,

3. Open the six harness clamps at the
gear and shaft.
outlet side.
E-rings (3)
Gear 4. Remove the screw and then the
sensor bracket.
E-ring
Harness Clamps (6)
17
17.5.19 Bearing Bearing
17.5.20 Spacer Shaft Gears (3)
Poly-sliders (2)
GD967
Screw
Sensor Bracket
Installation
GD939

removal. 5. Release the locking tabs and remove
the sensor.
Locking Tabs
Sensor (D568)
GD940
17-48
17.6 Printer Door/Front Cover Section
17.6.1 Printer Front Right 17.6.3 Printer Door Interlock Installation

Cover Removal/ Switch 1 (D591)
Reinstallation Replacement order of removal.
Removal Removal Note: Install the switch so that the bent

section faces upward.
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove:
and set the built-in circuit breaker and
the main power supply to OFF. • printer front right cover (see
subsection 17.6.1). 17.6.4 Printer Door Interlock
2. Remove the two screws and then the • printer front left cover (see Switch 2 (D592)
printer front right cover. subsection 17.6.2) Replacement
Printer Front Right Cover 2. Open the printer left and right doors.
Removal
1. Remove the printer front left cover
switch bracket.
Screws (2)
2. Open the printer left and right doors.
3. Remove the screw and the switch

bracket.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
GD1194
Reinstallation
Switch Bracket
GD1196
removal.
4. Disconnect the two switch connectors.
Switch Bracket
17.6.2 Printer Front Left Switch Connectors (2)
GD1199
Cover Removal/
Reinstallation 4. Disconnect the two switch connectors.
Removal Switch Connectors (2)
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,

and set the built-in circuit breaker and
17
17.6.1
17.6.2
printer front left cover.
GD1613 17.6.3
Screws (2) 17.6.4
5. Remove the screw, spring, E-ring, pin
and then the switch.
Spring GD1613
E-rings
Printer Front Left Cover

GD1198
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Screw

removal. GD1197
17-49
17.6 Printer Door/Front Cover Section
5. Remove the screw, spring, E-ring, pin

and then the switch.
Spring
E-ring
Screw
GD1200
Installation

order of removal.
Note: Install the switch so that the bent

section faces upward.
17
17.6.4
17-50
18. PRINTER ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 18-2
18.1 Printer Power Supply Section ..................................................................... 18-3

18.1.1 Printer-side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 18-3
18.1.2 Power Switch (D594) Replacement ............................................................... 18-3
18.1.3 JNA21 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement ............................................................. 18-3
18.2 Printer Control Section ................................................................................. 18-5

18.2.1 Printer Control Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 18-5
18.2.2 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan (F584 and F585) Replacement ............ 18-5
18.2.3 PDC21 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-5
18.2.4 CTL21 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 18-5
18.3 Image Processing Section ........................................................................... 18-6

18.3.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 18-6
18.3.2 Louver Replacement ...................................................................................... 18-6
18.3.3 Sub-scanning Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ................................ 18-6
18.3.4 Printer Air Intake Fan (F587 and F588) Replacement ................................... 18-6
18.3.5 Air Intake Fan (F572 and F573) Replacement .............................................. 18-7
18.3.6 Laser Unit Light Source Section Cooling Fan (F570 and F571) Replacement ..... 18-8
18.3.7 AOM Exhaust Fan (F580, F581 and F582) Replacement ............................. 18-8
18.3.8 LDD20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 18-8
18.3.9 AOM Driver (AOM-R, AOM-G and AOM-B) Replacement ............................. 18-9
18.3.10 AOM Driver Cooling Fan (F577, F578 and F579) Replacement ................... 18-9
18.3.11 FMB20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-9
18.3.12 FMA20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-10
18.3.13 FMC20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-10
18
18.4 Operation Panel .............................................................................................. 18-11
18.4.1 KEY21 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 18-11
18-1
Parts Location
LDD20 Circuit Board

Laser Unit Light Source Section Cooling Fans 1 and 2 (F570/F571)
AOM Drivers
(AOM20 Circuit
Boards)
(AOM-R, AOM-G
AOM Drive Exhaust and AOM-B)
Fans 1, 2 and 3
FMC20 Circuit Board (F580, F581 and F582) AOM Driver
Cooling Fans 1, 2
and 3 (F577, F578
and F579)
Printer Air Intake

Fans 1 and 2 Air Intake Fans 1
(F588 and F589) and 2 (F572 and
F573)

Exhaust Fans 1 and 2 FMB20 Circuit Boards FMA20 Circuit Board JNA21 Circuit
(F584 and F585) Board
DC Power Supply
Unit 1
18
DC Power Supply
Unit 2
PDC21 Circuit Board CTL21 Circuit Board
GD1239
18-2
18.1 Printer Power Supply Section
18.1.1 Printer-side Lower 3. Release the locking tabs and remove 18.1.4 DC Power Supply Unit
Cover Removal/ the power switch. Replacement
Reinstallation 4. Disconnect the 1A and 2A connectors
from the power switch.
Removal
Removal
1A Connectors Locking Tabs (4)
1. Remove the printer-side lower cover
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, (see subsection 18.1.1).
main power supply OFF. 2. Open the five harness clamps.
2. Remove the four truss-head screws

with toothed washers and then the
printer-side lower cover.
Printer-side Lower Cover
2A Connector
GD1216
Harness Clamps (5)
Installation GD1265
Install the parts in the reverse order of 3. Remove all connectors from the
removal. power supply unit.
Truss-head Screws with
DC Power Supply Unit 1
Toothed Washers (4)
GD1214
18.1.3 JNA21 Circuit Board DC Power Supply
Unit 2
Replacement
Reinstallation
Removal
removal. 1. Remove printer-side lower cover (see
subsection 18.1.1).

18.1.2 Power Switch (D594) circuit board.
Replacement Connectors (30)
3. Remove the twelve screws and then
Removal the JNA21 circuit board. GD1266
1. Remove the printer-side lower cover JNA21 Circuit Board 4. Remove the two screws and then the
(see subsection 18.1.1). bracket.
2. Disconnect the PSW2 connector. Screws (2) 18

PSW2 Connector 18.1.1
18.1.2
18.1.3
18.1.4
Screws (12)
GD1264
Bracket
Installation

GD1215
removal.
18-3
18.1 Printer Power Supply Section
5. Remove eight screws and the DC

power supply units.
DC Power Supply Unit Screws (8)
GD1268
Installation

removal.
18
18.1.4
18-4
18.2 Printer Control Section
18.2.1 Printer Control Section 4. Open the two harness clamps. 18.2.4 CTL21 Circuit Board
Cover Removal/ Replacement
5. Remove the four screws, two fan
Reinstallation guards and the fans.
Removal
Removal Harness Clamps (2) Screws (2)
1. Remove the printer control section
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, cover (see subsection 18.2.1).
main power supply OFF. 2. Disconnect all connectors from the
circuit board.
cover. 3. Remove the eleven screws and then
the circuit board.
Screws (2)
Screws (11)
GD1233
Installation

order of removal.
Printer Control Section Cover
GD1241 NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow CTL21 Circuit Board
mark points outside.
GD1235
Reinstallation

Installation
removal. 18.2.3 PDC21 Circuit Board
Replacement Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
18.2.2 Power Supply Section Removal

Exhaust Fan (F584 and 1. Remove the power supply section
F585) Replacement exhaust fan bracket (see subsection
18.2.2).
Removal
1. Remove the printer control section circuit board.
cover (see subsection 18.2.1).
3. Remove the fourteen screws and then
2. Remove the two screws and then the the circuit board.
fan bracket.
Screws (14) 18
3. Remove the F584 and F585
18.2.1
connectors from the fan bracket.
18.2.2
Screws (2) Fan Bracket 18.2.3
18.2.4
PDC21 Circuit Board

GD1234
Connectors (2) Installation

GD1232
removal.
18-5
18.3 Image Processing Section
18.3.1 Printer Rear Cover Installation 4. Disconnect the CN1 and CN2
Removal/Reinstallation connectors from the driver circuit
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse board.
order of removal.
Removal 5. Remove the two screws and then the
NOTE: Install the louvers downward, driver circuit board.
upward and downward in
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Connectors (2)
sequence.
Downward
2. Remove the six screws and then the Upward
printer rear cover. Downward
Screws (6) Printer Rear Cover
Screws (2)
Driver Circuit Board
GD1202
Installation
Screws (6)
GD1129 removal.
GD1127
18.3.3 Sub-scanning Motor 18.3.4 Printer Air Intake Fan
Reinstallation Driver Circuit Board (F587 and F588)
removal. Removal Removal
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see
18.3.2 Louver Replacement subsection 18.3.1). subsection 18.3.1).
2. Open the two harness clamps and 2. Disconnect the F587 and F588
Removal disconnect the F587 and F588 connectors.
connectors.
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see
subsection 18.3.1). 3. Remove the two fan connectors.
fan bracket. 4. Remove the four screws and then the
2. Remove the six screws, nuts, washers
and nine louvers. fan bracket.
Connectors (2) Fan Bracket
18 Louvers (9)
F587 Connector
Fan Connectors (2)
Screws (4)
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
Screws (6) Screws (2) F588

Harness Clamps (2) Connector
GD1128
GD1201
Fan Bracket
GD1201
18-6
5. Open the harness clamp. 18.3.5 Air Intake Fan (F572 Installation
and F573) Replacement
6. Remove the four screws, two fan Installation is essentially in the reverse
guards, fans and six louvers. order of removal.
Removal
NOTE: • Install the fan so that its arrow
Fan Guard mark points inside.
subsection 18.3.1).
• Install the louvers downward,
2. Disconnect the F572 and F573
sequence.
connectors.
Screws (2)
3. Disconnect the two.
Arrow Mark Fan Guard

Clamp fan bracket.
Louvers (3) Fan Fan
Fan F572
Screws (4)
Screws (4) Connectors (2) Connector
GD1206
Installation

order of removal.
Louvers (3)
NOTE: • Install the fan so that the arrow
mark points inside. F573 Connector
• Install the louvers downward,
sequence.
Screws (2) Fan Bracket

GD1204
GD1205
Arrow Mark Fan Guard

Fan 6. Remove the four screws, two fan

guards, fans and six louvers.
Fan Guard
Louvers (3)
18
18.3.5
Clamp
Louvers (3) Fan
Screws (4)
GD1204
GD1206
18-7
18.3.6 Laser Unit Light Installation 18.3.8 LDD20 Circuit Board

Source Section Replacement
Cooling Fan (F570 and order of removal.
F571) Replacement Removal
NOTE: Install the louvers downward,
Removal 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see
subsection 18.3.1).
sequence.
subsection 18.3.1). Louvers (2) 2. Remove the screw securing the
grounding wire.
2. Disconnect the F570 and F571
connectors. 3. Disconnect all connectors from the
circuit board.
fan duct cover. NOTE: When connecting or
disconnecting the LDD4 to
Connectors (2) Fan Duct Cover
LDD11 connectors, wear a
grounding wrist band.
Screws (2)
GD1209
18.3.7 AOM Exhaust Fan

(F580, F581 and F582) To Frame Grounding Wrist Band
Replacement GD1221
Screws (4) Removal 4. Remove the circuit board from the

GD1207 nine circuit board spacers.
4. Open the harness clamp and remove subsection 18.3.1). Circuit Board Spacers (9)
the fan connector from the fan duct.
2. Disconnect the fan connector.
two fans. 3. Remove the six screws, three fan
guards and fans.
Harness Clamp
Screws (6) Fan Connector
Screws (2)
18
Screw
18.3.6
18.3.7
18.3.8 GD1213
Installation

removal.
GD1212
Installation

Fan Connectors (2)
order of removal.
GD1208

18-8
18.3.9 AOM Driver (AOM-R, Installation 18.3.11 FMB20 Circuit Board

AOM-G and AOM-B) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see 18.3.10 AOM Driver Cooling subsection 18.3.1).
subsection 18.3.1). Fan (F577, F578 and
F579) Replacement 2. Remove the four screws and then the
2. Disconnect the R, G and B cables circuit board cover.
form the top and bottom of the driver.
Removal Screws (4) Harness Clamp
3. Disconnect the AOM-R, AOM-G,
1. Remove the AOM bracket (see
AOM-B connectors from the driver.
subsection 18.3.9).
4. Disconnect the F580, F581 and F582
2. Disconnect the F577, F578 and F579
connectors.
connectors.
Cables (6) Fan connectors (3)
3. Remove the six screws, three fan
guards and fans.
Screws (6)
Circuit Board Cover

GD1224
3. Disconnect the flat cable.
4. Release the locking tab and remove

the FMB20 circuit board.
Connectors (3)
Connectors (3) FMB20 Circuit Boards
GD1217 GD1220
5. Loosen the two screws, remove the Installation

other two screws and then remove the
AOM bracket. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
Screws (2) (Remove)
Flat Cable 18
GD1225
18.3.9
18.3.11
Install the circuit board in the reverse
Screws (2) (Loosen)
order of removal.
GD1218
6. Remove the nine screws and then the

AOM drivers.
AOM Drivers (3)

Screws (9)
GD1219
18-9
18.3.12 FMA20 Circuit Board 18.3.13 FMC20 Circuit Board

Removal Removal
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see 1. Remove:

subsection 18.3.1).
• FMA20 circuit board (see
2. Disconnect the interface cable. subsection 18.3.12).
• FMB20 circuit board (see
2. Disconnect the R, G and B cables.
R Cable G Cable B Cable
Interface Cable
GD1223

circuit board.
GD1222
circuit board. 3. Disconnect all connectors from the
FMC20 circuit board.
Screws (4)
4. Remove the seven screws, four
spacers and then the FMC20 circuit
board.
Screws (7) FMC20 Circuit Board
FMA20 Circuit Board

GD1226
18 Installation
18.3.12 Spacers (4)
18.3.13 removal. GD1227
Installation

removal.
18-10
18.4 Operation Panel
18.4.1 KEY21 Circuit Board 7. Remove the five screws and the
Replacement KEY21 circuit board.
KEY21 Circuit Board

Removal
1. Remove the printer upper cover (see

subsection 16.1.1).
2. Open the printer right and left doors.
3. Remove the two screws from the

inside.
Screws (5)
Screws (2)
GD1230
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Before installing the operation

panel cover, turn the power supply
ON and adjust the brightness by
turning the adjuster.
GD1614
Operation Panel Adjuster
4. Remove the two truss-head screws
with toothed washers and then the
operation panel cover.
Operation Panel Section Cover
GD1231
Truss-head Screws (2)

with Toothed Washers (2)
GD1228
18
18.4.1
5. Disconnect the flat cable connector
from the operation panel.

operation panel.
Screws (2) Operation Panel
Flat Cable Connector

GD1229
18-11
19. PROCESSOR
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 19-3
19.1 Processor Body .............................................................................................. 19-6

19.1.1 Processor Front Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 19-6
19.1.2 Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 19-6
19.1.3 Processor Cover Sensor (D700) Replacement .............................................. 19-6
19.1.4 Squeegee Rack Cover Sensor (D701) Replacement .................................... 19-6
19.1.5 Processor Exhaust Fan (F790) Replacement ................................................ 19-7
19.1.6 Ambient Temperature Sensor (HS790) Replacement .................................... 19-7
19.2 Crossover Rack .............................................................................................. 19-8

19.2.1 No.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................... 19-8
19.2.2 No.3, No.5 to No.8 Crossover Racks Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 19-8
19.3 Processing Racks .......................................................................................... 19-10

19.3.1 Lower Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................... 19-10
19.3.2 Upper Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................... 19-11
19.3.3 Middle Feed Roller Replacement................................................................... 19-12
19.3.4 Upper Guide Plate Replacement ................................................................... 19-12
19.3.5 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement ...................................................................... 19-13
19.3.6 Rack Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement ....................................................... 19-14
19.3.8 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Gear Replacement ....................................... 19-16
19.3.9 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Replacement ................................................ 19-16
19.3.10 Paper Width Guide Timing Adjustment .......................................................... 19-17
19.4 Squeegee Rack .............................................................................................. 19-18

19.4.1 Guide Plate Replacement .............................................................................. 19-18
19.4.2 Squeegee Roller/Gear Replacement ............................................................. 19-18
19.5 Rack Drive System ........................................................................................ 19-20 19

19.5.1 Processor Drive Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................ 19-20
19.5.2 Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ............................ 19-20
19.5.3 Processor Drive Motor (M710) Replacement ................................................ 19-20
19.5.4 Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 19-21
19.5.5 Processor Drive Shaft/Dryer Section Drive Shaft Replacement .................... 19-21
19.5.6 Processing Rack Drive Chain Tension Adjustment ........................................ 19-22
19.5.7 Processing Rack Drive Chain Replacement .................................................. 19-22
19.5.8 Dryer Rack Drive Sprocket/Chain Guide Replacement ................................. 19-23
19.5.9 Squeegee Rack Drive Gear Replacement ..................................................... 19-23
19.5.10 Dryer Section Drive Chain Replacement ....................................................... 19-24
19.5.11 Processor Drive Chain Guide Replacement .................................................. 19-25
19.5.12 Unit 5 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement ...................................................... 19-25
19-1
19.6 Paper Width Guide ......................................................................................... 19-27

19.6.1 Processor Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D710) Replacement ... 19-27
19.6.2 Paper Width Guide Position Encoder Sensor (D711) Replacement .............. 19-27
19.6.3 Paper Width Guide Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 19-27
19.6.4 Paper Width Guide Drive Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ............................. 19-28
19.6.5 Processor Width Guide Motor (M711) Replacement ..................................... 19-29
19.6.6 Processor Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement ............................... 19-30
19.6.7 Dryer Rack Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement ............................. 19-30
19.6.8 Rack Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement ....................................... 19-31
19.6.9 Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shaft Replacement ....................................... 19-31
19
19-2
Parts Location
Rack Drive System
Dryer Section Drive Chain

Rack Drive Sprockets
Squeegee Rack
Processor Drive
Bracket
Processor Drive
Motor (M710)
Printer Drive Gear
Processing Rack
Drive Chain
Rack Drive Shafts
P2
P1-1 P1-2 P2-1 P2-2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
Processing Racks
GD1495
19
19-3
Parts Location
Paper Width Guide System
Processor Paper Width Guide Motor (M711)
Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shaft
Dryer Paper Width

Guide Drive Joint
Paper Width Guide

Drive Shafts
Paper Width Guide

Drive Unit
PS4 PS3 PS2 PS1 P2-2 P2-1 P1-2 P1-1
Processing Racks
19 GD1496
19-4
Parts Location
Roller and Guide Arrangement
Silicone foam ø14

Gray hard ø21
Beige soft ø21
Beige soft ø21
Gray soft ø21
Black hard ø21
Gray hard ø42
White soft ø42
Black hard ø30

Beige soft ø30
Brown hard ø30
Beige soft ø48
P1-1 P1-2 P2-1 P2-2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 GD654
19
P1-1 P1-2 P2-1 P2-2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4

GD1498
19-5
19.1 Processor Body
19.1.1 Processor Front Upper Reinstallation 19.1.4 Squeegee Rack Cover

Cover Removal/ Sensor (D701)
Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Perform the post-operational checks 19.1.3 Processor Cover 1. Remove:

to shut down the system, turn the Sensor (D700)
power switch to STANDBY, and the Replacement • processor front upper cover (see
built-in circuit breaker and the main subsection 19.1.1).
power supply OFF. • processor front cover (see
Removal
subsection 19.1.2).
2. Remove the slant sorter (see
1. Remove:
subsection 23.3.2). 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
• processor front upper cover (see
3. Remove the two screw and the
subsection 19.1.1).
processor front upper cover. 3. Remove the two screws and then the
• processor front cover (see
sensor bracket.
subsection 19.1.2).
Screws (2)
2. Disconnect the connector from the Sensor Bracket

sensor.

sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket Screws (2)
Screws (2)
Processor Front Upper Cover
GD340
GD1395
4. Unhook the spring from the bracket.

Reinstallation
5. Remove the E-ring and then the
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of bracket.
removal. GD338
Bracket E-ring
4. Unhook the spring from the bracket.
19.1.2 Processor Front Cover
Removal/Reinstallation sensor from the bracket.
Removal Bracket E-ring
1. Remove the processor front upper

19 cover (see subsection 19.1.1).
2. Remove the two screw and then the

19.1.1
processor front cover.
19.1.2 Sensor
19.1.3 Spring
19.1.4 GD339
Installation
Screws (2) Sensor
Install the sensor in the reverse order of
Spring
removal.
GD339
Installation

removal.
Processor Front cover

GD1396
19-6
19.1 Processor Body
19.1.5 Processor Exhaust Fan Installation

(F790) Replacement
order of removal.
Removal
1. Remove:
points outside.
• processor front upper cover (see
subsection 19.1.1).
• processor front cover (see 19.1.6 Ambient Temperature
subsection 19.1.2). Sensor (HS790)
Replacement
2. Remove the six screws, the fan duct
and then the guard.
Removal
Screws (6) Guard
Duct
1. Remove the processor front upper

sensor.

sensor.
Ambient Temperature
Sensor (HS790) Connector
Screws (2)
GD334
GD337
Installation

removal.
Fan Connector
GD335
4. Remove the two screws, the exhaust

19
fan and then the fan guard.
19.1.5
Screws (2) 19.1.6
Fan Guard
Processor
Exhaust Fan
(F790)
Arrow
GD336
19-7
19.2 Crossover Rack
19.2.1 No.1 Crossover Rack Reassembly 3. Remove the screw, D-washer, poly-
Disassembly/ slider, coil spring and bearing.
Reassemble the crossover rack in the
Reassembly reverse order of disassembly.
Disassembly Bearing
1. Remove the No.1 crossover rack. 19.2.2 No.3, No.5 to No.8 D-washer
Crossover Racks
2. Remove the E-ring, guide shaft, four Disassembly/
rollers and guide bracket from the Reassembly
No.1 crossover rack.
3. Remove the E-ring, guide shaft, four Disassembly

Poly-Slider
spacers and three rollers from the Screw Coil Spring
guide bracket. IMPORTANT:
Be careful not to damage the roller. GD347
1. No.3: 4. Remove the coil spring, shaft and

Remove the four screws and then the roller.
solution spillage protection roller
assembly. Roller
E-ring
Solution Spillage Protection
Roller Assembly
Screws (2)
(No.3 Crossover Rack Only)
Rollers(7)
Guide Bracket
E-ring Guide Shaft
Guide Shaft
Shaft
GD1500
4. Remove the screw, D-washer, poly- Coil Spring

slider and bearing.
GD345 GD348
Bearing
2. No.3: 5. Remove the solution spillage
Remove the poly-slier, two gears, protection plate.
bearings and five rollers.
D-washer
6. Remove the four C-rings, bearings
Rollers (5) and the two rollers.
Rollers (2)
Screw Poly-slider
19 GD342
19.2.1 5. Disengage the pin from the gear by

19.2.2 pushing the roller shaft out, and
remove the roller shaft, gear, bearing Gears (2)
and roller. Bearings (2)
Poly-slider Solution Spillage C-rings (4)
Gear Protection Plate Bearings (4)
Pin GD346
Bearing
GD349
Roller Shaft
No.1 Crossover Rack

Roller
GD343
19-8
19.2 Crossover Rack
7. Remove the screw, gear shaft and

gear.
Gear Gear Shaft
Screw
GD350
Reassembly

order of disassembly.

gear shaft screw.

IMPORTANT:
• Install the squeegee (rubber) roller in
the frame, taking care not to damage
it. If damaged, improper squeegeeing
may result.
• The roller shafts of the No.5 and No.6
crossover racks are made of titanium
and have red marks on both ends.
Take care not to interchange then with
the other shafts.
19
19.2.2
19-9
19.3 Processing Racks
19.3.1 Lower Feed Roller 3. Remove the C-ring, poly-slider and 6. Remove the two screws and loosen
Replacement bearing from the lower end of the rack the five screws securing the guide.
drive shaft.
Removal Bearing
NOTE: Place the processing rack so that

its side plate faces up.
1. Remove the coil spring, four C-rings

and bearings from the rear side of the
rack.
C-rings (4) Screws (2) (Remove)

Coil Spring
Bearings
(4) C-ring Poly-slider
GD353
Screws (5) (Loosen)
4. Remove the two screws and the drive GD356
shaft bracket, gear and pin.
7. Remove the two guides by opening
Gear the lower end of the rack.
Screws Pin
(2)
Side Plate
GD351
2. Remove the coil spring, the two roller

shafts, outlet side lower feed roller
(ø21) and return roller (ø21) from the
front side.
Drive Shaft Bracket Guides (2)
Coil Spring Outlet Side GD354

Roller Shaft
5. Remove the roller shaft and the inlet
side lower feed roller (ø21). GD357
8. Remove the roller shaft and the lower

feed roller, gear, pin, poly-slider and
bearing.
Pin Gear
Poly-slider
19
19.3.1
Return Roller Shaft Outlet Side Lower

Bearing
Feed Roller (ø21)
Roller Shaft
Return Roller (ø21)
Inlet Side Lower Feed Roller (ø21)
GD352
GD355
Roller Shaft
Lower Feed Roller
(Hard roller for P1)
GD358
19-10
Installation 19.3.2 Upper Feed Roller 5. P2-1, PS-1, PS-2, PS-3, PS-4:
Replacement Remove the two screws and the inlet
Installation is essentially in the reverse side guide.
order of removal.
Removal Screws (2)
NOTE: • The gear ends of the rollers face
1. Remove the coil spring, three C-rings
the groove side of the guides.
• Align the positioning pins of the
rack.
guide with the holes of each side
plate. Black positioning pins
Coil Spring
align with the larger holes.
Black Positioning Pins/Larger Holes C-rings (3)
Bearings (3)
Inlet Side Guide
GD364
6. Remove the two screws and the inlet

side width guide on the front side.
Inlet/Front Side Width Guide

Screws (2)
Positioning Groove GD361

Pins Positioning
Pins
2. Remove the screws securing the rack
GD360
drive shaft bracket, and move the
bracket to the lower side.
• Make sure the two gear drive
pins are correctly installed.
Drive Shaft
GD365
7. Place the paper width guide in the

widest position.
8. Remove the roller (ø42).
Roller (Hard roller for P1)

Rack Drive
Screws (2)
Shaft Bracket
Gear Drive Pins (2)
GD362
GD359
3. Remove the coil spring, two roller

shafts and the rollers (ø21). 19
4. Remove the roller (ø42) shaft. 19.3.2
Roller (ø42) Shaft

Coil Spring
GD366
Installation
Install the roller in the reverse order of

removal.
Roller Shafts (2)

Rollers (ø21) (2)
GD363
19-11
19.3.3 Middle Feed Roller 5. Remove the two screws and the inlet Installation
Replacement side lower width guide on the front
side. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
Removal Screws (2)
NOTE: Set the inlet side guides to the
1. Remove the coil spring, three C-rings
same width as the outlet side
guides. After installation, perform
rack.
the paper width guide adjustment
Coil Spring (see subsection 19.3.7).
C-rings (3)
Bearings (3)
19.3.4 Upper Guide Plate
Replacement
Removal
Inlet/Front Side Lower Width Guide
GD370 1. P2-1, PS-1, PS2, PS3, PS4:
Remove the two screws and then the
6. Remove the two screws securing the inlet side guide plate.
inlet side lower guide.
Screws (2)
GD367
Inlet Side Lower Guide

rack drive shaft bracket, and move the
bracket to the lower side.
NOTE: Note that the gear drive pin is

removed.
Inlet Side Guide Plate
Screws (2) GD397
GD371
2. P2-1, PS-1, PS2, PS3, PS4:
Remove the two screws and the outlet
7. Rotate the inlet side lower guide.
side guide plate.
8. Remove the two screws and two Screws (2)
Screws (2) Rack Drive Shaft Bracket
guide locaters and turn the guide as
shown.
GD368
9. Remove the roller (ø42).

3. Remove the coil spring, roller (ø42)
shaft and the two middle feed rollers Guide Roller(ø42)
19 (ø21).
Inlet Lower Guide
19.3.3 4. Remove the roller (ø42). Screws(2)

19.3.4
Roller (ø42) Shaft
Coil Spring Outlet Side Guide Plate
GD398
Roller Shafts (2)
Guide Locators(2)
GD372
Middle Feed Rollers (ø21) (2)

GD369
19-12
3. Remove the screw and nut securing 19.3.5 Rack Drive Shaft 4. Remove the C-ring from the lower end
the handle. Replacement of the drive shaft.
Screw 5. Push the roller shaft out and remove

Removal the pin and knob.
1. Release the locks and remove the
6. Remove the poly-slider and bearing.
evaporation prevention cover.
7. Remove the rack drive shaft and
Evaporation Prevention Cover
bearing.
Nut
Poly-slider
Screw
GD399 Knob

upper guide plate.
Screws (2) Locks (2) Bearing

GD402 Rack Drive Shaft Pin
2. Remove the six screws securing the GD405

rack drive shaft brackets.
8. Press the rack drive gear against the
Rack Drive Shaft Brackets (3) spring force and remove the pin, rack
drive gear, spring, spring seat and pin.
Spring Seat
Spring
Upper Guide Plate
Pin
GD400
5. Remove the upper guide plate by

opening the upper end of the rack.
Screws (6)
GD403
Pin
3. Remove the seal plate on the rack Rack Drive Gear
drive knob. GD406
Installation
Install the rack drive shaft in the reverse

order of removal.
19
Upper Guide Plate
19.3.5
GD401
Installation

order of removal. Seal Plate
GD404
NOTE: • Note that the shapes of the
guide plates vary depending on
the racks (see “Roller and Guide
Arrangements” in “Parts
Location”).
• Tighten the screws taking care
not to bend the guide plate.
• After installation, make sure the
guide plate does not interfere
with the rotation of the roller.
19-13
19.3.6 Rack Drive Sprocket/ NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to 3. Remove the four screws and move
Gear Replacement the hex. socket head setscrew. the two paper width guide drive shaft
brackets to the lower side.
Removal LOCTITE 425 or equivalent Paper Width Guide Drive
Shaft Brackets (2)
1. Remove the two screws and the rack
• Align the hex. socket head
drive guide.
setscrew with the hole of the
Rack Drive Guide shaft.
Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
Shaft
Screws (4)
GD375
Screws (2) 4. Remove the eight screws and the four

paper width guides.
GD407

2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew GD409
and remove the collar, sprocket, two
bearings, shaft, poly-slider, pin and
gear.
Hex. Socket Head Replacement
Setscrew
Sprocket Removal

Pin outlet-side guides.
Bearings (2) Screws (2)
Collar Screws (2)

Screws (8)
Gear GD376
Shaft
5. Remove the two C-rings and bearings
on the front side of the rack.
Poly-slider
C-rings (2)
GD408
Bearings (2)
Installation

19 order of removal.
Outlet-side Guides (2)
GD373
19.3.6
19.3.7 2. Remove the four screws and the two
inlet-side guides.
GD377
Screws (2)
Screws (4)
Inlet-side Guides (2)

GD374
19-14
6. Remove the four screws, four guide Installation • If either of the threaded shafts
locaters and the guide. was removed, adjust the paper
Installation is essentially in the reverse width guide by following the
Guide Locators (4) Screws (4) order of removal. procedure below.
NOTE: • Install the flanges on the 1) Place the paper width guide
threaded shaft, aligning the “ ” that was not removed in the
marks. narrowest position.
“O”Marks
GD1499
7. Remove the four screws and two

threaded shafts. Narrowest Paper Width
Position Guide
Threaded Shafts (2)
GD383
Flange
Screws (4) Threaded Shaft 2) Make sure the flanges of the
GD380 removed threaded shaft is in
the narrowest position, then
• Screw the flanges fully on the turn the threaded shaft until
threaded shaft and make sure all the threaded shaft gear
that the slants on both flanges pins face in the same
are in the same position. direction.
GD378 3) Engage the gears so that the

pin groove aligns with the pin
8. Remove the pin and gear. on the drive shaft.
9. Remove the threaded shaft and the Gear Pins (4)

guide. (Face in the same direction)
Pin Flanges
Gear GD381
• Install the threaded shaft so that

Guide
the slants on the flanges face
the paper inlet side.
GD384 19
4) After the paper width guide 19.3.7
installation, make sure both
Threaded Shaft Paper guides are the same in width
Inlet and are parallel.
GD379
Side
• If both shafts were removed,

perform the paper width guide
timing adjustment. (See
Slants
GD382
19-15
19.3.8 Paper Width Guide 2. Remove the eight screws securing the 6. Remove the pin, adjustment knob,
Drive Shaft Gear paper width guide drive shaft bracket. poly-slider and bearing.
Replacement
Removal Poly-slider
Brackets (4)
1. Remove the eight screws and the four
paper width guide drive shaft
brackets.
2. Remove the four C-rings, eight poly- Pin

sliders, four bearings, brackets, gears Screws (8)
and pins.
Bearing Adjustment Knob
Pin (4) GD391
7. Move the gear to remove the pin and

the gear.
Poly-siders (4)
8. Remove the paper width guide drive
GD386
shaft gear and the shaft.
3. Remove the evaporation prevention Gear

Gears (4)
cover.
Brackets (4) Evaporation Prevention Cover

C-rings (4)
Bearings (4)
Poly-sliders (4)
GD386
Installation
Pin Width Adjustment
Drive Shaft
order of removal.
GD392
NOTE: • After installation, perform the GD388

Installation
paper width guide adjustment
(see subsection 19.3.7). 4. Remove the seal plate on the Installation is essentially in the reverse
adjustment knob. order of removal.
19.3.9 Paper Width Guide Seal Plate NOTE: • After installation, perform the
Drive Shaft paper width guide timing
adjustment (see subsection
Replacement
19.3.10).
Removal
19
1. Remove the screw, nut, spring
19.3.8 washer, plain washer and the paper
19.3.9 width guide driven gear.
Nut
Spring Washer GD389
Plain Washer
5. Remove the C-ring securing the paper
Paper Width width guide drive shaft gear.
Guide Driven
Gear
Screw C-ring
GD387
GD390
19-16
19.3.10 Paper Width Guide 4. Make sure the inside width of the
Timing Adjustment paper width guide is 186 mm and the
guides are parallel.
1. Place the adjustment knob in the
home position, face the “ ” mark on
the paper width guide drive shaft gear
toward the “ ” mark on the knob,
and align the pin with the groove.
Home Position
186mm
GD396
5. After the rack installation, perform the

paper width guide adjustment (see
“ ” Mark (Face the “ ” mark on the knob)
GD393
2. Align the “ ” mark on the paper

width guide drive shaft gear with the
“ ” mark on the driven gear.
“ ” Mark
“ ” Mark
GD394
3. Place the paper width guide in the

widest position, then turn the threaded
shaft so that the threaded shaft gear
pins are almost parallel (3.72°) to the 19
drive shaft. Engage the gears so that
the pin groove aligns with the pin on 19.3.10
the drive shaft.
Almost parallel (3.72°)
GD395
19-17
19.4 Squeegee Rack
19.4.1 Guide Plate 5. Remove the four screws and the 19.4.2 Squeegee Roller/Gear
Replacement upper brace plate. Replacement
6. Remove the four screws and the four
Removal processor side upper guide plates.
Removal
1. Remove the dryer squeegee rack. 1. Remove the dryer squeegee rack.
Upper Brace Plate
2. Remove the screw and the Screws (4) 2. Remove the brace plate.
transparent cover.
Screws (4)
Transparent Cover Brace Plate
Screws (4)
Processor Side Upper Guide Plates (2)
GD413
GD411
processor side guide plates.
3. Remove the nine E-rings and gears
Processor Side Guide Plates (4) from the roller shafts.
Gears (9)
Screw
GD410
3. Remove the six screws and the outlet

side guide plate and brace plate.
Brace Plate
Screws (6)
Screws (8)
GD414
E-rings (9)
GD415
Installation
4. Remove the four coil springs and nine
Installation is essentially in the reverse bearings from the roller gear side.
order of removal.
Outlet Side Guide Plate Coil Springs (4)
GD411
NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing
the guide plate against the rack. Bearings (9)
19 guide plates.
19.4.1 Guide Plates (4)
19.4.2
GD416
GD419
Screws (8)
GD412
19-18
19.4 Squeegee Rack
5. Remove the two roller shafts, rollers,

six poly-sliders and two bearings.
Gear
Bearing
Spring
Pin
C-ring
Roller
Roller Shaft
Poly-sliders(3)
GD417
6. Remove the E-ring, D-washer, poly-

slider, gear and poly-slider.
Gear
Poly-slider
Poly-slider
D-washer
E-ring
GD418
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Be careful with the roller

arrangement.
19
19.4.2
Black hard ø30

Beige soft ø30
Brown hard ø30
Beige soft ø48
19-19
19.5 Rack Drive System
19.5.1 Processor Drive Installation 4. Loosen the two hex. socket head
Section Cover setscrews with a 2.5 mm hex. wrench
Install the circuit board in the reverse and then remove the gear from the
Removal/Reinstallation order of removal. motor.
Removal
Gear
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 19.5.3 Processor Drive Motor
and the built-in circuit breaker and the (M710) Replacement
Removal
subsection 23.3.2). 1. Remove:
3. Remove the two screws securing the • processor drive section cover (see
sorter bracket and the bracket. subsection 19.5.1).
• processor power supply section
4. Remove the four screws and the Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
cover. GD467
Processor Drive Section Cover driver circuit board and open the two 5. Remove the four hex. socket head
harness clamps. bolts, the bracket and gear head from
the motor.
Motor (M710) Hex. Socket

Head Bolts (4)
Screws (4)
Sorter Bracket
Screws (2)
GD1361
Gear Head
Reinstallation
Bracket
Connector Harness Clamps (2) GD468
removal.
GD465
Installation
19.5.2 Processor Drive Motor Installation is essentially in the reverse
motor bracket.
Driver Circuit Board order of removal.
Replacement Screws (4)
Removal hex. socket head setscrews.
19 Thread Locking Agent:
1. Remove the processor power supply
19.5.1 section cover (see subsection 24.1.1). LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
19.5.2
19.5.3 2. Disconnect the three connectors from
the circuit board.

circuit board.
Motor Bracket
GD466
Connectors (3) Screws (2)

GD464
19-20
• Align the hex. socket head 5. Remove the processor drive shaft, 4. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
setscrew with the key on the dryer section drive shaft and two with a 2 mm hex. wrench and remove
shaft. bearings. the dryer drive sprocket (12T).
• Flush the end surface of the
gear with the end of the motor Dryer Section Drive Shaft 5. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
shaft. with a 2 mm hex. wrench and remove
Processor Drive Shaft
the gear.
Dryer Drive Sprocket
Gear
Bearings (2)
Key

Bracket GD474
Flush the end surfaces

Installation
GD469 GD471

Reinstallation
order of removal.
19.5.4 Drive Bracket Removal/ Reinstall the bracket in the reverse order
Reinstallation NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to
of removal.
the hex. socket head setscrews.
Removal
1. Remove the processor drive section
19.5.5 Processor Drive Shaft/ LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
cover (see subsection 19.5.1). Dryer Section Drive
Shaft Replacement
setscrew with the hole in the
shaft.
spring bracket. Removal
Hex. Socket Head
3. Remove the four screws securing the 1. Remove the drive bracket (see Setscrew
bracket. subsection 19.5.4).
Processor Drive Sprocket
4. Disengage the rack drive chain from 2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
the sprocket and then remove the with a 2 mm hex. wrench and remove
bracket. the rack drive sprocket (22T).
Key
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the 3. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
gear. with a 2 mm hex. wrench and remove
Screws (2)
the gear. 19
Spring Bracket
Rack Drive Sprocket Hex. Socket 19.5.4
Head Setscrew
Drive Bracket 19.5.5
Gear
Key
GD473
Gear
GD472
Rack Drive Chain Screws (4)
GD470
19-21
Hex. Socket Head 5. Install the bracket with the two 3. Connect a new chain to the end of the
Setscrew screws. old chain by using the master link and
clip. Pull the old chain as a guide to
Gear route the new chain.
Key
Screws(2)
Hex. Socket
Head Setscrews Key
Dryer Drive Sprocket Spring Bracket
GD475 Old Chain
GD1398
New Chain
6. Reinstall the processor drive section GD478
19.5.6 Processing Rack Drive cover.
Chain Tension 4. Remove the old chain.
Adjustment
Installation
19.5.7 Processing Rack Drive
1. Remove the processor drive section Chain Replacement Installation is essentially in the reverse
cover (see subsection 19.5.1). order of removal.
Removal
2. Measure the length of the chain NOTE: • Face the closed end of the chain
tensioner spring. 1. Remove: clip in the direction of rotation.
Spring Length: 55mm min. • processor drive section cover (see Direction of Rotation
subsection 19.5.1).
Processing Rack Drive Chain • processor front cover (see
subsection 19.1.2).
2. Remove the chain clip and master link

from the drive chain.
Master Link
55mm
min. Chain Clip
GD479
• Perform the chain tension

Chain Tensioner Spring 19.5.6).
19 GD1397
19.5.6 3. If the length is less than 55mm, Chain Clip

19.5.7 remove the two screws securing the GD477
spring bracket and the bracket.
4. Adjust the bracket position so that the

spring length is more than 55mm.
19-22
19.5.8 Dryer Rack Drive 6. Loosen the two hex. socket head 19.5.9 Squeegee Rack Drive
Sprocket/Chain Guide setscrews with a 2.5 mm hex. wrench Gear Replacement
and remove the sprocket.
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the processor drive section
1. Remove the processor drive section cover (see subsection 19.5.1).
2. Loosen the tensioner and disengage
2. Remove the six screws securing the the chain from the sprocket.
drive bracket.
Hex. Socket Head bracket.
3. Disengage the chain from the Sprocket
Setscrews (2)
squeegee rack drive sprocket and
remove the drive bracket. GD483
Sprocket
Squeegee Rack Drive Sprocket 7. Remove the two screws and the chain Screws (4)
guide.
Screws (2)
Drive Bracket
Chain
Chain
Screws (6) Bracket

Chain Guide GD486
GD480
GD485
4. Remove the E-ring, two screws, 4. Loosen the two hex. socket head
sprocket bracket and bearing. Installation setscrews and remove the sprocket.
Screws (2) Installation is essentially in the reverse 5. Remove the three screws securing
order of removal. the bracket.
E-ring NOTE: Align the hex. socket head Screws (3) Sprocket
Bracket
shaft.
Bearing
19
19.5.8
Sprocket Bracket 19.5.9
GD481
GD487
Sprocket
5. Remove the E-ring, bearing and Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
sprocket shaft.
GD484
Bearing
E-ring
Sprocket Shaft
GD482
19-23
6. Separate the bracket and remove the 8. Remove the drive gear, poly-slider 19.5.10 Dryer Section Drive
six bearings, three shafts and poly- and one-way clutch. Chain Replacement
slider.
One-way Clutch
Poly-slider
Removal
Bracket 1. Remove the processor drive section

2. Remove the chain clip and master

link.

Drive Gear
GD490
One-way Clutch
Poly-slider
Drive Gear
Bearings (6)
Master Link
GD488 Chain Clip
GD493
7. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew Flat Key
securing the drive gear. 3. Connect a new chain to the end of the
old chain by using the master link and
Drive Gear Flat Key clip. Pull the old chain as a guide to
GD491 route the new chain.
9. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew Old Chain

and remove the squeegee rack drive
gear from the shaft.
Flat Key
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrew
Flat Key
GD489
New Chain
GD494
19 Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
GD492 4. Remove the old chain.
19.5.10
Installation

order of the removal.
NOTE: Align the hex. socket head

shaft.
19-24
Installation 19.5.11 Processor Drive Chain 19.5.12 Unit 5 Drive Gear/

Guide Replacement Sprocket Replacement
order of removal.
Removal Removal
NOTE: • Face the closed end of the chain
1. Remove the processor drive section 1. Remove:
clip in the direction of rotation.
Direction of Rotation • unit 5 (see subsection 17.5.1).
2. Remove the processing racks. • processor front cover (see
subsection 19.1.2).
3. Disengage the chain from the • processor drive section cover (see
tensioner. subsection 19.5.1).
Chain Tensioner 2. Disengage the drive chain from the

chain tensioner.
Chain Tensioner
Chain Clip
GD495
<Chain Tension Adjustment>
1. Measure the length of the chain

tensioner spring. Drive Chain
GD498
Spring Length: 55mm min.
4. Remove the two screws and guides. Drive Chain
GD498
Screw
Screw
3. Remove the chain clip and master link
from the drive chain.
55mm min. Drive Chain
GD1399 Slider
Slider
Master Link
2. If the length is less than 55mm, GD503
remove the two screws securing the

spring bracket and the bracket. Installation Chain Clip 19
GD499
3. Adjust the bracket position so that the Install the slider in the reverse order of 19.5.11
spring length is more than 55mm. removal. 19.5.12
4. Install the bracket with the two

screws.
Spring Bracket
Screws (2)
GD1340?/1400?
19-25
4. Remove the screw and the sprocket 8. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
bracket upper cover. and remove the sprocket and shaft.
5. Remove the four screws and the Sprocket

sprocket bracket. Shaft
Sprocket Bracket Upper Cover

Screw

GD502
Screws (4)
Sprocket Bracket
Installation
GD500
6. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew order of removal.
and remove the collar, gear and poly-
slider. NOTE: • Align the hex. socket head
Hex.Socket Head Setscrew sprocket shaft.
setscrew of the gear with the flat
surface on the shaft as shown.
Hex.Socket Head Setscrew

Gear
Flat Surface
Gear
GD496
7. Remove the E-ring and two bearings.

Poly-slider
E-ring
GD497
19
19.5.12
Bearings (2)
GD501
19-26
19.6 Paper Width Guide
19.6.1 Processor Paper Width 19.6.2 Paper Width Guide 19.6.3 Paper Width Guide
Guide Home Position Position Encoder Drive Unit Removal/
Sensor (D710) Sensor (D711) Reinstallation
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove: 1. Remove:
• processor control section cover
• processor control section cover • processor control section cover (see subsection 24.2.1).
(see subsection 24.2.1). (see subsection 24.2.1). • processor control section upper
• processor control section upper • processor control section upper cover (see subsection 24.2.2).
cover (see subsection 24.2.2). cover (see subsection 24.2.2). • dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.2).
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the four screws and then the
sensor bracket. sensor bracket. cover.
Screw
Screws (4) Cover

Screws (2) Sensor Bracket
GD504 Sensor Bracket GD508
GD506
3. Disconnect the connector from the 3. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor. 3. Disconnect the connector from the home position sensor bracket.
sensor.
4. Remove the screw and the sensor. 4. Remove the screw and then the
4. Remove the screw and then the encoder sensor bracket.
Sensor (D710) sensor.
5. Open the clamp and remove the
Sensor (D711) motor connector.
Home Position Sensor Bracket

Motor Connector Screw
19
19.6.1
Connector
Bracket Screw 19.6.2
Connector
GD505 Bracket Screw 19.6.3
GD507
Installation
Clamp Encoder Sensor Bracket
Installation
Screws (2)
removal. Install the sensor in the reverse order of GD509
removal.
19-27
6. Loosen the six screws and remove 19.6.4 Paper Width Guide 5. Remove the pin and the detection
the unit. Drive Unit plate by loosening the hex. socket
head setscrew.
Screws (6)
Disassembly/
Reassembly Pin
Hex. Socket
Head Setscrew
Disassembly


gear bracket.
Paper Width Guide Drive Unit

GD510
Detection Plate
Reinstallation
GD522

order of removal. 6. Loosen the two hex. socket head
setscrews and remove the bevel gear.
NOTE. Place the unit on the L-bracket
Bevel Gear
and tighten the six screws.
Align with the
hole in the shaft
Paper Width Guide Drive Unit Gear Bracket Screws (4)
Screws (6)
GD520

arm.
4. Remove the E-ring and then the arm

Hex. Socket Head
boss. Setscrews (2)
Screws (2)
GD523
Arm
L-bracket
GD1635 E-ring
NOTE: If the unit is replaced with a new

one, follow the steps below.
1) Remove the three screws E-ring

securing the L-bracket and the
bracket.
2) Install the new unit loosely with
the six screws.
19 3) Adjust the unit position so that
there is appropriate backlash
19.6.4 Bearing
between the paper width guide
main drive shaft and the unit GD524
gears.
4) Tighten the six screws Arm Boss 8. Remove the drive pin, collar, gear,
securely. GD521 bearing and shaft.
5) Place the L-bracket under the
unit and tighten the three Gear Bearing
screws while pressing it Shaft
Collar
against the unit.
Drive Pin
GD525
19-28
9. Loosen the two hex. socket head <Phase Adjustment> 6. Loosen the hex. socket head
setscrews . setscrew, move the jig to its original
1. Position the recessed points on the position and then tighten the hex.
10. Remove the E-ring, shaft, bearing and joint as shown in the figure below and socket head setscrew.
bevel gear. install the gear bracket.
Hex. Socket Head Jig
Shaft Bevel Gear Setscrew
Joint
GD540
Hex. Socket Head E-ring GD537
Setscrews (2) Bearing
7. After installation, perform the paper
GD526 2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew width guide adjustment (see
and move the jig to the arm position subsection 19.6.10).
11. Remove the E-ring, plain washer, and then tighten the hex. socket head
spring, collar, joint, shaft and bearing. setscrew.
E-ring 3. Press the arm against the jig and

19.6.5 Processor Width Guide
Plain Washer Motor (M711)
Collar secure it with the two screws.
Joint Replacement
Arm
Jig
Removal
Spring 1. Remove the paper width guide drive

2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew

securing the encoder detection plate.
Bearing
and remove the gear from the motor
Shaft
shaft.
GD527 Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)
Setscrew Encoder Detection Plate Hex. Socket Head
Reassembly GD538 Setscrews (2)
Assembly is essentially in the reverse 4. Align the hole of the detection plate
order of disassembly. with the hole in the bracket and then
secure them with the M3 × 10 screw.
NOTE: • Align the hex. socket head
setscrew with the hole in the 5. Secure the detection plate with the
19
shaft. hex. socket head setscrew.
19.6.5
• Perform phase adjustment by
doing the procedure below. Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
M3 × 10 Screw
Hex. Socket Head Gear

Setscrews (2)
GD511
Home Position
Detection Plate
Bracket
GD539
19-29
4. Remove the four screws and then the • Align the hex. socket head Installation
motor from the bracket. setscrew with the D-flat surface
on the shaft and then tighten the Installation is essentially in the reverse
Bracket screws while pressing the gear order of removal.
against the motor as shown in
the figure below. NOTE: Align the hex. socket head
Hex. Socket Head shaft.
Setscrews (2)
Align with the hole
in the shaft
Screws (4)
Motor (M711)
GD512
D-flat Surface
5. Remove the four screws and then the GD514
spacer. GD516
Motor (M711)
19.6.6 Processor Paper Width
Guide Drive Gear 19.6.7 Dryer Rack Paper
Replacement Width Guide Drive
Gear Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the processor paper width
guide motor (M711) (see subsection 1. Remove the paper width guide drive
19.6.5). unit (see subsection 19.6.3).
2. Loosen the six hex. socket head 2. Remove the two screws and then the
setscrews with a 2 mm hex. wrench processor side bracket.
and remove the shaft, encoder
detection plate, processor paper width
Spacer guide drive gear and dryer paper
width guide drive gear.
Screws (4)
GD513 Processor Paper Width Guide Drive Gear
Installation

order of removal.
19 NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to
Screws (2)
Processor Side Bracket
19.6.6 GD517
19.6.7 Thread Locking Agent: 3. Remove the two bearings, collars and
LOCTITE 425 or equivalent thrust bearings from the gear shaft.
Shaft Encoder
Thrust Bearings (2)
Detection Plate
Dryer Paper Width Guide Drive Gear
Collar (2)
GD515
Gear Shaft
Bearing (2)
GD518
19-30
4. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew NOTE: • Place the pin of the worm gear 3. Remove the thrust bearing.
with a 2.5 mm hex. wrench and on the main drive shaft in
remove the gear from the shaft. horizontal position and then
install each gear so that the
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2) drive boss of all the gears faces
Gear the rear side.
Drive Boss (Rear Side)

Align with the hole
in the shaft Pin
(Horizontal
Position)
Thrust Bearing
Shaft
GD531
GD519
flange plate, bearing and bearing
Installation
GD529 cover.
Flange Plate Bearing Cover
order of removal. • After installation, perform the
NOTE: Align the hex. socket head (see subsection 19.6.10).
shaft.
Main Drive Shaft
19.6.8 Rack Paper Width Replacement
Guide Drive Gear
Replacement Removal Screws (4)
Bearing
1. Remove: GD532
Removal
• paper width guide drive unit (see
1. Remove the processing racks. subsection 19.6.3). 5. Push the main drive shaft to the
• processor paper width guide drive printer side, then remove the E-ring,
gear (see subsection 19.6.6). plain washer, thrust bearing and two
2. Remove the screw and the gear.
• processing racks. spring washers.
• unit 5 (see subsection 17.5.1).

and remove the paper width guide
main drive shaft. Spring Washer
Thrust Bearing
Plain Washer
19
19.6.8
Gear Screw 19.6.9
E-ring
GD528
GD533
Installation

order of removal.

GD530
19-31
6. Remove the four screws, flange plate, Grease: M11S-0001 (Sun-call 19.6.10 Paper Width Guide
bearing and bearing cover. No. LEN-317F) or Adjustment
equivalent
! WARNING
Do not use the lubricant (part
Special care must be taken because this
number M11G02001) provided
adjustment is done with the electric power
with the processor.
Flange Plate ON.
Grease A. Paper Width Guide Home

Position Adjustment
Bearing Cover 1. Remove:
Bearing
Screws (4) • processor control section upper
GD534 cover (see subsection 24.2.2).
7. Remove the paper width guide main 2. Remove the processing racks.
drive shaft.
3457
3. In menu “46A Processor I/O Check”,
move the paper width guide to the
• Install the thrust bearing race
home position.
with the small I. D. to the E-ring
side.
4. Make sure the pin of the worm gear
on the main drive shaft is in horizontal
position, and the drive boss of each
gear faces the rear side.
Worm Gear

Race with
GD535 Large I.D.
Installation Thrust Race with

Small I.D.
Bearing
Installation is essentially in the reverse GD536
order of removal.
• Apply thread locking agent to
NOTE: • Align the two collars of the shaft the hex. socket head setscrews.
with the ribs of the processing
tank. Drive Boss Pin (Horizontal Position)
Thread Locking Agent: (Rear Side)
• Place the pin of the worm gear LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
on the main drive shaft in GD541
horizontal position and then • Align the hex. socket head
install each gear so that the setscrew with the hole in the 5. Open the paper width guide fully and
drive boss of all the gears faces shaft. align the “ ” marks on the knobs
19 the rear side. with the “ ” marks on the racks.
• After installation, perform the
19.6.10 Drive Boss (Rear Side)
Pin (see subsection 19.6.10). Knob
(Horizontal
Position)
“∆” Marks for

Home Position
GD529
GD1626
• Apply grease to the thrust
bearing.
19-32
6. Make sure the “ ” mark aligns with Dryer Rack Processing Rack
the “ ” mark and the recessed point
faces the rear side. Width Min. Standard Max. Min. Standard Max.
89 62 65 63.5 58.5 60.0 61.5
7. Make sure the inside width of the 102 75 78 76.5 71.5 73.0 74.5
paper width guide is 186 mm.
127 100 103 101.5 96.5 98.0 99.5
Recessed Point 152 125 128 126.5 121.5 123.0 124.5
210 183 186 184.5 179.5 181.0 182.5
(home position) (188) (186)
186
mm
B. Inside Width Adjustment
1. Measure and record the inside width

“ ” Mark of the dryer rack exit side and the
processing rack width guide by setting
“ ” Mark the paper width to 89 mm, 102 mm,
127 mm, 152 mm and 210 mm in the
GD385 “46A Processor I/O Check” screen.
8. In this condition, install the processing 2. Make sure each measured value is
racks. within the range listed in the table
above.
9. Remove the dryer rack.
1) If both the dryer rack and the
10. Make sure the “ ” marked teeth processing rack are within the
align between the “ ” marks. range, paper guide adjustment is
not necessary.
Hex. Socket Head Set Screw
GD451 2) If the dryer rack is outside the
“ ” Marks range and the processing rack is
12. Make sure the inside width of the within the range, perform “C.
paper width guide is 188 mm. Paper Width Guide Mechanism
Fine Adjustment” and “D. Timing
Exit Side Paper Width Guides Adjustment”.
3) If the dryer rack is within the

range and the processing rack is
outside the range, perform “D.
GD450 Timing Adjustment”.
11. Make sure the hex. socket head 4) If both the dryer rack and the
setscrews face the directions shown processing rack are outside the
in the figure below. range, first perform “C. Paper
Width Guide Mechanism Fine
Adjustment” for the dryer rack and
then “D. Timing Adjustment”.
188mm
C. Paper Width Guide Mechanism
19
GD449
Fine Adjustment 19.6.10
13. In this condition, install the dryer rack.
1. Calculate the difference between the
standard value and the measured
value.
2. In menu <46A Processor Mechanism

Fine Adjustment>, enter the
calculated value for the fine
adjustment value of the paper width
guide (see subsection 9.7.9).
3. Make sure the inside width is within

the range by executing an output
check for the home position and for
each paper width.
GD1627
4. Update fine adjustment value and the

measured value of the home position
in the data sheet.
19-33
D. Timing Adjustment
1. Calculate adjustment value using the

formula below.
| (Measured Value) - (Standard Value) |

÷ 0.14 = Adjustment Value
2. In the “46A Processor I/O Check”

Menu, move the paper width guide to
the home position.

of the paper width guide main drive
shaft gear.
Paper Width Guide Main Drive Shaft Gear

GD542
4. Round the adjustment value to the

nearest whole number.
5. Move the gear to the left and correct

the gear engagement position
according to the adjustment value, by
shifting the corresponding number of
teeth.
• If the measured value is larger than

the standard value, turn the gear to
the rear side.
• If the measured value is smaller

than the standard value, turn the
gear to the front side.
19 6. Move the gear to the right and tighten
the hex. socket head setscrew.
19.6.10
Change the gear engagement
GD543
7. Make sure the inside width is within

the range by executing an output
check for the home position and for
each paper width.
19-34
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM
Parts Location .................................................................................................... 20-2
20.1 Sub-tanks ............................................................................................................ 20-3

20.1.1 Harness Protection Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 20-3
20.1.2 Processing Solution Level Sensor Replacement ............................................. 20-3
20.1.3 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor Replacement .................................. 20-3
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section .......................... 20-4

20.2.1 Processor Rear Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 20-4
20.2.2 Processor Rear Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....................................... 20-4
20.2.3 Heater Cooling Fan Replacement .................................................................... 20-4
20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 20-5
20.2.5 Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat Replacement .......................... 20-5
20.2.6 Hose Connection .............................................................................................. 20-5
20.2.7 Pump Section Brace Plate Removal/Reinstallation .......................................... 20-6
20.2.8 P1-1 to PS2 Processing Solution Heater Replacement .................................... 20-6
20.2.9 PS3 to PS4 Processing Solution Heater Replacement .................................... 20-6
20.2.10 Circulation Pump Replacement ........................................................................ 20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System ................................................................................... 20-8

20.3.1 Waste Solution Level Sensor Replacement ...................................................... 20-8
20
20-1
Parts Location
Solution Level Sensors (FS720 to FS727)
Circulation Filters
PS4 Solution Temperature Sensors

(TS720 to TS725)
PS3
PS2
PS1
P2
P1
PS4
PS3
PS2
To W2 Waste Solution Tank PS1
H726 P2-2
(PS3-1)
P2-1
H725 P1-2
(PS2)
P1-1
H724
H727 (PS1)
(PS3-2) H723
(P2-2) H722
(P2-1) H721
(P1-2)
H720
H728 (P1-1)
(PS4) Solution Drain
To W1 Waste Valves
Solution Tank
PU725 Solution Heaters

(PS2)
PU724
(PS1)
PU723
20 (P2-2)
PU722
Circulation Pumps
(P2-1)
PU721
(P1-2)
PU727 PU720
(PS4) PU726 (P1-1)
(PS3)
GD648
20-2
20.1 Sub-tanks
20.1.1 Harness Protection 20.1.2 Processing Solution NOTE: Pass the sensor wires through the
Cover Removal/ Level Sensor holder, and insert the two pins into
the connector.
Connector
Removal Symbol Sensor
FS720 P1 solution level Holder
1. Perform the post-operational checks
to shut down the system, turn the FS722 P2 solution level
power switch to STANDBY, and turn FS724 PS1 solution level
main power supply OFF. FS725 PS2 solution level
FS726 PS3 solution level
2. Remove the sub-tank cover. FS727 PS4 solution level
Wire Pins (2)
Removal
GD596
1. Remove the harness protection cover
2. Open the harness clamp and 20.1.3 Processing Solution

disconnect the connector (FS720 to Temperature Sensor
FS727). Replacement
3. Remove the screw and the level
sensor. Symbol Sensor
Sub-tank Cover
TS720 P1 solution temperature
GD1316 Harness Clamp
TS721 P2 solution temperature
3. Remove the seven screws and the Connector TS722 PS1 solution temperature
harness protection cover.
TS723 PS2 solution temperature
Harness Protection Cover TS724 PS3 solution temperature
Screws (7) TS725 PS4 solution temperature
Removal
1. Remove the harness protection cover

Screw Level Sensor
GD594
disconnect the connector (TS720 to
TS725).
4. Loosen the lock nut, cut the harness
and remove the sensor from the
GD593 3. Remove the screw and the
holder.
temperature sensor.
Reinstallation
Harness Clamp
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Connector
removal.
20
20.1.1
20.1.2
Cut the harness.
Lock Nut 20.1.3
GD595
Installation Sensor Screw

GD597
order of removal.
Installation

removal.
20-3
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section
20.2.1 Processor Rear Left Reinstallation 20.2.3 Heater Cooling Fan

Cover Removal/ Replacement
Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
Symbol Cooling Fan
Removal NOTE: Pass the harness of the waste F720 P1 heater
solution tanks as shown in the F722 P2 heater
1. Perform the post-operational checks figure below.
to shut down the system, turn the F724 PS1, 2 heater
power switch to STANDBY, and turn F726 PS3 heater
main power supply OFF. F727 PS4 heater
2. Remove the sub-tank cover. Removal
1. Remove:
• processor rear left cover

• processor rear right cover
Harness
2. Remove the air filter holder.
GD619
Sub-tank Cover 20.2.2 Processor Rear Right

GD1316 Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
processor rear left cover.
Removal

power switch to STANDBY, and turn Air Filter Holder
Screws (2) the built-in circuit breaker and the GD1402
3. Remove the two screws, and then the
2. Remove the sub-tank cover. air duct.

processor rear right cover.
Screws (4)
Processor Rear
Left Cover
GD620
20 Air Duct
20.2.1 Screws (2)

20.2.2 GD1403
20.2.3
Processor Rear Right Cover

GD1345
Reinstallation

removal.
20-4
4. Disconnect the fan connector. 20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan 4. Remove the two screws and the
Bracket Removal/ safety thermostat from the heater.
5. Remove the two screws and the fan
and fan guard.
Reinstallation Safety Thermostat
Fan Connector Removal

Fan
1. Remove:

• processor rear right cover
2. Loosen the two screws, remove the

two screws, and then the heater
cooling fan bracket. Screws (2)
Screws (2) Guard Wires (2)
Screws (2) (Loosen)
GD1404 GD1407
order of removal. removal.

mark points towards the heater. 20.2.6 Hose Connection
Screws (2)
Heater Cooling Fan Bracket (Remove)
1. Connect the hose securely so that it
GD1406 extends as far as the base of each
connection opening.
Reinstallation
2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace
Reinstall the bracket in the reverse order them if the docking portion is
of removal. damaged.
Docking Portion
Arrow 20.2.5 Processing Solution

Heater Safety
GD1405 Thermostat
Replacement
Symbol Safety Thermostat

D720 P1-1
D721 P1-2
Hose Clamp
D722 P2-1
0681
D723 P2-2
D724 PS1 3. Install each hose clamp so that the 20
edge on the inside surface is towards
D725 PS2 the end of the connection as shown. 20.2.4
D726 PS3-1 20.2.5
D727 PS3-2 20.2.6
D728 PS4
Removal
1. Remove the heater cooling fan

2. Remove the safety thermostat

protection cover.
5S074
3. Disconnect the two wires from the
safety thermostat.
20-5
4. Check that the hose clamps are not 20.2.8 P1-1 to PS2 Processing 3. Pinch the heater inlet and outlet hoses
twisted when they are installed. Hold Solution Heater with the two pinchcocks.
each end of the clamp with a pair of
pliers and squeeze the ends together
Replacement 4. Remove the two screws securing the
securely. heater.
Symbol Processing Solution Heater
H720 P1-1 (200V 500W) 5. Remove the two screws and the
safety thermostat from the heater.
H721 P1-2 (200V 500W)
H722 P2-1 (200V 500W) 6. Loosen the hose clamp and remove
H723 P2-2 (200V 500W) the heater.
H724 PS1 (200V 500W) Pinchcocks (2)

Clamps (2)
H725 PS2 (200V 500W)
Docking Portion Hose Clamp Removal

0680
1. Remove:
Screws
5. After operating the machine for 30 (2)
• heater cooling fan Bracket
minutes, check that no solution is
(see subsection 20.2.4). Screws
leaking from the hose connections. (2)
• pump section brace plate
20.2.7 Pump Section Brace 2. Remove the harness duct cover and
Plate Removal/ disconnect the connector (H720 to
H728).
Reinstallation
Heater Connector Heater
Removal Safety Thermostat
GD1410
1. Remove:
Installation
(see subsection 20.2.1). Installation is essentially in the reverse
• processor rear right cover order of removal.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see
2. Loosen the two screws and remove subsection 20.2.6).
the four screws and the brace plate.
Screws (2) (Loosen) Harness Duct Cover

GD1409 20.2.9 PS3 to PS4 Processing
Solution Heater
Replacement
Symbol Processing Solution Heater

H726 PS3-1 (240V 360W)
H727 PS3-2 (240V 360W)
H728 PS4 (200V 500W)
20 Pump Section Reinforcement
Screws (4) (Remove) Removal
20.2.7
20.2.8 GD1408
1. Remove:
20.2.9
Reinstallation
• heater cooling fan bracket (see
subsection 20.2.4).
Reinstall the plate in the reverse order of
• pump section brace plate (see
removal.
subsection 20.2.7).
2. Drain the processing solution from the

appropriate tank.
IMPORTANT:
Drain the processing solution into a
clean container and return it into the
tank immediately after replacement.
20-6
3. H727/H728: Remove the two screws Installation 3. Pinch the pump inlet and outlet hoses
and loosen the two screws. Remove using the two pinchcocks.
the fan bracket. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. 4. Remove the two screws securing the
Fan Bracket pump.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
NOTE: Connect the hose securely (see
subsection 20.2.6). 5. Loosen the two hose clamps and the
pump.
NOTE: The solution remaining inside

20.2.10 Circulation Pump the pump may be spilled out.
Replacement Wipe off the spilled solution
immediately.
Symbol Circulation Pump
Hose Clamps (2)
PU720 P1-1 Pinchcocks (2)
PU721 P1-2
Screws (2) (Remove)
PU722 P2-1
GD1411
PU723 P2-2
Screws (2)
4. Remove the harness duct cover and PU724 PS1
disconnect the heater connector. PU725 PS2
Heater Connector PU726 PS3
PU727 PS4
Removal
1. Remove the pump section brace plate

Pump
2. Remove the harness duct cover and
GD1415
disconnect the connector (PU720 to
PU727).
Installation
Harness Duct Cover
GD1412
order of removal.
heater. NOTE: Connect the hoses securely
6. Remove the two screws, and then the
safety thermostat.
7. Loosen the two hose clamps and

remove the heater.
Pump Connector
Harness Duct Cover
NOTE: The solution remaining inside
GD1414
the heater may spill out. Wipe
up the spilled solution
immediately.
Hose Clamp
20
Heater Screws (2) 20.2.10
Screws
(2)
Safety Thermostat
GD1413
20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System
20.3.1 Waste Solution Level Installation

Sensor Replacement
order of removal.
Symbol Waste Solution Level Sensor
FS740 W1 NOTE: Install the new sensor onto the
cap as follows:
FS741 W2
1) Remove the lock nut from the new
Removal
sensor.
2) Pass the sensor through the cap
1. Remove the processor rear left cover
base, and tighten the lock nut.
3) Insert the two wire pins into the
connector.
2. Disconnect the sensor connector.
Cap Base Connector
Lock Nut
Wire Pins (2)
W1 Connector
W2 Connector Sensor
GD623
GD621
3. Remove the waste solution tank cap.
4. Cut the sensor harness.
5. Remove the lock nut and the sensor

from the cap base.
Waste Solution Tank Cap

Connector
Cut
20 Waste Solution
Lock Nut
Level Sensor Cap Base
20.3.1
GD622
20-8
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM
Parts Location ................................................................................................... 21-2
21.1 Replenisher Tank Section .............................................................................. 21-4

21.1.1 Replenisher Tank Section Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 21-4
21.1.2 Replenisher Tank Section Right Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 21-4
21.1.3 Replenisher Tank Section Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 21-4
21.1.4 Replenisher Tank Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 21-4
21.1.5 Replenisher Tank Section Removal/Reinstallation .......................................... 21-5
21.1.6 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ............................................... 21-5
21.1.7 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D803) Replacement ................ 21-5
21.1.8 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D801/D802) Replacement ..................... 21-5
21.1.9 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D800) Replacement ............................................... 21-6
21.1.10 Cartridge Opening Motor (M800) Replacement ............................................... 21-6
21.1.11 Replenisher Cartridge Section Removal/Reinstallation ................................... 21-6
21.1.12 Hose Connection ............................................................................................. 21-7
21.1.13 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement ........................................ 21-7
21.1.14 Auto Washing Solution Filter Replacement ..................................................... 21-8
21.1.15 Auto Washing Pump (PU800) Replacement .................................................... 21-8
21.1.16 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Valve /P1-R Stirring Valve Replacement ....... 21-8
21.1.17 P1-R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS800/FS804) Replacement ..................... 21-9
21.1.18 P2-RA/P2-RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement ................................. 21-9
21.1.19 PS-R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS803/FS807) Replacement ..................... 21-10
21.1.20 P1-R Replenisher Tank Replacement .............................................................. 21-10
21.1.21 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenisher Tank Replacement ................................................ 21-11
21.1.22 PS-R Replenisher Tank Replacement ............................................................. 21-11
21.1.23 PCW/P1W Air Bleeding ................................................................................... 21-12
21.1.24 Replenisher Preparation .................................................................................. 21-13
21.2 Replenisher Pump Section ............................................................................ 21-14

21.2.1 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ........................................................... 21-14
21.2.2 Replenisher Pump Replacement ..................................................................... 21-14
21.2.3 Replenisher Filter Case Replacement ............................................................. 21-14
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Air Bleeding ....................................................................... 21-15
21
21-1
Parts Location
PS-R Tank
Washing Valves/P1-R
Replenisher Stirring Valve
(S800 to S803)
P2-RA Tank P2-RB Tank
P2-RA PS-R Air

Level Sensors Bleeding Valve
(FS801/FS805)
P2-RB
Level Sensors
(FS802/FS806) P1-R Tank
Drain Valves
PS-R
P2-RB
P1-R
P2-RB
P2-RA P1-R
P2-RB PS-R P2-RA
P2-RA P1-R
21 P1-R Level Sensors (FS800/FS804)
PS-R
PS-R Level Sensors (FS803/FS807) Filter for Auto-Washing
Auto-washing Pump (PU800)
GD649q
21-2
Parts Location
P2-RB P2-RA
PS-R
P1-R
PS4
PS3
PS2
PS1
P2
P1
Replenisher
Filters
P2-RB
P2-RA
P1-R
Replenisher
Nozzles
PU745
(PS-R) PU744
(P2W) PU743 Replenisher Pumps
(P2-RB) PU742
(P2-RA) PU741
(P1W) PU740
(P1-R)
21
GD649w
21-3
21.1 Replenisher Tank Section
21.1.1 Replenisher Tank 21.1.2 Replenisher Tank Reinstallation

Section Left Cover Section Right Cover
Removal/Reinstallation Removal/Reinstallation removal.
Removal Removal
1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Perform the post-operational checks 21.1.4 Replenisher Tank
to shut down the system, turn the to shut down the system, turn the Section Front Cover
power switch to STANDBY, and turn power switch to STANDBY, and turn Removal/Reinstallation
the built-in circuit breaker and the the built-in circuit breaker and the
main power supply OFF. main power supply OFF.
Removal
2. Remove the four screws and then the 2. Remove the four screws and then the
replenisher tank section left cover. replenisher tank section right cover.
power switch to STANDBY, and the
built-in circuit breaker and the main
power supply OFF.

replenisher tank section front cover.
Screws (5)
Replenisher Section Right Cover

GD545
Replenisher Tank Section Left Cover

Reinstallation
GD544

Replenisher Tank Section Front Cover
GD547
removal.
21.1.3 Replenisher Tank
Reinstallation
Section Top Cover
Removal/Reinstallation Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of
removal.
Removal

power switch to STANDBY, and turn
21 2. Remove the six screws and then the

replenisher tank section top cover.
21.1.1
Replenisher Section Top Cover
21.1.2
Screws (6)
21.1.3
21.1.4
GD546
21-4
21.1.5 Replenisher Tank 21.1.7 Replenisher Door Installation

Section Removal/ Detecting Interlock
Reinstallation Switch (D803) order of removal.
Replacement
Removal NOTE: Take care not to pinch the
Removal harness with the connector cover.
1. Remove:
1. Remove:
• replenisher tank section left cover
(see subsection 21.1.1). • replenisher tank section left cover
21.1.8 Cartridge Box Upper/
• replenisher tank section right cover (see subsection 21.1.1). Lower Sensor (D801/
(see subsection 21.1.2). • replenisher tank section top cover D802) Replacement
2. Remove the two screws and then the • replenisher tank section front cover Removal
replenisher tank section. (see subsection 21.1.4).
1. Remove the replenisher section right
2. Remove the two screws and then the cover (see subsection 21.1.2).
switch bracket.
sensor bracket.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
Replenisher Tank Section

GD548
Screws (2) Switch Bracket

Reinstallation
GD550
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of Sensor Bracket
removal. 3. Remove the screw and then the
GD553
connector cover.
NOTE: • Make sure the hoses are not
Screw 3. Disconnect the connector from the
bent. sensor.
• After installation, perform
“Replenisher Pump Output
4. Loosen the locking tabs and remove
Measurement/Setup” in menu the sensor from the bracket.
461.
Sensor (D801)
Connectors (2)
21.1.6 Replenisher Box Door
Lock Manual Releasing
Connector Cover
1. Remove the screw securing the top
GD551
cover.
2. Insert the hex. wrench through the 4. Disconnect the connector from the
screw hole to release the lock and switch.
open the door.
5. Remove the spring, E-ring and the
21
switch from the bracket. Sensor (D802)
Screw 21.1.5
E-ring Locking Tabs (3) 21.1.6
Switch Connector
GD554 21.1.7
21.1.8
Installation

removal.
Replenisher Box Door

GD549
Spring
GD552
21-5
21.1.9 Cartridge Setting 4. Remove the two screws and then the 3. Open the five clamps.
Sensor (D800) motor.
4. Disconnect the motor connector
Replacement 5. Loosen the hex. socket head set (M800).
screw and remove the gear from the
Removal motor shaft. 5. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor (D800).
1. Remove the replenisher section Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
(see subsection 21.1.5). Motor Connector (M800)
Clamps (5)
3. Disconnect the connector from the Gear

sensor.
Locking Tabs (3)
Hex. Socket Head Set Screw Connector (D800)
GD557 GD558
Installation 6. Remove the six screws securing the

opening nozzle section.
removal.
Sensor (D800) Connector
GD555 Screws (6)
21.1.11 Replenisher Cartridge
Installation
Section Removal/
Install the parts in the reverse order of Reinstallation
removal.
Removal
Opening Nozzle
1. Remove: Section
21.1.10 Cartridge Opening
Motor (M800) • replenisher tank section GD559
Replacement (see subsection 21.1.5).
• replenisher tank section top cover 7. Remove the lower four screws
Removal (see subsection 21.1.3). securing the cartridge setting section.
• replenisher tank section front cover
(see subsection 21.1.4). Screws (4)
1. Remove the replenisher section
2. Disconnect the motor connector. sensor bracket.
3. Remove the four screws and then the Screws (2)

motor bracket.
Connector
Motor Bracket
21
GD560
21.1.9
21.1.10
21.1.11
Sensor Bracket
GD553
Screws (4)
GD556
21-6
8. Remove the upper four screws 21.1.12 Hose Connection 21.1.13 Replenisher Cartridge
securing the cartridge setting section. Opening Gear
1. Connect the hose securely so that is Replacement
9. Remove the two screws and then the extends as far as the base of each
lock lever. connection opening. Removal
2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace 1. Remove the replenisher cartridge
them if the docking portion is setting section
damaged.
Docking Portion
cartridge bracket.
E-rings (2)
Lock Lever
GD561
10. Loosen the hose clamp and Hose Clamp

disconnect the overflow hose. 0681
11. Remove the cartridge setting section. 3. Install each hose clamp so that the
edge on the inside surface is towards Cartridge Bracket
Cartridge Setting Section
the end of the connection as shown. GD563
Hose Clamp
3. Remove the E-ring and then the gear.
Gear E-ring
Overflow Hose
GD562 5S074
Reinstallation 4. Check that the hose clamps are not

twisted when they are installed. Hold GD564
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse each end of the clamp with a pair of
order of removal. pliers and squeeze the ends together
Installation
securely.
NOTE: • Connect the hose securely Install the parts in the reverse order of
(see subsection 21.1.12). removal.
• Install the replenisher cartridge
setting section with its
uppermost position.
21
21.1.12
Docking Portion Hose Clamp 21.1.13
0680
5. After operating the machine for 30

minutes, check that no replenisher is
leaking from the hose connections.
21-7
21.1.14 Auto Washing Solution 4. Remove the two screws securing the 21.1.16 Replenisher Cartridge
Filter Replacement pump bracket. Washing Valve /P1-R
Stirring Valve
Removal Replacement
1. Remove the replenisher tank section
Symbol Valve
S800 P1-R cartridge washing valve
2. Shut off the filter inlet and outlet hoses S801 P2-RA cartridge washing valve
with the pinchcocks.
S802 P2-RB cartridge washing valve
3. Loosen the two hose clamps and S803 P1-R stirring valve
remove the filter from the hoses.
Pump Bracket Screw (2) Removal
Inlet Hose
Pinchcocks (2) GD567
Outlet Hose 1. Remove the replenisher tank section
left cover (see subsection 21.1.1).
5. Shut off the inlet and outlet hoses of
the auto washing pump with the 2. Remove the harness duct cover and
pinchcocks. disconnect the four connectors (S800
to S803).
6. Loosen the hose clamp and
disconnect the hose from the pump. 3. Open the clamp.
7. Loosen the upper screw and remove Clamp

the lower screw and the pump.
Inlet Hose
Screw (Loosen) Pinchcocks (2)
Hose Clamps (2) Outlet

Auto Washing Solution Filter Hose
GD565
Screw
Installation (Remove)

order of removal. Connector Harness Duct Cover
Hose GD571
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely Clamps (2)
4. Remove the two screws and the auto
Auto Washing Pump (PU800) washing valve unit.
GD568
21.1.15 Auto Washing Pump Valve Unit
(PU800) Replacement Installation
Removal Installation is essentially in the reverse

order of removal.
1. Remove the replenisher tank section
(see subsection 21.1.5). NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely
2. Remove the harness duct cover. • Perform air bleeding for the auto
washing pump
21 3. Open the two clamps and disconnect (see subsection 21.1.23).
the pump connector.
21.1.14
21.1.15 Connector (PU800)
Screws (2)
21.1.16
GD572
Clamps (2) Harness Duct Cover

GD566
21-8
5. Shut off the inlet hose with the 3. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the harness duct cover and
pinchcock. sensor. disconnect the sensor connector.
6. Loosen the five hose clamps and 4. Remove the rubber gasket from the
disconnect the hoses from the valve sensor.
unit.
Arrow
bracket from the valve unit.
Screws (2)
Pinchcock
Valve Unit Inlet Hose
Harness Duct Cover

GD577
3. Remove the two screws and open the

clamp, and then remove the tank
holding bracket.
Sensor
Bracket GD581 4. Cut the cord tie.
Screws (2)
Hose Clamps (5) Installation Cord Tie Screws (2)
Tank Holding
Bracket Cord Tie
GD573
Installation order of removal.
Installation is essentially in the reverse NOTE: • Install the sensor flange so that
order of removal. its arrow mark faces the rear
side.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see • Insert the sensor into the hole in
subsection 21.1.12). the floating cover.
Clamp
21.1.17 P1-R Upper/Lower 21.1.18 P2-RA/P2-RB Upper/
GD578
Level Sensor (FS800/ Lower Level Sensor
FS804) Replacement Replacement 5. Withdraw the upper part of the tank.
Symbol Sensor 6. Remove the two screws and the

Removal
sensor.
FS801 P2-RA upper level
1. Remove:
FS802 P2-RB upper level 7. Remove the rubber gasket from the
FS805 P2-RA lower level sensor.
• replenisher tank section
(see subsection 21.1.5). FS806 P2-RB lower level
• replenisher tank section top cover Screws (2)
(see subsection 21.1.3). Removal
• replenisher tank section front cover
(see subsection 21.1.4). 1. Remove:
2. Remove the harness duct cover and • replenisher tank section

disconnect the sensor connector. (see subsection 21.1.5).
• replenisher tank section top cover
Arrow
21
• replenisher tank section front cover 21.1.17
(see subsection 21.1.4). 21.1.18
Sensor (FS800/FS804)
GD579
Installation

order of removal.
Connector
NOTE: • Install the sensor flange so that
Harness Duct Cover
its arrow mark faces the front
GD580 side.
• Insert the sensor into the hole in
the floating cover.
21-9
21.1.19 PS-R Upper/Lower 7. Remove the screw and the sensor. 5. Loosen the three clamps and remove
Level Sensor (FS803/ the overflow hose, water
Pinchcocks (2) Hose replenishment hose and inlet hose.
FS807) Replacement
Overflow Hose
Removal
1. Remove:

• replenisher tank section top cover Water
(see subsection 21.1.3). Hose Clamps (2) Replenishment
• replenisher tank section front cover Hose
Sensor
2. Remove the harness duct cover and (FS803/FS807)
disconnect the sensor connector.
Screw
Hose
GD576
Hose Clamps (3) Inlet Hose
Installation GD587
Installation is essentially in the reverse 6. Loosen the two clamps and remove
order of removal. the replenishment hose, drain hose
and the tank.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely
Replenishment Hose
Harness Duct Cover

Connector
GD574 21.1.20 P1-R Replenisher Tank
Replacement
3. Cut the four cord ties.
Removal
4. Open the three clamps.
1. Remove:
Cord Ties (4)
Clamps (3)
• replenisher tank section Drain Hose
(see subsection 21.1.5). Hose Clamps (2)
• replenisher tank section top cover GD588
• replenisher tank section front cover Installation
2. Drain the P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB order of removal.
replenisher solutions.
NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely
3. Remove the two screws and then the (see subsection 21.1.12).
level sensor. • Install the sensor flange so that
its arrow mark faces the front
4. Remove the two screws and then the side.
tank holding bracket. • Perform “Replenisher
21 Screws (2)
Preparation” (see subsection
GD575 Level Sensor 21.1.24).
21.1.19
21.1.20 5. Shut off the upper and lower hoses of
the sensor case with the pinchcocks.
6. Loosen the clamp and remove the

hose.
Tank Holding Bracket Screws (2)

GD586
21-10
21.1.21 P2-RA/P2-RB 5. Loosen the two clamps and remove 21.1.22 PS-R Replenisher Tank
Replenisher Tank the inlet hose, overflow hose and the Replacement
tank.
Replacement
Hose Clamps (2)
Removal
Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove:
• replenisher tank section (see subsection 21.1.5).
(see subsection 21.1.5). • replenisher tank section top cover
• replenisher tank section top cover (see subsection 21.1.3).
(see subsection 21.1.3). • replenisher tank section front cover
• replenisher tank section front cover Overflow Hose (see subsection 21.1.4).
(see subsection 21.1.4). • PS-R upper/lower level sensor
2. Drain the P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB
replenisher solutions. Inlet Hose 2. Drain the PS-R replenisher solution.
3. Remove the two screws and open the 3. Open the clamp securing the breather
clamp, and then remove the tank hose.
holding bracket.
GD584 4. Loosen the upper three clamps and
Screws (2) disconnect the inlet hose, level sensor
6. Remove the two screws and then the hose, and auto washing pump
Clamp level sensor. breather hose.
Level Sensor Hose

Clamp
Inlet Hose Breather Hose
Tank Holding Bracket

GD582
4. Loosen the two clamps and Screws (2) Level Sensor

disconnect the two hoses from the
GD585
bottom of the tank.
Hose Clamps (3)
Clamps (2) Installation Auto Washing Pump Breather Hose
GD589
order of removal.
5. Remove the two screws and the tank
NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely holding bracket.
• Install the sensor flange so that Tank Holding Bracket
its arrow mark faces the rear
side.
• Perform “Replenisher
Preparation” (see subsection
21.1.24). 21
Hoses
GD583 21.1.21
21.1.22
Screws (2)
GD590
21-11
6. Remove the two screws and then the 21.1.23 PCW/P1W Air Bleeding 8. Press the [ENTER] key.
rear brace plate.
1. Drain the PS-R replenisher from the 72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
Screws (2)
PS-R tank.
PSR AIR EXT. ?
2. On the printer control panel, press the
[MENU] key five times and the
9. Press the [Enter] key.
[ENTER] key.
• PS-R air bleeding starts.
0 [MENU]
72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
1 LANGUAGE
PSR AIR EXT. *
Rear Brace Plate 3. Press the [▼] key six times.
GD591
72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
0 [MENU]
7. Loosen the two clamps, disconnect
the two hoses from the bottom of the VALVE OPEN ?
7 INSTALLATION
tank and remove the tank.
10. Open the air bleed valve in the
Hose Clamps (2) 4. Pres the [s] key.
replenisher tank section.
7 [INSTALLATION]
1 FREQ. SETTING ?
5. Press the [▼] key.
7 [INSTALLATION]
Level Sensor Hose

2 PCW AIR EXT. ?
Hose to Filter
GD592
6. Press the [ENTER] key.
Air Bleed Valve (Opened)
Installation 72 <PCW AIR EXT.> GD570
Installation is essentially in the reverse PSR 4L ADD ? 11. Press the [ENTER] key.
order of removal.
72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
7. Open the water supply port door,
introduce one FSC100 tablet into the
(see subsection 21.1.12). PCW AIR EXT. ?
supply port and pour 4 liters of
• Perform air bleeding for the
deionized water (FRSS processing
PCW and P1W pumps (see
water) through the PS-R supply port. 12. Press the [ENTER] key.
• Secure the hoses with the cord
Deionized Water 4 liters • Auto washing pump air bleeding
tie as shown.
Water Supply Posrt Door starts.
72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
PCW AIR EXT. *

21
21.1.23 72 <PCW AIR EXT.>
VALVE CLOSE ?
Cold Tie
FSC100 (1 tablet)
GD1586
GD1274
21-12
13. Close the air bleed valve. 19. Press the [ENTER] key. 7. Press the [MENU] key.
75 <P1W A. EXT.> • “WARMING UP” appears on the

display after “INITIALIZING”.
EXTRACTING AIR *
7 [INSTALLATION]
6 P2W AIR EXT. ?
20. Press the [MENU] key.
Air Bleed Valve (Closed) • “WARMING UP” appears on the

display after “INITIALIZING”.
GD569

21.1.24 Replenisher
72 <PCW AIR EXT.> Preparation
PSR 12L ADD ? 1. On the printer control panel, press the

[MENU] key five times and the
[ENTER] key.
15. Open the water supply port door,
introduce three FSC100 tablets into
0 [MENU]
the supply port and add 12 liters of
deionized water (FRSS processing
water) through the PS-R supply port. 1 LANGUAGE
Deionized Water 12 liters

2. Press the [▼] key six times.
Water Supply Port Door
0 [MENU]
7 INSTALLATION
3. Press the [s] key.
7 [INSTALLATION]
1 FREQ. SETTING ?
FSC100 (3 tablets) 4. Press the [▼] key twice.

GD1274
7 [INSTALLATION]
3 MIX REPL. ?
7 [INSTALLATION]

3 MIX REPL. ?
17. Press the [▼] key twice.

73 <MIX REPL.> 21
START ? 21.1.24
7 [INSTALLATION]

5 P1W AIR EXT. ?
• Replenisher preparation starts.
73 <MIX REPL.>
75 <P1W A. EXT.>
MIXING *
START ?
7 [INSTALLATION]
4 PUMP AIR EXT. ?
21-13
21.2 Replenisher Pump Section
21.2.1 Replenisher Pump 21.2.2 Replenisher Pump 5. Remove the two screws and then the
Valve Replacement Replacement pump.
Removal Symbol Replenisher Pump

PU740 P1-R
1. Remove the processor rear right or
left cover (see subsection 20.2.1). PU741 P1W
PU742 P2-RA
2. Shut off the replenisher pump inlet
and outlet hoses with the pinchcocks. PU743 P2-RB
PU744 P2W
3. Remove the two joint caps and the PU745 PS-R
two valves.
Screws (2)
Removal Pump
Pinchcocks (2)
GD1420
1. Remove the processor rear right or
left cover (see subsection 20.2.1). Installation
2. Remove the harness duct cover and Installation is essentially in the reverse
disconnect the pump connectors order of removal.
(PU740 to PU745).
• After installation, perform
“Replenisher Air Bleeding” (see
subsection 21.2.4) and
Joint Caps “Replenisher Pump Output
GD1416 Measurement/Setup” in menu
461 (see subsection 9.7.1).
Valves (2)
21.2.3 Replenisher Filter Case

Pump Connector Replacement
Harness Duct Cover
GD1418 Removal
3. Shut off the replenisher pump inlet 1. Remove the processor front cover
and outlet hoses with the pinchcocks. (see subsection 19.1.2).
4. Loosen the hose clamps and 2. Shut off the filter inlet and outlet hoses
disconnect the hoses. with the pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (2) 3. Loosen the two hose clamps and the

Hose Clamps (2) filter case.
GD1417 Hose Clamps (2)
Installation

order of removal.
21 NOTE: • Note the installation direction of

the valve and tighten the joint
21.2.1 cap securely.
21.2.2 • After installation, perform
Outlet Hose Inlet Hose
21.2.3 “Replenisher Pump Output
Measurement/Setup” in menu GD1419
Pinchcocks (2)
461 (see subsection 9.7.1).
Replenisher Filter Case
GD341
21-14
21.2 Replenisher Pump Section
Installation 7. Press the [MENU] key.
Installation is essentially in the reverse • “WARMING UP” appears on the

order or removal. display after “INITIALIZING”.
NOTE: • Connect the hose securely

• Do ”Processor I/O Check” in
menu 64B to operate the
appropriate replenisher pump
and make sure replenisher is
output from the replenisher
nozzle.
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Air

Bleeding
1. On the printer control panel, press the

[MENU] key five times.
0 [MENU]
1 LANGUAGE
2. Press the [▼] key six times.
0 [MENU]
7 INSTALLATION
3. Press the [s] key.
7 [INSTALLATION]
1 FREQ. SETTING ?
4. Press the [▼] key three times.
7 [INSTALLATION]
3 MIX REPL. ?
73 <MIX REPL.>
START ?

21
21.2.4
• Pump air bleeding starts.
73 <MIX REPL.>
MIXING *
7 [INSTALLATION]
4 PUMP AIR EXT. ?
21-15
22. DRYER SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................... 22-2
22.1 Dryer Rack ......................................................................................................... 22-3

22.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 22-3
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................. 22-3
22.1.3 Roller Drive Chain Replacement ..................................................................... 22-3
22.1.4 Sprocket Replacement .................................................................................... 22-4
22.1.5 Roller Replacement ......................................................................................... 22-5
22.1.6 Inlet Guide Replacement ................................................................................. 22-6
22.1.7 Inlet Paper Width Guide Replacement ............................................................ 22-6
22.1.8 Outlet Guide Replacement .............................................................................. 22-6
22.1.9 Lower Turn Guide Replacement ...................................................................... 22-7
22.1.10 Rack Upper Guide Replacement ..................................................................... 22-7
22.1.11 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Bracket (Brace Plate) Removal/Reinstallation ... 22-8
22.1.12 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement .................................................. 22-8
22.1.13 Paper Width Guide Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 22-9
22.1.14 Paper Width Guide Drive Gear Replacement .................................................. 22-10
22.1.15 Paper Width Guide Threaded Shaft Replacement .......................................... 22-10
22.1.16 Dryer Inlet Guide/Roller Replacement ............................................................. 22-11
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan .................................................................................. 22-12

22.2.1 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement .......................................... 22-12
22.2.2 Dryer Heater (H760)/Safety Thermostat (D760) Replacement ........................ 22-12
22.2.3 Dryer Fan (F760)/Duct Replacement ............................................................... 22-13
22
22-1
Parts Location
Dryer Inlet Guide

Squeegee Rack
Dryer Rack
Paper Width Guide

Drive Shaft
Fan Duct
Paper Width Guide

Drive Gear Bracket (Brace Plate)
22
Dryer Heater (H760) Dryer Fan (F760)
GD1497
22-2
22.1 Dryer Rack
22.1.1 Dryer Section Cover 3. Grasp the upper and lower insulated 22.1.3 Roller Drive Chain
Removal/Reinstallation stays and remove the dryer rack by Replacement
pulling it toward you.
Removal Dryer Rack Removal
Remove the two screws and then the Stays Loosen the chain tensioner and remove
dryer cover by raising it slightly. the drive chain.
Screws (2) Chain Tensioner
Stays
GD421
Reinstallation
Dryer Section Cover 1. Position the dryer rack and push it
GD1624 fully. Chain
GD425
Reinstallation 2. While pushing the top of the dryer
rack in, turn the knob until the paper
width guides are locked.
Installation
removal.
1. Install the drive chain with the closed
NOTE: If the paper width guide
end of the master link clip facing the
cannot be locked, refer to the
direction of rotation as shown.
“Paper Width Guide Timing
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Removal/ Adjustment” in the “Processor”
Reinstallation section (see subsection
19.3.10).
Removal
1. Remove the dryer section cover (see

subsection 22.1.1). Clip
2. Release the dryer rack lock pin.
Lock Pins
tion
Rota
Knob
n of
ctio
Dire
GD422
3. Secure the dryer rack by inserting the

lock pins.
GD420
22
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
GD424
Lock Pins
GD423
4. Install the dryer section cover (see

subsection 22.1.1).
22-3
22.1 Dryer Rack
2. Install the adjustment sprocket so that 3. Remove the E-ring and then the Installation
it is 6 to 7 mm from the side plate as driven sprocket.
shown in the figure below. Installation is essentially in the reverse
Driven Sprocket order of removal.
Adjustment Sprocket Screws (2)
NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to
the hex. socket head setscrew.
Thread locking agent:
• Install the sprocket to the
tensioner arm, noting its
direction, as shown in the figure
above.
• Align the hole of the sprocket
6~7mm
and collar with the hole of the
E-ring shaft, and secure them with the
hex. socket head setscrew.
GD430
GD426
3. Adjust the clearance between the 4. Remove the screw and then the
tensioner arm and spring.
stopper and the tensioner arm to
1 mm.
Spring
Screws (2)
GD429
Stopper 1mm
Screw Tensioner Arm
GD427
GD431

22.1.4 Sprocket Replacement tensioner sprocket from the arm.
Removal E-ring
1. Remove the chain (see subsection

22.1.3).
2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew Tensioner Arm

and remove the drive sprocket and
collar.

Sprocket
D280
22
22.1.4
Collars Drive Sprocket

GD428
22-4
22.1 Dryer Rack
22.1.5 Roller Replacement ■ Cream Rubber Roller ( ) 3. Remove the two E-rings, sprocket,
spring (L=115 mm), two bearings and
■ Roller Arrangement Removal the outside roller.
Black Hard 1. Remove: E-rings (2) Spring

Gray Hard Tube
Roller Roller
• chain (see subsection 22.1.3).
• inlet guide (see subsection 22.1.6).
Cream Rubber White Hard 2. Remove the E-ring, sprocket and

Roller Roller
bearing.
3. Remove the E-ring, bearing and roller.

Cream Rubber Black Hard
Roller Roller E-ring
Bearing
Sprocket Bearings (2)
Cream Rubber White Hard GD437
Roller Roller

guide plate.
Gray Hard Tube
Gray Hard Tube
Roller Screws (4)
Roller
GD461
Roller
Bearing
■ Black/Gray Hard Roller ( ) E-ring
Sprocket
Removal GD435
1. Remove the E-rings, gears, springs Installation

(L=115 mm) and bearings.
Gears (2) removal.
■ White Hard Roller ( ) GD1501
Removal 5. Remove the E-ring, pin, inside roller

and shaft.
22.1.3). Inside Roller
Shaft
2. Remove the two E-rings, gears, spring
(L=115 mm) and two bearings. Pin
Spring E-rings (2)
E-rings (2)
GD432
2. Remove the roller shafts and rollers.

E-ring
Shafts (2)
GD438
Installation
22
22.1.5
Gears (2) Installation is essentially in the reverse
GD436
order of removal.
NOTE: Align the hole of the roller with the

Rollers (2) hole of the shaft, and secure them
with the hex. socket head
setscrew.
GD433
Installation

removal.
22-5
22.1 Dryer Rack
■ Inlet Roller 22.1.6 Inlet Guide Installation

Replacement
removal.
Removal
22.1.3).
2. Remove the two E-rings, gears, spring
inlet upper guide. 22.1.7 Inlet Paper Width Guide
(L=95 mm) and two bearings. Replacement
Screws (4)
Spring Removal
1. Remove the inlet upper guide (see

subsection 22.1.6).

paper width guides through the lower
side as shown.
Screws (4)
Gears (2) E-rings (2)

GD439
3. Remove the shafts and the rollers. Inlet Upper Guide

GD434
Shafts (2)

inlet lower guide.
Screws (4)

Rollers (2) GD443
GD440
Installation
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse removal.
order of removal.
NOTE: Do not install the spring onto the 22.1.8 Outlet Guide
lower pair of rollers.
Replacement
Inlet Lower Guide Removal
GD441
3. Remove the E-ring, shaft and guide paper width guide through the lower
rollers. side as shown.
E-ring Screws (4)

22
22.1.6
22.1.7
22.1.8
Guide Roller
GD442 Paper Width Guides (2)
GD455
22-6
22.1 Dryer Rack
2. Remove the two screws and then the 7. Remove the E-ring, shaft and guide 3. Remove the twelve screws and then
brace plate. rollers. the three inside turn guides.
3. Remove the white hard roller (see E-ring Screws (6)

subsection 22.1.5).
Brace Plate
White Hard Roller
Guide Rollers Shaft

Screws (6) Inside Turn Guides (3)
GD459 GD453
Screws (2)
GD456 Install the parts in the reverse order of Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
stays.
22.1.9 Lower Turn Guide 22.1.10 Rack Upper Guide
guide plate. Replacement Replacement
Stays (2) Removal Removal

Guide Plate Screws (4)
1. Remove one of the outside lower turn 1. Remove the four screws and then the
rollers. upper plate.
2. Remove the twelve screws and then Screws (4)

the three outside turn guides.
Turn Roller Screws (6)
Screws (4)
GD457
6. Remove the eight screws and then

Upper Plate
the stainless plate from the guide.
GD454
Screws (8)
Screws (6)
gears.
E-ring
Outside Turn Guides (3) E-rings (2)
Gears (2)
GD452
Guide
22
GD458
22.1.9
22.1.10
D294
22-7
22.1 Dryer Rack
3. Remove the four screws and then the 22.1.11 Paper Width Guide 22.1.12 Paper Width Guide
upper guide. Drive Gear Bracket Drive Gear
Screws (4) (Brace Plate) Removal/ Replacement
Reinstallation
Removal
Removal
Remove the six screws and then the drive gear bracket (brace plate) (see
gear bracket with the gear shaft bracket. subsection 22.1.11).
Screws (6) Brace Plate 2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and gear
shaft from the brace plate.
Upper Guide Bearing
D295
4. Remove the E-ring, roller shaft and

ten rollers.
Rollers (10)
E-ring
Gear Shaft
Gear Shaft Bracket
3565 E-ring
D300
Reinstallation
3. Loosen the hex. socket head
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse setscrews and remove the spur and
order of removal. bevel gears.
GD1502
1. Place the paper width guides in the Spur Gear
5. Remove the four screws and then the widest position, face the hex. socket
Hex. Socket Head
lower guide. head setscrews on the bevel gears to Setscrews (2)
the front, and install the gear bracket
Lower Guide and brace plate.
2. Make sure that the “ ” marks on the

bracket gears are aligned.
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews
Bevel Gear
D299
4. Remove the E-ring and then the knob.

Screws (4)
GD1503 5. Remove the E-ring and the bearing,
collar and drive gear shaft.
Installation
E-ring
Install the parts in the reverse order of Knob
E-ring
removal. “ ” marks
22 D298
22.1.11
22.1.12
Collar
Bearing
Drive Gear Shaft
D301
22-8
22.1 Dryer Rack
6. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew 3. Align the “ ” marked teeth between Reinstallation
and remove the drive gear from the the “ ” mark.
shaft. Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse
“ ” marks order of removal.
7. Remove the two pins from the drive
gear. NOTE: Perform the paper width guide
phase adjustment.
Pins
<Paper Width Guide Phase
Adjustment>
1. Make sure the inside width of each

paper width guide is as follows.
Outlet side: 188 mm
D305

Hex. Socket
Head Setscrew Drive Gear Drive Shaft Removal/
D302
Reinstallation
188 mm
8. Remove the E-ring and then the Removal

counter-gear.
1. Remove the eight screws and the
Counter-gear shaft and brackets.
Brackets (4)
Screws (8)
GD448
Inlet side: 191 mm
E-ring
D303
191mm
Shaft
Installation

order of removal.
GD449
1. Apply thread locking agent to the hex. GD444
socket head setscrews. 2. Face the hex. socket head setscrews
on the gear up as shown below, and
Thread locking agent: LOCTITE425 or align the “ ” marked teeth between
equivalent the “ ” mark.
2. Align the gear hole with the hole in the Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
shaft and secure them with the hex.
socket head setscrew.
22
22.1.13
“ ” marks
GD450
D304
22-9
22.1 Dryer Rack
3. Engage the bevel gears with the hex. Installation 4. Remove the screw securing the stay.
socket head setscrews facing as
shown below. Installation is essentially in the reverse 5. Loosen the two hex. socket head
order of removal. setscrews and remove the bevel gear,
poly-slider, bearing and threaded shaft
1. Apply thread locking agent to the hex. bracket.
socket head setscrews.
Gear Shaft
Thread locking agent: LOCTITE425 or Screw Bearing
equivalent
2. Align the hole of the shaft with the

hole in the bevel gear.
Drive Shaft Bevel Gear

Bevel Gear on Threaded Shaft Poly-slider
GD451
GD445

6. Remove the four screws and threaded
Drive Gear shaft from the guide transfer plates.
3575
Replacement
Screws (4)
Removal
1. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew Threaded Shaft
and remove the bevel gear. Replacement
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and
Removal
bracket from the shaft.
1. Remove:
Shaft
Bearing • paper width guide drive shaft (see
subsection 22.1.13). Guide Transfer Plate
• cream rubber roller (see subsection
GD447
22.1.5).
• outlet side paper width guide (see
subsection 22.1.8).
Installation
2. Remove the two E-rings, poly-sliders Installation is essentially in the reverse

E-ring order of removal.
Bracket and bearings securing the threaded
Bevel Gear shaft.
1. Align the “ ” mark on the nut with the
3574 “ ” mark on the threaded shaft and
3. Remove the screw securing the stay.
screw the nut onto the shaft.
Screw
22
22.1.14 Bearings (2)
22.1.15 E-rings (2)
“ ” marks
Poly-sliders (2)
3580
GD446
2. Install the threaded shaft into the
plates with the nuts at the narrowest
position.
3. Perform the paper width guide phase

22-10
22.1 Dryer Rack
22.1.16 Dryer Inlet Guide/Roller

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.2).

• squeegee rack.

dryer inlet guide.
Screws (2)
Dryer Inlet Guide

GD460

guide.
Guide
Screws (4)
GD462
4. Remove the E-ring, roller shaft, rollers

and collars.
Roller
E-ring
22
22.1.16
Shaft
GD463
Installation

removal.
22-11
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan
22.2.1 Dryer Temperature 22.2.2 Dryer Heater (H760)/ 5. Withdraw the harness to the heater
Sensor (TS760) Safety Thermostat side.
Replacement (D760) Replacement 6. Remove the three screws and then
the heater.
Removal Removal
Harness
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
and the built-in circuit breaker and the and the built-in circuit breaker and the
main power supply OFF. main power supply OFF.
• dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.2). • dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.2).
• processor control section cover • processor control section cover
(see subsection 24.2.1). (see subsection 24.2.1).
• processor control section side
3. Withdraw the dryer temperature cover (see subsection 24.2.3).
sensor connector (TS760) from the Heater (H760)
processor control section, and 3. Disconnect the dryer heater
GD602
disconnect the connector. connectors (H7-1, H7-2, H7-3) and
safety thermostat connector (D760) at
4. Remove the screw and then the the processor control section. 7. Unfasten the two strings and remove
sensor bracket. the two screws, fastening terminals
Connector (D760) and the safety thermostat.
Safety Thermostat
Strings (2)
Screws (2)
Connectors (3)
GD600
Connector 4. Remove the two screws and then the Fasten Terminals (2)
GD598 heater harness cover. GD603
5. Remove the screw and then the dryer Installation

temperature sensor (TS760) from the
bracket. Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Screws (2)
22 Heater Harness Cover

22.2.1 GD601
22.2.2 Sensor (TS760) Screw
GD599
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Take care not to hit the tip of the

sensor on the duct when installing
the sensor because it is easy to
damage.
22-12
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan
22.2.3 Dryer Fan (F760)/Duct 5. Loosen the two screws, remove the 10. Withdraw the harness between the
Replacement two other screws, and then remove fan duct and the PAC21 circuit board.
the dryer fan with the bracket.
11. Withdraw the harness between the
Removal fan duct and the side plate.
12. Remove the ten screws and then the
fan duct.
2. Remove:
• dryer section cover (see subsection Bracket

22.1.1).
Screws (2) (Remove)
(see subsection 24.2.1). Screws (2) (Loosen)
• processor control section side
GD606
capacitor.
the control section lower cover.
7. Remove the four bolts and then the
Control Section Lower Cover
bracket from the dryer fan.
Capacitor
Screw
Screws (10) Fan Duct
GD609
Installation

removal.
Screws (3)
GD604
4. Disconnect the dryer fan connector

(F760).
Bolts (4) Bracket
Connector (F760) GD607
8. Open the four harness clamps.

harness cover.
Harness Clamps (4) Screws (2)
GD605
22
22.2.3
Harness Cover
GD608
22-13
23. CUTTER AND SORTER
Parts Location ................................................................................................... 23-3
23.1 Cutter Section .................................................................................................... 23-4

23.1.1 Cutter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 23-4
23.1.2 Outlet Cover and Inside Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................... 23-4
23.1.3 Cutter Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 23-5
23.1.4 Cutter Entry Paper Sensor (D770) Replacement ............................................ 23-5
23.1.5 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Open/Close Sensor (D771/D772) Replacement ...... 23-5
23.1.6 Cutter Loop Sensor (D773P)/Sensor LED (D773L) Replacement ................... 23-6
23.1.7 Loop Guide Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................... 23-6
23.1.8 Cutter Loop Guide Motor (M770) Replacement ............................................... 23-7
23.1.9 Loop Guide Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 23-8
23.1.10 Loop Guide Plate Replacement ....................................................................... 23-9
23.1.11 Cutter Loop Guide Plate Adjustment ............................................................... 23-9
23.1.12 Cutter Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D774) Replacement ......... 23-9
23.1.13 Paper Leading End Sensor (D775) Replacement ........................................... 23-10
23.1.14 Paper Width Guide Belt Replacement ............................................................. 23-10
23.1.15 Paper Width Guide Belt Tension Adjustment ................................................... 23-10
23.1.16 Cutter Paper Width Guide Motor (M771) Replacement ................................... 23-11
23.1.17 Paper Width Guide Replacement .................................................................... 23-11
23.1.18 Paper Width Guide Treaded Shaft Replacement ............................................. 23-12
23.1.19 Cutter Home Position Sensor (D776) Replacement ........................................ 23-13
23.1.20 Cutter Motor (M773) Replacement .................................................................. 23-13
23.1.21 Cutter Replacement ......................................................................................... 23-14
23.1.22 Punch Hole Sensor (D777P/D784P) Replacement ......................................... 23-15
23.1.23 Punch Hole Sensor LED (D777L/D784L) Replacement .................................. 23-15
23.1.24 Punch Hole Sensor (D777/D784) Gain Value Adjustment ............................... 23-16
23.1.25 Feed Roller Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................... 23-16
23.1.26 Feed Roller Drive Belt Tension Adjustment ..................................................... 23-16
23.1.27 Cutter Feed Motor (M772) Replacement ......................................................... 23-17
23.1.28 Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 23-17
23.1.29 Paper Feed Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 23-18
23.1.30 Outlet Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 23-18
23.1.31 Anti-static Brush Replacement ........................................................................ 23-18
23.1.32 Cutter Motor Driver Replacement .................................................................... 23-19
23.1.33 Cutter Exit Guide Replacement ....................................................................... 23-19
23.1.34 Cutter Exit Guide Home Position Sensor (D778) Replacement ...................... 23-20
23.1.35 Cutter Exit Guide Motor (M774) Replacement ................................................. 23-20 23
23.1.36 PWC01 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 23-21
23.2 Horizontal Sorter ............................................................................................... 23-22

23.2.1 Horizontal Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 23-22
23.2.2 Large-size Tray Transfer Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................... 23-22
23.2.3 Horizontal Sorter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 23-23
23.2.4 Horizontal Sorter Stop Position Sensor (D779) Replacement ......................... 23-23
23-1
23.2.5 Horizontal Motor Drive Motor (M775) Replacement ........................................ 23-23

23.2.6 Chain Replacement ......................................................................................... 23-23
23.2.7 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement .................................................................. 23-24
23.2.8 Driven Sprocket Replacement ......................................................................... 23-24
23.2.9 Chain Tension Adjustment ............................................................................... 23-24
23.2.10 Large-size Tray Waiting Sensor (D783) Replacement ..................................... 23-24
23.2.11 Large-size Tray Set Sensor (D785) Replacement ........................................... 23-25
23.3 Slant Sorter ........................................................................................................ 23-26

23.3.1 Slant Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 23-26
23.3.2 Slant Sorter Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... 23-28
23.3.3 Slant Sorter Stop Position Sensor (D780) Replacement ................................. 23-28
23.3.4 Slant Sorter Drive Motor (M776) Replacement ................................................ 23-28
23.3.5 Sorter Drive Switch Replacement .................................................................... 23-29
23.3.6 Sorter Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 23-29
23.3.7 Sorter Full Sensor (D781) Replacement .......................................................... 23-29
23.3.8 Sorter Chain/Sprocket Replacement ............................................................... 23-30
23.3.9 Sorter Chain Tension Adjustment .................................................................... 23-31
23
23-2
Parts Location
Cutter Section
Large-size Tray
Horizontal Sorter Slant Sorter
GD1585
23
23-3
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.1 Cutter Cover Removal/ 5. Disconnect the sorter cable connector. 23.1.2 Outlet Cover and Inside
Reinstallation Cover Removal/
Sorter Cable Connector
Reinstallation
Removal
Removal
and set the built-in circuit breaker and 1. Remove:
• cutter covers (see subsection
2. Remove the cutting waste container. 23.1.1).
• horizontal sorter (see subsection
Cutting Waste Container 23.2.1).
Cutter Lower Cover 2. Remove the two screws and then the
GD217 exit guide.
6. Remove the cutter lower cover. 3. Remove the five screws and then the
outlet cover.
Screws (2)
GD215
3. Open the clamp and disconnect the

sorter cable connector from the cutter.

Cutter Lower Cover
GD216
Exit Guide
Reinstallation Screws (5) Outlet Cover
GD227
removal.
inside cover.
Screws (2)
Clamp
GD214

cutter covers.
Screws (2)
Inside Cover
GD228
Reinstallation

removal.
23
23.1.1
23.1.2
Cutter Cover
GD213
23-4
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.3 Cutter Unit Removal/ Reinstallation 23.1.5 Cutter Loop Guide

Reinstallation Plate Open/Close
order of removal.
Sensor (D771/D772)
Removal Replacement
NOTE: Always install the toothed washer
1. Remove the cutter covers (see Removal
on the grounding wire screw.
subsection 23.1.1).
1. Remove the outlet and inside covers
2. Disconnect the PWC8 and PWC9 (see subsection 23.1.2).
connectors from the PWC01 circuit 23.1.4 Cutter Entry Paper
board. Sensor (D770) 2. Remove the two screws and then the
Replacement sensor bracket.
3. Disconnect the D852 connector.
Removal Screws (2)

grounding wires.
1. Remove the outlet and inside covers
NOTE: Take care not to drop the (see subsection 23.1.2).
toothed washer.
PWC01 Circuit Board sensor.
Screw/Toothed Washer
3. Disconnect the sensor connector
(D770).
Sensor (D770) Sensor Bracket

GD242
3. Disconnect the sensor connector.

D852 sensor.
Connector
PWC8 Connector Sensor
PWC9 Connector Grounding Wire Screws (2) Sensor
Harness Clamps Screw (D772)
(D771)
GD218
D770 Connector
Screw GD262
Installation

removal.
Screw
Connector
Connector
GD243
Installation
Grounding Wires (2)
5. Remove the four screws and then the perform the cutter loop guide plate
cutter unit. adjustment (see subsection 23.1.11).
23
23.1.3
23.1.4
23.1.5
Screws (4)
GD220
23-5
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.6 Cutter Loop Sensor 6. Remove the two screws and then the 23.1.7 Loop Guide Drive Belt
(D773P)/Sensor LED sensor cover. Replacement
(D773L) Replacement Screws (2)
Removal
Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove the cutter covers (see
subsection 23.1.1). • cutter covers (see subsection
23.1.1).
2. Remove the two screws and then the • outlet and inside covers (see
sensor cover. subsection 23.1.2).
• horizontal sorter (see subsection
Sensor Cover Screws (2) 23.2.1).
2. Loosen the two screws and then the

Sensor Cover
tension roller.
GD224
3. Remove the belt.
7. Remove the two screws, sensor LED,
spacer, filter and lens. Belt
Screws (2)
GD221
Spacer LED
sensor (D773P). Filter
Lens
Tension Roller Screws (2)

(Loosen)
GD244
Installation
GD225
1. Install the belt over the pulleys while
8. Cut the two cord ties. keeping the loop guide closed.
9. Open the harness clamp and 2. Adjust the belt to the specified tension
Sensor (D773P) Screws (2) disconnect the PWC10 connector by moving the tension roller, and then
from the PWC01 circuit board. tighten the screws.
GD222
PWC01 Circuit Board Belt tension: 200±10 g/3 mm
4. Cut the cord tie. Harness Clamp
Tension Gauge
sensor case.
Cord Ties PWC10 Connector

23 GD226
Screws (2)
23.1.6 Screws (2) Sensor (D773L) Case Installation Tension Roller
23.1.7
GD245
GD223
removal.
23-6
23.1 Cutter Section
3. Remove the two screws and then the 7. Turn the loop guide shaft so that the 23.1.8 Cutter Loop Guide
lower resin bracket. loop guide touches the loop guide Motor (M770)
plate.
Replacement
Loop Guide Shaft
Removal
1. Remove:

23.1.1).
• outlet and inside covers (see
subsection 23.1.2).
Screws (2) Resin Bracket 2. Remove the two screws and then the
GD1597 Loop Guide Plate sensor bracket.
GD248
4. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew Screws (2)
securing the pulley using a 1.5-mm 8. Tighten the hex. socket head
Allen wrench. setscrew securing the pulley.
Sensor Bracket
GD242
3. Loosen the screw and move the cam

guide arm.
GD246
GD249
4. Open the harness clamp and remove
5. Remove the two screws and then the the connector (M770).
9. Install the sensor bracket.
sensor bracket.
Connector
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of Screw
Screws (2)
removal.
Sensor Bracket
Cam Guide Arm
GD242
GD250
6. Position the cam guide arm to open

dead center by turning the cam by
hand.
Cam
23
23.1.8
To Open Dead Center

GD247
23-7
23.1 Cutter Section
5. Remove the two screws and then the Installation 4. Remove the PWC01 circuit board
motor and bracket. from the four circuit board posts.
Bracket Motor (M770) order of removal.
Screws (2)
NOTE: • Align the hex. socket head
setscrew with the D-cut surface
on the motor shaft.
• Set the end surface of the cam
at a distance of 2.5 mm from the
end surface of the motor shaft.
Cam D-cut Surface
Circuit Board
PWC02 Circuit Board Posts (4)
GD251 GD255
6. Loosen the two hex. socket head D-cut Surface 5. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft,
setscrews and remove the cam. roller bracket and cam guide arm.
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2) Shaft

Cam
2.5mm
Motor
GD254
23.1.9 Loop Guide Roller

Replacement
Removal E-ring
GD252 GD257
1. Remove:
7. Remove the two screws and then the 6. Remove the E-ring and disassemble
bracket from the motor. • cutter covers (see subsection the roller bracket.
23.1.1).
Bracket Motor (M770) • outlet and inside covers (see Bracket E-rings (2)
subsection 23.1.2).
• loop guide drive belt (see
subsection 23.1.7)
2. Remove the screw securing the cam

guide arm.
3. Remove the screw securing the roller

bracket.
Shaft Rollers (2)
Screws (2) Screws (2) Screw
GD258
GD253
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: • Refer to subsection 23.1.7 for

23 Roller Bracket
Cam Guide Arm details on how to install the loop
guide drive belt.
GD256 • After installation, adjust the
23.1.9
cutter loop guide plate (see
23-8
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.10 Loop Guide Plate 23.1.11 Cutter Loop Guide 23.1.12 Cutter Paper Width
Replacement Plate Adjustment Guide Home Position
Sensor (D774)
Removal 1. Remove the cutter covers (see Replacement
subsection 23.1.1).
1. Remove: Removal
2. Pass a 3 mm Allen. wrench through
• cutter covers (see subsection the hole of the bracket and loop guide 1. Remove the cutter covers (see
23.1.1). shaft. subsection 23.1.1).
• loop guide drive belt (see
subsection 23.1.7). 2. Disconnect the sensor connector and
remove the screw and then the sensor
2. Remove the circuit-board-side E-ring,
(D774) from the bracket.
bearing and then the shaft.
Sensor Connector
Screw
Shaft
Allen Wrench (3 mm) Loop Guide Shaft
GD260
Bearing 3. Make sure the tabs on the loop guide

E-ring
plate touch at the guide as shown.
GD259
NOTE: If necessary, remove and Bracket Sensor (D774)

3. Release the spring ends from the reinstall the loop guide drive GD263
cotter pins. belt (see subsection 23.1.7).
Installation
4. Remove the cotter pins and E-ring. 4. Loosen the locknuts and adjust the
loop guide plate height by turning the Install the parts in the reverse order of
5. Loosen the two screws and then two fine-adjustment screws evenly. removal.
remove the guide plate, spring and
roller from the shaft. Clockwise: high
Counterclockwise: low
Screws (2)
Guide Plate Roller
Fine-adjustment Screws (2)
To Low To High
Spring
E-rings (2) GD261
Cotter Pin
A239
5. Check the open and close operation
of the loop guide plate by performing
Installation the I/O check (menu 46B).
Installation is essentially in the reverse 6. Install the cutter covers.

order of removal.
NOTE: • Refer to subsection 23.1.7 for

23
details on how to install the loop 23.1.10
guide drive belt.
23.1.11
• After installation, adjust the
cutter loop guide plate (see 23.1.12
23-9
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.13 Paper Leading End Installation 23.1.15 Paper Width Guide Belt
Sensor (D775) Tension Adjustment
Removal subsection 23.1.1).
1. Remove: 23.1.14 Paper Width Guide Belt 2. Loosen the two screws securing the
Replacement paper width guide motor.
23.1.1). 3. Adjust the belt tension by moving the
Removal
• outlet and inside covers (see motor, and then tighten the screws.
subsection 23.1.2). 1. Remove the cutter covers (see
Belt tension: 200±10 g/3 mm
subsection 23.1.1).
2. Turn the pulley and make the paper
width guides wider. Paper Width Guide Motor
paper width guide motor.
3. Disconnect the connector and open
the three harness clamps securing the 3. Remove the belt.
sensor harness.
Screws (2) (Loosen) Tension Gauge

GD279
Connector (D775)
Paper Width Guide Belt 4. Install the removed parts.
Harness Clamps (3) Screws (2) (Loosen)
GD264 GD278
4. Remove the screw and then the Installation

sensor bracket.
order of removal. After installation, adjust
the belt tension (see subsection 23.1.15).
GD265
5. Loosen the locking tabs and then

remove the sensor from the bracket.
Bracket
23
23.1.13
23.1.14
23.1.15
Sensor (D775)
GD266
23-10
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.16 Cutter Paper Width 23.1.17 Paper Width Guide Installation

Guide Motor (M771) Replacement
Removal
Removal NOTE: • Make sure the roller position is
correct.
1. Remove: subsection 23.1.1).
following adjustments.
• cutter covers (see subsection 2. Remove the four screws and then the
23.1.1). upper and lower resin brackets.
1. Rotate the pulley until the paper width
• outlet and inside covers (see guides are in the widest position, and
subsection 23.1.2). Screws (4)
then turn it back for one turn.
2. Disconnect the motor harness

connector (M771).
3. Open the three harness clamps.
Harness Clamps (3)
Resin Brackets (2)

GD282 Pulley
GD284
3. Remove the four hex. socket head
screws using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench
and then the paper width guides. 2. Loosen the screws securing the paper
width guides with a 2.5-mm Allen.
Paper Width Guides wrench, and then adjust the distance
from the side plate of the cutter
M771 Connector bracket to the outside surface of the
GD280 paper width guides to the specified
value.
motor. Distance Between Side Plate of
Bracket to Outside Surface of Paper
5. Remove the E-ring and then the Width Guides: 50±0.25 mm
pulley. Difference Between Top and Bottom:
±0.2 mm
Motor (M771) Pulley Paper Width Guides (2)
Hex. Socket Head Screws (4) 50±0.25 mm 50±0.25 mm
GD283
Screws (2) E-ring

GD281
50±0.25 mm 50±0.25 mm
GD285
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse 23

the paper width guide belt tension (see 23.1.16
subsection 23.1.15). 23.1.17
23-11
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.18 Paper Width Guide 4. Remove the two screws and then the 8. Remove the guide shaft and then the
Treaded Shaft stainless guide plate. two bushings.
Replacement Stainless Guide Plate Bushings
Removal
Guide Shaft
1. Remove:
• cutter covers (see

subsection23.1.1).
• outlet and inside covers (see
subsection 23.1.2).
Screws (2) GD288
23.1.17).
• cutter (see subsection 23.1.21). GD293
9. Remove the shaft and then the two
2. Remove the two screws and then the 5. Remove the screw and then the pulley guide holders and springs.
cutter loop sensor bracket. from the shaft.
Springs (2)
Cutter Loop Sensor Bracket 6. Remove the two E-rings.
Pulley
Guide Holders (2) Shaft

Screws (2)
GD292
GD289
Screw E-rings (2)
Installation
3. Remove the eight screws and then GD286
the cutter bracket.
7. Remove the two E-rings, bearing and order of removal.
Screws (8) Cutter Bracket then the threaded shaft at the circuit-
board side.
NOTE: • Place the treaded shaft in the
narrowest position, and install it
E-rings (2)
with the screw hole facing up.
on
siti
st Po
we
rro
Na
To
GD272
Screw Hole
Threaded Shaft Bearing GD291
GD287
23
23.1.18
23-12
23.1 Cutter Section
• Align the hole in the pulley with 23.1.20 Cutter Motor (M773) 6. Remove the three screws and then
the screw hole in the shaft, and Replacement the cutter motor bracket.
tighten the screw while pressing
the pulley against the shaft as
shown below.
Removal
Screw Pulley 1. Remove the outlet and inside covers


the sensor.
3. Remove the PWC01 circuit board

from the four circuit board posts.
Screws (3)
Circuit Board Posts (4)
GD233
Connector (D776)

GD296 setscrews using a 2-mm Allen wrench
and then remove the cam and key.

23.1.19 Cutter Home Position
Sensor (D776) Cam
Replacement
Removal
PWC01 Circuit Board
1. Remove:
GD230

23.1.1). 4. Disconnect the motor connector from
• outlet and inside covers (see the driver circuit board.
2. Disconnect the connector from the 8. Remove the four screws and then the
sensor (D776). motor from the bracket.
3. Remove the screw and then the Screws (4)

sensor through the cutter bracket
hole.
Sensor (D776)
Motor Connector (CN2)

GD231
5. Open the harness clamp securing the

cutter motor harness.
Motor (M773)
Bracket
Cutter Motor Harness
GD235
Sensor Connector Screw

GD229
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of 23

removal.
23.1.19
23.1.20
Harness Clamp
GD232
23-13
23.1 Cutter Section
Installation 23.1.21 Cutter Replacement 6. Remove the two screws and then the
guide plate.
Installation is essentially in the reverse Removal
order of removal. 7. Remove the hex. socket head bolt
1. Remove the cutter covers (see and cam guide arm using a 3-mm
NOTE: • Face the round side of the key subsection23.1.1). Allen wrench.
toward the motor.
• Install the cam so that the motor Screws (2)
shaft end protrudes 4.0 mm from retaining plates.
the cam end surface and tighten
the hex. socket head setscrews. 3. Move the roller to the outlet side.
Motor Shaft
Retaining Plates (2)
Key
Hex. Socket Screws (2)
Head Setscrew
Cam Hex. Socket Head Bolt

4.0 mm Cam Guide Arm
GD270
Installation

GD236 order of removal. After installation, check
the cut angle and adjust it if necessary.
• Align the cam roller with the Roller
groove on the cam guide arm.
GD267
• Install the motor so that its ! CAUTION
harness faces down. • Take care not to touch the blade
• Align the hole in the bracket with surfaces. This can cause corrosion.
cutter stay plate and then the cutter.
the positioning boss on the side • Take care not to insert your fingers
plate. Cutter Stay Plate between the cutter’s rotary blade and
Screws (2)
the flat blade.
Cam Roller
NOTE: • Align the cam roller with the
groove on the cam guide arm.
• Align the holes of the cutter stay
plate with the positioning bosses
and cam of the cutter bracket,
then tighten the screw.
Cutter Bracket
Cutter Stay Plate
GD268
Cam Guide Arm ! CAUTION

Positioning Boss
Cam
Take care not to insert your fingers
GD237
between the cutter’s rotary blade and
the flat blade.

the cutter retaining plate from the
cutter.
Positioning Boss
Cutter
Cam Guide Arm
Screws (3) Cam Roller
23 GD271
Cutter Stay Plate

23.1.21
GD269
23-14
23.1 Cutter Section
<Cut Angle Adjustment> Installation 4. Disconnect the PWC11 and PWC12

connectors from the PWC01 circuit
1. Remove the cutter cover (see Installation is essentially in the reverse board.
subsection 23.1.1). order of removal.
PWC12 Connector
2. Adjust the cut angle by rotating the NOTE: • Install the cord ties so that they
cam. do not interfere with the cutter
blade.
Cam • See subsection 23.1.20 for
details on how to install the
Screws (2) cutter motor.
punch hole sensor gain value
23.1.24).
PWC11 Connector
23.1.23 Punch Hole Sensor GD273
LED (D777L/D784L)
5. Cut the three cord ties.
GD1598 Replacement
Difference between the right-hand and 6. Remove the four screws and then the
Removal two LEDs (D777L/D784L).
left-hand sides when rotating the cam for
90 degrees:
1. Remove: Sensor LED Sensor LED
Paper Width Difference (D777L) (D784L)
• cutter covers (see subsection Screws (2)
89 mm 0.3 mm
23.1.1).
127 mm 0.4 mm • outlet and inside covers (see
210 mm 0.6 mm subsection 23.1.2).
• cutter blade (see subsection
3. Tighten the two screws. 23.1.21).
4. Install the cutter cover. 2. Remove the eight screws securing the
cutter bracket.
Screws (8) Cutter Bracket

23.1.22 Punch Hole Sensor Screws (2) Cord Ties (3)
(D777P/D784P) GD275
Replacement
Installation
Removal
1. Remove the cutter motor bracket (see order of removal.
NOTE: • Install the cord ties so that they
2. Cut the two cord ties. do not interfere with the cutter
GD272
blade.
3. Remove the four screws and then the • See subsection 23.1.20 for
3. Open the six harness clamps securing details on how to install the
sensor (D777P/D784P).
the upper sensor harness.
cutter motor.
Screws (4) Cord Ties (2) • After installation, perform the
punch hole sensor gain value
23.1.24).
23
23.1.22
Harness Clamps (6) 23.1.23
Sensor (D777P) Sensor (D784P) GD274
GD277
23-15
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.24 Punch Hole Sensor 6. Turn VR2 and adjust it so that the 23.1.26 Feed Roller Drive Belt
(D777/D784) Gain Value voltage between TP2 and TP8 (SE Tension Adjustment
GND) on the PWC01 circuit board is
Adjustment 0.9V, then pull out the paper and
make sure that the voltage without
1. Remove the cutter covers (see subsection 23.1.1).
paper is more than 3.5V.
subsection 23.1.1).
Voltage between TP1 and TP8
2. Disconnect the PWC6 connector from cutter feed motor.
(SE GND): 0.9V (D777)
the PWC01 circuit board. Voltage between TP2 and TP8
3. Adjust the tension by moving the
(SE GND): 0.9V (D784)
PWC01 Circuit Board motor, and then tighten the two
VR1 VR2 screws.
Belt tension: 1000 g±20 g/3 mm
4. Install the cutter covers.
Feed Roller Drive Belt

Motor (M772)
PWC6 Connector
GD318
GD316
7. Remove the sheet of white paper

3. Turn ON the main power supply, and between the punch hole sensors.
set the built-in circuit breaker and the
power switch to ON. 8. Install the removed parts.
! CAUTION Tension Gauge Screws (2)

The steps below are performed with GD239
the power ON. Take care to avoid 23.1.25 Feed Roller Drive Belt
short-circuiting. Replacement
4. Insert a sheet of white (unexposed Removal
and developed) paper between the
punch hole sensors (D777P, D784P) 1. Remove the cutter covers (see
and (D777L, D784L). subsection 23.1.1).

cutter feed motor and remove the belt.
Feed Roller Drive Belt
Paper
GD317
5. Turn VR1 and adjust it so that the

voltage between TP1 and TP8 (SE
GND) on the PWC01 circuit board is Screws (2)
0.9V, then pull out the paper and GD238
make sure that the voltage without
23 paper is more than 3.5V. Installation
23.1.24
23.1.25 order of removal. After installation, adjust
23.1.26 the belt tension (see subsection 23.1.26).
23-16
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.27 Cutter Feed Motor 23.1.28 Feed Roller 5. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
(M772) Replacement Replacement using a 2-mm Allen wrench and then
remove the collar, bearing and feed
roller.
Removal Removal
Feed Roller Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
• cutter covers (see subsection • cutter covers (see subsection

23.1.1). 23.1.1).
• outlet and inside covers (see • outlet and inside covers (see
• feed roller drive belt (see • paper width guide belt (see
2. Open the two harness clamps and 23.1.17).
disconnect the motor connector. • cutter (see subsection 23.1.21).
Bearing Collar
Harness Clamps (2) 2. Remove the two screws and then the
GD294
cutter loop sensor bracket.
Cutter Loop Sensor Bracket Installation

order of removal.

setscrew while pressing the collar
against the shaft as shown below.
Screws (2)
Motor Connector GD289
GD240
3. Remove the ten screws and then the
3. Remove the two screws and then the cutter bracket.
motor.
Screws (8) Cutter Bracket
Motor (M772) Screws (2) Collar
GD295
GD272

GD241 stainless guide plate.
Installation Stainless Guide Plate

the belt tension (see subsection 23.1.26).
23
23.1.27
23.1.28
Screws (2)
GD293
23-17
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.29 Paper Feed Roller Installation 5. Remove the cutter (see subsection
Replacement 23.1.21).
order of removal. 6. Remove the E-ring, bearing and then
Removal the lower roller.
NOTE: • After installing the bracket, hook
1. Remove the cutter covers (see Lower Roller
the springs onto the shaft rollers. Bearing
subsection 23.1.1).
• After installation, operate the
cutter feed motor by performing
2. Remove the three hex. socket head
the I/O check (menu 46B), and
bolts using a 3-mm Allen wrench and
check that the belt does not ride
then remove the feed belt bracket.
up onto the roller flange.
Hex. Socket Head Bolts (3)
23.1.30 Outlet Nip Roller

Replacement
Removal E-ring
GD311
1. Remove:
Installation
23.1.1).
• feed roller drive belt (see
Feed Belt Bracket removal.
GD298

3. Remove the two springs from the roller retaining plates. 23.1.31 Anti-static Brush
roller shaft.
Replacement
3. Remove the upper roller from the
4. Loosen the four roller shaft screws. springs.
Removal
Springs (2)
Screws (2) Upper Roller
1. Remove the cutter cover (see
subsection 23.1.1).
2. Open the harness clamp and remove

the screw and then the anti-static
brush grounding wires.
Screw
Retaining Plates (2)
Shaft Screws (4) Springs (2)

(Loosen)
GD309
3051
4. Remove the E-rings, bearings and
then the upper roller from the shaft.
5. Remove the rollers and feed belt from
the bracket. Upper Roller
Anti-static Brush Grounding Wires (2)
Feed Belt Bracket
Bearings (2) GD1600
23
23.1.29 E-rings (2)
23.1.30 GD310
23.1.31 Rollers (3)
3052
23-18
23.1 Cutter Section
3. Loosen the two screws and then 5. Disconnect the wires and jumper wire 23.1.33 Cutter Exit Guide
remove the anti-static brush. from the motor driver terminal table. Replacement
Screws (2) (Loosen) Anti-static Brush Installation
Removal
order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, measure the
voltage between terminals 2 and 5
2. Disconnect the PWC1 and M401
(GND) on the motor driver
connectors.
terminal table.
3. Open the two harness clamps.
Specified voltage: 3.85± 0.05V
GD308 Harness Clamps (2)

If necessary, turn VR and adjust it
so that the voltage is within the
Installation specified range.

removal.
23.1.32 Cutter Motor Driver

Replacement
Removal
PWC1 Connector M401 Connector
GD299
subsection 23.1.1). VR
2. Disconnect the motor connector from GD315 exit guide.
the motor driver.
Screws (2)
3. Remove the screw and then

disconnect wires 1, 2, 3, 9 and 10
from the terminal.
Screws (5)
Exit Guide
GD300
Installation

Motor Connector Motor Driver
removal.
GD313

motor driver.
Motor Driver
23
23.1.32
23.1.33
Screws (4)
GD314
23-19
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.34 Cutter Exit Guide 23.1.35 Cutter Exit Guide 7. Remove the two screws and then the
Home Position Sensor Motor (M774) guide and slider.
(D778) Replacement Replacement Screws (2)
Removal Removal
1. Remove the cutter exit guide (see 1. Remove the cutter exit guide (see
2. Remove the screw and then the lower 2. Remove the screw and then the lower
cover. cover.
Exit Guide
Screw Screw
Lower Cover Lower Cover
GD305
8. Remove the hex. socket head

setscrew using a 1.5 mm Allen wrench
and then the detecting plate.
GD301 GD301
3. Cut the cord tie. 3. Cut the cord tie.
4. Remove the two screws and then the 4. Remove the two screws and then the
motor cover. motor cover.
Detecting
5. Remove the two screws and then the 5. Remove the two screws and then the Plate
bracket from the guide. bracket from the guide. GD306
Bracket Bracket 9. Remove the two screws and then the

motor and spacer.
Motor
Spacer
Screws (2) Cord Tie Screws (2) Cord Tie

Motor Cover Motor Cover Screws (2)
GD302 GD302 GD307
6. Remove the two screws and the 6. Remove the E-ring and then the link. Installation
sensor.
E-ring Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Place the end surface of the

detecting plate so that it is flush
Sensor (D778) with the end of the motor shaft,
and tighten the hex. socket head
23 setscrew.
23.1.34 Link
23.1.35 Screws (2)
GD304
GD303
Installation

removal.
23-20
23.1 Cutter Section
23.1.36 PWC01 Circuit Board

Replacement
Removal

subsection 23.1.1).

PWC01 circuit board.
3. Remove the circuit board from the

four circuit board posts.
PWC01 Circuit Board

GD312
Installation

the punch hole sensor gain values (see
23
23.1.36
23-21
23.2 Horizontal Sorter
23.2.1 Horizontal Sorter 4. Disconnect the grounding wire 4. Remove the screw and flat-head
Removal/Reinstallation connector. screw securing the large-size tray
transfer bracket.
Removal Large-size Tray Transfer Bracket

horizontal sorter.
Horizontal Sorter
Grounding Wire Connector

GD1557
Flat-head Screw Screw
Reinstallation GD323
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of 5. Disconnect the two sensor
Screws (2) removal. connectors.
GD1555
2. Open the clamp and then disconnect large-size tray transfer bracket.
23.2.2 Large-size Tray
the sorter cable connector from the
Transfer Bracket Sensor Connectors (2)
cutter.
Removal
1. Remove the horizontal sorter (see

subsection 23.2.1).
2. Loosen the thumbscrew and then

remove the large-size tray bracket.
Thumbscrew
Screws (2) Large-size Tray
Transfer Bracket
GD324
Reinstallation
Clamp Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of

GD214 removal.
3. Remove the horizontal sorter.

Large-size Tray Bracket
GD1587

print receiver guide.
Screws (2)
23
23.2.1 Horizontal Sorter
23.2.2 GD1556
Print Receiver Guide

GD1588
23-22
23.2.3 Horizontal Sorter Installation Installation

Cover Removal/
Reinstallation removal. removal.
Removal
1. Remove the large-size tray transfer 23.2.5 Horizontal Motor Drive 23.2.6 Chain Replacement
bracket (see subsection 23.2.2). Motor (M775)
Replacement Removal
2. Remove the horizontal sorter cover by
loosening the three screws and 1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover
Removal
removing the two screws. (see subsection 23.2.3).
1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover
Screws (2) (Remove) 2. Loosen the screw securing the motor
bracket.
2. Open the two harness clamps.
Screw
3. Disconnect the connector.

Motor Bracket
Harness Clamps (2)
Screws (3) (Loosen)

GD325
GD330
Reinstallation
3. Remove the clip, master link and then
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of the chain.
removal.
Master Link Chain
Connector
GD326
23.2.4 Horizontal Sorter Stop
Position Sensor (D779) 4. Remove the four screws and then the
guide plate.
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover

Clip
2. Move the detecting plate from the GD1589
sensor section.
4. Remove the eight screws and then
3. Disconnect the connector from the the two print feed bars and detecting
sensor. plates.
4. Remove the screw and then the Print Feed Bars (2)
sensor from the bracket. GD327
Screws (4)
Connector 5. Remove the two screws and then the
motor.
Sensor Bracket
Screws (2)
Screws (4)
23
23.2.3
Detecting Plates (2)
23.2.4
GD1590
23.2.5
Installation 23.2.6
Screw Sensor (D779) Installation is essentially in the reverse

Motor (M775) order of removal. After installation, adjust
GD329
GD328 the chain tension (see subsection 23.2.9).
23-23
23.2.7 Drive Gear/Sprocket 23.2.8 Driven Sprocket 23.2.9 Chain Tension

Replacement Replacement Adjustment
Removal Removal 1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover

1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover 1. Remove the horizontal sorter cover
(see subsection 23.2.3). (see subsection 23.2.3). 2. Measure the chain tension with a
tension gauge.
2. Loosen the screw and then remove 2. Loosen the screw securing the motor
the chain from the sprocket. bracket. 3. Adjust the tension by loosening the
two screws securing the motor
Screw bracket and then moving the bracket.
Motor Bracket Chain tension: 3 to 4 mm/130 g
Screw
Tension Gauge
Sprocket
Chain
GD330
Screw
GD331
driven shaft bracket. GD333

Driven Shaft Bracket 4. Tighten the two screws securing the
sensor and cut the cord tie.
motor bracket.
5. Install the horizontal sorter cover.
5. Remove the drive gear and sprocket.
Connector 23.2.10 Large-size Tray Waiting

E-ring Sprocket
Sensor (D783)
Replacement
Screws (2)
Removal
GD1591
1. Remove the large size tray transfer
4. Remove the E-ring, bearing and then bracket (see subsection 23.2.2).
the sprocket shaft.
Bearing
Sprocket Shaft harness cover, sensor and two plate
Cord Ties (2) nuts.
Bearing
Drive Gear
Screws (2)
GD332
Harness Cover
Installation

the chain tension (see subsection 23.2.9).
E-ring
23 D436
Plate Nuts (2)
Sensor (D783)
23.2.7 GD1592
Installation
23.2.8
23.2.9 Installation is essentially in the reverse
23.2.10 order of removal. After installation, adjust
the chain tension (see subsection 23.2.9).
23-24
Installation 4. Remove the two screws, plate nuts

and then the sensor.
order of removal. Screws (2)
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while

pressing the large-size tray
transfer bracket against the
waiting position.
Large-size Tray Transfer Bracket
Sensor (D785)
Plate Nuts (2)
GD1595
Installation

Screws (2)
order of removal.
GD1593 NOTE: Tighten the two screws while

pressing the slider against the set
position.
23.2.11 Large-size Tray Set
Screws (2)
Sensor (D785) Slider
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the large-size tray transfer

2. Align the holes on the bracket with the

screws on the slider by moving the
slider.
3. Remove the four screws and special

nuts, and then separate the large-size
GD1596
tray transfer bracket from the slider.
Screws (4)
LO
CK
Holes (4) Special Nuts (4)

GD1594
23
23.2.11
23-25
23.3 Slant Sorter
23.3.1 Slant Sorter Removal/ Reinstallation 4. Place the adjustment jig so that its
Reinstallation narrow tab is horizontal as shown and
1. Adjust all sorter adjusting bolts so that check that the V-groove is within the
their end heights from the sorter tray range (tab width +2 mm). If it is
Removal are approximately 7 mm. outside the range, adjust it by turning
the adjustment bolts on the lower
1. Disconnect the sorter cable connector Sorter Stay sorter stay bracket.
from the cutter section.
• If the V-groove is retarded, screw in
2. Remove the screw and then the sorter
the bolts to lower the adjustment
stay cover.
bolts.
7m • If the V-groove is advanced, loosen
Sorter Cable Connector m the bolts to raise the adjustment
bolts.
Adjustment Tool
Sorter Adjusting Bolts
D138
2. Install the sorter in the trays and

connect the sorter cable to the
connector.
Screw
Sorter Stay Cover Sorter Stays
D438
3. Remove the sorter by lifting it off the

stays. 5mm
Align V Within 5mm

(Tab Width+2mm)
GD1579
Sorter Connector
D143
3. Press the sorter drive switch to drive

the sorter for one pitch.
NOTE: The sorter may drive for two

pitches. Adjustment Bolts (2)
D534
Sorter Drive Switch
Sorter
D439
23 D144
23.3.1
23-26
23.3 Slant Sorter
5. Place the sorter adjustment jig in the 8. Make sure the slant sorter guide is 10. Place the adjustment jig in the V-
V-groove in the horizontal sorter with behind the guide on the horizontal groove in the horizontal sorter with its
its wide tab (5 mm) facing down as sorter as shown. narrower tab (3mm) facing down and
shown in the figure below. make sure that it does not touch the
Slant Sorter Guide V-groove in the sorter tray.
6. Turn the adjustment bolts evenly so
that the V-groove in the sorter tray just Adjustment Tool
touches the tab.
NOTE: One turn of the bolts changes

the sorter height by 0.8 mm.
Adjustment Jig
3mm
Horizontal Sorter Guide
D150 D145
9. Check that the sorter tray is 10 to 15 11. Turn the adjusting bolts so that the
mm below the horizontal sorter cover clearance between the horizontal
as shown. Adjust by following the sorter guide and the slant sorter guide
Wide Tab (5 mm) steps below if necessary. is 2 to 7 mm.
D146 Horizontal
Horizontal Sorter Cover Slant Sorter
10 to 15mm Guide Sorter Guide
Lock Nuts (2)
2 to 7 mm
Tray
GD1717 A747
Adjustment Bolts (2)
1) Remove the slant sorter cover 12. Tighten the locknuts.
D149
7. Place the adjustment jig in the V- 13. Install the sorter stay covers with the
2) Loosen the two screws and turn screws.
groove in the horizontal sorter with its
the detecting plate.
narrow tab (3 mm) facing down and
Sorter Stay Cover
make sure that it does not touch to the More than 15 mm: Turn the plate
V-groove in the sorter tray.
clockwise.
Less then 10 mm: Turn the plate
Adjustment Jig
counterclockwise.
Detecting Plate
Screw
D151
Narrow Tab (3 mm)

D145
Screws
23
GD1582
23.3.1
3) Press the sorter drive switch and
check the sorter tray position.
4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 if

necessary.
5) Tighten the two screws and

reinstall the slant sorter cover.
23-27
23.3 Slant Sorter
23.3.2 Slant Sorter Cover 4. Open the harness clamp and 4. Remove the screw and then the
Removal/Reinstallation disconnect the connector from the grounding wire from the motor
sensor. bracket.
Removal 5. Remove the screw and then the 5. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor from the bracket. motor bracket.
Remove the three screws and then the
slant sorter cover. Harness Clamp Sensor Connector Grounding Wire
Screws (2)
Toothed Washer Screw
Bracket Screw Sensor (D780)

Motor Bracket
D441
D443
Installation
motor bracket.
removal.
setscrews and then remove the bevel
Sorter Cover Screws (3) gear from the motor.
23.3.4 Slant Sorter Drive
3345
Motor (M776) Motor (M776) Bracket Bevel Gear
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Removal

removal.
1. Disconnect the sorter cable connector
from the power supply section.
23.3.3 Slant Sorter Stop
2. Remove the slant sorter cover (see
Position Sensor (D780) subsection 23.3.2).
Replacement
3. Open the harness clamp and Screws (4)
Removal disconnect the motor connector. Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
D444
1. Disconnect the sorter cable connector Clamp
from the power supply section.
2. Remove the slant sorter cover (see

subsection 23.3.2).

sensor bracket.
Screws (2)
Connector (M776)
23 D442
23.3.2
23.3.3
23.3.4
Sensor Bracket
D440
23-28
23.3 Slant Sorter
Installation 23.3.5 Sorter Drive Switch 23.3.6 Sorter Circuit Board

order of removal.
Removal Removal
NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to
1. Disconnect the sorter cable connector 1. Disconnect the sorter cable connector
from the power supply section. from the power supply section.
LOCTITE425 or equivalent
2. Remove the slant sorter cover (see 2. Remove the slant sorter cover (see
setscrew on the bevel gear with
the D-cut surface on the motor
3. Disconnect the connector from the 3. Disconnect the connectors from the
shaft.
switch. sorter circuit board.
• Adjust the clearance between
the motor and the bevel gear to
4. Remove the two screws and then the 4. Release the catches on the circuit
7 mm.
switch. board posts and then remove the
D-flat Surface sorter circuit board.
Switch
Bevel Gear Sorter Circuit Board
7mm
3760 Screws (2) Connector
D446
Connectors (3)
• Tighten the bracket screws while D447
lightly pressing the motor bevel Installation
gear against the bevel gear of Installation
the drive shaft. Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal. Install the parts in the reverse order of
Bracket Drive Shaft Bevel Gear
removal.
23.3.7 Sorter Full Sensor

(D781) Replacement
Removal

subsection 23.3.1).

Bevel Gear sensor bracket.
D445
Bracket
23
23.3.5
23.3.6
23.3.7
Screws (2)
D448
23-29
23.3 Slant Sorter
3. Disconnect the sensor connector and 23.3.8 Sorter Chain/Sprocket 5. Remove the E-ring on the drive
remove the screw and then the Replacement sprocket shaft.
sensor.
6. Disconnect the sorter full sensor
Screw Removal (D781) connector.
1. Remove:
7. Remove two screws securing the
clamps.
• slant sorter (see subsection 23.3.1).
• slant sorter cover (see subsection
8. Remove eight screws and then the
23.3.2).
side plate.
2. Loosen the two chain tension Screws (10)
adjusting nuts.
Side Plate (Processor Side)
Sensor (D781) 3. Remove the E-ring from the processor
Sensor Connector side of the driven shaft.
D449
Driven Shaft
Installation

order of removal. Connector
NOTE: Adjust the bracket position so that E-ring

the sensor arm is flush with the
3770
sorter tray surface and does not
interfere with the sorter tray.
9. Remove the chain.
Sorter Tray Sensor Arm Adjusting Nuts (2)
E-ring (Loosen) 10. Remove the sorter trays from the
chain.
3768

bottom of the side plate (processor
side).
Side Plate (Processor Side)
Bracket
D450
3771
11. Remove the driven shaft.

Screws (4) driven sprocket from the driven shaft.
3769
E-ring
Driven Shaft
23
23.3.8
Driven Sprocket
3772
23-30
23.3 Slant Sorter
13. Loosen the two hex. socket head Installation 23.3.9 Sorter Chain Tension
setscrews and remove the drive Adjustment
sprocket from the drive shaft. Installation is essentially in the reverse
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2.5 mm) 1. Remove:
the sorter chain tension (see subsection
23.3.9).
• slant sorter (see subsection 23.3.1).
• slant sorter cover (see subsection
NOTE: • Align the edge of the drive shaft
23.3.2).
groove with the end surface of
the bevel gear.
2. Remove the three cap nuts and then
Bevel Gear the guide plate.
Drive Shaft Guide Plate
Drive Sprocket
3773
14. Remove:
• slant sorter stop position sensor

Align end surface
• slant sorter drive motor bracket with the groove edge. Cap Nuts
3775 D451
15. Remove the drive shaft.

• Face the detecting plate out and 3. Remove the four screws and then the
16. Loosen the four hex. socket head align the plate with the end stainless guide plate.
setscrews and remove the detecting surface of the drive shaft.
plate boss. Stainless Guide Plate
Detecting Plate
Screws (4)
17. Loosen the four hex. socket head
setscrew and remove the bevel gear.

the detecting plate from the boss.
Detecting Plate
D452
Bevel Gear
Boss 4. Measure the chain tension by pulling

the mid point of the chain with a
3774
tension gauge.
• Install the drive sprocket so that Chain tension: 10 to 11 mm/0.5 kg

its end surface is 72 mm from
the end of the drive shaft as Tension Gauge
Bevel Gear
shown below.
Boss
Drive Sprocket
3774
72
mm
23
D453 23.3.9
Drive Shaft
3776
23-31
23.3 Slant Sorter
5. Adjust the tension by loosening the

locknuts and turning the adjusting
nuts.
NOTE: Position each adjusting nut in

the same location on the
adjusting screws.
Adjusting Nut
Locknut
3778
6. Reinstall the slant sorter cover.
7. Reinstall the slant sorter unit on the

stays.
23
23.3.9
23-32
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................... 24-2
24.1 Power Supply Section ..................................................................................... 24-4

24.1.1 Processor Power Supply Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................... 24-4
24.1.2 Circuit Breaker Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................... 24-4
24.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement .............................................................. 24-4
24.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2) Test ......................................................................... 24-5
24.1.5 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ............................................ 24-5
24.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP20) Replacement ................................................ 24-5
24.1.7 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Replacement .......................................................... 24-5
24.1.8 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement ........................................................................ 24-6
24.1.9 Transformer Replacement ............................................................................... 24-6
24.1.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 3/4 (F793/F794)
Replacement............................................................................................... 24-6
24.1.11 PAD21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................. 24-7
24.2 Processor Control Section ............................................................................ 24-8

24.2.1 Processor Control Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................... 24-8
24.2.2 Processor Control Section Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................... 24-8
24.2.3 Processor Control Section Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 24-8
24.2.4 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation .............................................................................................. 24-9
24.2.5 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F791/F792)
Replacement............................................................................................... 24-9
24.2.6 CTP21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................. 24-9
24.2.7 PAC21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................. 24-9
24
24-1
Parts Location
Processor Electrical
Noise Filters (NF1 to NF3) Equipment Section Cooling
Circuit Protectors (CP1 to CP20)
Fan 3/4 (F793/F794)
PAD21 Circuit Board
Leakage Breakers
(NFB2 to NFB4)
CN12 Jumper
Connector for
AC200V and
AC210V
Relay (K3)
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Relay (K2)
Relay (K1)
Circuit Breaker (NFB1)
Input Terminal
Block (TB1)
Transformer Terminal Block (TB3)
Replenisher Tank Electrical Connection Section
GD646
24
24-2
Parts Location
Processor Electrical Equipment Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F791/F792)
CTP21 Circuit Board
PAC21 Circuit Board
24
GD647
24-3
24.1.1 Processor Power 24.1.2 Circuit Breaker Section 24.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1)
Supply Section Cover Cover Removal/ Replacement
Removal/Reinstallation Reinstallation
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove the circuit breaker section
1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Perform the post-operational checks cover (see subsection 24.1.2).
to shut down the system, turn the to shut down the system, turn the
power switch to STANDBY, and the power switch to STANDBY, and the 2. Remove the eight screws and then
built-in circuit breaker and the main built-in circuit breaker and the main the circuit breaker bracket.
power supply OFF. power supply OFF.
Bracket
! WARNING ! WARNING
The main power supply MUST be The main power supply MUST be
switched OFF. switched OFF.
Even if the power switch is at Even if the power switch is at
STANDBY and the built-in circuit STANDBY and the built-in circuit
breaker is turned OFF, electricity will breaker is turned OFF, electricity will
still be supplied, so the power supply still be supplied, so the power supply
area can cause electric shocks and area can cause electric shocks and
short circuit. short circuit.
2. Remove the replenisher section 2. Remove the two screws and then the
(see subsection 21.1.5). dryer section cover.
3. Remove the two screws and then the Screws (2) Screws (8) Circuit Breaker
processor power supply section cover. GD628
Screws (2)
3. Remove the eight screws and
disconnect all wires from the breaker.
Black
White Red
Screws (8) Blue
Circuit White
Breaker
Black
Dryer Section Cover

GD1624
Red
Blue
Processor Power Supply Section Cover 3. Remove the screw and then the circuit
breaker section cover.
GD1401
Screw GD629
Reinstallation
Installation
removal. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.
24
Circuit Breaker Section Cover
24.1.1
GD1625
24.1.2

removal.
24-4
24.1.4 Leakage Breaker 4. Remove the two screws and then the 24.1.7 Noise Filter (NF1 to
(NFB2) Test leakage breaker. NF3) Replacement
NOTE: Perform the leakage breaker test Removal
once a month.
1. Remove:
1. Remove the circuit breaker section
cover (see subsection 24.1.2). • processor power supply section
2. Turn the main power supply, the built- • circuit breaker section cover
in circuit breaker and the power switch (see subsection 24.1.2).
ON.
3. Confirm the circuit breaker turns OFF protection cover.
by pressing the red button.
Screws (2)
Leakage Breaker (NFB2)
Leakage Breaker Screw Covers (2)
GD631
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.
24.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP1

NFB4 NFB3 Red Button
to CP20) Replacement
GD630
Removal
4. Install the circuit breaker section
cover.
1. Remove:
Protection Cover
• processor power supply section GD634
24.1.5 Leakage Breaker cover (see subsection 24.1.1).
(NFB2 to NFB4) • circuit breaker section cover 3. Disconnect the PAD4 connector.
Replacement
2. Disconnect the wires from the circuit bracket.
Removal protector.
Bracket
1. Remove the circuit breaker section 3. Loosen the locking tabs and remove Noise Filter (NF1)
cover (see subsection 24.1.2). Connector (PAD)
the circuit protector.
2. Remove the two screw covers. Circuit Protector
3. Loosen the four screws and

disconnect the wires from the breaker.
NF2
NF3
Wires (2)
Locking Tabs 24
GD633
24.1.4
Installation Screws (6) 24.1.5
GD635 24.1.6
removal.
24-5
5. Remove the four nuts and wires from 3. Remove the relay from the relay 3. Remove the four screws and then the
the noise filter. bracket by releasing locking tabs. input wires.
6. Remove the two screws and then the Relay Bracket Relay Input Wires
Screws (4)
noise filter.
Noise Filter
GD640
Installation
Input Selection Terminal Block
Screws (2)
Nuts (4) Installation is essentially in the reverse GD645
order of removal.
GD637
Installation
NOTE: Connect the connectors that have
Installation
the same symbol as the relay. Install the parts in the reverse order of
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
removal.
24.1.9 Transformer
Replacement 24.1.10 Processor Electrical
24.1.8 Relay (K1 to K3) Equipment Section
Replacement Removal Cooling Fan 3/4 (F793/
F794) Replacement
Removal
Removal
section cover (see subsection 24.1.1). 1. Remove:
transformer bracket.
2. Disconnect the six connectors from • processor power supply section
NOTE: The right-hand screw also
the relay. cover (see subsection 24.1.1).
secures the grounding wire.
• circuit breaker section cover
Relay (see subsection 24.1.2).
Screws (2)

fan and fan guard.
Fan (F794) Screws (2)
Arrow
Transformer Bracket Grounding Wire

Connectors (6)
GD644
GD639
Fan (F793)
24 Fan Connector
Screws (2)
24.1.8 GD643
24.1.9
24.1.10
24-6
Installation

order of removal.

mark points to the outside of the
processor.
24.1.11 PAD21 Circuit Board

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the power supply section


PAD21 circuit board.
3. Remove the PAD21 circuit board from

the six circuit board spacers.
PAD21 Circuit Board
Connectors (6) Circuit Board Spacers (6)

GD638
Installation

removal.
24
24.1.11
24-7
24.2 Processor Control Section
24.2.1 Processor Control 24.2.2 Processor Control 24.2.3 Processor Control

Section Cover Section Upper Cover Section Side Cover
Removal/Reinstallation Removal/Reinstallation Removal/Reinstallation
1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Perform the post-operational checks
to shut down the system, turn the to shut down the system, turn the to shut down the system, turn the
power switch to STANDBY, and the power switch to STANDBY, and the power switch to STANDBY, and the
built-in circuit breaker and the main built-in circuit breaker and the main built-in circuit breaker and the main
power supply OFF. power supply OFF. power supply OFF.
! WARNING ! WARNING ! WARNING

The main power supply MUST be The main power supply MUST be The main power supply MUST be
switched OFF. switched OFF. switched OFF.
Even if the power switch is at Even if the power switch is at Even if the power switch is at
STANDBY and the built-in circuit STANDBY and the built-in circuit STANDBY and the built-in circuit
breaker is turned OFF, electricity will breaker is turned OFF, electricity will breaker is turned OFF, electricity will
still be supplied, so the power supply still be supplied, so the power supply still be supplied, so the power supply
area can cause electric shocks and area can cause electric shocks and area can cause electric shocks and
short circuit. short circuit. short circuit.
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the four screws and then the 2. Remove the two screws and then the
processor control section cover. processor control section upper cover. dryer section cover.
Screws (4)
Processor Control Section Upper Cover
GD625
Reinstallation
processor Control Section Cover Dryer Section Cover
GD624 Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of GD1624
removal.
Reinstallation 3. Remove the screw and then the
processor control section side cover.
removal. Screw
24
24.2.1 Processor Control Section Side Cover
24.2.2 GD626
24.2.3
Reinstallation

removal.
24-8
24.2 Processor Control Section
24.2.4 Processor Electrical Installation Installation

Equipment Section
Installation is essentially in the reverse Installation is essentially in the reverse
Cooling Fan Bracket order of removal. order of removal.
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow NOTE: Make sure the jumper plug JP2 is
Removal mark points to the outside of the in “BACK UP position”.
processor.
1. Remove the processor control section JP2
upper cover (see subsection 24.2.2).
2. Disconnect the fan connector from the 24.2.6 CTP21 Circuit Board
fan. Replacement
3. Loosen the two screws and remove NOTE: • Always replace the CTP21
the two screws and the fan bracket. circuit board as an assembly.
• Do not try to replace the lithium
Processor Electrical
Section Cooling Fan battery for data backup.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Bracket Incorrect battery replacement
may cause explosion.
• Return the old CTP21 circuit GD617-1
board to the FUJIFILM’s factory.
Lithium Battery
24.2.7 PAC21 Circuit Board
Replacement
Removal
Screws (2) Fan Connectors (2) 1. Remove the processor control section
(Remove)
GD612

Reinstallation PAC21 circuit board.
Reinstall the bracket in the reverse order 3. Remove the PAC21 circuit board from
of removal. GD617-2
the thirteen circuit board spacers.
Removal Circuit Board Spacers (13)
24.2.5 Processor Electrical 1. Remove the processor electrical
PAC21 Circuit Board
Equipment Section equipment section cooling fan bracket
Cooling Fan 1/2 (F791/ (see subsection 24.2.4).
F792) Replacement
CTP 21 circuit board.
Removal
3. Remove the CTP21 circuit board from
1. Remove the processor electrical
the six circuit board spacers.
section cooling fan bracket
CTP21 Circuit Board
fan and fan guard.
Screws (4)
Screws (4)
Fan Guard
Connectors (27) 24
Circuit Board Spacers (6) GD616
Arrow Installation 24.2.5
GD615
Fan (F791) 24.2.6
Fan Guard Install the parts in the reverse order of
24.2.7
Fan (F792) removal.
GD614
24-9
25. AUTOMATIC NEGATIVE LOADING SYSTEM NF2500AG (135ANL)
Parts Location ................................................................................................... 25-3
25.1 Tray Section ....................................................................................................... 25-4

25.1.1 Tray Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................................ 25-4
25.1.2 Stainless Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 25-4
25.1.3 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....................................... 25-4
25.1.4 Negative Holder Cover Sensor (D383) Replacement ...................................... 25-4
25.1.5 Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch (D385) Replacement ........................ 25-4
25.1.6 Indicator LED (L371) Replacement ................................................................. 25-5
25.1.7 Negative Holder Cover Sensor (D383) Adjustment ......................................... 25-5
25.1.8 Negative Holder Cover Interlock Switch (D385) Adjustment ........................... 25-5
25.2 Negative Holder Section ................................................................................ 25-6

25.2.1 Negative Holder Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 25-6
25.2.2 Negative Holder Open Sensor (D374) Replacement ....................................... 25-6
25.2.3 Negative Holder Close Sensor (D375) Replacement ...................................... 25-6
25.2.4 Negative Holder Motor (M372) Replacement .................................................. 25-6
25.2.5 Negative Feed Motor (M371) Replacement ..................................................... 25-7
25.2.6 Negative Holder Replacement ......................................................................... 25-7
25.2.7 Negative Holder Reference Position Adjustment ............................................. 25-8
25.3 Negative Holder Unit Feed Section ............................................................ 25-9

25.3.1 Negative Holder Section Inlet Upper Anti-static Brush Replacement .............. 25-9
25.3.2 Negative Sensor (D376) Replacement ............................................................ 25-9
25.3.3 Feed Belt Replacement ................................................................................... 25-9
25.3.4 Negative Holder Section Inlet Lower Anti-static Brush Replacement .............. 25-9
25.3.5 Negative Holder Section Feed Roller Replacement ........................................ 25-9
25.4 Upper Guide Section ....................................................................................... 25-10

25.4.1 Negative Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 25-10
25.4.2 Negative Feed Section Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 25-10
25.4.3 Negative Feed Section Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 25-10
25.4.4 Negative Overlap Sensor (D382) Replacement .............................................. 25-10
25.4.5 Negative Leading End Sensor LED (D388) Replacement ............................... 25-10
25.4.6 Loop Sensor (D372) Replacement .................................................................. 25-11
25.4.7 Negative Standby Sensor LED (D387) Replacement ...................................... 25-11
25.4.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement ....................................................... 25-11
25.4.9 Loop Section Anti-static Brush Replacement ................................................... 25-11
25.4.10 Inlet Roller Replacement ................................................................................. 25-12
25.4.11 Middle Roller Replacement .............................................................................. 25-12
25.4.12 Loop Section Roller Replacement ................................................................... 25-12
25.4.13 Negative Overlap Sensor Adjustment .............................................................. 25-13
25
25.5 Lower Guide Section ....................................................................................... 25-14
25.5.1 Negative Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 25-14
25.5.2 Negative Leading End Sensor (D373) Replacement ....................................... 25-14
25.5.3 Upper Guide Sensor (D381) Replacement ...................................................... 25-14
25-1
25.5.4 Negative Standby Sensor (D371) Replacement .............................................. 25-14

25.5.5 Lower Guide Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 25-14
25.5.6 Anti-static Brush Replacement ........................................................................ 25-15
25.5.7 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement ....................................................... 25-15
25.5.8 Inlet (Drive) Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 25-15
25.5.9 Middle Roller Replacement .............................................................................. 25-15
25.6 Switch Guide Section ...................................................................................... 25-16

25.6.1 Switch Guide Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 25-16
25.6.2 Upper Roller Replacement .............................................................................. 25-16
25.6.3 Lower Roller Replacement .............................................................................. 25-16
25.6.4 Switch Guide Replacement ............................................................................. 25-16
25.7 Negative Catcher Unit ..................................................................................... 25-17

25.7.1 Negative Catcher Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 25-17
25.8 Negative Feed Section ................................................................................... 25-18

25.8.1 Outlet Anti-static Brush Replacement .............................................................. 25-18
25.8.2 Negative Trailing End Sensor LED (D389) Replacement ................................ 25-18
25.8.3 Negative Trailing End Sensor (D377) Replacement ........................................ 25-18
25.8.4 Nip Release Home Position Sensor (D378) Replacement .............................. 25-18
25.8.5 Negative Feed Belt Replacement .................................................................... 25-19
25.8.6 Catcher Negative Feed Motor (M373) Replacement ....................................... 25-19
25.8.7 Nip Release Solenoid (S371) Replacement .................................................... 25-19
25.8.8 Nip Roller/Feed Roller Replacement ............................................................... 25-20
25.8.9 Inlet Guide Replacement ................................................................................. 25-20
25.9 Negative Press Section .................................................................................. 25-21

25.9.1 Negative Full Sensor (D384) Replacement ..................................................... 25-21
25.9.2 Negative Press Home Position Sensor (D380) Replacement ......................... 25-21
25.9.3 Negative Press Motor (M374) Replacement .................................................... 25-21
25.9.4 Lower Negative Guide Replacement ............................................................... 25-22
25.9.5 Upper Negative Guide Replacement ............................................................... 25-22
25.9.6 Negative Full Sensor Adjustment ..................................................................... 25-23
25.10 ANL Sliding Device ....................................................................................... 25-24

25.10.1 Slide Lock Sensor (D391) Replacement .......................................................... 25-24
25.10.2 ANL Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................................... 25-24
25.10.3 ANL Operating Position Sensor (D379) Replacement ..................................... 25-24
25.10.4 Slide Lock Replacement .................................................................................. 25-25
25.11 Control Circuit Board Section .................................................................... 25-26

25 25.11.1 CTF21 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................. 25-26
25.12 Optional Air Compressor ............................................................................. 25-27

25.12.1 Optional Air Compressor Connection .............................................................. 25-27
25-2
Parts Location
Negative Holder Cover

Upper Guide Section
Tray
Switch Guide Unit
Indicator LED (L371)
Negative Storage Box
Negative Feed Unit Lower Guide Section
GD166
25
25-3
25.1 Tray Section
25.1.1 Tray Removal/ 25.1.3 Circuit Board Section 4. Remove the two screws and then the
Reinstallation Cover Removal/ sensor.
Reinstallation Sensor (D383)
Removal Harness Clamp
Removal
1. Open the negative holder cover.
2. Remove the four screws and then the to shut down the system, then turn the
tray. built-in circuit breaker and the main
power supply OFF.

circuit board section cover. Screws (2)
D383 Connector
GD039
Installation

removal.
Tray
Screws (4)
GD035
25.1.5 Negative Holder Cover
Reinstallation Screws (5) Interlock Switch (D385)
GD184
Replacement
Reinstall the tray in the reverse order of
removal. Reinstallation Removal
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of 1. Remove:

25.1.2 Stainless Guide Plate removal.
• circuit board section cover (see
Removal/Reinstallation subsection 25.1.3).
• tray (see subsection 25.1.1).
Removal 25.1.4 Negative Holder Cover
Sensor (D383) 2. Open the four harness clamps.
1. Perform the post-operational checks Replacement
to shut down the system, then turn the 3. Disconnect the switch connector.
built-in circuit breaker and the main Removal
power supply OFF. 4. Remove the two screws and then the
1. Remove: switch.
2. Remove the tray
(see subsection 25.1.1). • circuit board section cover (see D385 Connector
subsection 25.1.3). Screws (2)
3. Remove the four flat-head screws and • tray (see subsection 25.1.1).
then the stainless guide plate. • negative feed section rear cover
Flat-head Screws (4)

sensor.
Harness Clamps (4)
Interlock Switch (D385)
25 Stainless Guide Plate

GD040
GD036 Installation
25.1.1
25.1.2 Reinstallation Install the parts in the reverse order of
25.1.3 removal.
25.1.4 Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
25.1.5
25-4
25.1 Tray Section
25.1.6 Indicator LED (L371) 3) Open and close the negative

Replacement holder cover to check that the
sensor is operating properly.
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove the tray (see subsection
25.1.1).

LED.
3. Remove the screw and then the LED.
Screw LED (L371)
Sensor (D383) Actuator

Connector
GD117
25.1.8 Negative Holder Cover

Interlock Switch (D385)
Adjustment
GD042
1. Open and close the negative holder
Installation cover and make sure that the actuator
does not interfere with the slot in the
Install the parts in the reverse order of tray.
removal.
2. If the actuator interferes with the slot,
perform the adjustment below.
25.1.7 Negative Holder Cover 1) Loosen the two screws securing

Sensor (D383) the actuator and adjust its
Adjustment mounting position.
2) Tighten the screws.

1. Display the “444 ANL Input Check”
screen.
Actuator
2. Open and close the negative holder

cover. The sensor is operating
properly if it matches the screen
display.
3. If the sensor is not operating properly,

perform the adjustment below.
1) Loosen the two screws securing

the actuator and adjust its
mounting position.
Screws (2)
2) Tighten the two screws. GD116
25
25.1.6
25.1.7
25.1.8
25-5
25.2 Negative Holder Section
25.2.1 Negative Holder Unit 4. Loosen the locking tabs and then 25.2.4 Negative Holder Motor
Removal/Reinstallation remove the sensor from the bracket. (M372) Replacement
Screws (2) Sensor Bracket
Removal Removal
1. Remove: 1. Remove the negative holder unit (see

subsection 25.2.1).
subsection 25.1.3). 2. Remove the E-ring, collar and
• stainless guide plate (see bearing.
subsection 25.1.2).
• feed belt (see subsection 25.3.3).

the negative holder unit.
Sensor (D374)

GD045
Installation

removal. Collar E-ring
GD047
25.2.3 Negative Holder Close 3. Disconnect the connector from the

Sensor (D375) negative holder open/close sensor
Replacement (D374/D375).
GD044 4. Disconnect the motor connector.
Removal
Reinstallation 1. Remove the negative holder unit (see
D374 Connector
subsection 25.2.1).
removal.
sensor bracket.
25.2.2 Negative Holder Open 3. Disconnect the connector from the

Sensor (D374) sensor.
Replacement 4. Loosen the locking tabs and then
remove the sensor from the bracket.
Removal
1. Remove the negative holder unit (see D375 Connector M372 Connector
2. Remove the two screws and then the 5. Remove the two screws and then the
sensor bracket. motor bracket and bearing.
3. Disconnect the connector from the Screws (2)

sensor.
Sensor Bracket
Sensor (D375)
GD046
Installation

25 removal. GD049
25.2.1
25.2.2
25.2.3
25.2.4
25-6
6. Remove the two screws and then the 4. Remove the two screws and then the 3. Remove the four screws, two bearing
motor and nut plate from the bracket. bracket from the motor. holders, bearings and then the
negative holder.
Motor (M372) Screws (2) 5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear
from the motor.
Gear E-ring
Bracket
Nut Plate
Screws (4)
Bearing Holders/Bearings (2)
GD060
GD050
Screws (2) negative holder plate, negative holder
Installation Motor (M371) and negative guide.
GD054
Installation is essentially in the reverse Screws (2)
order of removal. Negative Holder Plate
Installation
NOTE: After installation, perform the
negative holder reference position Install the parts in the reverse order of Negative Holder
adjustment (see subsection removal.
25.2.7).
Negative Guide
25.2.6 Negative Holder
25.2.5 Negative Feed Motor Replacement
(M371) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove the negative holder unit (see
subsection 25.2.1). • tray (see subsection 25.1.1).
• stainless guide plate (see
2. Disconnect the motor connector. subsection 25.1.2). GD061
3. Open the clamp securing the harness. 2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew 5. Remove the two E-rings, four screws,
securing the link using a 1.5-mm Allen two plungers, plunger guides and
wrench and then disengage the link. spring.
Hex. Socket Head Setscrew Screws (4)
E-rings (2)
Clamp Plunger
Guides (2)
M371 Connector
GD051 Spring
Link Plungers (2)

GD059
GD062
25
25.2.5
25.2.6
25-7
Installation 3. Press the negative holder cover

sensor while holding the interlock
Installation is essentially in the reverse switch down and click [Close] of the
order of removal. “Negative holder motor”.
NOTE: Align the hex. socket head • The negative holder lowers.
setscrew with the flat surface of
the shaft. 4. Use the vernier calipers, measure the
height of the negative holder stopper
Hex. Socket Head Setscrew from the stainless guide plate at the
front and rear as shown and calculate
the difference.
Difference Allowance: 0.3 mm max.
Negative Holder
Stopper
GD063
25.2.7 Negative Holder

Reference Position Stainless Guide Plate
Adjustment
GD1452
1. Remove the four screws mounting the 5. If the difference is more than 0.3 mm,
tray, and then the tray. adjust by following the steps below.
1) Loosen the adjusting screw for the

negative holder open/close sensor
plate.
2) Move the sensor plate and tighten

the adjusting screw.
Sensor Plate
Tray
Screws (4)
GD035
Screw
2. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” →
“44 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance”
→ “44U 135ANL I/O Check”.
GD065
3) Repeat steps 3 and 4 and make

sure the difference is less than 0.3
mm.
4) Repeat steps 1) through 3) if

necessary.
25 5) Make sure there is clearance

between the negative holder
25.2.7 bracket and the stopper.
6. Reinstall the tray.
25-8
25.3 Negative Holder Unit Feed Section
25.3.1 Negative Holder 4. Remove the two screws and then the 25.3.4 Negative Holder
Section Inlet Upper sensor bracket. Section Inlet Lower
Anti-static Brush 5. Loosen the locking tabs and then
Anti-static Brush
Replacement remove the sensor from the bracket. Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Sensor (D376) Removal
1. Open the upper guide. 1. Remove the stainless guide plate

2. Remove the anti-static brush.
2. Remove the anti-static brush.
Anti-static Brush
Anti-static Brush
Sensor Bracket
GD038
Installation

GD055 removal.
Installation
GD056
Install the parts in the reverse order of 25.3.3 Feed Belt Replacement
Installation
removal.
Removal
removal.
1. Remove:
25.3.2 Negative Sensor (D376)
Replacement • negative feed section front cover
(see subsection 25.4.1). 25.3.5 Negative Holder
Removal • stainless guide plate (see Section Feed Roller
subsection 25.1.2).
Replacement
1. Remove:
• tray (see subsection 25.1.1). tensioner. Removal
• stainless guide plate (see
subsection 25.1.2). 3. Remove the feed belt. 1. Remove the feed belt (see subsection
25.3.3).
2. Disconnect the connector from the Feed Belt
sensor. 2. Remove the four screws, roller,
bearing holder and bearing.
3. Open the two clamps securing the
harness. Bearing Holder/Bearing
Screws (4)
Screws (2) Tensioner

GD043
Installation
Clamps (2)
Roller
D376 Connector Install the parts in the reverse order of
GD037 removal. GD058 25
Installation 25.3.1
25.3.2
removal.
25.3.4
25.3.5
25-9
25.4 Upper Guide Section
25.4.1 Negative Feed Section 25.4.3 Negative Feed Section Installation

Front Cover Removal/ Upper Cover Removal/
Reinstallation Reinstallation removal.
Removal Removal
1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Perform the post-operational checks 25.4.5 Negative Leading End
to shut down the system, then turn the to shut down the system, turn the Sensor LED (D388)
built-in circuit breaker and the main built-in circuit breaker and the main Replacement
power supply OFF. power supply OFF.
Removal
2. Open the negative holder cover and 2. Open the upper guide.
the upper guide.
1. Remove the negative feed section
3. Remove the two screws and then the the upper cover.
negative feed section front cover.
2. Close the upper guide.
Screws (2) Negative Feed Section Upper Cover
sensor LED.

sensor LED.
Connector
Screw
Screws (3)
Negative Feed Section Front Cover
GD183 GD187
Reinstallation Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
Sensor LED (D388)
GD019
25.4.2 Negative Feed Section 25.4.4 Negative Overlap
Rear Cover Removal/ Sensor (D382) Installation
removal.
Removal Removal
1. Remove the circuit board section 1. Remove the negative feed section
cover (see subsection 25.1.3). upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3).
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Open the upper guide.
negative feed section rear cover.
Negative Feed Section Rear Cover sensor.

sensor.
Sensor (D382)
Connector
25 Screws (2)
GD186
25.4.1
25.4.3
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of Screws (2)
25.4.4
removal. GD020
25.4.5
25-10
25.4.6 Loop Sensor (D372) 25.4.7 Negative Standby 25.4.8 Upper Dust Removal
Replacement Sensor LED (D387) Roller Replacement
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove the negative feed section 1. Remove the negative feed section
upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3). 1. Remove the negative feed section upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3).
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the screw and then the roller
sensor bracket. 2. Remove the two screws and then the holder.
loop sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket 3. Remove the dust removal roller.
Sensor Bracket
Roller Holder
Screw
Dust Removal Roller
Screws (2)
GD021 Screws (2)
GD024
GD021
sensor. 3. Remove the screw and then the Installation
sensor LED.
4. Loosen the locking tabs and remove Installation is essentially in the reverse
the sensor. 4. Disconnect the connector from the order of removal.
sensor LED.
Bracket NOTE: Install the roller so that its D-cut
Sensor (D372) surface faces down.
Screw
25.4.9 Loop Section Anti-

static Brush
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the negative holder section

Connector upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3).
GD022
Connector 2. Remove the four screws and then the
Sensor LED (D387)
Installation two loop section anti-static brushes.
GD023
Install the parts in the reverse order of Anti-static Brush

Installation
removal.
removal.

Anti-static Brush 25
GD025
25.4.6
Installation 25.4.7
25.4.8
25.4.9
removal.
25-11
25.4.10 Inlet Roller 25.4.11 Middle Roller 25.4.12 Loop Section Roller
Replacement Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the negative feed section 1. Remove the negative feed section 1. Remove the negative feed section
upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3). upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3). upper cover (see subsection 25.4.3).
2. Remove the screw and then the 2. Remove the two screws and then 2. Remove the two screws and then the
negative leading end sensor LED. negative overlap sensor link. roller holder and loop guide.
3. Remove the two screws and then the NOTE: Do not loosen the locknut. Roller Holder
negative overlap sensor link.
NOTE: Do not loosen the locknut. roller shaft.
Screws (2) Negative Overlap

Screw Screws (2) Sensor Link
Loop Guide Screws (2)
GD030
3. Remove the roller shaft

Negative Overlap
Sensor Link Screws (2) 4. Remove the two rollers, bearings and
Negative Leading End Sensor LED GD028 spacer from the shaft.
GD026
4. Remove the two rollers and four Spacer
4. Remove the roller and shaft. bearings from the roller shaft.
Roller Shaft
Roller Shaft Loop Guide
Rollers (2)
Rollers (2)
Bearings (2)
Rollers (2) Roller Shaft

Washers (4) GD031
GD027
GD029
Installation
Installation
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.
order of removal. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Install the roller so that its D-cut
NOTE: Install the roller so that its D-cut surface faces down.
surface faces down. NOTE: Install the roller so that its D-cut
surface faces down.
25
25.4.10
25.4.11
25.4.12
25-12
25.4.13 Negative Overlap 2) Insert the two negatives at the

Sensor Adjustment same time and make sure the
“Negative overlap sensor” turns
“ON”. If it is still “OFF”, turn the
1. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” →
adjusting screw counterclockwise
“44 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance”
until it turns “ON”. When the
→ “444 135ANL Input Check”.
“Negative overlap sensor” turns
“ON”, turn the adjusting screw
additional half turn
counterclockwise.
Adjustment Screw
2. Remove the negative feed section

3. Insert one negative from the inlet

guide while turning the roller drive
GD202
pulley and check that the “Negative
overlap sensor” does not change from
“OFF” to “ON”.
NOTE: The pulley may be heavy to

turn because the motor is
excited.
Negative
Roller Drive Pulley

GD033
If the “Negative overlap sensor” is turn

“ON”, adjust by following the steps below.
1) Turn the adjusting screw

clockwise until the “Negative
ovelap sensor” is turned OFF.
Adjustment Screw
25
25.4.13
GD202
25-13
25.5 Lower Guide Section
25.5.1 Negative Feed Unit 25.5.2 Negative Leading End Installation

Removal/Reinstallation Sensor (D373)
Removal
Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove the negative feed section unit 25.5.4 Negative Standby
• negative feed section upper cover (see subsection 25.5.1). Sensor (D371)
(see subsection 25.4.3). Replacement
• negative feed section rear cover 2. Disconnect the connector from the
(see subsection 25.4.2). sensor.
• feed belt (see subsection 25.3.3). Removal
• circuit board section cover (see 3. Remove the screw and then the
subsection 25.1.3). 1. Remove the negative feed section unit
sensor.
2. Disconnect the ANL12, ANL32 and Screw
D381 connectors. 2. Remove the screw and then the
sensor.

sensor.
Screw
Connector
Sensor (D373)
GD032 GD072

negative feed unit.
Screws (4) removal. Connector
Sensor (D371)
GD074
25.5.3 Upper Guide Sensor Installation

(D381) Replacement
Removal removal.
1. Remove the negative feed section unit

25.5.5 Lower Guide Removal/
2. Remove the screw and then the Reinstallation
Negative Feed Unit
sensor.
GD071
Removal
Reinstallation sensor. 1. Remove the negative feed section unit
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse Screw
order of removal. 2. Disconnect the D371, D373 and D381
connectors.
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the
harness. D381 Connector
25 Connector
Sensor (D381)
25.5.1 GD073
25.5.2
25.5.3 D371 Connector D373 Connector
25.5.4
GD075
25.5.5
25-14
25.5 Lower Guide Section
3. Remove the three screws and then 25.5.7 Lower Dust Removal 25.5.9 Middle Roller
the lower guide. Roller Replacement Replacement
Lower Guide
Removal Removal
1. Remove the lower guide (see 1. Remove the lower guide (see
2. Remove the two screws and then the 2. Remove the six screws and then the
lower dust removal roller. three rollers.
Lower Dust Removal Roller 3. Disassemble the rollers.

Screws (2)
Screws (2)
Roller Shaft (Short)
Screws (3)
GD076 Roller
Washer
Reinstallation

removal.
GD078
25.5.6 Anti-static Brush Roller Shafts
Replacement (Long)
Installation
GD080
removal.
1. Remove the lower guide (see
Installation
subsection 25.5.5).
2. Remove the two screws and then the 25.5.8 Inlet (Drive) Roller order of removal.
brush bracket. Replacement
NOTE: The inlet (Brush) side roller shaft
is shorter than the other two
3. Remove the two screws and then the Removal
brush from the bracket.
shafts.
1. Remove the lower guide (see
Screws (2) subsection 25.5.5).
Anti-static Brush
2. Remove the eight screws, two bearing
holders, bearings and then the two
rollers.
Screws (4)
Bearing Holder
Brush Bracket Bearing Holder/Bearing
Screws (2) Roller

Roller
GD077
Installation
Bearing
removal.
Screws (4)
GD079
Installation
25
25.5.6
removal. 25.5.7
25.5.8
25.5.9
25-15
25.6 Switch Guide Section
25.6.1 Switch Guide Unit 25.6.3 Lower Roller 25.6.4 Switch Guide
Removal/Reinstallation Replacement Replacement
1. Remove: 1. Remove the upper roller (see 1. Remove the switch guide unit (see
• negative feed section front cover
(see subsection 25.4.1). 2. Remove the three screws and then 2. Remove the two screws securing the
• negative feed section rear cover the outlet guide. guide.
Screws (3) Outlet Guide 3. Remove the E-ring.
switch guide. Screws (2)
Switch Guide
GD083
E-ring
3. Remove the four E-rings, roller shaft,
GD085
two rollers and four poly-sliders.
Screws (2) 4. Remove the spring.
Shaft
GD081
5. Remove the shaft, two bearings,
Reinstallation guides and spacer.
Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of Bearings (2)

removal.
Shaft
25.6.2 Upper Roller
Replacement E-rings (4)
Rollers (2)
Guide
Removal Poly-sliders (4)
GD084 Guide
1. Remove the switch guide unit (see Spacer Spring
subsection 25.6.1). Installation GD086
2. Remove the E-ring, roller shaft, Install the parts in the reverse order of Installation
spacer, two rollers and poly-sliders. removal.
E-ring
Spacer removal.
Roller Shaft
Rollers (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
25 GD082
25.6.1 Installation
25.6.2
25.6.3 removal.
25.6.4
25-16
25.7 Negative Catcher Unit
25.7.1 Negative Catcher Unit 4. Remove the four screws and then the
Removal/Reinstallation negative catcher unit.
NOTE: Clear the black harness clamp

Removal to remove the unit.
1. Remove:
Screws (4)

subsection 25.1.3).
• tray (see subsection 25.1.1).
• negative feed section front cover
• negative feed section rear cover
• negative feed unit (see 25.5.1)
• feed belt (see 25.3.3)
2. Disconnect the ANL11, ANL31, S371,

M373 and M374 connectors.
GD189

protection plate.
Screws (2)
Protection Plate
GD087
3. Remove the two screws and loosen

the special screw and then remove
the lower cover.
Special Screw (Loosen) GD190
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (2) (Remove)

GD188
25
25.7.1
25-17
25.8 Negative Feed Section
25.8.1 Outlet Anti-static 3. Disconnect the connector from the 25.8.4 Nip Release Home
Brush Replacement sensor LED. Position Sensor (D378)
Screw
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the two screws and loosen
the special screw and then remove 1. Remove the negative catcher unit
the lower cover. (see subsection 25.7.1).
Special Screw (Loosen) 2. Remove the screw and then the

sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Connector
Sensor LED (D389)
GD191
Installation

removal.
Screws (2) (Remove)
GD188
Screw
25.8.3 Negative Trailing End
2. Remove the screw and then the anti-
static brush. Sensor (D377) GD090
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the negative catcher unit sensor.
Sensor Connector
2. Disconnect the connector from the Sensor (D378)
sensor.

sensor.
Screw
Sensor Screw
GD097
Installation

removal. GD091
Installation
25.8.2 Negative Trailing End
Sensor LED (D389)
removal.
Replacement
Connector
Removal GD192

negative feed unit (see subsection
25.5.1). Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
sensor LED.
25
25.8.1
25.8.2
25.8.3
25.8.4
25-18
25.8.5 Negative Feed Belt 4. Remove the two screws and then the 6. Remove the two nuts, spring washers
Replacement motor. and then the solenoid and spring
washer.
Screws (2)
Removal 7. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew
using a 1.5-mm Allen wrench and then
1. Remove the negative catcher unit
remove the stopper.
2. Remove the screw securing the belt
tensioner. Stopper Spring
3. Remove the feed belt.
Belt Tensioner Screw
Motor (M373)
GD096
Installation

removal.
25.8.7 Nip Release Solenoid Nuts (2)

Belt
(S371) Replacement
GD094 Spring Washer
GD099
Removal
Installation
1. Remove the negative catcher unit Installation
removal. Installation is essentially in the reverse
2. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew order of removal.
using a 1.5-mm hex. wrench.
NOTE: • Install the stopper at distance of
25.8.6 Catcher Negative Feed
3. Open the harness clamp and then 2.5 mm from the end surface of
Motor (M373) the solenoid.
remove the solenoid harness.
Replacement
2.5 mm
Removal then remove the D378 and D380 Solenoid (S371)
harnesses.
1. Remove the negative feed belt (see
subsection 25.8.5). 5. Remove the two screws and then the
solenoid bracket.
Solenoid Harness
3. Open the two clamps securing the Harness Clamps (3)
motor harness.
Screws (2)
Motor Harness
Stopper
D380 Harness
GD100
D378 Harness
Solenoid Bracket
Clamps (2)
Connector Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
GD095 GD098 25
25.8.5
25.8.6
25.8.7
25-19
• When tightening the nuts, make 3. Remove the screw and then the 7. Remove the two E-rings, bearings and
sure that the plunger moves negative press home position sensor. the roller.
smoothly.
• With the nip bracket down, 4. Remove the two screws, spring Roller
tighten the hex. socket head holders, springs and the roller.
setscrew while pressing the
plunger. Screws (2) Screw
Plunger Nip Bracket
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
GD106
Installation
Spring Holders (2) Sensor Bracket
Hex. Socket Head Setscrew Installation is essentially in the reverse
GD101
5. Remove the two E-rings and then NOTE: Align the hex. socket head
disassemble the roller. setscrew on the pulley with the
25.8.8 Nip Roller/Feed Roller hole of the shaft.
Replacement Spring Holders (2)
Springs (2)
Removal 25.8.9 Inlet Guide

Replacement
1. Remove:
Roller
Removal
• negative feed belt (see subsection
25.8.5).
1. Remove:
• nip release solenoid bracket (see
subsection 25.8.7).
• negative trailing end sensor LED
2. Remove the screw, nip guide plate,
• negative trailing end sensor (see
two slider collars and nip bracket.
subsection 25.8.3).
Nip Bracket Screw
Roller Shaft Bearings (2) 2. Remove the four screws and the right-
E-rings (2) hand and left-hand inlet guides.
GD104
Screws (2)

using a 1.5-mm Allen wrench and
remove the feed roller pulley.
Nip Guide Plate

Slider Collars (2)
GD102
Screws (2)
GD115
Installation

Hole Pulley removal.
25 GD105
25.8.8
25.8.9
25-20
25.9 Negative Press Section
25.9.1 Negative Full Sensor 25.9.2 Negative Press Home 25.9.3 Negative Press Motor
(D384) Replacement Position Sensor (D380) (M374) Replacement
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove the negative catcher unit 1. Remove the negative catcher unit
(see subsection 25.7.1). 1. Remove the negative catcher unit (see subsection 25.7.1).
2. Remove the screw and then the 2. Open the clamp securing the motor
sensor. 2. Disconnect the junction connector, harness.
open the two harness clamps and
3. Disconnect the connector from the then remove the harness. 3. Remove the four screws and then the
sensor. negative press unit.
Sensor Connector sensor bracket. Negative Press Unit
NOTE: Before removal, mark the

mounting position of the
bracket with a pencil, etc.
Connector Sensor Bracket
Clamp
Screw Sensor (D384) Screws (4)
GD089 GD107
Installation 4. Remove the two flat-head screws,

Screw guide plate and negative holder.
order of removal. Harness Clamps (2) Guide Plate
GD092
NOTE: After installation, perform negative
full sensor adjustment (see 4. Remove the two screws and then the
subsection 25.9.6). sensor.
Screws (2) Sensor (D380)
Flat-head Screws (2)

GD108

setscrews using a 1.5-mm Allen
GD093 wrench and then remove the cam.
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Install the bracket aligning with the

mounting position marked in
step 3.
25
25.9.1
25.9.2
25.9.3
25-21
6. Remove the two screws and the guide 3. Remove the flat-head screw, spring 25.9.5 Upper Negative Guide
plate from the motor. holder and spring. Replacement
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2) Flat-head Screw
Spring Holder Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove:
Cam
• nip roller (see subsection 25.8.8).
D-cut Surface
• lower negative guide (see
2mm subsection 25.9.4).

Motor right-hand and left-hand upper guides.
(M374)
Upper Guide
Guide Plate
Motor Shaft Cam Spring
GD109 GD113
Installation 4. Remove the two screws, flat-head

screws and then the negative guide.
order of removal. Flat-head Screws (2)
NOTE: • Install the motor cam at distance

of 2 mm from the end surface of
the motor shaft.
• Align the D-cut surface of the Screws (4)
motor shaft with the hex. socket GD114
head setscrew.
Installation
25.9.4 Lower Negative Guide Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Negative Guide
1. Remove the negative catcher unit
GD111
2. Remove the four screws and then the 5. Remove the two guide bases,
guide. actuator arm, two bearings and the
shaft.
Guide
Guide Base Actuator Arm
Bearings (2)
Shaft
Screws (4)
GD112
GD110
Installation

removal.
25
25.9.4
25.9.5
25-22
25.9.6 Negative Full Sensor 3) If the “Negative Full Sensor” turns

Adjustment ON and OFF, inspect the
mounting condition of the sensor.
1. Display the “444 ANL Input Check”
screen.
2. Feed 25 to 40 negatives from their

check tape side into the negative
catcher. “Negative Full Sensor” should
turn ON.
3. If “Negative Full Sensor” turns ON

with 20 negatives or less, adjust the
sensor by following the steps below.
1) Remove the two screws and

loosen the special screw, and
then remove the lower cover.
Special Screw (Loosen)
Screws (2) (Remove)

GD188
2) Move the actuator by hand to

check that “Negative Full Sensor”
turns ON and OFF.
Actuator
GD201 25
25.9.6
25-23
25.10 ANL Sliding Device
25.10.1 Slide Lock Sensor 25.10.2 ANL Unit Removal/ Reinstallation

(D391) Replacement Reinstallation
order of removal.
Removal Removal
NOTE: Perform the ANL unit adjustment
1. Perform the post-operational checks 1. Remove:
(see subsection 3.4.5 of
to shut down the system, then turn the
“Installation Manual”.).
built-in circuit breaker and the main • tray (see subsection 25.1.1).
power supply OFF. • negative feed section front cover
2. Remove the tray (see subsection • negative feed section rear cover 25.10.3 ANL Operating
25.1.1). (see subsection 25.4.2). Position Sensor (D379)
Replacement
3. Disconnect the connector from the 2. Disconnect the D379 connector and
sensor. then open the two clamps.
Removal
4. Loosen the locking tabs and then
remove the sensor. 1. Remove the ANL unit (see subsection
25.10.2).

clamp.

sensor.
Sensor (D379)
Clamps (2) D379 Connector
GD205
Sensor (D391)
Connector
3. Disconnect the D391 connector.
GD041
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of Screw/Clamp

Screws (2)
removal.
GD207
Installation

removal.
D391 Connector
GD206
4. Remove the four nuts and then the

ANL unit.
ANL Unit
Nuts (4)
25 GD070
25.10.1
25.10.2
25.10.3
25-24
25.10 ANL Sliding Device
25.10.4 Slide Lock 6. Remove the spring.

Replacement
7. Remove the two screws, lock and two
sliders from the bracket.
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Move the ANL unit (see subsection Lock
25.10.2).
2. Remove the screw.

Spring
3. Remove the three screws, washers
and sliders.
4. Remove the screw and then the cam Sliders (2)

and lock lever.
Screws/Washers/Sliders (3)
Lock Bracket
GD069
Installation
Lock Lever
Spring
Cam Screw Installation is essentially in the reverse
5. Remove the two screws and then the NOTE: Make sure the slide lock works
lock bracket. properly.
Screws (2)
Lock Bracket
GD068
25
25.10.4
25-25
25.11 Control Circuit Board Section
25.11.1 CTF21 Circuit Board

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the circuit board section


circuit board.
3. Remove the CTF21 circuit board from

the nine circuit board spacers.
CTF21 Circuit Board
Circuit Board Spacers (9)

GD066
Installation

removal.
25
25.11.1
25-26
25.12 Optional Air Compressor
25.12.1 Optional Air

Compressor
Connection
Use the optional air compressor AC20 or

its equivalent having the following
capacity.
Compressor Capacity:
Rated Pressure 0.01Mpa (0.1 kgf/

cm2) min.
Output Air Volume 45 liters min.
1. Connect the film carrier side hose to

the output connection of the
compressor.
2. Connect the hose from the air filter to

the suction connection of the
compressor.
Carrier Side Hoses
Hose from Air Filter

GD1620
25
25.12.1
25-27

Fuji Frontier 390 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fuji Frontier 390 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fuji Frontier 390 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distributed by www.minilablaser.

System Disk Ver.4.0 Second Edition

Precautions Generally Applying to All Servicing Operations

Service Manual Appropriations

2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.

K Manual copying in whole or in part.

1. SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ................................................................................................................ 1-2

2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION ...................................................... 2-1

3. MENU TABLE ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Menu Table .................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item ........................................................................................................... 3-8

4. OUTLINE .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Scanner (SP2500) ........................................................................................................................ 4-3

5. OPERATION SEQUENCES ........................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Scanner ....................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.4.1 Paper Leading End Feed .................................................................................................... 5-36

5.6.31 Paper Leading End Insertion .............................................................................................. 5-117

6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS ......................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................ 6-2

7. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ......................................................................................................... 7-1

8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Simple Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 8-2

9. MAINTENANCE MENU .................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Operational Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-4

9.2.2 Production Information 2 (412) ........................................................................................... 9-5

9.5.4 135ANL Input Check (444) ................................................................................................. 9-37

9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46) .................................................................................... 9-65

10. I/O PARTS DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Scanner (SP2500) ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

11. OPERATION SECTION .................................................................................................................. 11-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.2.5 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection ................................................................................ 11-7

11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) Replacement .................................................. 11-22

12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION ........................................................................................................... 12-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 12-2

12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................. 12-7

13. SCANNER SECTION ....................................................................................................................... 13-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 13-2

14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION ........................................................................................... 14-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 14-2

14.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment .................................................................................................. 14-7

15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ........................................................................................................... 15-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 15-3

15.3.13 Paper Width Guide Replacement ....................................................................................... 15-14

16. EXPOSURE SECTION ..................................................................................................................... 16-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 16-2

16.1.2 Air Duct Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................................... 16-3

17. POST-EXPOSURE FEED SECTION/PRINTER FRONT DOOR SECTION .................... 17-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 17-4

17.1.44 Cutter 1 Punch Hole Sensor (D550P) Replacement .......................................................... 17-23

17.5.3 Paper Width Guide 5 Motor (M564) Replacement ............................................................. 17-42

18. PRINTER ELECTRICAL SECTION .............................................................................................. 18-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 18-2

19. PROCESSOR ..................................................................................................................................... 19-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 19-3

19.6 Paper Width Guide ....................................................................................................................... 19-27